*- ?*■»•.>»;.- ^W^ ^ SSL 'V.I' V ."^ ^ > y>> V*"\o^.vr»'.<^^ ;'4 . 'Kt- ^^0^ ^A d^ .* ^■p -/' ■^^o^ <,-^> o. <^ p. Y: "^^0^ ^^-.^^^ : ^ "^ ^..# :: ' .# *<^ " *^°- .^^ VI. No. 6 Price 10 cents ATHI/BTIC I/IBRARY ,c.Au.ICE HOCKEY ^ Guide %. OFFICIAL RULES '■-....» ' American Sports Publishing Co ...T ,„<„,„ 21 Warren Street, NewYorK irs'nm A.G.Spalding & Bros. MAINTAIN THEIR OWN HOUSES FOR DISTRIBUTING THE SFAL.DING ^^^ COMPLETE LINE OF Athletic Goods ;--■■ ■,..■ /" IN THE FOLLOWING CITIES /< ^ ^^ CHICAGO 147-149 Wabasb Ave. ST. LOUIS, MO. 415 North Serenlh St. KANSAS CITY, MO. 1 120 Grand Ave. leie Arapahoe St. CINCINNATI, O. 1 19 East Fifth St. CLEVELAND, O. 741 Euclid Ave. COLUMBUS, O. 191 South High St. DETROIT, MICH. 254 Woodward Ave. LOUISVILLE. KY. 328 West Jefferson St. INDIANAPOLIS, IND. 211 Massachusetts Ave. BIRMINGHAM, ENG. 57, New Street MANCHESTER, ENG. 4, Oxford St. and I, Lower Moscley St. EDINBURGH, SCOT. 3 South Charlotte St. SAN FRANCISCO 150-158 Geary St. SEATTLE. WASH. 711 Second Ave. LOS ANGELES, CAL. 435 South Spring St. MILWAUKEE, WIS. 379 East Water St. MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 44 Seventh St., South ST. PAUL. MINN. 386 Minnesota St. ATLANTA, GA. 74 N. Broad Street NEW ORLEANS, LA. 140 Carondelet St. DALLAS, TEX. St. MONTREAL, P. «. 443 St. TORONTO, ONT Communications directed to a. G. SPALDING & BROS., at any of tlie above addresses, will receive prompt attention. M m K\mwmmm t i»m\wwmmmmmmiiimtmmmmmmm f mtmmmn \ THE SPALDING TRADE MARK IS REGISTERED IN THE UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, AND WE HAVE ALSO PROTECTED OUR INTERESTS BY 39 REGISTRATIONS IN FOREIGN COUN. TRIES. INFRINGERS ARE WARNED. THE SR4LDING TRADE-MARK IS THE FOUNDATION OF THE SIVLLmNG^^B^^ Spalding's Athletic Library Anticipating the present ten- dency of the American people toward a healthful method of living and enjoyment, Spalding's Athletic Library was established in 1892 for the purpose of encouraging ath- letics in every form, not only by publishing the official rules and records pertaining to the various pastimes, but also by instructing, until to-day Spalding's Athletic Library is unique in its own par- ticular field and has been conceded the greatest educational series on athletic and physical training sub- jects that has ever been compiled. The publication of a distinct series of books devoted to athletic sports and pastimes and designed to occupy the premier place in America in its class was an early idea of Mr. A. G. Spalding, who was one of the first in America to publish a handbook devoted to athletic sports, Spalding's Official Base Ball Guide being the initial number, which was followed at intervals with other handbooks on the sports prominent in the '70s. Spalding's Athletic Library has had the advice and counsel of Mr. A. G. Spalding in all of its undertakings, and particularly in all books devoted to the national game. This applies especially to Spalding's Official Base Ball Guide end Spalding's Official Base Ball Record, both of which receive the personal attention of Mr. A. G. Spalding, owing to his early connection with the game as the leading pitcher of the champion Boston and Chicago teams of 1872-76. His interest does not stop, however, with matters pertaining to base ball; there is not a sport that Mr. Spalding does not make it his business to become familiar with, and that the Library will always maintain its premier place, with Mr. Spalding's able counsel at hand, goes without saying. The entire series since the issue of the first number has been unde» the direct personal supervision of Mr. James E. Sullivan, President of the American Sports Publishing Company, and the total series of consecutive numbers reach an aggregate of considerably over three hundred, included in which are many "annuals," that really constitute the history of their particular sport in America year by year, back copies of which are even now eagerly sought for, constituting as they do the really first authentic records of events and official rules that have ever been consecutively compiled. When Spalding's Athletic Library was founded, seventeen years ago, track and field athletics were practically unknown outside the larger colleges and a few athletic clubs in the leading cities, which gave occa- Bional meets, when an entry list of 250 competitors was a subject of com- ment; golf was known only by a comparatively few persons; lawn tennis had some vogue and baso ball was practically the only established field A. G. Spalding EDITORS OF SPALDING' S ATHLETIC LIBRARY sport, and that in a professional way; basket ball had just been invented; athletics for the schoolboy— and schoolgirl— were almost unknown, and an advocate of class contests in athletics in the schools could not get a hearing. To-day we find the greatest body of athletes in the world ia the Public Schools Athletic League of Greater New York, which has had an entry list at its annual games of over two thousand, and in whose "elementary series" in base ball last year 106 schools competed for the trophy emblematic of the championship. While Spalding's Athletic Library cannot claim that the rapid growth of athletics in this country is due to it solely, the fact cannot be denied that the books have had a great deal to do with its encouragement, by printing the official rules and instructions for playing the various games at a nominal price, within the reach of everyone, with the sole object that its series might be complete and the one place where a person could look with absolute certainty for the particular book in which he might be interested. In selecting the editors and writers for the various books, the lead- ing authority in his particular line has been obtained, with the result that no collection of books on athletic subjects can compare with Spalding's Athletic Library for the prominence of the various authors and their ability to present their subjects in a thorough and practical manner. A short sketch of a few of those who have edited some of the lead- ing numbers of Spalding's Athletic Library is given herewith : JAMES E. SULLIVAN President American Sports Publishing Com- pany; entered the publishing house of Frank Leslie in 1878, and has been connected continu- ously with the publishing business since then and also as athletic editor of various New York papers; was a competing athlete; one of the organizers of the Amateur Athletic Union of the United States; has been actively on its board of governors since its organization until the present time, and President for two suc- cessive terms; has attended every champion- ship meeting in America since 1879 and has officiated in some capacity in connection with American amateur championships track and field games for nearly twenty-five years; assistant American director Olympic Games, Paris, 1900; director Pan-American Exposition athletic department, 1£0] ; chief department physical culture Louisiana Purchase Exposition, St, Louis, 1904; secretary American Committee Olympic Games, at Athens, 1906; honorary director of Athletics at Jamestown Exposition, 1907; secre- tary American Committee Olympic Games, at London, 1908; member of the Pastime A. C, New York: honorary member Missouri A. C, St. Louis; honorary member Olympic A. C, San Francisco; ex-president Pastime A. C, New Jersey A. C, Knickerbocker A. C; president Metropolitan Association of the A. A. U. for fifteen years; president Outdoor Recrea- tion League; with Dr. Luther H. Gulick orgc-nized the Public Schools Athletic League of New York, and is now chairman of its games commit- tee and member executive committee; was a pioneer in playground work and one of the organizers of the Outdoor Recreation League of New York ; appointed by President Roosevelt as special commissioner to the Olympic Games at Athens, 1906. and decorated by King George I. of the Hellenes (Greece) for his services in connection with the Olympic Games; ap- pointed special commissioner by President Roosevelt to the Olympic Games at London, 1908; appointed by Mayor McClellanj 1908, as member of the Board of Education of Greater New York, EDITORS OF SPALDING'S ATHLETI C LIBRARY WALTER CAMP For quarter of a century Mr. Walter Camp of Yale has occupied a leading position in col- Jege athletics. It is immaterial what organiza- tion is suggested for college athletics, or for tlie betterment of conditions, insofar as college athletics is concerned, Mr. Camp has always played an important part in its conferences. and the great interest in and high plane of college sport to-day, are undoubtedly due more to Mr. Camp than to any other individual. Mr. Canip nas probably written more on college athletics than any other .viiter and the leading papers and maga- zines»of America are always pnxious to secure his expert opinion on foot ball, track and field athletics, base ball and rowing. Mr. Camp has grown up with Yale athletics and is a part of Yale's remarkable athletic system. While he has been designated as the "Father of Foot Ball," it is a well known fact that during his college career Mr. Camp was regarded zi one of the best players that ever represented Yale on the base ball fi^,d, so when \:'e hear of Walter Camp as a foot ball expert we must also i -^mem- ber his remarkable knowledge of the game of base ball, of which he is a great admirer. Mr. Camp has edited Spalding's Official Foot Ba' 1 Guide since it was first published, and also the Spalding Athletic Libra .y book on How to Play Foot Ball. There is certainly no man in American college life better qualified to write for Spalding's Athletic Library than Mr. Camp. DR. LUTHER HALSEY GULICK The leading exponent of physical training in America; one who has worked hard to im- press the value of physical training in the schools; when physical training was combined with education at the St. Louis Exposition in 1904 Dr. Gulick played an important part in that congress; he received several awards for his good work and had many honors conferred upon him; he is the author of a great many books on the subject; it was Dr. Gulick, who, acting on the suggestion of James E. Sullivan, organized the Public Schools Athletic League of Greater New York, and was its first Secretary; Dr. Gulick was also for several years Director of Physical Training in the public schools of Greater New York, resigning the position to assume the Presidency of the Playground Association of America. Dr. Gulick is an authority on all subjects pertaining to phys- ical training and the study of the child. JOHN B. FOSTER Successor to the late Henry Chadwick ("Father of Base Ball") as editor of Spald- ing's Official Base Ball Guide; sporting editor of the New York Evening Telegram; has been in the newspaper bi\siness for many years and is recognized thxJ'ughout America as a leading writer on the national game; a staunch supporter of organized base ball, his pen has always been used for the better* ment of the sranie. * EDITORS OF SPALDING' S ATHLETIC LIBRARY TIM MURNANE Base Ball editor of the Boston Globe and President of the New England League of Lase Ball Clubs; one of the best known base ball men of the country; known from coast to coast; is a keen follower of the game and prominent in all its councils; nearly half a century ago was one of America's foremost players; knows the game thoroughly and writes from the point of view both of player and an official. HARRY PHILIP BURCHELL Sporting editor of the New York Times; graduate of the University of Pennsylvania; editor of Spalding's Official Lawn Tennis Annual; is an authoiity on the game; follows the movements of the players minutely and understands not only tennis but all other sub- jects that can be classed as athletics; no one is better qualified to edit this book than Mr. Burchell. GEORGE T. HEPBRON Former Young Men's Christian Association director; for many years an official of the Athletic League of Young Men's Christian Associations of North America ; was con- nected with Dr. Luther H. Gulick in Young Men's Christian Association work for over twelve years; became identified with basket ball when it was in its infancy and has fol- lowed it since, being recognized as the lead- ing exponent of the official rules; succeeded Dr. Gulick as editor of the Official Basket Ball Guide and also editor of the Spalding Athletic Library book on How to Play Basket Ball. JAMES S. MITCHEL Former champion weight thrower; holder of numerous records, and is the winner of more championships than any other individual in the history of sport ; Mr. Mitchel is a close student of athletics and well qualified to write upon any topic connected with athletic sport ; has been for years on the staff of the New York Sun. EDITORS OF SPALDING' S ATHLETIC LlBRARlt MICHAEL C. MURPHY The world's most famous athletic trainer; the champion athletes that he has developed for track and field sports, foot ball and base ball fields, would run into thousands; he became famous when at Yale University and has been particularly successful in developing what might be termed championship teams; his rare good judgment has placed him in an enviable position in the athletic world; now with the University of Pennsylvania ; dur- ing his career has trained only at two col- leges and one athletic club, Yale and the University of Pennsylvania and Detroit Athletic Club; his most recent triumph was that of training the famous American team of athletes that swept the field at the Olympic Games of 1908 at London. DR. C. WARD CRAMPTON Succeeded Dr. Gulick as director of physical training in the schools of Greater New York : as secretary of the Public Schools Athletic League is at the head of the most remarkable organization of its kind in the world; is a practical athlete and gymnast himself, and has been for years connected with the physi- cal training system in the schools of Greater New York, having had charge of the High School of Commerce. DR. GEORGE J. FISHER Has been connected with Y. M, C. A. work for many years as physical director at Cincin- nati and Brooklyn, where he made such a high reputation as organizer that he was chosen to succeed Dr. Luther H. Gulick as Secretary of the Athletic League of Y. M. C. A.'s of North America, when the latter resigned to take charge of the physical training in the Public Schools of Greater New York. DR. GEORGE ORTON On athletics, college athletics, particularly track and field, foot ball, soccer foot ball, and training of the youth, it would be hard to find one better qualified than Dr. Orton; has had the necessary athletic experience and the ability to impart that experience intelligently to the youth of the land; for years was the American, British and Canadian champion runner. EDITORS OF SPALDING' S ATHLETIC LIBRARY FREDERICK R. TOOMBS A well known authority on skating, rowinar. boxing, racquets, and other athletic sports; was sporting editor of American Press Asso- ciation, New York; dramatic editor; is a law- yer and has served several terms as a member of Assembly of the Legislature of the State of New York; has written several novels and historical works. R. L. WELCH A resident of Chicago; the popularity of indoor base ball is chiefly due to his efforts; a player himself of no mean ability; a first- class organizer: he has followed the game of indoor base ball from its inception. DR. HENRY S. ANDERSON Has been connected with Yale University for years and is a recognized authority on gymnastics; is admitted to be one of the lead- ing authorities in America on gymnastic sub- jects; is the author of many books on physical training. CHARLES M. DANIELS Just the man to write an authoritatiye book on swimming; the fastest swimmer the world has ever known; member New York Athletic Club swimming team and an Olym- pic champion at Athens in 1906 and London, 1908. In his book on Swimming, Champion Daniels describes just the methods one must use to become an expert swimmer. GUSTAVE BOJUS Mr. Bojus is most thoroughly qualified to write intelligently on all subjects pertaining to gymnastics and athletics; in his day one of America's most famous amateur athletes; has competed successfully in gymnastics and many other sports for the New York Turn Verein; for twenty years he has been prom- inent in teaching gymnastics and athletics; was responsible for the famous gymnastic championship teams of Columbia University; now with the Jersey City biffh Bchools. EDITORS OF SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY CHARLES JACOBUS Admitted to be the "Father of Roque;" one of America's most expert players, win- ning the Olympic Championship at St. Louis in 1904; an ardent supporter of the game and follows it minutely, and much of tho success of roque is due to his untiring efforts; certainly there is no one better qualified to write on this subject than Mr. Jacobus. DR. E. B. WARMAN Well known as a physical training expert; was probably one of the first to e^iter the f eM and is the author of many books on the sub- ject; lectures extensively each year all over the country. W. J. CROMIE Now with the University of Pennsylvania; was formerly a Y. M. C. A. physical director; a keen student of all gymnastic matters; the author of many books on subjects pertaining to physical training. G. M. MARTIN By professibn a physical director of the Young Men's Christian Association; a close student of all things gymnastic, and games for the classes in the gymnasium or clubs. PROF. SENAC A leader in the fencing world ; has main- tained a fencing school in New Yori' for years and developed a great many cham- pions ; understands the science of fencing thoroughly and the benefits to be derived therefrom. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY 0= Giving the Titles of all Spalding Athletic Library Books now J in print, grouped for ready reference ( ^ SPALDING OFFICIAL ANNUALS D No. I Spalding's Official No. lA Spalding's Official No. IC Spalding's Official No. 2 Spalding's Official No. 2A Spalding's Official No. 3 Spalding's Official No. 4 Spalding's Official No. 5 Spalding's Official No. 6 Spalding's Official No. 7 Spalding's Official No. 7A Spalding's Official No. 8 Spalding's Official No. 9 Spalding's Official No. lO Spalding's Official No. 12 Spalding's Official No. I2A Spalding's Official Group I. Base Bali No.l Spalding' sOfficial BaseBall Guide No. lA Official Base Ball Record. No. IC Collegiate Base Ball Annual. No. 202 How to Play Base Ball. No. 223 How to Bat. No. 232 How to Run Bases. No. 230 How to Pitch. No. 229 How to Catch. No. 225 How to Play First Base. No. 226 How to Play Second Base. No. 227 How to Play Third Base. No. 228 How to Play Shortstop. No. 224 How to Play the Outfield. C How to Organize a Base Bal 1 I League. fClub. I How to Organize a Base Ball TVT I How to Manage a Base Ball No- ^ Club. "^^^^ I HowtoTrainaBaseBallTeam How to Captain a Base Bal 1 I HowtoUmpireaGame. [Team L Technical Base Ball Terms. No. 219 Ready Reckoner of Base Ball Percentages. BASE BALL AUXILIARIES No. 348 Minor League Base Ball Guide No. 338 Official Book National League of Prof. Base Ball Clubs. No. 340 Official Handbook National Playground Ball Assn. Group II. Foot Ball No.2 Spalding' sOfficial Foot Ball Guide No. 344 ADigest of the Foot Ball Rules No. 324 How to Play Foot Ball. No. 2a Spalding's Official Soccer Foot .Ball Guide. No. 286 How to-Play Soccer. No. 335 How to Play Rugby. Base Ball Guide Base Ball Record Collegiate Base Ball Annual Foot Ball Guide Soccer Foot Ball Guide Cricket Guide Lawn Tennis Annual Golf Guide Ice Hockey Guide Basket Ball Guide Women's Basket Ball Guide Lacrosse Guide Indoor Base Ball Guide ,. Roller Polo Guide 4< Athletic Almanac Athletic Rules FOOT BALL AUXILIARY No. 343 Official Rugby Foot Ball Guide. No. 332 Spalding's Official Canadian Group III. ^^^^^^"^"^"^^ CrIcKcl No. 3 Spalding's Official Cricket Guide. No. 277 Cricket and How to Play It. Group IV. Lawn Tennis No. 4 Spalding's Official Lawn Ten- nis Annual. No. 157 How to Play Lawn Tennis. No. 279 Strokes and Science of Lawn ^ ., Tennis. ^ „ Group V. Golf No. 5 Spalding's Official Golf Guide No. 276 How to Play Golf. Group VI. Hockey No. 6 Spalding's Official Ice Hockey Guide. No. 304 How to Play Ice Hockey. No. 154 Field Hockey. (Lawn Hockey. No. 188 < Parlor Hockey. (Garden Hockey. No. 180 Ring Hockey. HOCKEY AUXILIARY No. 256 Official Handbook Ontario Group VIL^*'''^^''^'''' Basket Ball No. 7 Spalding's Official Basket Ball Guide. No. 7a Spalding's Official Women's Basket Ball Guide. No. 193 How to Play Basket Ball. BASKET BALL AUXILIARY No. 323 Official Collegiate Basket Ball Handbook. ANY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPON RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY iroup VIII. Lacrosse Mo. 8 Spalding's Official Lacrosse Guide. '•lo. 201 How to Play Lacrosse. iroup IX. Indoor Base Ball >Jo. 9 Spalding's Official Indoor Base Ball Guide. ■roup X. Polo ^^o. 10 Spalding's Official Roller Polo Guide. ^o. 129 Water Polo, ^o. 199 Equestrian Polo. [roup XI. Miscellaneous Games «Io. 248 Archery. To. 138 Croquet. Jo. 271 Roque. (Racquets. Jo. 194 < Squash- Racquets. (Court Tennis. To. 13 Hand Ball, lo. 167 Quoits. Jo. 170 Push Ball, lo. 14 Curling, lo. 207 Lawn Bowls, lo. 188 Lawn Games. To. 189 Children's Games, ro. 341 How to Bowl. iroup XII. Athletics lo. 12 Spalding's Official Athletic Almanac. lo. 12a Spalding's Official Athletic Rules- Jo. 27 College Athletics. Jo. 182 All Around Athletics. [o. 156 Athletes' Guide. fo. 87 Athletic Primer. lo. 273 Olympic GamesatAthens,i906 fo. 252 How to Sprint. fo. 255 How to Run 100 Yards. lo. 174 Distance and Cross Country Running. [Thrower. lo. 259 How to Become a Weight fo. 55 Official Sporting Rules, [boys. lo. 246 Athletic Training for School- lo. 317 Marathon Running. lo. 331 Schoolyard Athletics, lo, 342 Walking for Health and Com- petition. ATHLETIC AUXILIARIES fo. 349 Intercollegiate Official Hand- book. Fo. 302 Y. M. C. A. Official Handbook. ro.313 Public Schools Athletic League Official Handbook. fo. 314 Girls' Athletics. [o. 308 Official Handbook New York Interscholastic Athletic Association. Group XIII. ...Z"*'^"^ . ^ Accomplishments No. 177 How to Swim. No. 296 Speed Swimming. No. 128 How to Row. No. 209 How to Become a Skater. No. 178 How to Train for Bicycling. No. 23 Canoeing. No. 282 Roller Skating Guide. Group XIV. Manly sports No, 18 Fencing. ( By Breck.) No. 162 Boxing. No. 165 Fencing. ( By Senac.) No. 140 Wrestling. No. 236 How to Wrestle. No. 102 Ground Tumbling. No. 233 Jiu Jitsu. No. 166 How to Swing Indian Clubs. No. 200 Dumb Bell Exercises. No. 143 Indian Clubs and Dumb Bells. No. 262 Medicine Ball Exercises. No. 29 Pulley Weight Exercises. No. 191 How to Punch the Bap. No. 289 Tumbling for Amateurs. No. 326 Professional Wrestling. Group XV. Gymnastics No. 104 Grading of Gymnastic Exer- cises. [Dumb Bell Drills. No. 214 Graded Calisthenics and No. 254 Barnjum Bar Bell Drill. No. 158 Indoor and Outdoor Gym- nastic Games. No. 124 How to Become a Gymnast. No. 287 Fancy Dumb Bell and March- ing Drills. [Apparatus. No. 327 Pyramid Building Without No. 328 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. No. 329 Pyramid Building with Wands, Chairs and Ladders GYMNASTIC AUXILIARY No. 345 Official Handbook I. C. A. A. Gymnasts of America. Group XVI. Physical culture Ten Minutes' Exercise for Busy Men. [giene. Physical Education and Hy- Scientific Physical Training and Care of the Body. Physical Training Simplified. Hints on Health. 285 Health Answers. Muscle Building. [fting. School Tactics and Maze Run- Tensing Exercises, [nasties. Health by Muscular Gym- Indigestion Treated by Gym- Get Well; Keep Well, [nasties. Twenty-Minute Exercises, Physical Training for the School and Class Room,' How to Live 100 Years. No. 161 No. 208 No. 149 No. 142 No. 185 No. 213 No. 238 No. 234 No. 261 No. 285 No. 288 No. 290 No. 325 No. 330 No. 346 ANY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPON RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY Group I Base Ball No. 1— Spaldingr's Official Base Ball Guide. The leading Base Ball annual of the country, and the official authority of the game. Contains the official playing rules, with an explanatory index of the rules compiled by Mr. A. G. Spalding; pictures of all the teams in the National, American and minor leagues ; re- views of the season; college Base Ball, and a great deal of interesting in- formation. Price 10 cents. No. lA — Spalding's Official Base Ball Record. Something new in Base Ball. Con- tains records of all kinds from the be- ginning of the National League and official averages of all prof eLSional or- ganizations for past season. L iustrated with pictures of leading teams and players. Price 10 cents. No. 202— How to Play Base Ball. Edited by Tim Murnane. New and revised edition. Illustrated with pic- tures showing how all the various curves and drops are thrown and por- traits of leading players. Price 10 cents. No. 223— How to Bat. There is no better way of becoming a proficient batter than by reading this book and practising the directions. Numerous illustrations. Price 10 cents. No. 232— How to Run tbe Bases. This book gives clear and concise directions for excelling as a base run ner; tells when to run and when not to do so; how and when to slide; team work on the bases; in fact, every point of the g^me is thoroughly explained Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 230— How to Pitch. A new, up-to-date book. Its contents are the practical teaching of men who have reached the top as pitchers, and who know how to impart a knowledge of their art. All the big leagues pitchers are shown. Price JLO cenjts. No. 229— How to Catch. Every boy who has hopes of being a clever catcher should read how well- known players cover their position. Pictures of all the noted catchers in the big leagues. Price 10 cents. No. 22S— How to Play First Base. Illustrated with pictures of all the prominent first basemen. Price 10 cents. No. 226— How to Play Second Base. The ideas of the best second basemen have been incorporated in this book for the especial benefit of boys who want ^^ i to know the fine points of play at this ^ point of the diamond. Price 10 cents. No. 227— How to Play Third Base. Third base is, in some respects, the most important of the infield. All the points explained. Price 10 cents. No. 228— How to Play Short- stop. Shortstop is one of the hardest posi- tions on the infield to fill, and quick thought and quick action are necessary for a player who expects to make good as a shortstop. lUus Price 10 cents No. 224— How to Play the Outfield. An invaluable guide for the out- fielder. Price 10 cents. No. 231— How to Coach; How to Captain a Team; Ho'w to Managre a Team; Hofv to Umpire: How to Or- granize a League; Tech- nical Terms of Base Ball. A useful guide. Price 10 cents. Noo 219— Ready Reckoner of Base Ball Percentagres. To supply a demand for a book which would show the percentage of clubs without recourse to thearduous work of figuring, the publishers had these tables compiled by an expert. Price 10 cents. BAI^£: BALL AUXILIARIES. No, 336— Minor Leagrne Base Ball Guide. The minors' own guide. Edited by President T. H. Murnane, of the New [England League. Price 10 centf SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 338— Official Handbook of the National Leagrne of Professional Base Ball Clubs. Contains the Constitution. By-Laws, Official Rules. Averages, and schedule of the National League for the current year, together with list of club officers and reports of the annual meetings of the League. Price 10 cents. No. 340— Official Handbook National Playg^ronnd Ball Association. This game is specially adapted for playgrounds, parks, etc., is spreading t rapidly. The book contains a descrip- tion of the game, rules and list of officers. Price 10 cents. Group II. Foot Ball No. 2— Spalding's Foot Ball Guide. Official Edited by Walter Camp. Contains the new rules, with diagram of field; All- America teams as selected by the leading authorities; reviews of the game from various sections of the country; scores; pictures. Price 10 cents. No. 344— A Digrest of the Foot Ball Rules. This book is meant for the use of officials, to help them to refresh their memories before a game and to afford them a quick means of ascertaining a point during a game. It also gives a ready means of finding a rule in the Official Rule Book, and is of great help to a player in studying the Rules. Compiled by C.W. Short, Harvard, 1908. Price 10 cents. No. 324— How to Play Foot Ball. Edited by Walter Camp, of Yale. Everything that a beginner wants to know and many points that an expert will be glad to learn. Snapshots of leading teams and players in action, with comments by Walter Camp. Price 10 cents. No. 2A— Spalding's Official Association Soccer Foot Ball Guide. A complete and up-to-| date guide to the "Soccer" game in the United States, containing instructions for I playing the game, official | rules, and interesting! news from all parts of the! country. Illustrated. Price] 10 cents. No. 286— How to Play Soc- cer. How each position should be played, written by the best player in England in his respective position, and illus- trated with full-page photographs of players in action. Price 10 cents. No. 335— How to Play Rugby. Compiled in England by " Old Inter- national." Contains directions for playing the various positions, with dia- grams and illustrations. Price 10 cents. FOOT BALL. AUXILIARIES. No. 332— Spalding's Official Canadian Foot Mall Guide. The official book of the game in Can- ada. Price 10 cents. No. 343— Official Rugby Foot Ball Guide. The official handbook of the Rugby game, containing the official playing rules, referee's decisions, articles on the game in the United States and pic- tures of leading teams. Price 10 cents. Group III. Cricket No. 3— Spalding's Official icket Guide. The most complete year book of the game that has ever been published in America. Reports of special matches, official rules and pictures of all the leading teams. Price 10 cents. No. 2T7— Cricket; and How to Play it. By Prince Ranjitsinhji. The game described concisely and illustrated with full-page pictures posed especially for this book. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY Group IV, Lawn Tennis No. 4— Spalding's Official liSTTn Tennis Annual. Contents include reports of all important tourna- ments; official ranking from 1885 to date; laws of lawn tennis; instructions for handicapping; deci- sions on doubtful points; management of tourna- ments; directory of clubs; laying out and keeping a court. Illus- trated. Price 10 cents. No. 157— HovF to Play Liawn Tennis. A complete description of lawn ten- nis; a lesson for beginners and direc- tions telling how to make the most im- portant strokes. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 279— Strokes and Science of Lawn Tennis. By P. A. Vaile, a leading authority on the game in Great Britain. Every stroke in the game is accurately illus- trated and analyzed by the author. Price 10 cents. Golf Official Group V. No. 5— Spaldingr's Golf Guide. Contains records of all important tournaments, articles on the game in various sections of the country, pictures of prom- inent players, official play- ing rules and general items of interest. Price 10 cents. No. 276— How to Play Golf. By James Braid and Harry Vardon, the world's two greatest players tell how they play the game, with numer- ous full-page pictures of them taken on the links. Price 10 cents. Group VI. Hockey No. 6— Spaldingr's Official Ice Hockey Guide. The official year book of the game. Contains the official rules, pictures of leading teams and players, records, review of the season, reports from dif- ferent sections of the United States and Canada. Price 10 cents. No. 304— How to Play Ice Hockey. Contains a description of the duties of each player. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 154 — Field Hockey. Prominent in the sports at Vassar, Smith, Wellesley, Bryn Mawrand other leading colleges. Price 10 cents. ^ o. 1«8 — L.awn Hockey, Parlor Hockey, Garden Hockey. Containing the rules for each game. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 180— Ring, Hockey. A new game for the gymnasium. Exciting as basket ball. Price 10 cents. H0CK:EY AUXILIARY. No. 256— Official Handbook of the Ontario Hockey Association.^ Contains the offieaa' rules of the Association, constitution, rules of com- petition, list of officers, and pictures of leading players. Price 10 cents. Group VIIc Basket Ball No. 7— Spalding^'s Official Basket Ball Guide. Edited by George T. Hepbron. Contains the revised official rules, de- cisions on disputed points, records of prominent teams, reports on the game from various parts of the country. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC OBRARY JVo. 7A— Spalding^'s Official Women's Basket Ball Ciuide. Edited by Miss Senda Berenson, of Smith College. Contains the official playing rules and special articles on the game by prominent authorities. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 193— How to Play Basket Ball. By G. N. Messer. The best book of instruction on the game yet published. Illustrated with numerous pictures and diagrams of plays. Price 10 cents. BASKET BALL AUXILIARY. No. 323— Collegiate Basket Ball Handbook. The official publication of the Colle- giate Basket Ball Association. Con- tains the official rules, records, All- America selections, reviews, and pic- tures. Edited by H. A. Fisher, of Columbia. Price 10 cents. Group VIIL Lacrosse KTo. 8— Spaldingr's Official La- crosse Guide. Contains the constitution, by-laws, playing rules, list of officers and records of the U. S. Inter-Collegiate Lacrosse League. Price 10 cents. No. aoi— How to Play La- crosse. Every position is thoroughly ex- plained in a most simple and concise manner, rendering it the best manual of the game ever published. Illus- trated with numerous snapshots of im- portant plays. Price 10 cents. ^ _-_ Indoor Group IX. Base Ball No. 9— Spalding's Official In- door Base Ball Guide. America's national game is now vising with other indoor games as a winter pastime. This book con- tains the playing rules, pictures of leading teams, and interesting articles on the game by leading au- thorities on the subject. Price 10 cents. Polo Group X. No. 10— Spalding:'« Official Roller Polo Guide. Edited by A. W. Keane. A full description of the game; official rules, re- cords; pictures of promi- nent players. Price 10 cents No. 129— Water Polo. The contents of this book treat of every detail, the individual v ork of the players, the practice of the team, how to throw the ball, with illustrations and many valuable hints. Price 10 cents. No. 199— Equestrian Polo. Compiled by H. L. Fitzpatrick of the New York Sun. Illustrated with por- traits of leading players, and contains most useful information for polo play- ers. Price 10 cents. _ -,, Miscellane- GroupXI. ous Games No. 271— Spalding's Official Roque Guide. The official publication of the Na- tional Roque Association of America. Contains a description of the courts and their construction, diagrams, illus- trations, rules and valuable informa- tion. Price 10 cents. No. 13S— Spalding's Official Croquet Guide Contains directions for playing, dia- grams of important strokes, description of grounds, instructions for the begin- ner, terms used in the game, and the official playing rules. Price 10 cents. No. 341— How to Boivl. The contents include : diagrams of effective deliveries ; hints to begin- ners : how to score ; official rules ; spares, how they are made ; rules for cocked hat. quintet, cocked hat and feather, battle game, etc. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 248— Arcliery. A new and up-to-date book on this fascinating pastime. The several varieties of archery: instructions for shooting; how to select implements; how to score; and a great deal of inter- esting information. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. Nrs. 194— Racquets, Squash- Racquets and Court Ten- nis. How to play each game is thoroughly explained, and all the difficult strokes shown by special photographs taken especially for this book. Contains the official rules for each game. Price 10 cents. No. 167— anoits. Contains a description of the plays used by experts and the official rules. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 170— Push Ball. This book contains the official rules and a sketch of the game; illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 13— How to Play Hand Ball. By the world's champion, Michael Egan. Every play is thoroughly ex- plained by text and diagram. Illus- trated. Price 10 cents. No. 14 — Curling:. A short history of this famous Scot- tish pastime, with instructions for play, rules of the game, definitions of terms and diagrams of different shots. Price 10 cents. No. 207— Bowling on the Green; or, LaTvu BotfIs. How to construct a green; how to play the game, and the official rules of the Scottish Bowling Association. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 189— Children's Games. These games are intended for use at recesses, and all but the team games have been adapted to large classes. Suitable for children from three to eight years, and include a great variety. Price 10 cents. Scotch, No. 188 — Law^n Games. Lawn Hockey. Garden Hockey, Hand Tennis, Tether Tennis; also Volley Ball, Parlor Hockey, Badminton, Bas- ket Goal. Price 10 cents. Group Xn. Athletics No. 12— Spaldingr's Official Athletic Almanac. Compiled by J. E. Sulli- van, President of the Ama- teur Athletic Union. The only annual publication now issued that contains a complete list of amateur | best-on-records; intercol- legiate, swimminvr, inter- scholastic, English, Irish, Swedish, Continental, South African^ Australasian; numerous photos of in- dividual athletes and leading athletic teams. Price 10 cents. No. 12A— Spaldins's Official Athletic Rules. The A. A. U. is the governing body of athletes in the United States of America, and all games must be held under its rules, which are exclusively published in this handbook, and a copy should be in the hands of every athlete and every club officer in America. Price 10 cents. No. 27— College Athletics. M. C. Murphy, the well-known ath- letic trainer, now with Pennsylvania, the author of this book, has written it especially for the schoolboy and college man, but it is invaluable for the athlete who wishes to excel in any branch of athletic sport; profusely illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 182— Ail-Around Ath- letics. Gives in full the method of scoring the All-Around Championship; how to train for the All-Around Champion- ship. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 15G— Athlete's Guide. Full instructions for the beginner, telling how to sprint, hurdle, jump and throw weights, general hints on train- ing; valuable advice to beginners and important A. A. U. rules and their ex- planations, while the pictures comprise many scenes of champions in action. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 273— The Olympic Gaines at Athens. A complete account of the Olympic Games of 1906. at Athens, the greatest International Athletic Contest ever held. Compiled by J. E. Sullivan, Special United States Commissioner to the Olympic Games. Price 10 cents. No. S7 — Athletic Primer. Edited by J. E. Sullivan, Secretary- Treasurer of the Amateur Athletic Union. Tells how to organize an ath- letic club, how to conduct an athletic meeting, and gives rules for the gov- ernment of athletic meetings; contents also include directions for laying out athletic grounds, and a very instructive article on training. Price 10 cents. No. 255— How to Ran lOO Yards. By J. W. Morton, the noted 'British champion. Many of Mr. Morton's methods of training are novel to American athletes, but his success is the best tribute to their worth. Illus- trated. Price 10 cents. No. 174 — Distance and Cross- Conntry Running:. By George Orton, the famous Uni- versity of Pennsylvania runner. The quarter, half, mile, the longer dis- tances, and cross-country running and steeplechasing, with instructions for training; pictures of leading athletes in action, with comments by the editors Price 10 cents. No. 259— Weight Throwingr. Probably no other man in the world has had the varied and long experience of James S. Mitchel, the author, in the weight throwing department of ath- letics. The book gives valuable infor- mation not only for the novice, but for the expert as well. Price 10 cents. No. 246— Athletic Training for Schoolboys. By Geo. W. Orton. Each event in the intercollegiate programme is treated of separately. Price 10 cents. No. 55— Official Sporting: Rules. Contains rules not found in other publications for the government of many sports; rules for wrestling, shuffleboard. snowshoeing, profes- sional racing, pigeon shooting, dog '•acing, pistol and revolver shooting, British water polo rules, Rugby foot ball rules. Price 10 cents. No. 252— How to Sprint. Every athlete who aspires to be a sprinter can study this book to advan- tage. Price 10 cents. No. 331— Schoolyard Ath- letics. By J. E. Sullivan, Secretary-Treasurer Amateur Athletic Union and member of Boai'd of Education of Greater New York. An invaluable handbook for the teacher and the pupil. Gives a systematic plan for conducting school athletic contests and instructs how to prepare for the various events. Illus- trated. Price 10 cents. No. 317— Marathon Running^. A new and up-to-date book on this popular pastime. Contains pictures of the leading Marathon runners, methods of training, and best times made in various Marathon events. Price 10 cents. No. 342— W alkiji^; for Health and Competition. Contains a great deal of useful and interesting information for the pedes- trian, giving the best methods of walk- ing for recreation or competition, by leading authorities. A history of the famous Fresh Air Club of New York is also included, with specimen tours, rules for competitive walking, records and numerous illustrations. Price 10 cents. ATHLETIC AUXILIARIES. No. 339— Official Intercolle- giate A.A.A.A. Handbook. Contains constitution, by-laws, and laws of athletics; records from 1876 to date. Price 10 cents. No. 30S— Official Handbook New York Interschol- astic Athletic Associa- tion. Contains the Association's records, constitution and by-laws and other information . Price 10 cents. No. 302— Official Y.M.C.A. Handbook. Contains the official rules governing all sports under the jurisdiction of the Y. M. C. A., official Y. M. C. A. scoring tables, pentathlon rules, pictures of leading Y. M. C. A. athletes. Price 10 cents. SPAIiDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 313— Official Handbook of the Public Scliools Athletic Leagrue. Contains complete list of records, constitution and general review of the season in the Public Schools Athletic League of Greater New York. Illus- trated. Price 10 cents. No. 314— "Girls' Athletics." Official Handbook of the Girls' Branch of the Public Schools Athletic Leagrae. The official publication. Contains': constitution and by-laws, list of offi- cers, donors, founders, life and annual members, reports and illustrations, schoolroom games. Edited by Miss Jessie H. Bancroft. Price 10 cents. Group Xin. Athletic Accomplishments No. 177— How to Swim, Will interest the expert as well as the novice; the illustrations were made from photographs especially posed, showing the swimmer in clear water; a valuable feature is the series of "land drill " exercises for the beginner. Price 10 cents. No. 296— Speed Swimming:. By Champion C. M. Daniels of the New. York Athletic Club team, holder of numerous American records, and the best swimmer in America qualified to write on the subject. Any boy should be able to increase his speed in the water after reading Champion Daniels' instructions on the subject. Price 10 cents. No. 128— How to Row. By E. J. Giannini, of the New York Athletic Club, one of America's most famous amateur oarsmen and cham- pions. Shows how to hold the oars, the finish of the stroke and other valu- able information. Price 10 cents. No. 23— Canoeingr. Paddling, sailing, cruising and rac- ing canoes and their uses; with hints on rig and management; the choice of a canoe; sailing canoes, racing regula- tions; canoeing and camping. Fully illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 209— HoTV to Become a Skater. Contains advice for beginners; how to become a figure skater, showing how to do all the different tricks of the best figure skaters. Pictures of prominent skaters and numerous diagrams. Price 10 cents. No. 282— Official Roller Skat- ing- Guide. Directions for becoming a fancy and trick roller skater, and rules for roller skating. Pictures of prominent trick skaters in action. Price 10 cents. No. 178— How to Train for Bicycling. Gives methods of the best riders when training for long or short distance races; hints on training. Revised and up-to-date in every particular. Price 10 cents. Group XIV. f^:^ No. 140— Wrestling. Catch-as-catch-can style. Seventy illustrations of the different holds, pho- tographed especially and so described that anybody can with little effort learn every one. Price 10 cents. No. IS— Fencing. By Dr. Edward Breck, of Boston, editor of The Swordsman, a promi- nent amateur fencer. A book that has stood the test of time, and is universally acknowledged to be a standard work. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 1G2— Boxing Guide. Contains over 70 pages of illustrations showing all the latest blows, posed especially for this book under the super- vision of a well-known instructor of boxing, who makes a specialty of teach- ing and knows how to impart his knowledge. Price 10 cents. No. 165— The Art of Fencing By Regis and Louis Senac, of New York, famous instructors and leading authorities on the subject. Gives in detail how every move should be made. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 236— How to Wrestle. The most complete and up-to-date book on wrestling ever published. Edited by F. R. Toombs, and devoted principally to special poses and illustra- tions by George Hackenschmidt, the " Russian Lion." Price 10 cents. No. 102— Ground TumblinsT' Any boy. by reading this book and following the instructions, can become proficient. Price 10 cents. No. 2S«— Tumbling: lor Ama- teurs. Specially compiled for amateurs by Dr.JamesT. Gwathmey. Every variety of the pastime explained by text and pictures, over 100 different positions being shown. Price 10 cents. No. 191— How to Punch tlie Baer. The best treatise on bag punching that has ever been printed. Every va- riety of blow used in training is shown and explained, with a chapter on fancy bag punching by a well-known theatri- cal bag puncher. Price 10 cents. No. 200— Dumb-Bells. The best work on dumb-bells that has ever been offered. By Prof. G. Bojus, of New York. Contains 200 photographs. Should be in the hands of every teacher and pupil of physical culture, and is invaluable for home exercise. Price 10 cents. Clubs and No. 143— Indian Dumb-Bells. By America's amateur champion club swinger, J. H. Dougherty. It is clearly illustrated, by which any novice can become an expert. Price 10 cents. No. 262— Medicine Ball Elx- ercises. A series of plain and practical exer- cises with the medicine ball, suitable for boys and girls, business and profes- sional men, in and out of gymnasium. Price 10 cents. No. 29— Pulley Weight Exer- cises. By Dr. Henry S. Anderson, instructor in heavy gymnastics Yale gymnasium. In conjunction with a chest machine anyone with this book can become perfectly developed. Price 10 cents. No. 233— Jiu Jitsu. Each move thoroughly explained and illustrated with numerous full-page picture: of Messrs. A. Minami and K. Koyamsi. two of tho most famous ex- ponents of the art of Jiu Jitsu, who posed especially for this book. Price 10 cents. No. 166— How to Swing In- dian Clubs. By Prof. E. B. Warman. By follow- ing the directions carefully anyone can become an expert. Price 10 cents. \o. 326— Professional Wrest- ling. A book devoted to the catch-as-catch- can style; illustrated with half-tone pictures showing the different holds used by Frank Gotch, champion catch- as-catch-can wrestler of the world. Posed by Dr. Roller and Charles Postl. By Ed. W. Smith, Sporting Editor of the Chicago American. Price 10 cents. Group XV. Gymnastics No. 104— Tbe Gradingr of Gymnastic Exercises. By G. M. Martin. A book that should be in the hands of every physical direc- tor of the Y. M. C. A., school, club, col- lege, etc. Price lOicents. No. 214— Graded Calisthen- ics and Dumb-Bell Drills. For years it has been the custom in most gymnasiums of memorizing a set drill, which was never varied. Conse- quently the beginner was given the same kind and amount as the older member. With a view to giving uni- formity the present treatise is at- tempted. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 254— Barnjum Bar Bell Drill. Edited by Dr. R. Tait McKenzie, Director Physical Training, University of Pennsylvania. Profusely illustrated. Price 10 cents. ,*o. 158 — Indoor and Outdoor Gymnastic Games. A book that will prove valuable to in- door and outdoor gymnasiums, schools, outings and gatherings where there are a number to be amused. Price 10 cents. No. 124 — HoTi" to Become a Gymnast. By Robert Stoll, of the New York A. C., the American champion on the flying rings from 1885 to 1892. Any boy can easily become proficient with a little practice. Price 10 cents. No. 287— Fancy Dnmb Bell and Marching Drills. All concede that games and recreative exercises during the adolescent period are preferable to set drills and monoton- ous movements. These drills, while de- signed primarily for boys, can be used successfully with girls and men and women. Profusely illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 827- Pyramid Building: Without Apparatus. By W. J. Cromie, Instructor of Gymnastics, University of Pennsyl- vania. With illustrations showing many different combinations. This book should be in the hands of all gym- nasium instructors. Price 10 Cents. No. 328 — Exercises on tlie Parallel Bars. By W. J. Cromie. Every gymnast should procure a copy of this book. Illustrated with cuts showing many novel exercises. Price 10 cents. No. 329 — Pyramid Building: witli Chairs, Wands and Ladders. By W. J. Cromie. Illustrated with half-tone photopraphs showing many interesting combinations. Price 10 cents. GYMNASTIC AUXILIARY. No. 345— Official Handbook Inter-Colleg:iate Associa- tion Amateur Gymnasts of America. Edited by P. R. Carpenter, Physical Instructor Amherst College. Contains pictures of leading teams and individual champions, official rules governing con- tests, records. Price 10 cents. ^ ^,„ Physical Group XVI. Culture No. 161— Ten Minutes' Exc» i , cise for Busy Men. . v By Dr. Luther Halsey Gulick, Direc- "^ tor of Physical Training in the New York Public Schools. A concise and complete course of physical education. Price 10 cents. No. 208— Physical Education and Hygiene. This is the fifth of the Physical Training series, by Prof. E. B. Warman (see Nos. 142. 149, 166, 185, 213, 261, 290.) Price 10 cents. No. 149— The Careof the Body. A book that all who value health should read and follow its instructions. By Prof. E. B. Warman, the well-known lecturer and authority on physical cul- ture. Price 10 cents. No. 142— Physical Training: Simplified. By Prof. E. B. Warman. A complete, thorough and practical book where the whole man is considered — brain and body. Price 10 cents. No. 261— Tensingr Exercises. By Prof. E. B. Warman. The "Ten- sing" or "Resisting" system of mus- cular exercises is the most thorough, the most complete, the most satisfac- tory, and the most fascinating of sys- tems. Price 10 cents. No. .346— How to Live lUO Years. By Prof. E. B. Warman. Helpful and healthful suggestions for attain- ing a vigorous and happy "old age," with numerous instances of longevity and the methods and habits pursued by those who lived beyond the allotted span of life. Written in Prof. War- man's best style. Price 10 cents. SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY No. 185— Healtb Hints. By Prof. E. B. Warman. Health in- fluenced by insulation; health influ- enced by underwear; health influenced by color; exercise. Price 10 cents. No. 213—285 Health Answers. By Prof. E. B. Warman. Contents: ventilating a bedroom; ventilating a house; how to obtain pure air; bathmg; salt water baths at home; a substitute for ice water; to cure insomnia, etc., etc. Price 10 cents. No^ 238— Muscle Building:. *y Dr. L. H. Gu. :k. A complete treatise on the correct method of acquiring strength. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. No. 234— School Tactics and Maze Runninjsr. A series of drills for the use of schools. Edited by Dr. Luther Halsey Guliok. Price 10 certs. No. 325— Twenty Minute Ex- ercises. By Prof. E. B. Warman, with chap- ters on " How to Avoid Growing Old," and " Fasting ; Its Objects and Bene- fits." Price 10 cents. No. 285— Health; hy Muscu- lar Gymnastics. With hints on right living. By W. J. Cromie. If one will practice the exer- cises and observe the hints therein contained, he will be amply repaid for so doing. Price 10 cents. No. 288— Indigestion Treated by Gymnastics By W. J. Cromie. If the hints there- in contained are observed and the exercises faithfully performed great relief will be experienced. Price 10 cents. No. 290— Get Well; Keep Well. By Prof. E. B. Warman, author of a number of books in the Spalding Ath- letic Library on physical training. Price 10 cents. No. 330— Physical Training lor the School and Class Boom. Edited by G. R. Borden, Physical Director of the Y. M. C. A., Easton, Pa. A book that is for practical work in the school room. Illustrated. Price 10 cents. CORNELIUS FELLOWES. JR.. Director St. Nicholas Skatirs Rink. New York City. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY Group VI. No. 6 Official Ice Hockey Guide 1911 b Edited by FREDERICK R. TOOMBS c^©^ o PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN SPORTS PUBLISHING COMPANY 21 Warren Street, New York Qi^3^ o»> Copyright, 1910 BY AivLEKicAN Sports Publishing Com i* any New York ©CI.A278111 Contents Review of the Nation's Ice Hockey for 1909-1910 American Amateur Hockey League Season of 1909-1910 Review of the Season in the Interco legiate Ice Hockey Leapue . . ; . Interscholastic Ice Hockey League Hockey in New England New League Formed in the East . Hockey in Western Pennsylvania Canadian Teams Invade the East . The Race for the Stanley Cup, Won by the Wanderers of Montreal OfTficial Rules Governing Play for the Stanley Cup Constitution of the American Amateur Hockey League Laws of Hockey of the American Amateur Hockey League Championship Rules of the American Amateur Hockey League Ontario Hockey Association Rules Laws Across Border — Conditions which Govern Play of the Eastern Canada League Eastern Canada Rules Constitution of the Intercollegiate Hockey League Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League What to Use for Ice Hockey PAGE 5 II 25 35 41 49 51 55 59 61 65 n 82 85 94 96 98 104 KENNETH GORDON. Captain St. Nicholas Skating Club and Secretary-Treasurer American Amateur Hockey League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. . Review of the Nation's Ice Hockey for 1909-1910 An examination of the developments in the ice hockey cam- paigns during 1909-1910 in the centers of interest throughout the country reveals that conflicting conditions existed. In some sections the game prospered anV made new advances toward a higher level; in other quarters, regretful to relate, retrogression was the most noticeable feature, and the interests of the game ^ •eceiyed severe setbacks in those instances. Therefore, there .vas no widely prevalent boom in ice hockey for 1909-1910 such as has been the case in some of the years past, and the followers of the greatest of winter pastimes should take on themselves the task of evolving some method of strengthening the game and encouraging 'ts devotees m sections where its progress is halted. The New York season was particularly active, so far as the American Amateur League and the Intercollegiate League were concerned, but the Interscholastic League fell to pieces, thus destroying much of the efficiency of the schools comprising it as training agencies for the advanced players of the future. The school teams have proved valuable '"preparatory schools" for more mature teams in the past, and should be such in the future. They should be encouraged, and the one time league should be reorganized on an established basis. The unusual roughness of games in the American Amateur League lowered the standard of playing, and "foot ball on ice" should be abolished by more strict regulations on the part of the league officials. The same teams constituted the amateur league during 1909-1910 that appeared the year before — four clubs from New York City and one representing Brooklyn. The Intercollegiate League had some of its plans frustrated by the failure to complete the Boston Area in time for official championship contests. This arena will serve to promote vastly the interests of not only college hockey, but of all classes of hockey as well, in and about Boston, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LiBRARl*. 7 In fact the hockey campaign centering at Boston and vicinity proved one of the especially bright chapters of the year in the entire country.' The fact that the temperature is colder than that of New York, and also that there is more ice surface of easy access in and about Boston than there is in New York to some degree account ' for the more favorable development of the game in Beantown. Complete details of the season in Boston and Eastern Massachusetts are given in a special article farther on in thf^ Guide. The class of playing in the Intercollegiate League was not up to the standard of the league in various respects. Prince- ton's championship winning team surprised some of the wise- acres who had thought at the beginning of the season that the Jerseymen would not finish better than second. One criticism made by a veteran of the American Amateur League was that the mosquito hunters did not display team work of a stellar nature, and that this was the only demerit in the style of play exhibited by them. Williams College defeated Princeton prior to the opening of the season, worsting them 5 to 4 at the St. Nicholas Rink on December 2^, 1909. The names of the players who achieved this noteworthy feat for Williams, and the positions they played, were as follows : Goal, Curtis ; point, Peterson ; cover point, Michaels ; rover, Hurlburt; center, Van Gordor; left wing, Ely; right wing, Benton. Some of the Williams enthusiasts made the claim at the finish of the season that the team ought to be considered the champions of the college world, as they had defeated the seven that finally won the official league series, but of course that claim had no serious foundation. Van Gorder scored three of the five goals tallied for Williams, and Hurlburt and Michaels each one. The Pennsylvania campaign proved a disappointment and ended prematurely with the dismal prospect of very little high- class hockey at all for the new season of 1910-1911. The col- lapse of the International League (professional) operations in SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 9 Pittsburg put a heavy damper on the activity in the game in that quarter. Also the complications which arose in the Inter- ' collegiate League of Western Pennsylvania and resulted in the ending of official play in the middle of January served to put the game under a cloud, which, ho\\ ever, it is to be hoped will be merely temporary. Again has talk cropped out in New York of a national or international league including New York among its members, but the prospect for such an innovation are not to be seriously considered so long as New York has only one rink, and that of a limited seating capacity. Under the present conditions a New York professional team could not take in enough money to pay the large salaries that would be required, and the traveling eNrpenses incurred by the necessitated long jumps. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 11 The American Amateur Hockey League Season of 1909-1910 The season of 1909 and 1910 in the amateur hockey league proved one of warm interest and of hotly contested games. As heretofore, all of the contests occurred in the well-known St. Nicholas Hockey Rink in West 66th Street, New York City. The league for this season was composed of five teams, the New York Athletic Club, the Wanderers, the St. Nicholas Skat- ing Club, Crescent Athletic Club and the Hockey Club of New York. At the opening of the season the wise ones among the fol- lowers of ice hockey in this section of the country named three teams as the ones which would lead the fight for the .champion- ship title. These teams were the St. Nicholas Skating Club, the New York A. C. and the Wanderers. The prognostications proved correct, for it was among this trio that the deciding matches occurred at the period when the premiership was in the balance. The Mercury Foot aggregation won the champion- ship, with the Wanderers second and St. Nicholas a strong third. Truth to tell, the St. Nicholas team, led by the able strategian and versatile player, Kenneth B. Gordon, cajptain, had prob- ably the best chance of capturing the coveted title. The line-up of the "Seven Saints" was very strong indeed at the opening of the campaign, and to many of the sharps appeared to be the "class" of the league. But the accidents which met the mem- bers of the team early in the season and particularly due to the Wanderers' seven crippled the club seriously and greatly enabled the New York A. C. to forge onward to championship honors, for with St. Nicks in the field with their full strength they would at all times have proven a menace to the champion- ship hopes of both the New Yorks and the Wanderers. Although the championship winners, the New York Athletic Club puck pushers did not finish the season with a clean Wood, Goal TWO WELL-KNOWN I'LAYEKS Sam Austin, St. Nkhola^Iiink, New York. Smoatnii. Pofnt. OV TIIK WANDKIJEKS. f SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 13 score. They won seven games and lost one of the eight. Eight games constituted the official playing season of each club in the amateur league. The Wanderers Hockey Club won six games and lost two. St. Nicholas won three and lost five, and the Crescents did the same. The Hockey Club of New York hav- • ing a weak aggregation individually and failing to develop any semblance of real or effective team work, languished morn- fully in the rear of the procession and finished last with a per- centage of .125, winning one game and losing seven. The per- centage of the winning team of the New York A. C. was .875. ,,,^, In the matter of goals scored the Wanderers strangely I enough outclassed the championship winners, for they tallied 41 goals as again the 36 recorded by the Mercury Foot stick- shovers. However, only fifteen goals were registered against the New York A. C, while twenty-two were tallied against the Wanderers. The Hockey Club of New York scored the lowest number of goals, twenty-two, and had registered against them the largest number of goals, fifty-one. While the New York A. C. won the title for the season, they by no means made a runaway race, for even at the tag end of the season had the St. Nicholas experts won their last game with the "Seven Saints" the Mercury Foot wearers would have been tied in the race by the Wanderers. Consequently, this game with the "Seven Saints" must be considered the most important contest of the season and the one which actually decided the cham- pionship. The match occurred March* 11. At the end of the first period the two teams were tied, but the final result was 3-2 in favor of the New York A. C. The best individual showing by amateur league players dur- ing the season was made by Castleman of the New York A. C, Clarke of the same team, O. Cleghorn of the Wanderers and the always reliable Kenneth B. Gordon of the St. Nicholas team. Castleman was by far the individual star of the season, and he equalled and sometimes exceeded the brilliant work of times past. He proved the mainstay to the Mercury Foot ice dem.ons at times when they could ill afford to lose his services. The S. CU'ghorn, Britton. Wanderers Hockey Club, Hockey Ohib of New York. Llffiton of the Crescents. PROMINENT AMATEUR LEAGUE PLAYERS. I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Ij? degree to which the St. Nicholas team suffered a handicap through the injury of players may be realized when it is re- membered that no less than a half a dozen of their men were disabled through accidents during the championship race. Among these were Chew, Putnam, Souther and C. C. Pell. In the case of Mr. Pell the sharp toe of a skate punctured his •cheek, so that one might run a finger from in front of his jaw in and out through his cheek. It was in such a condition that he was married shortly after the accident. / In the deciding, game of the year, as regards the champion- ^jf ship title, when the New York A. C. defeated St. Nicholas, on *■"■? Friday, March ii, at the St. Nicholas Rink, Sherriff, Peabody and Clarke each scored a goal for the mercury foot sharps, in the order named, and Cornell and Leake tallied for the Seven Saints. Castleman, Sherriff, Clarke and Mills excelled for the athletic club team, while K. Gordon shone brightest for St. Nicholas. If the St. Nicholas team had had its full play- ing strength on the ice the result might have been different, but the men laid off through accidents materially handicapped them, as was to be expected. The lineup in this game was as follows : N. Y. A.C. (3). Position. St. Nicholas S.C. (2). Mills Goal reitner White I'oiut Richards Broadfort Cover point Leake Castleman Rover Gordon Sherrifif Centre Cornell Peabody Left wing Winter Clarke Right wing Freeman Total score— New York A.C, 3; St. Nicholas. 2. Referee— W. H. Russell; assistant referee — Howard Drakeley, Crescent A.C. Goal umpires — M. C. Tisne and F. C. Britton. Timekeepers — G. M. Curran and Mortimer Bishop. N.Y.A.C. goals— Sherriff, 18 min. 43 sec; Peabody, 3:15; Clarke. 9:16. St. Nicholas— Cornell, 10:40: Leake, 11:07. Penalties, White, 1 min.; Cornell, 2 min. The closeness of this contest made it one of the most inter- esting and exciting ones of the year, and as the victory of the New York A. C. made that team the undisputed champions beyond all chance of loss, it must be considered the most important of the official league matches. The New Yorks would have been tied with the Wanderers for first place and a play- White. .a.L..mau. TWO NEW YORK A.C. PLAYERS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC rJBRARY. 17 r.tf woLild have been made necessary if they had lost this match. The one defeat of the New York A. C. occurred on i-'>bruary 24, when the Gothamites clashed at the St. Nicholas Rink with the ice sharps of the Crescent A. C. of Brooklyn. losing the match by one goal, 3 to 2. This contest was a very stirring one though heady, fast playing predominating throughout the evening, and the result was at all times in thej balance. At the end of the first period the score was a tie, McDonnell having tallied one goal for the Crescents, 13-17, and Peabody having previously achicv^ed the same for the New Yorkers, 5-32. i'«J In the second period Castleman carried joy into the Mercury r" ' foot camp by driving the puck into the cage six minutes after ": play was resumed. But Brown, the able right wing of the Crescents, forged into the hall of fame by tying the score six and a half minutes later. And he attached considerably more glory to himself four minutes later by scoring the goal which won for the Brooklynites. The lineup in this match was as follows : Crescent A.C. (.3). Position. N, Y. A.C. (2). Thomas Goal Mills Mclntyie Point White Lifflton Cover point Clarke Kennedy Rover Reimund Jackson Centre Castleman McDonnell Left win,^ Peabodv Brown Right wing Coolican Goals for Crescent A.C. — McDonnell, Brown, 2. New York A.C. — Peabody and Castleman. Referees — Wm. C. Russell and Dr. McKenzie. Goal umpires — Rritton, (H.C. of N. Y. ), and Richards, (St. Nicholas). Timekeepers — Geo. F. Stebbins, (Crescent A. C), and Phillips, (H.C. of N. Y.). The one game won by the Hockey Club of New York was that of February 8 against St. Nicholas, which the Santa Claus seven lost 4 to 2. The dropping of this match was a severe blow to Captain Gordon's experts, as it served mightily to put them out of the running for first honors. Frazer Camp- bell scored the two goals made by the St. Nicks, both occurring in the second half, and for the Hockey Club, Bryant scored two goals and Britton and Brush each one. The lineup of the Hoc- key Clum team in this match was as follows : Goal, Regens- 1 i^Mu-ituii- ■' Odie OWEliom; 3, Dafvesne, THREE STKONG PLAVEKS OF THE WANDEBEBS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. M burger; point, Russell; cover point, Davidson; rover, Britton; center, MacKenzie; left wing, Bryant; right wing, Brush. The match of February ii between the New York A. C. and the Wanderers attracted considerable attention and comment owing to the many thrills that were produced for the stirring of the onlookers and the importance it bore to the league race. The athletic club won by the narrow margin of one point, score 2 to I. An enthui-.astic partisan crowd, which filled the rink until even standing room was at a premium, followed the game with '^^ intense interest and watched the fourteen swift, skillful players .^ as they glided over the smooth ice, roughing it at times in the ..: heat of the battle so strenuously that three different times the game was stopped when a player lay dazed and almost exhausted on the ice. The game proved the Wanderers' last chance to become cham- pions. A victory meant even honors in the league standing with the speedy New York A. C. team. And for a large part of the game the strong Wanderer aggregation, with its fast, spectacular skaters from Canada, looked as if they had the smooth team work of their rivals boxed up in a formidable defense. Indeed, until within a few minutes of the end of the struggle it looked as if the honors would finally be even, but suddenly Clarke, who played in the New York A. C. lineup in place of Shirreff, shot out from the bunch and carried the puck at lightning speed down the north side of the rink. With a quartette of Wanderers massed about him he shot the rubber to Castleman, who toyed for a second with the disk, and then shot it into the netting with terrific force, and the aspirations of the Wanderers faded into defeat. Both teams gave much attention to defensive tactics. The players watched each other with keen eyes, rarely allowing each other to get out of reach. As a result there was less of a con- certed attack, less shooting for the goal, and fewer chances taken on long drives. The game was played on a hard surface, over which skaters slipped and slid in a way which interfered 20 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. with accurate passing. There was a lot of roughness, which the officials failed to notice, and during the whole first half not one penalty was imposed. In the second half Castleman, who seldom violates the rules, was sent off the ice for a three- minute period for tripping O. Cleghorn and sending him sprawling over the ice. The line-up and summary was as follows : N. Y. A.C. (2). Position. Wanderers (1). Mills Goal Woods White Point Smeaton Broadfoot Cover point Dufresne Clarke Rover Jiarmon Castleman Centre S. Cleghorn *\ Peabody Left wing Bulger '' Denesba Right wing O. Cleghorn Goals — First half: First for Wanderers by O. Cleghorn in 15:17. Second half: First for New York A.C. by Clarke, in 7:58; second for New York A.C. by Castleman, in 17:10. Penalties — Castleman, 3 minutes; S. Cleghorn, 2 minutes; White, 2 minutes. Referee — William Russell, Hockey Club; as- sistant referee— Howard Brakeley, Crescent A.C. Goal umpires — C. de Casa- nova. Hockey Club, and Fred Richards, St. Nicholas Hockey Club. Timers — Mortimer Bishoi), New Y'ork Athletic Club, and Frank Ellison, Wanderers' Hockey Club. , Many players and spectators commented on the roughness displayed in a large number of the matches. Early in the winter, the Wanderers Hockey Club imported Sprague and Odie Cleghorn and C. Smeaton from the West- mount Club of Canada. The Westmounts are noted for rough playing, and in one game early in the year against Sherbrook the total penalties were ii8 minutes, of which yi minutes went to Westmount players and 47 to Sherbrook. This will give some idea of the way the Westmount men play the game. "The importation of these players," commented the New York Sun, "seriously hurt the game here because they brought their rough style of play with them." The roughness has been so prevalent that the officers of the league are worried about the future of the game. They realize that to keep the game a popular winter attraction something must be done to put a stop to unnecessary roughness and that those players who cannot play without trying to injure their opponents must be kept out of the game. It has been sug- gested that changes be made in the rules which will give the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBKiRY . 21 referees more power, and it is realized that the referees, do not rule erring players out of the game quickly enough. Often if a referee would inflict some severe punishment as soon as a fc^l play is committed instead of a reprimand, it would have a wholesome effect on the others in the game. But when a referee is lax the players soon take advantage of his good nature. One change su^ nested is to make the penalties cumulative. For the first offence, if only a minor one, a minute's suspension might be the penalty. On the second offence three minutes. Then five minutes for the third, and if the player still breaks •^ the rules he should be put out of the game for the rest of the fj contest. Players who deliberately try to injure an opponent should be dealt with in a summary manner at once, and the i Executive Committee of the League should suspend him for a I certain period just as players in other sports are suspended by the managing committee. Another change that will be made is that regarding the standing of the players as amateurs. Just what these changes will be the executive committee has not determined. Hockey is a rough, game at the best. Body checking is legitimate and falls will consequently be frequent. Tripping is not allowed, but often the players are so expert that it is impossible for the referee to decide if the trip was inten- tional or accidental, and as a consequence the players often get the benefit of the doubt. With players who are disposed to be ugly there are many tricks that are used. When in close con- tact with an opponent the short end of the stick is used to jab into his ribs or stomach. The short end is that part above the hands, and it can be used so effectively that no one but the injured player will know what has happened, and he will feel the effects for several days. Odie Cleghorn, however, it should be observed in passing, established a record for tallying the largest number of goals in a single game. He scored six goals in a match against the St. Nicholas Skating Club on February 15. 22 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. OFFICIAL TABLE OF CONTESTS AND RESULTS IN AMERICAN AMATEUR ICE HOCKEY' LEAGUE RACE, SEASON OF 1910. Jan. 4— St. Nicholas S. C, 8; Hockey Club of N. Y., i. Jan. 7 — New York A. C, 2; Wanderers H. C, i. Jan. II — Crescent A. C, 6; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2. Jan. 13 — Wanderers H. C, 3; St. Nicholas S. C, 2. Jan. 18 — Wanderers H. C, 5; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2. Jan. 21 — New York A. C, 10; Crescent A. C, i. Jan. 25 — New York A. C, 4; St. Nicholas S. C, 2. Jan. 28 — Wanderers H. C, 3; Crescent A. C, i Feb. I — New York A. C, 6; Hockey Club of N. Y., o. Feb. 3 — St. Nicholas S. C, 4; Crescent A. C, 3 Feb? 8— St. Nicholas S. C, 2; Hockey Club of N. Y., 4. Feb. II — Wanderers H. C, i; New York A. C. 2. Feb. 15 — W^anderers H. C, 8; St. Nicholas S. C. 4. Feb. 18 — Crescent A. C, 5; Hockey Club of N. Y. 3. Feb. 24 — Crescent A. C, 3; New York A. C, 2. Feb. 25 — Wanderers H. C, 12; Hockey Club of N. Y., 5. Mar. I — New York A. C, 7; Hockey Club of N. Y.. 3. Mar. 3 — St. Nicholas S. C, 4; Crescent A C, 3. Mar. 8— Wanderers H. C, 8; Crescent A. C, 4. Mar. II— New York A. C, 3; St. Nicholas S. C, 2. OFFICIAL TABLE OF PERCENTAGES. AMERICAN AMATEUR LEAGUE SEASON OF 1910. Games Games Goals Goals Teams. won. lost. PC. for. against. New York Athletic Clnh 7 1 .875 36 15 Wanderers' Hockey Club 6 2 .7.J0 41 22 St. Nicholas Hockey Club 3 5 .375 28 29 Crescent Athletic Club 3 5 .375 26 36 Hockey Club of New York 1 7 .125 22 51 OFFICIAL RECORDS OF A. A. H. L. LEAGUE TEAMS, 1910. NEW YORK A. C. 2— Wanderers 1 6— Hockey Club 7— Hockey Club 3 10— Crescent A.C. 1 2— Wanderers 1 3— St. Nicholas 2 4— St. Nicholas 2 2— Crescent A.C. 3 WANDERERS H. C. 1— N.Y.A.C. 2 3— Crescent A.C. 1 12— Hockey Club 5 2— St. Nicholas 2 1— N.Y.A.C. 2 8— Crescent A.C. 4 5— Hockey Club 2 8— St. Nicholas 4 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 2 — Waudercrs.S 1'— N.Y.A.C. 4 S— Hockey Club 1 G— Hockey Chil. 2 1— N.Y.A.C. 10 1 — Wanderers 3 1--St. Nicholas 8 -' — Crescent A.C. 6 3 — Wanderers 5 ST. NICHOLAS H. C. 4— Crescent A.C. 3 1'— Hockey Club 4 4 — Wanderers S CItESCENT A. C. 3— St. Nicholas 4 r>--H..ckcy Club 3 3— N.Y.A.C. 2 HOCKEY CLUB. 0— N.Y.A.C. 6 4— St. Nicholas 2 3 — Crescent A.C. 5 -Crescent, A.C -N.Y.A.C. 3 3— St. Nicliolas 4 4 — Wanderers 8 -Wanderers 12 -N.Y.A.C. 7 RECORD OF INDIVIDUAL GOALS SCORED. Pile goals scored by the different players are: NEW YORK A. C. ^lastlemau -^A^hirreff . . jPeabody 0. Cleghorn 15 S. Cleghorn 7 K. Gordon 11 Cornell 4 Souther 2 McDonnell 7 Brown 6 Bryant 14 Britton 3 . 3 . 4 c. . 10 . 3 C. 2 2 '. 2 . ti . 4 . 2 , 1 2 Clark Broadfoot 2 WANDERERS II. Harmon Bulger 3 Smeaton Winter ST. NICHOLAS A. Campbell Chew Leake Larned . . . . 2 Pell . 1 CRESCENT A. C Liffiton 2 Scarborough HOCKEY CLUB. Brush Kennedy 1 1 O-Keefe CHAMPIONSHIP WINNERS. The table of championship teams since the founding of the American Amateur Hockey League is shown by the attached schedule : i8y6-97 — New York Athletic Club. 1897-98— New York Athletic Club. 1898-99 — Brooklyn Skating Club. 1899-1900 — Crescent Athletic Club. '' 1900-01 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1901-02 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1902-03 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1903-04 — Wanderers Hockey Club. 1904-05 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1905-06 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1906-07 — St. Nicholas Skating Club. 1907-08 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1908-09 — New York Athletic Club. 1909-10 — New York Athletic Club. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Review of the Season in the Inter- collegiate Ice Hockey League The championship race in the Intercollegiate Ice Hockey League during the season of 1909-1910 opened January 5, at the St. Nicholas Rink, New York City. Six teams comprised the league. Princeton, Yale, Harvard, Cornell, Dartmouth and Columbia, as against five teams in recent years. Cornell was the new entrant for league honors. Princeton proved the surprise of the campaign, going through it without a defeat. The Jcrseymen were scored on only twice, once by Dartmouth and once by Yale. They tallied a total of 12 goals in the five league games played. Yale was picked by many of the sharps to win the title, and if their defeat by Princeton on January 26. by the score of 2 to i, was a surprise, r\en more so was the trouncing given them February 3 b,- Cornell, 3 to i. Cornell had already been defeated by Har- vard (January 8, Harvard 5. Cornell o). Yale's famous coach, Tom Howard, who formerly was one of the best of the ex- perts playing in New York City, proved unable to produce another championship winning aggregation with the material on hand at New Haven. The Tiger victory was an unusual one, as it occurred in the middle of the playing season and long before the other teams finished their schedules. In fact, Vale, the team defeated by Princeton on Wednesday night, January 26, was playing its first game and had to finish the year with the knowledge that the championship was already lost. The peculiar state of affairs was the result of the Intercol- legiate Hockey League arranging a schedule for a rink that was yet in course of construction. Prior to the opening of the playing season the league was assured that the new rink in Boston would be finished in time to allow the btudeiits an opportunity of playing there a part of the championship sched- ule. Cornell, therefore, was admitted to the league and a SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. ^7 schedule drawn up with half of the dates awarded to the Bos- ton inclosure. The rink, however, progressed but liltle durin^i the playing season, and the dates given to Boston had to be cancelled. The Princeton hockey septette met and chose Alfred C. Kay, 1912, of Pittsburg, Pa., as captain for the season of 1910- 1911. Of the championship hockey team, all but Captain C. J. Pea- cock, 1910, and F. B. Read, lyio, will again be available. Cap- tain-elect Kay, the rover ; Angell, Sawyer, AIcKinney and Con- nett, of the forwards; Cover Point Blair and Substitutes Day / Ind Kalbfleisch will constitute a good squad. In the freshman ^Vrlass Bob Patterson is a star point, and some other good men m that class w-ill give some of the present regulars a strong ^ 'nght for positions. It is to be noted that Pittsburg boys figure largely in hockey at Princeton. This year Captain Peacock, 1910; L. D. Blair, 1912; J. F. McKinney, Jr., 1912, and x^. G. Kay, 1912, hail from Pittsburg. Patterson, 1913, is from the Smoky City, too. Because of the presence of a rink like Duquesne Garden indoor hockey is very popular in Pittsburg, and the college teams get a number of men from that city. Princeton had a clean slate in hockey in the intercollegiate series, but in the early season practice matches showed poor form, the St. Paul's School team administering defeat in what seem,ed a humiliating affair, but that school team had had the advantage of much ice and was composed of some crack players, some of whom are bound for Princeton, anyway. It was not luck that placed St. Paul's School at the top of the heap. Last season the same school defeated Harvard Uni- versity, a team that afterward won the championship of the Intercollegiate League. It is interesting to note that Princeton University had sev- eral former St. Paul's School players on its seven. Kay, Con- nett and McKinney all learned the game at the New Hampshire institution. This was the first year for the three in inter- wm ^^ mf O H W 5 ^^^mmm:Tr Kr.\T>l)lNG'8 ATIILKTIO LIBRARY. 29 • ollegiate company, and all showed th-if they are clevei playerii. Kay was the most prominent. He h a speedy skater, with an excellent shot. Kay played in the center of the ice, and his skating mate' was AIcKinney. The latter was a steady player, Connett held, down right and Angell played left wing during the major part of the season. Both just nosed out Sawyer for the honor of being regular players. The four forwards were not equals of the Tiger defense. Captain Peacock at goal was the star of the team and a player who would ix- a valuable addition to any team in the Amateur Hockey League. It is his last year at college, and his loss will greatly cripple the Tiger seven. Read, the foot ball half back, also added a great deal to the strength of the Nassau team. He played cover point, and although not a finished player, the big fellow was one of the best defense men in the Intercollegiate League. Blair filled in nicely at point. Ballin was not allowed to play this year. Ihe game between Princeton and Yale, January 26, which decided the championship was intensely interesting and exciting. Yale lost the intercollegiate title after having competed otice. Yale's previous games were postponed. The certainty that a victory for Princeton would eliminate Yale almost before starting served as an incentive for a fierce struggle on the part of the New Haven players, but there was lacking just a shade less ability than Princeton wjas able to put forth, and the victory by a margin of one tally followed. No hockey match that has been contested at the St. Nicholas Rink during the season brought out the crowd that witnessed the Princeton- Yale match. Long before the time for the game to cpmmence all the seats in the rink had been sold, and the spectators who would not be denied a chance to look at the^ struggle crowded several deep around the sides of the rink. At the end of twenty minutes of hard play, in which the tide of battle centered alternately around one goal and then the other, the changes coming with lightning rapidity, the Tigers SPALblNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 31 were in the lead b}- one point, and in the second half there was an even break, with each side scoring once. . . It there was any man on the Princeton forward Hne who de- served greater credit than another, it was httle Kay. Though not weighing as much as any other man on the ice, he looked to be outclassed until he began to skate, and then he worried the whole Yale team. Both of the scores which won for Prince- ton the championship wxre due to his accurate shots, which were the results of clever play. In the first half Kay received the puck from McKinney near the side of the rink and shot it into the Yale net, and in the second period he carried the rubber f'^own close to the net after a run through the whole Yale team, and scored neatly. Read, too, deserves a great deal of credit, for he was one of the Tigers' best players on defense, dividing honors with Peacock, who stopped repeated tries by Yale. The one score by Yale was a long lift by Loutrell from near the center of the rink, llie line-up : Yale (1). rosition. rriiicetMii (2). Williams Goal Peacock Swenson I'oiut Blair Johnson Cover point Read •Martin Rover Kay Heron Centre :McKinney Merritt Left wing Angell LoutreU . Kight wing Connett Goals— First half: Fir^t for Princeton by Kay in 4:r.O. Seconrl half: First for Yale bv Loutrell in i>::W: second for I'linceton by Kay in 11:15. Referee— W. Russell. Hockey Club; ast,istant referee— E. Dufresne. Wander- ers. Goal umpires — G. Harmon. Wanderers, and F. C. Britton. Hockey Club. Timekeepers — George Stebbins. Crescent A.C., and W. J. Croker, Wand(>rers.( Time of halves — Twenty minutes. MEN WHO PLAYED ON INTERCOLLEGIATE LEAGiUE TEAMS. PRINCETON. Goal, Peacock; point, Blair; cover point, Read; rover, Kay; center, McKinney; left wing. Sawyer and Angell; right wing, Connett and .\ngell. H.ARVARD. Goal, Chadwick; point, Huntington; cover point, Foster and Blackball; rover, Capt. Hicks; center, Gardner and Duncan; left -ving, Duncan and Hornblower; right wing, Leslie, Cutler and Hornblower. 81'ALD1N(;'S ATHJLETIC LIBRARY. 33 YALE. Goal, Williams: point. Joliiisun aivl Swensuii : cover point. Johnson and Swenson ; rover. Martin ; center. Capt. Heron ; left wmg. Merritt ; right wing. Loutrel. DARTMOUTH. Goal. Bullard and Norris ; point. Patten ; cover point, F. Eaton; rover. S. Eaton and Stiicklen ; center. Wells; left wing. Doe; light wing, Marston. CORNELL. Goal. Matthair and A'ail : point. Warner ; cover point, Lally ; rover. Capt. Matchneer ; center. Magner ; left wing, Jones; right wing, Crassweller. COLUMBIA. Goal, Murphy ; point, Mackenzie ; cover point. Murchie and Lovejoy; rover. Harding: center. Cassidy ; left wing. Harrison and Lovejoy; right wing. Trimljle. IXTERCOLLEGIATE ICE HOCKEY LEAGUE CHAMPIONSHIP GAMES. 1909-1910. Jan. .5 — Princeton 1 Cornell Jan. 8-Harvard 5 Cornell Jan. 12— Princeton 5 Dartmouth 1 Jan. 12— Harvard 6 Columbia Jan. 15 — Princeton 3 Harvard Jan. 22— Princeton 1 Columbia Jan. 26— Princeton 2 Yale 1 Feb. 5-Carnell 3 Yale 1 Feb. 10-Yale 5 Columbia 1 Feb. 12- Harvard.. 6 Dartmouth Feb. 16 -Yale 5 Dartmouth o Feb. 17— Dartmouth 3 Columbia Feb. 19— Harvard 3 Yale Feb. 26 -Cornell 7 Columbia..... 1 OTHER C()LLh:GIATE CONTESTS. At Cleveland, Jan. 1— Yale 5 Cornell 3 AtCleveland, Jan. 3— Yale 4 Cornell 2 At Cambridge, Jan. 5— Harvard 4 Mass. Inst, of Tech ... 1 At Amherst, Jan. 15-Yale 5 Amherst 3 At Cambridge, Feb 5— St. Francis Xavier (Can.) 4 Harvard 1 At Amherst, Feb. 12— Amherst 2 Williams 1 34 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. GAMES PLAYED AT WEST POINT Jan. 8— University of Penna 1 West Point Jan. 15— West Point Columbia Feb. 3— West Point 1 Springfield Training School 1 Feb. 5-Mass. Institute of Tech 3 West Point Feb. 19— Troy Polytechnic 3 West Point MEN WHO PLAYED ON WELL-KNOWN TEAMS. Springfield, Mass., Training School. — Goal, Solassa; point, Emerson; cover point, Smith; rover, Warren: center, Berry; right wing. Best; left wing, Guildton. Amherst. — Goal, Bedford; point. Sibley; cover point, Henry; center, San Souci and Cranshaw; rover, Connell; right wing, \ Washburn; left wing, Chapin. University of Pennsylvania. — Goal, Ward; point, Hayden: cover point. Young; center, King; rover, DeWitt; right wing, Newman; left wing, Gideon, West Point.— Goal, Waldrick; point, Milh; cover point, P. Waterman; center, Schneider; rover, Harmon; right wing, Sibert; left wing, Rosebear. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 35 Interscholastic Ice Hockey League While at the start of the season of 1909 and 1910 there were indications that the Interscholastic League would resume and continue operations as a league, yet it soon developed that the league as such would not continue and that the individual teams would make matches and play them as they chose. Unfor- tunately for the welfare of the game, this was the result, and the Interscholastic League dwindled into nothing during this past year. That hockey will suffer as the result is only too Evident to those who have a keen interest and a knowledge of the game, for it is in this league in the past that many of the players who later developed into stars were developed and made possible of obtainment by the amateur and intercol- legiate leagues. During the season of 1909 and 1910 so far as concerned the teams which originally made up the Interscholastic League the seven of the Groff School may be said to have made the best showing. The team of the Cutler School ranked very high owing to the playing of Watson Washburn, goal, Capt. Will- iams and White, the rover of the seven. The record of the Cutler team is very creditable. It played seven games in all and defeated Stevens Institute, Stuyvesant High School, "Irving School, Hardstrom School, etc. The seven was defeated by the Groff School by a score of 4-0. The lineup of the Cutler School team was as follows : Captain Washburn, goal ; Curtis, point; Williams, cover point; Lawson, right forward; Richard, left forward ; White, rover ; Forman, center. The best player of the year in interscholastic circles was White of Cutler School. He is like Washburn, a very promis- ing and a very versatile athlete, and among other athletic honors has attached to himself the title of interscholastic golf champion. Cutler School may well be proud of representatives like Washburn and White. Capt. Washburn has been prepar- ing for Harvard at Cutler, and passed one of the highest exam- IS '^- SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 37 illations for entrance to John Harvard's institution that has ever been passed, notwithstanding his athletic activities and propensities. He is an all around athlete and is the inter- scholastic tennis champion of New York. A review of the interscholastic ice hockey situation in Greater New York leads one to deplore the fact that the league of the past has disintegrated. It is thus evident that the great sport is declining in popularity among the younger players in the greater city. As the game's life blood in a considerable degree depends on th interest of the younger players who will graduate into the advanced ranks, it is seen that the condition described is one which should be of concern to those who hope and work for the advancement of the interest of ice hockey in the future. Several reasons have been ascril)ed as causing the decline which has been described. One is that there is but one artificial ice rink in the city and that in this rink the school boy players are allowed to practice but twice a week. Another is that many promising young players leave the city to go to boarding schools and are thus removed from any possibility of participation in the playing of the local teams in this class. Whatever the actual, cause may be it is evident and important that the playing of ice hockey by school boys in Greater New York should be encouraged and the game will never have the popularity and strength which it deserves until the young lads are given facility and encouragement to participate in the sport which should lead all indoor and outdoor winter games. In addition to providing the school boy's facilities for practice and play, the Interscholastic League should be placed on a firm basis, for it is only through organization that any pastime can be placed in a position where it is of an established nature and of a nature that will contribute to the prosperity and popu- larity of the sport as a whole. The class of playing exhibited by the teams of the schools in and about New York City was not as high as has been shown in some of the years past owing probably to the disorganization SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 39 of the league. The Intercollegiate League likewise exhibited a decline in excellence of play, although that league con- tinued its operations as a league. These two facts accentuate the need for increased attention from the individuals who are concerned with the future of ice hockey among amateur players in this country. SPALDING':? ATHLETIC LIBRARl'. 41 Hockey in New England Bv Fred J. Hoev, Boston. It only needed the establishment of an indoor rink in which climaxial games could be played independently of the earliest of early springs, to make ice hockey the leading sport of the winter months in New England. • .^he announcement that the new Bos- ton Arena would be available for use last winter stimulated inter- est in the game enormously, but, owing to delays in construction, this splendid rink was not in shape for hockey during the season. Interest in hockey, however, was keen throughout the winter, and although schedules were often interrupted by weather condi- tions, most of the important matches were played eventually. Hockey seemed to be especially popular with students of the New England colleges. Where the sport was new, or where 'varsity teams could not be supported, interclass competitions pro- vided plenty of sport, and laid the foundation for 'varsity teams this year. Harvard and Dartmouth, both members of the Intercollegiate Hockey League, had fairly effective teams, but they did not measure up to their standard of past years. Princeton won the championship. The Crimson seven had a satisfactory exhibition season, while Dartmouth had the poorest winter that the college has known since the game was adopted there. Lack of ice for practice was the principal reason for the weak work of these teams. Through the Christmas holidays, while Princeton and Yale were getting useful experience in the Duquesne rink at Pittsburg, and while Columbia had the use of the St. Nicholas rink, the Dartmouth team got but one day's practice out of the ten days' vacation. Harvard practiced at the St. Nicholas rink, but several of the regulars were absent, and little team work was developed. Every year the Dartmouth squad comes south during the Christmas holidays, and though the seat of the college at Hanover is much further north, the players get their first taste SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 43 of the game around Boston. Heavy snowfalls and other un- favorable conditions make early season practice at Hanover un- profitable. The Harvard squad has three rinks within the Stadium en- closure. The ice is kept in splendid shape when there is any ice to keep. Last season Coach Winsor experimented with night practice under arc lights, and the results were satisfactory. After the regular 'varsity squad had been, chosen, those that *vere left formed club teams, and competitions were continued throughout the season. Several players who fell short of the 'varsity stand- ard will be valuable additions to the regular team this year. The schedule will call for league matches in the new arena, and both Harvard and Dartmouth should be better prepared for the other college sevens than ever before, Williams College presented one of the strongest teams in the country last season. The team was fast and»clever, and by its win over Princeton was entitled, it supporters figured, to dispute Princeton's claim to the intercollegiate championship. Another college which produced a team of more than ordinary ability was Amherst. The game was practically new to Amherst men, but by dint of hard practice, aided by professional coach- ing, a well developed team was moulded. Springfield Training School, though represeinted by a weak combination, played out its schedule so far as tlie weather per- mitted, and the men got the experience needed for better work this season. The team will have many veterans available, and should get a good start toward winning hockey. Brown made an effort to start hockey, but the game was eventually abandoned. The indoor game that took Brown's ath- letic attention last winter was not a success, however, and it seems probable that hockey will again be fostered, li Brown should decide to take up the game, there is a fine opening for the formation of a league, composed of New England colleges. St. Paul's school of Concord, N. H., the school that has the reputation of developing the best hockey players in this country, produced its usual fast team last year. This institution sends SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 46 many of its best players to Harvard, as a glance at the list of former Harvard stars will show. Hockey is the big sport at St. Paul's. No college or "prep" school in this country has better facilities for the Canadian game. A half dozen rinks are at the disposal of the students, and the ice is kept in splendid shape. With the Boston Arena open, more colleges will probably adopt ice hockey for a winter sport. In past seasons hock-^y never gain- ed favor with some colleges because of the uncertainty of the weather, but with the new rink in operation it is expected that more colleges will take up the game in a serious way. The Boston Hockey League, an organization of club sevens, had a most successful season. The Crescents, composed of the leading players of Boston, won the championship for the second time. The Brae Burn Country Club, of West Newton, was represented by two fast sevens, and its first team finished second in the race. Most of the matches were played at the Brae Burn rink, one of the best outdoor surfaces in New England. Night hockey was tried under electric lights, and was a pronounced success. The league expects to play its coming matches at the Boston Arena, and the membership will probably be increased to eight clubs. The final standing of the teams in 1909-10 : Won Lost P. C. Won Lost P. C Crescents 4 o i.ooo Brae Burn, 2nd i 2 .333 Brae Burn, ist .. 3 i .667 Brookline H. C. o 2 .000 Milton H. C. . . . 2 2 .500 Dorchester H.C. o 3 .000 Never has keener scholastic competition been witnessed than last season saw. Greater Boston was the big center for school hockey, although teams outside of the district furnished some ex- citing competition for the leading Boston teams. Arlington High, a school that has been a top-notcher in hockey for several years, won the championship of Greater Boston, For a time Milton Academy made a close run for the honor, but was subsequently defeated by Arlington, which made a re- markable run of victories. In the last week the players lost form and succumbed to St. Mark's. As Milton had won from St. - ^ « S ' o UJ ^^ ^^ a ^ ■HH w K ; pHH .. ^ ; i^g ^ o ; O i HlBT ii"™ m o o ' r/ M a a igU 3. Vi ffl 1 ' ai f w s 1 rn p < Ipll ^ - ■^j '—' ' ^ llll'^..,,,,^ ro g HHL. HJ^nHtiiiiaidiii j_, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 47 Mark's, but had suffered an e?rly defeat while playing xMelrose High, the championship situation was left in a muddle. Arling- ton decided the issue by trimming Milton and thus clinched the title. The leading teams of Greater Boston were: Arlington High, Milton Academy, Rindge Manual Training School, and Newton High. Other teams that had fair success were English High, Medford High, Milton High, Noble and Greenough, Brookline High, Maiden High, Somerville High, Dorchester High, Mechanic Arts High and Boston Latin School. Of the teams outside of the Greater Boston district the leaders were : St. Mark's School, of Southboro, Mass., and Pomf ret (Conn.) School. These men were picked for all-scholastic honors in Greater Boston : First Team. Player. School. Position. Louis Washburn .... Newton High Left wing. John Hutchinson ...Arlington High ....Left center. John Fritz Rindge M.T.S Right center. Clarence Wanamaker. Melrose High Right wing. Bert Kingsley Rindge M.T.S Cover point. John Buckley Arlington High ..... Point. David Buttrick Arlington High Goal. Captain — John Fritz, Rindge M. T. S. Substitute forward — S. L. Devereaux, Milton Academy. Second Team. Player. ' School. Position. Forest Osgood Arlington High Left wing. Walter Kelley Arlingto-n High Left center. Detmar Jones Melrose High Right center. Wallace McNaught . English High Right wing. Norman McDonald . Melrose High Cover point. Melville Comey Melrose High Point. Frank Converse ..... Nobele & Greenough. Goal. Captain — Wallace McNaught, English High. Substitute for- ward — Leon Tuck, Winchester High. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. New League Formed in the East An interesting development of the season in the East was the formation of a new league, the New Jersey Ice Hockey League. Captain Gordon and Larned, of the St. Nicholas team of the amateur league, and other league stars are taking an active in- terest in the new organization. The teams comprising the league are South Orange Field Club, Short Hills Hockey Club, Montclair A, C, and Englewood Field Club. ^ The South Orange *Club finished the season with the best record, not meeting with a single defeat. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. (U Hockey in Western Pennsylvania By Edward M. Thierry. Contrary to the success of previous years, hockey did not enjoy its usual place in the hearts of Pittsburgers during the winter season of 1909-1910. Play was confined to an Intercol- legiate League and several inter-city and inter-university games during December, January and February. During the two previous seasons the Western Pennsylvania League was in existence, being made up of strong teams of local players. The season before that — 1906-1907 — saw the final playing of games in the old International League. High salaries, excessive in comparison to the patronage, killed ; the big league game for the 1909-1910 season. It was declared too ; expensive a proposition and it was decided by those who had : formerly boomed and managed the game in Pittsburg that inter- :: college hockey was Pittsburg's limit. Consequently the Intercollegiate League was formed, composed ; of the University of Pittsburg, Carnegie Technical Schools and ; Pennsylvania State College. Overtures were made to Washing- ton and Jefferson College to enter, but as that institution pos- sessed no artificial ice and there was no available outdoor rink, the thing was passed up. Penn State entered because a ^ew pond had been constructed at State College, Pa. Pitt and Tech were able to get plenty of practice because of their location — in Pitts- burg, where the spacious Duquesne Garden indoor rink is located. Dr. Watson L. Savage, physical director of the new Pittsburg Athletic Association, which is just completing a $1,000,000 club house in the Smoky City, was chosen president of the organi- ijI '-ation. Dr. Savage has had plenty of experience with the game, t he was physical director at Columbia University, New ^^y.-ji, for a number of years. le Intercollegiate League season opened on December 18 and 62 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. closed about the middle of January. The end came abrupt;! when the Penn State- faculty put the ban on the game. j When the season closed Carnegie Tech's players were the ui disputed champions, having won three games and tied one, witl out suffering a defeat. Pitt was second with one victory, two d' feats and one tie. State played but two games, losing both. The State trouble originated because all games were played i Pittsburg and the Penn State authorities protested because tV men had to make the long trip to Pittsburg whenever a game wj played. The faculty's position was reinforced by the majority c] members of the students' athletic association, who looked wit| disfavor on the 'varsity hockey team because they claimed it Wc made up almost wholly of Pittsburg students. On December i8 the first Intercollegiate League game wj played when Tech defeated Pitt, i to 0. Charles scored the onli goal. On Christmas day Tech walloped State, 7 to o. Maso scored 4 goals and Bright 3. On New Year's Day Pitt defeated State 2 to I. Boyle and Askins scored for Pitt and Beatz fc' State. On January 8 Pitt and Tech played at i-i tie, Lambin scoring for Pitt and Mason for Tech. On January 22 Tech bei Pitt 3 to I. Bright, Low and Harmer scored for Tech ani Muller for Pitt. On January 15 State was scheduled to play Tech, but thi faculty refused to let the team go to Pittsburg. Instead a teat from Tech called the Tartans played a team from Pitt, called th All-Collegians, the latter winning 2 to i. It was not included i the league standing. Following were the players on each team : Pitt — Reed and Hagan, goal ; McCutcheon, point ; Muller, cove point ; Captain Boyle, rover ; Haggerty, center ; Lambing, Daniel and Askins, wings. Tech — Minnemeyer, goal ; Hittner, point ; Captain Dornberge: cover point ; Charles, rover ; Mason, center ; Bright and Lov wings. State — Captain Dunn, goal ; Stevenson, point ; Clarke, cove point; Lloyd, rover; Baetz, center; McDonald and Bien, wing; SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 53 During Christmas week the Yale and Princeton teams pla3'e(l a series in Pittsburg. Great crowds saw the games because of the presence of a number of Pittsburg boys on each team. Yale was captained by John Herron of Pittsburg and Princeton by- Clarence Peacock, also of Pittsburg. On December 28 Yale played Tech, winning 4 to i. Yale's lineup was : French, goal ; Johnson, point ; Dilworth, cover point ; Martin, rover; Herron, center; Howe and Merritt, wings; Stevens and Loutrel, substitutes. Following that Princeton and Yale played three games, Prince- ton winning two of them. On December 29 the Tigers beat the Bulldogs, 2 to I. On December 30 Yale retaliated, winning by the same score. On December 31 Princeton won, 5 to 2. The Tigers' lineup was : Peacock, goal ; Blair, point ; Reed, 'cover point ; Read, rover, Kay, center ; McKinney and Connett, wings ; Mathay and Sawyer, substitutes. In January a picked team of former Western Pennsylvania League stars in Pittsburg played an inter-city series with an all- star Cleveland team. Two games were played in Pittsburg, where the Smoky City men won and two were played in the Forest City, when the Clevelanders won. On January 6 Pitts- burg won 2 to I and on Janaury 7 they were again victorious by the same score. On January 14 Cleveland won in their own rink 2' to o, and on Januray 15 they won again, 3 to 2. The teams were made up as follows : Pittsburg — Mackay, goal; Rutledge, point; Koch, cover point; Robinson, rover; Vincent, center; Brown and Stroebel, wings; Bechel, substitute. Cleveland — Russell, goal; Killaly, point; McLaughlin, cover point ; Winters, rover ; McFarland, center ; Gustin and Payne, wings; Poland, Marcot and Irving, substitutes. It was determined early in the fall of 1910 that there would be no league hockey of any kind in Pittsburg during the season of 1910-1911. It was declared by those in back of the game that nothing would be done until the rinks in Cleveland, Boston, New York and Chicago are ready for the much-discussed National Hockey League. 1— Fred Taylor, Cover Point, Renfrew Hockey Team, "$10 a Minute Player," "star" player of Canada. 2 — Bert Lindsay, Goal, Renfrew Hockey Team. 3 — Riley Hearn, Goalkeeper, Wanderers. A TRIO OF FAMOUS CANADIAN PLAYERS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Canadian Teams Invade the East There were in all eight contests in New York in which Canadian teams participated. In some Canucks met Canucks, md in the others, the stars from across the border lined up igainst teams of the American Amateur Hockey League. The first game occurred December 28, 1909, at the St. Nicholas Rink between the New York A. C. and the Toronto Jniversity seven. Toronto won, 3 to i. Castleman scored he single tally for New York in the second period. Davidson, ^rith and Hanley tallied for Toronto. Two of the Toronto players, Evans and Code, were subjected to penalties for oughness. The St. Nicholas S. C. defeated Queens College December 30, by a score of 3 to i. Larned, Souther and Putnam scored or the Seven Saints. On February 28 the Toronto University seven defeated the V^anderers H. C. (A. H. L.) by the score of 6 to 2. The jame was one of the roughest ever seen in New York. A spectator described one of the episodes of the game as follows ; "Toward the close of the second half many of the spectators ittered half-joyous, half-fearful shrieks as one of the stick-clashing 'pisodes developed a head-breaking soiree that would have delighted :he heart of any Donnybrook Fair-goer. Frith and Sprague Cleghorn, vho had been slashing each other going down the right side of the ink, are not selfish. They wearied of confining the stick-swinging to a duet. Accordingly Frith turned and openly struck at brother Sprague. With a fine regard for brawling conventionalities, sticks ivere dropped and they went at it with their fists. After Frith had jounded Sprague's body in the clinches, they sparred Sprague led svith his left, but Frith blocked. Then J. Cooper Smeaton and other Wanderers, acting as 'peacemakers,' took a hand in the doings. 'The Toronto players also had olive branch ideas, and in a moment the southeast corner of the rink was the scene of a struggling throng. Quarter was neither given nor asked. Hitting was allowed in the clinches and anywhere below the belt For a moment the rinksiders were nonplussed. Then they swarmed out on the ice and 56 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. a pretty mob scene was enacted. It looked like the Philadelp strikers taking the guns, buttons and other souvenirs from Fencibles. Happy to relate, the threatened mobbing was avoided ; the game progressed." Richards, Armstrong and McSloy played the best game r Toronto. Smeaton, Harmon, O. Cleghorn and Bulger excel for the Wanderers. Sweaton and Harmon each scored ( b goal. The Wanderers achieved a brilliant feat on March 4 walloping the strong Victorias of Montreal to the tune of to 2. O Cleghorn and DuFresne each scored twice against * b Canucks. The Victorias are one of the leading amateur teaip of the Dominion. J Sensational goal tending by Artie Woods and Smeaton's gr^^jt stops with every part of his anatomy prevented the Canadis;^ from scoring at will. Russell Bowie, one of the best amatetl" players in Canada, made it his business to be in front of Ot Wancierer net whenever the puck was in that territory, and l| shots were as straight as a die, but every shot save one w-i warded successfully. The Victorias were minus the services of Gilbert, their st ' left forward. The Victorias were further discomforted by later losing t game against the picked "All New York" team, made up players from various teams of the amateur league. The 'V New Yorks" defeated the visitors by a score of 5 to 4. T clubs lined up as follows : New York (5). Position. Victorias (4)0j Mills | matches in 1910. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 61 OFFICIAL RULES GOVERNING FLAY FOR THE STANLEY CUP The cup was given, as Lord Stanley said in his letter, "To be held by the champion hockey team of the Dominion." The con- ditions he imposed were : 1. The winners to give bond for the return of the cup in good order when required by the trustees for the purpose of being handed over to any other team who may in turn win. 2. Each winning team to have at their own charge engraved on a silver ring fitted on the cup for the purpose the names of the team and the year won. 3. The cup shall remain a challenge cup, and will not become the property of any team, even if won more than once. 4. In case of any doubt as to the title of any club to claim the position of champions, the cup shall be held or awarded by the trustees as they may think right, their decision being absolute. 5. Should either trustee resign or otherwise drop out, the remaining trustee shall nominate a substitute. In dealing with challenges and matches since 1893, the trustees have observed the following principles : 1. So far as the A. H. A. of C. is concerned, the cup goe^ with the championship each year without the necessity of any special or extra contest. Similarly in any other association. 2. Challengers from outside the A. H. A. of C. are recognized by the trustees only from champion clubs of senior provincial associations and in order received. 3. When a challenge is accepted the trustees desire the two competing clubs to arrange by mutual agreement all terms of the contest themselves, such as a choice of date, of rink, division of the gate money, selection of officials, etc. The trustees do not wish to interfere in any way, shape or form if it can be avoided. 4. Where competing clubs fail to agree, the trustees have observed and will continue to observe as far as practicable the following principles : SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 63 (a) The cup is to be awarded by the result of one match or of best two out of three, as seems fairest as regards other fix- tures. The trustees would be willing, however, if desired, to allow the contest to be decided by a majority of goals scored in two matches only ■(instead of the best two matches in three). (b) Conl;est to take place on ice in the home city, the date and choice of rink to be made or approved by the trustees. (c) The net gate money giv^n by the rink to be equally divided between the competing teams. (d) If the clubs fail to agree on a referee, the trustees to appoint one from outside the competing cities, the two clubs to share the expenses equally. (e) If the clubs fail to agree on other officials, the trustees to authorize the referee to appoint them, the expenses, if any, to be shared equally by the competing clubs. (/) No second challenge recognized in one season from the same hockey association. .^, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARX. CONSTITUTION OF THE AMERICAN AMATEUR HOCKEY LEAGUE ARTICLE I. The name of this organization shall be "The American Amateur Hockey League." ARTICLE II. Its object shall be to improve, foster and perpetuate the game of Hockey in the United States ; protect it from professionalism ; and to promote the cultivation of kindly feeling among the mem- bers of Hockey Clubs. ARTICLE III. Section i. Its officers shall be a President, a Vice-President, a Secretary-Treasurer, and an Executive Committee not exceed- ing four, to be elected annually by ballot, who shall be entitled to vote the same as delegates by virtue of their office. They shall hold office until their successors are appointed. No Club shall be allowed to have more than one representative as an officer or member of the Executive Committee of this League. Sec. 2. Any vacancy occurring in the Executive Committee may be filled at a regular meeting of the said Committee. Sec 3. All officers shall be ex-officio members of the Execu- tive Committee. Sec. 4. Two members of the Executive Committee shall be appointed by the Executive to be a Special Committee, which shall be known as the Governing Committee. oZjo^'e?'Teft ?eSJor''Arl,Sf^'^.?^*"\ ^i^-^'"^^^ <^'^^^-> ^igh School Team. SFALDING's athletic LIliRAKY. 6? ARTICLE IV. Section i. The President shall preside at all meetings of the Association and Executive. He shall have a vote in the "election of officers and the admission of new Clubs, and the casting vote in a tie. He shall call special meetings of this League whenever he deems them necessary, or when requested in writing to do so by any two Clubs in the Association, who shall specify their reasons for desiring such meeting. Sec. 2. The Vice-President shall perform the duties of the President in his absence. Sec. 3- The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep an accurate rec- ord of the proceedings of the League and the Executive Commit- tee, a register of the clubs in the League, and the nara^s of office bearers, and the address of the Club Secretary. He shall conduct all correspondence of the League and the Executive, keep a record of the decisions of the latter on all points of ap- peal, protest and complaint. He shall notify all officers and clubs of their election, issue all notices of meetings, keep a correct account of moneys received and disbursed by him, and report to the League. He shall bank all funds in trust. Sec. 4. The Executive Committee shall view and decide upon all business submitted to them and shall generally manage the Association; provided, however, that nothing herein contained shall give the Executive Committee jurisdiction over matters coming within the scope of the Governing Committee, unless same come before the Executive Committee in appeal. Sec. 5. The Governing Committee shall hear all appeals, pro- tests and complaints, and decide all questions, arising during the championship season, relative to the eligibility of players, dis- putes between contesting clubs or teams, .appeals -against" rulings of match officers or otherwise, and generally take full charge, control and management of the championship games and all club members of this League. ARTICLE V. Section t. The convention shall be composed of two dele- ' . SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 69 gates from the several Amateur Hockey Clubs in the United States, which have been duly admitted to membership, each delegate shall have one vote. Sec. 2. Delegates must be in good standing in the Club they represent. Sec. 3. No delegates shall be admitted to the convention unless he shall have filed with the Secretary a certificate of his appoint- ment signed by the President and Secretary of the Club he represents, ARTICLE VI. Section i. Clubs in this League must be composed exclusively of Amateurs. DEFINITION OF AN AMATEUR. Sec. 2. An Amateur is one who has never competed for a money prize or staked bet, or with or against a professional for any prize, or who has never taught, pursued, or assisted in the practice of athletic exercise as a means of obtaining a livelihood ; or who has never entered any competition under a name other than his own. Sec- 3. The Amateur rule of the A, A. U. is adopted by this League and embodied in this Constitution. Sec 4. No club shall be admitted to membership in this League unless it adopts in its Constitution the words or senti- ments in this article. ARTICLE VII. Section i. Any Hockey club desiring to join this League shall send to the Secretary an application for membership, not later than November ist, also as many copies of its Constitution and By-Laws as there are clubs in the League, a list of its officers, and number of members, together with membership fee as pre- scribed in Article VIII. ARTICLE VIII. SfiCTioN I. The annual fee for each club member of this \. Spalding's athllitic library. 71 League shall be $10.00, payable when applications for member- ship in the League is made and at each annual meeting thereafter. Sec. 2. Any club whose fee shall remain unpaid later than January ist in any year shall not be entitled to representation or to vote at any meeting; nor be represented by any team in the Championship series ; and shall be considered to have for- feited all-right to membership in this League. ARTICLE IX. Section i. Any club wishing to make an appeal, protest or complaint to the Governing Committee, must within three days from the time at which the cause of complaint, appeal or protest occurred, submit to the Governing Committee in writing (in du- plicate), a full and detailed account of the matter in appeal, protest or complaint signed by the President and Secretary of the complainant club. All such appeals, protests or complaints shall be accompanied by the 5>worn statements of all witnesses in sup port thereof. Such complaint shall be mailed postage prepaid by registered letter to the Chairman of the Governing CommiucL. who shall within one day of receipt of same, mail one copy there- of in like manner to the Secretary of the club complained against. Within three days of the receipt of any such appeal, protest or complaint, the answer of the responding club must be in the hands of the chairman of the Governing Committee duly signed by the President and Secretary of such club, accompanied also by the sworn statement of all witnesses to be used in reply to such appeal, protest or complaint. A failure to make appeal, protest or complaint, or to answer as hereinbefore provided, shall finally and absolutely debar the defaulting club of a hearing. Sec. 2. The Governing Committee shall at once meet and consider the appeal, protest or complaint and within three days after receipt of reply render its decision in the premises and forthwith notify both clubs by registered letter as above pro- vided. Such decision shall in all cases be final, and without ap- peal, except as hereinafter provided. Sec. 3. Any club wishing to appeal from the decision of the Governing Committee may within three days after receipt of de- SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 73 ision as provided in Section 2 of this article, take appeal to the Executive Committee, in the following manner : The club so desiring to appeal shall at the same time furnish he Secretary of the Association with two copies of its appeal, Totest or complaint (with sworn statements of its witnesses) igned by the President and Secretary of such club, and shall leposit with him the sum of $25.00. Upon these conditions being complied with, the Secretary of he Association shall immediately forward one copy to the club omplained against, which shall within three days make reply such appeal, protest or complaint, and submit sworn state- nents of its witnesses. The Secretary of the Association shall hen call a meeting of the Executive to be held within three lays, stating the object of such meeting. Both clubs shall submit their briefs of evidence at this meet- ling and the decision of the Executive on a two-thirds vote of those present on the hearing of the appeal, protest or complaint shall be final. If the decision be in favor of the complaining club, tl.e deposit of $25 shall forthwith be returned, but if the decision be adverse, the deposit shall be forfeited to the League. Sec. 4. The Executive on motion may direct both clubs to ap- pear with their witnesses for examination orally by the Execu- tive, or any such appeal. ARTICLE X. Section i. The League may suspend or expel any player or any Club for notorious or continued foul play or unfair conduct, or for any persistent infringement of the laws of the game or the rules of the League. Sec. 2. Any player or any Club so suspended may be read- mitted by making an ample official apology, in writing, to the Executive Committee and promising future compliance with the Constitution and By-Laws of the League. ARTICLE XL Section i. The League shall hold its annual Convention on the second Thursday in November, in the City of New York. ^^^^^^Bv^ €« 91 ■^""" 4|isJ -3.- •r: H SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 75 Sec. 2. Clubs shall be notified of time and place of meeting at least two weeks previously. ARTICLE XII. Section i. No amendment or alteration shall be made in any part of the Constitution, except at the annual Convention of the League and by a three-fourths vote of the members present. Notice of and full particulars of any proposed alterations or amendment must be made to the Secretary of the League, in writing, and by him communicated to the Clubs in its member- ship, in writing, at least two weeks before it can be voted upon. When notice of alteration or amendment has been given, as above, both the notice and amendment thereto may be voted upon at the Annual Convention. Sec. 2. Eight delegates shall form a quorum at the Annual Convention. Sec. 3. The League shall have the privilege of limiting the number of Clubs in the League. SPALDINQ'tJ ATHLETIC LIBBABY. 77 AMERICAN AMATEUR HOCKEY LEAGUE LAWS OF HOCKEY. Section i. The game of Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be de- clared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. A hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goaj lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or displaced, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play shall any player who fills this position, lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain a standing posi- tion. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the center and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two 78 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. ends of the forward line. The center position is the one mid- way on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are supposed to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5. A hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the ^lade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharpened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall re- fuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch' thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 76/16 and not more than 79/16 ounces. OFFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires and two timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall be- come the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in other official positions that may occur during a match ; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree; or when the selected officials are absent at the advertised starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the- referee *may remove and replace the official. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 79 DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places. He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front. He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. The time- keepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no penalized player shall return to the ice without the permis- sion of the timekeepers. The timekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, 80 SPALDINQ'fil A'THLBTIO LIBRARY. notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall at half time, notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 13. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minutes between the two periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes' play, should the score be tied the teams shall, change goals, and play shall be resumed at once and continued until a goal has been scored. Should the tie remain unbroken at the expiration of twenty minutes of ex- tra play, the referee shall declare the game a draw. The referee must start each period on schedule time. Sec. 14. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by the referees, and shall begin again when the puck is put in play. No delay of more than five minutes shall be al- lowed. SUBSTITUTES. Sec. 15. Substitutes shall be allowed only in the case of an injury. In the event of any dispute as to the injured player's ability to continue, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee. Should any player be compelled to leave the game during the first half, his side shall be allowed a substitute. Should an injury occur during the balance of the game, the opposing team may either drop a man or allow a substitute in the place of the injured player. A player who has been replaced by a substitute shall not return to further participation in the game. In exhibition or practice matches this rule may be altered by the captains. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. 16. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed 1 that is the direct and immediate result of loafing offside, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall: r I BPALDINQ'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 81 . decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has pass.ed between the goal posts. FACE. Sec. 17. A face shall consist of the referee placing the puck upon the ice on its largest surface between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The referee shall then order the play to begin. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck, he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at the beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec. 18. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck 4nd parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside «hall be considered out of the pla}-, and may not touch the puck himself or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is him- self to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the off- side play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goal-keeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 19. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall interfere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lifting the puck. No player shall use profane or abusive language or conduct himself in an unsportsmanlike manner. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. 82 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. PUCK FOULS. Sec. 20. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal posi-' tion may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 21. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec. 22. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. CHAMPIONSHIP RULES. Section i. All games shall be played under the rules adopted by the American Amateur Hockey League. Sec. 2. The playing season shall be from December i to March 31, both days inclusive. Sec. 3. The championship shall be decided by a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn by one delegate from each Club to the annual convention. The Club winning the greatest number of matches shall be declared the champi.-n. Sec. 4. All championship matches shall be played on rinks arranged for by the Executive Committee of the American Amateur Hockey League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 83 Sec. s. The League shall offer a championship trophy, the winning Club to hold same and to be recognized as the Amateur Champion of the United States. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning Club within seven days after the close of the season. Any Club winning the championship for three years, not necessarily in succession, shall become the permanent ownjr of the trophy. Sec. 6. Any team making default shall forfeit its right to com- pete for the championship and be liable to a fine of $ioo unless good reasons can be shown to the Executive Committee for de- faulting. In case of default by any team all matches which have been scheduled for this team shall be credited as victories to its opponents. This rule shall also be applied in case of ex- pulsion. Sec. 7. In all matches the Governing Committee shall appoint the referee and his assistant unless it has received written notice from either of the two Clubs at least three days before the match that they have agreed on the two officials. Sec. 8. It shall be the duty of the captains of the contesting teams to hand to the referee previous to the start of each match the names of his players written on forms supplied by the Secre- tary of the League. The referee shall fill in the date of the match and the names of contesting Clubs, substitutes used, if any, the score at the end of the match, with names of other officials, the whole to be duly signed by himself and forwarded immediately to the Secretary of the League. Sec. 9. A player must have been an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his Club is located for at least sixty da3^s previous to being eligible to appear in any League match, and must be a bona fide member of the Club he repre- sents at least thirty days before he is eligible to compete in any championship match. No player shall play in any Amateur Hockey League schedule match, who, during the then current season, has played with another Club in a recognized Hockey Association without special permission of the Executive. Sec. id. The Secretary of each Club shall file with the Sec- retary of the American Amateur Hockey League at least thirty 84 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. days prior to opening of the championship season a list of the players of his Club. The Secretary of each Club shall also file with the Secretary of the American Amateur Hockey League the names of any additional players immediately upon their being elected to membership. Sec. II. All matches must be stared at 8.30 p. m., and if for any reason there be any delay in the commencement of a match the Club at fault shall pay to the League as a penalty the sum of $10, unless good reason be given for such delay. The referee is to see that this rule is observed and to notify the League within two days should any breach of it occur. Sec. 12. The puck used in all championship matches must be the official puck of the League. Sec. 13. Goal nets must be approved by the Executive Com- mittee of the League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 85 ONTARIO H. A. RULES 1. The game is played on ice by teams of seven on each side, with a puck made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all .through and three inches in diameter. STICKS. 2. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at any part, and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. They shall consist entirely of wood, with tape binding per- missible. GOAL. 3. A goal is placed in the middle of each goal line, composed of official goal nets supported by two upright posts, four feet in height, placed six feet apart, and at least five feet from the end of the ice. The goal posts shall be firmly fixed. In the event of a goal post or net being displaced or broken, the referee shall blow his whistle, and the game shall not proceed until the post or net is replaced. It shall be the duty of the referee before each match to measure the goals. MATCH. 4. Each side shall have a captain (a member of his team), who, before the match, shall toss for choice of goals. 5. Each side shall play an equal time from each end, a ten minutes' rest being allowed at half time. The duration of cham- pionship matches shall be one hour, exclusive of stoppages. The team scoring the greater number of goals in that time shall be de- clared the winner of the match, subject to the qualifications con- tained in Rules of Competition, No. 15. If at the end of that time the game is a draw, ends shall be changed and the match continued for ten minutes, each side playing five minutes from each end with a rest of five minutes between such five minute ends, and if neither side has then scored a majority of goals, similar periods of ten minutes shall be played in the same way until one side shall have scored a majority of goals. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. TIME-KEEPERS. 6. Two time-keepers shall be appointed, one by each captain, before the commencement of the match, whose duty it shall be to keep an accurate account of the time of each game, deducting time for stoppages in the actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in their time, and the matter shall be at once decided by him. The referee also shall appoint a time-keeper, who shall keep the time of penalized players, and shall direct them to enter the game. The time-keepers shall be under the control of the referee. A gong shall be kept for their use. REFEREE. 7. There shall be only one referee for a match, and in no case shall he belong to either of the competing clubs, and he may be an amateur or a professional. He is to enforce the rules; ad- judicate upon disputes or cases unprovided for by rule; appoint or remove goal umpires ; control the time-keepers ; keep the score, announcing each goal as scored; and at the conclusion of the match declare the result. The puck shall be considered in play until the referee stops the game, which he may do at any time, and which he must do at once when any irregularity of play occurs, by sounding a whistle. His decision shall be final. SCORE. 8. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed be- tween the goal posts from in front and below the tops of the posts. GOAL UMPIRES. 9. There shall be one umpire at each goal ; they shall inform the referee when \h.ft puck has been put into the goal from the front. FACE. 10. The game shall be started and renewed by the referee blowing his whistle or calling "Play" after dropping the puck in the centre of the ice between the sticks of two players, one from SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 87 each team, who. are to face it. After a goal has been" scored the puck shall be faced in like manner in the centre of the ice. OFF-SIDE. 11. A player shall always be on his side of the puck. A player is off-side when he is in front of the puck, or when the puck has been hit, touched or is being run with, by any of his own side behind him (i. e., between himself and the end of the rink near which his goal is placed). A player being off-side is put on-side when the puck has been hit by, or has touched the dress or person of any player of the opposite side, or when one of his own side has run in front of him, either with the puck or having played it when behind him. If a player when off-side plays the puck, or annoys or obstructs an opponent, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the off-side play occurred. A player on the defending side shall not be off-side when he takes a pass from or plays the puck as it bounds off his goal-keeper within a space of three feet out from goal and extending to the side of the rink. KNOCKING-ON. 12. The puck may be stopped with the hand but not carried or held or knocked on by any part of the body. CHARGING, TRIPPING, ETC. 13. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking, cross-checking, or push- ing shall not be allowed. And the referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player who, in the opinion of the referee, has deliberately offended against the above rule. If a player makes any unfair or rough play, or dicputes any de- cision of the referee or uses any foul or abusivft language, the referee may rule him off for the remainder of the game or for such time as he may deem expedient, and no suDstitute shall be allowed. b8 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. 14. When the puck goes off the ice behind the goal line it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice, and there faced. When the puck goes off the ice at the side, it shall be simi- larly faced three yards from the side. GOAL-KEEPER. 15. The goal-keeper must not during play, lie, sit or kneel upon the ice; he may stop the puck with his hands, but shall not throw or hold it. He may wear pads, but must not wear a garment such as would give him undue assistance in keeping goal. The referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player, who, in the opinion of the referee, has offended against this rule. CHANGE OF PLAYERS. 16. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced. Should any player be injured during a match, break his skate, or from any other accident be compelled to leave the ice, the opposite side shall immediately drop a man to equalize the teams and the match proceed, without such players until such time as the player so compelled to leave the ice is ready to return. In event of any dispute, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee. STOPPAGES. 17. Should any match be stopped by the referee by reason of any infringement of any of the rules or because of an accident or change of players, the puck shall be faced again at the spot where it was last played before such infringement, accident 01 change of players shall have occurred. * SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. LAWS ACROSS BORDER CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN PLAY OF THE EASTERN CANADA LEAGUE. Section i. A team shall be compofi'^d of seven players who shall be bona fide members of the clubs they represent. No player shall be allowed to play on more than one team in the same series during a season, except in a case of bona fide change of residence from one city to another at least fifty miles apart. Sec. 2. The game shall be commenced and renewed by a face in the center of the rink. DEFINITION OF A FACE. The puck shall be faced by being placed between the sticks of two opponents, and the referee then calling "play." The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 3. Two half-hours, with an intermission of ten minutes between, will be the time allowed for matches, but no stops of more than fifteen minutes will be allowed. A match will be de- cided by the team winning the greatest number of games dur- ing that time. In case of a tie after playing the specified two half-hours, play will continue until one side secures a game, unless otherwise agreed upon between the captains before the match. Goals shall be changed after each half-hour. Sec. 4. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced, except for reasons of accidents or injury during the game. Sec. 5. In the event of a player being injured or compelled to leave the ice during a match, he may retire from the game for the period of ten minutes playing time, but play must be con- tinued immediately without the teams leaving the ice, the op- posing team dropping a player to equalize. If at the expiration 90 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. oi ten minutes the injured player is unable to resume his position on the ice, his captain may put on a substitute, providing the injury occurred during the first half of the match. If, however, the player was injured during the second half, the opposing captain shall have the option of dropping a man for the balance of the playing time or allowing the injured player's side to put on a substitute. The man dropped to equalize shall return to the ice when the injured player does or when substitute is put on. In the event of a dispute between the captains as to the injured player's fitness to continue the game, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee, and his decision shall be final. An injured player may not resume play after his place has been filled by a substitute, without the coinsent of the opposing team's captain. Sec. 6. Should the game be temporarily stopped by the in- fringement of any of the rules, the captain of the opposite team may claim that the puck be taken back and a face take place where it was last played from before such infringement occurred. Sec. 7. When a player hits the puck, anyone of the same side, who at such moment of hitting is nearer the opponent's goal line is out of play, and may not touch the puck himself or in any way whatever prevent any other player from doing so. until the puck has been played. A player should always be on his own side of the puck. In the event of the puck reboainding off the goal keeper's bod}^ players of his team touching the puck are to be considered on side. Sec. 8. The puck may be stopped but not carried or knocked on by any part of the body, nor shall any player close his hand on, or carry the puck to the ice in his hand. No player shall raise his stick above the shoulder, except in lifting the puck. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking or ■ shinning shall not be allowed, and for any infringement of these rules, the referee or his assistant may rule the offending player off the ice for that match, or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit, but it shall not be necessary to stop the game to en- force this rule. Sec. 9. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 91 the goals it shall be taken by the referee to five >*ards at rig:n<- aiigles from the goal line and there faced. When the puck goes oft the ice at the sides it shall be taken by the referee to five yards at right angles from the boundary line and there faced. Sec. id. The goal keeper must not during play, lie, kneel or sit upon the ice, but must maintain a standing position. Sec. II. Goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed between the goal posts from in front below an imaginary line across the top of posts. Sec. 12. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at any part. Sec. 13. The puck must be made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all through and three inches in diameter. The Spalding hockey puck, the official puck of the League, must be used in all matches. The home club to furnish the referee with a new puck previous to the match. Sec. 14. The captains of the competing teams shall agree upon two timekeepers, one penalty timekeeper, two umpires (one to be stationed behind each goal, which position shall not be changed during a match). In the event of the captains failing to agree on umpires and timekeepers, the referee shall appoint them. Sec. 15. All disputes during the match shall be decided by the referee, and he shall have full control of all players and of- cials from the commencement to finish of matches, inclusive of stops, and his decision shall be final. Sec. 16. All questions as to games shall be settled by the umpires, and their decision shall be final. Sec. 17. In the event of any dispute as to the decision of an umpire or timekeeper the referee shall have power to remove and replace him. Sec. 18. Any player guilty o;f using profane or abusive lan- guage to any officials or other players shall be liable to be ruled off by the referee or his assistant for the match or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit. Sec. 19. The referee shall, previous to the commencement of the match for which he has been duly appointed or agreed upon, obtain from the captains of each of the competing clubs a full I 92 SPALblNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. list of the players of their respective teams, and, if during thdf'i match a substitute is used by either club, the captain of the cluD^ using such substitute shall give to the referee the name of sac substitute player, and same will be inclined in the list of names of said team. The referee shall, before starting a match, see that the neces- sary penalty timekeeper, timekeepers and umpires have been ap- pointed and are in their respective places. In the event of the competing clubs failing to agree upon umpires and timekeepers the referee shall appoint same. The referee shall have full con- trol of all officials and players during the match (including stops), he shall face the puck at the commencement of each j| half and at such other times as may be necessary, he shall also " call off-sides or rule offending players off for such period of playing time as he may see fit, and perform such other duties as may be provided for hereinafter or in the laws of hockey or championship rules. The referee shall order the teams on the ice at the advertised time, and if for any reason there be more than fifteen minutes delay in the commencement of the match, the referee shall state in his report to the Secretary of the Association the cause of the delay, and name the club or clubs if they be at fault. It will be the referee's duty to record the time of the starting and finish- ing of the match, as well as the games scored, mailing to the Secretary of the Association, within three days of date of match, on the forms provided for the purpose, a report of the match in detail, including the names of players penalized, together with the number and length of penalties imposed (this informa- • tion to be obtained from the penalty timekeeper, who shall also keep for the referee a record of the games scored, and, if pos- sible, who by and the time). Should the assistant appointed or agreed upon be made to act at the last minute, or through sickness or accident be un- able to finish the match, the referee shall have power to appoint another in his stead, if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captains of one of the competing teams. Sec 20. The assistant referee will during the period of a SPALDtNG*S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 93 match be under the control of the referee; he shall, however, have full power to stop the game should an offside or foul occur which has escaped- the notice of the referee. He shall also have power to rule off for such time as he may see fit any player committing a foul. He shall also perform such other duties as may be assigned to him by the referee from time to time. If owing to illness or accident, the referee is unable to continue to officiate, the assistant shall perform such duties as devolve upon the referee during the balance of the match, selecting an as- sistant if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captain of one of the competing teams. Sec. 21. The penalty timekeeper shall keep a complete record of the penalties imposed by the referee or his assistant, and shall have control of all players while serving the time of their penal- ties, and any player ruled off shall not return to the ice until the playing time for which he was penalized has expired and then only by permission of the penalty timekeeper, A record of the games scored, who scored by and the time of each shall be recorded by the penalty timekeeper, and this, to- gether with a recmrd of the penalties imposed, shall be handec' the referee at the close of the match. 94 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRAfelT. EASTERN CANADA RULES Section i. The season shall be from the first of January to the tenth of March, both days inclusive. Sec. 2. The championship shall be decided by a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn up by one delegate from each club at the annual convention. The club winning the most matches shall be declared champions. Sec. 3. Unless President is notified jointly by the competing clubs at least four clear days before a match, that a referee and assistant have been agreed upon and have consented to act, the appointments shall be made at a meeting of a committee com- posed of one delegate from each club, to be called three days previous to the date set for each game. In the event of a tie, the President or his representative to have casting vote. Sec. 4. All championship matches shall be played in rinks arranged for by the home club, subject to the approval of the Association. Rink must be at least one hundred and seventy-five feet long by sixty-five feet in widt"h. Goals shall be six feet wide and four feet high, and provided with goal nets, such as approved by the Association. The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 5. The home club shall furnish the referee with a new puck for each match. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the official puck of the league, must be used in all matches. Sec. 6. All matches shall be started at 8.30 P. M., unless other- wise agreed upon by the competing clubs, and if, for any reason, there be more than fifteen minutes' delay in the commencement of a match, the club at fault shall, unless good reasons be given to the President for the delay, pay to the Association as a pen- alty the sum of twenty-five dollars. The referee shall state in his report to the Secretary of the Association if more than fifteen minutes' delay occurred in the commencement of the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 95 match, giving cause of such delay and naming the club at fault. Upon receipt of this information the President shall decide whether or not the club be fined. Sec. 7. Visiting clubs shall be allowed traveling expenses (by the home club) as follows : Between Montreal and Ottawa, eighty-five dollars ; between Montreal and Quebec, one hundred dollars ; between Ottawa and Quebec, one hundred and twenty- I five dollars. Sec. 8. — The Association shall offer a championship trophy, I the winning club to hold same, and be recognized as champions. j The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven I days after the close of the season. Sec. 9. — Any club winning the championship three times shall become absolute owners of the trophy. Sec. 10. Any team making default shall forfeit the right to compete for the championship for that season, no matches played with defaulting clubs shall count. Unless a written notice signed by the President and Secretary of the club be sent to the Secre- taries of the opposing team and Association, five days previous to the match, signifying the club's intention to default, the defaulting club shall pay to the opposing team within thirty days a fine of one hundred dollars. gg SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Constitution of tlie Intercollegiate Hockey League ARTICLE I. The title of this organ-ization shall be "The Intercollegia Hockey League.'' ARiTICLE IL The object of the organization shall be to govern the playingi of the game of ice hockey among its members, to* provide rules therefor, and to arrange annually a series of games for the cham- pionship of the League. ARTICLE III. The League shall consist of ice hockey teams representing Columbia University, Dartmouth College, Harvard University, Princeton University, Yale University, and such others as m-ay be admitted at any annual meeting by a majority vote. (Cornell University admitted November 8, 1909.) ARTICLE IV. (a) The annual meeting shall be held in New York City dur- ing the month of October of each year on a day to be iixed by the Advisory Comrnittee, hereinafter provided for, a majority of the members constituting a quorum. (b) Special meetings may be called by the Advisory Committee whenever in their judgment one is necessary and a special meet- ing must be called by the Secretary upon the written request of any three members of the League. (c) At all meetings each member shall have one vote but may be represented by three delegates. ARTICLE V. (a) At the annual meeting, or thereafter, each member shall; be entitled to designate a representative, preferably a graduate, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 97 to serve on an Advisory Committee, until the following annual meeting. Should the representative so designate fail or cease to serve, another may be designated to take his place. (b) The Advisory Committee shall interpret the playing rules, arrange for playing off any tie in the League Championship and shall decide all questions of dispute which may arise among the members of the League and all other points not covered by the Constitution ; it shall generally do all such things as it may be requested to do by the League. ARTICLE VL (a) Shortly after the annual meeting, the miembers of the Advisory Committee shall meet and elect from their own num- ber a Chairman, a Vice-Chairman and a Secretary-Treasurer. Vacancies shall be filled as they may occur. (b) The Chairman, or in his absence the Vice-Chairman, shall preside at all meetings of the League and of the Advisory Com- mittee. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep a record of all meetings of the League and Advisory Committee, shall notify members of the annual and special meetings and shall keep an account of the funds of the League, reporting whenever called upon to do so. ARfflCLE VIL Annual dues shall be fixed by the Advisory Committee but shall not exceed Ten dollars a year. ARTICLE VIII. Additions and amendments to this Constitution may be made at any annual meeting by a majority vote. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League (Adopted October 30, 1909.) Section i. The game of Intercollegiate Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be oni skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The( team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing^ period shall be declared the winner. RINK. ' Sec. 2. The Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The( imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the: goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side ■ lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and 1 shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet t in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 1 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly • fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or dis- placed, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play shall any player who fills this position lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly ib SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 99 in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall I be known as the left wing, the right wing, the centre and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are intended to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5. A Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. OFFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires and two timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in other official positions that may occur during a match; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree ; or when the selected 100 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. officials are absent at the agreed starting hour. In the event' of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places. He shall see thati the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. He shall begin and suspend play by means of a whistle. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing timie that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front. He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. T2. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 101 111 time, and the referee shall decide the matter. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no pen- alized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the timekeepers. The timekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall, at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 13. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minues between the two periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes' play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and after an intermission of five minutes play shall be resumed for a period of ten minutes. Should the score be tied at the end of this period, play shall be resumed after an intermission of five minutes and continued - until a goal has been scored. The captains of the contesting teams with the consent of the referee, after the regular periods and the first extra period have been played, may agree on another method of playing off a tie score, but in the absence of such agreement and consent, the tie must be played off in accordance with the provisions of this Law. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 14. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by the referees, and shall begin again when the puck is put in play. No delay of more than five minutes shall be allowed. SUBSTITUTES. Sec. 15. Substitutes shall be allowed at any time during a game, but a player who has been replaced by a substitute shall not be allowed to re-enter the game. 102 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. i6. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. A line not more than one-half an inch wide shall be drawn on the ice from the center of one goal post to the center of the other. To effect a score the puck must have completely passed this line. FACE. Sec. 17'. A face is the placing by the referee of the puck upon the ice on its largest surface between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The referee shall then order the play to begin. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at the beginning of each period and aft' r the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec 18. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck himi- self or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is himself to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, tlic puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of iiis team shall be considered on side. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRAFir. IO3 FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 19. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player hall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand, body or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall inter- fere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lift- ing the puck. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. ^^^^ ^^^^^ Sec. 20. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, .however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 21. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec. 22. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. POWERS OF CAPTAINS. Sec. 23. The captains of the opposing teams shall have the power to agree upon any matter not covered in the aforesaid laws. 104 jPALDING'S A.THLBTIO LJBBABT. WHAT TO USE FOR ICE H0CK:EY There is nothing like hav ing things| exactly right. How much more sat- isfied you feel when you realize that no adverse criticism can be passed upon your outfit, and it gives you more confidence while you are play- ing, too. It is this feeling that the player has who uses Spalding goods, and those who appreciate them could not be induced to make a change no matter how great the pressure. Would you jeopardize the chance of winning a game for your team in order to save a paltry amount on a pair of skates or a stick ? Or, if you did, could you ever forgive yourself if they lost because of this economy on your part ? Of course, this is not written to justify you in purchasing an expensive outfit, where one at a more moderate price would answer the purpose, but merely to emphasize the fact that in se- lecting the outfit for any athletic sport, price is to a great extent a secondary consideration. The main point is : are the goods correct and will they give satisfaction ? The stick which is endorsed by the most famous players in the world is the Spalding Championship Hockey Stick No. o. It is made of finest selected Canadian rock elm, and for years past has been used exclusively by the champion teams of Canada. This stick costs 50 cents. This year we have added the Spalding "Autograph" Hockey Sticks to our line. These sticks are SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 105 upHcates of those used by the most famous hockey players. The forward and Defence models cost 75 cents each, while the Goal »r "Built-up" models cost $1.00 each. The Spalding "Regula- iou" stick, No. I, costs 40 cents, while the "Practice" stick, slo. 2, made full size, costs 25 cents. The No. 3 is painted red, s made in boys' size and costs 25 cents. From this assortment he player can select with absolute certainty of satisfaction the ;tick most suitable to his purse. When the subject of skates is discussed, the name which comes nost readily to the lips of old and young is "Peck & Snyder," and here must be good reason for the long-continued popularity of No. Al Championship Pattern, the skates manufactured under this brand. There has never been a time when they were not abreast of the times as to model, and the standard of quality has been maintained throughout even where prices have been reduced. Look no further when the Peck & Snyder Championship No. Ai Skate is shown you, because in this are embraced the good points of all the various models used by the most prominent players in former years— now the bulk of them use this style. The No. Ai Hockey Skate costs $5.00 per No. 5H. pair. In what is known as the Canadian pattern, and which is also to be fastened to the shoe with screws or rivets, there is the No. 5H, full nickeled and buflfed, ribbed runners of three-ply welded steel, carefully hardened and tempered. These cost $3.50 per pair, while the No. 4H, similar in style, but with plain run- ners and with polished and blued tops, cost $2.50 per pair. After these in popularity come the skates with full clamp key fastenings, making it unnecessary for the player to keep a separate pair of 106 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. shoes for hockey. The No. 7H is the best of this style, and is a very handsome skate, full nickel-plated and bufifed, and withi ribbed runners of three-ply welded steel. The No. 7H skates cosll $4.00 per pair, A similar skate, but with plain runners and pol- ished and blued tops, is the No. CH, which costs $3.00 per pair^ while a good quality full nickeled skate, with full clamp fastening^ also, is the No. DH, which costs $2.00 per pair. Surely this range of prices and styles should satisfy the most exacting. An article which should not be lost sight of, not only in playinj the game but also when purchasing th< equipment, is the puck. The Spalding Trade Mark No. 13 puck has been adopted as the OfHcial Puck by the Canadian Ama- teur Hockey League. It is made to con- j I form exactly to the rules and costs 50 cents J", ^ each. The Practice Puck No. 15, costs Puck. ^ , 25 cents each. The Spalding Regulation Hockey Goals, made exactly right, costs $12.00 per pair. They are substantial, and there is no danger of an ac- cident where they are set up, and they conform to the rules in every particular. OFFICIAL RULES FO R ALL ATHLETIC SPORTS. The following' list contains the Group and the Number of the book of Spalding's Athletic Library in which the rules wanted are contained. See front pages of book for com lete list of Spalding's Athletic Library. Event. All-Round Athletic Cham- pionship A. A. U. Athletic Rules A. A. U. Boxing Rules A. A. U. Gymnastic Rules.. A. A. U. Water Polo Rules. A. A. U. Wrestling Rules. . . Archery Badminton Base Ball Indoor Basket Ball, Official Collegiate Women's Water Basket Goal Bat Ball Betting Bowling Boxing — A. A. U., Marquis of Queensbury, London Prize Ring Broadsword (mounted) Caledonian Games Canoeing Children's Games Court Tennis Cricket Croquet Curling Dog Racing Fencing Foot Ball Code of Rules Association (Soccer) English Rugby Canadian Golf Golf -Croquet Hand Ball Hand Polo Hand Tennis Hitch and Kick Hockey Ice Field Garden Lawn Parlor Ring Ontario Hockey Ass'n Indoor Base Ball Intercollegiate A. A. A. A. . I.-C, Gymnastic Ass'n Lacrosse U. S. I.-C. Lacrosse League o, 3 No. o 12 182 12 311 12 311 12 311 12 311 12 311 11 248 11 188 1 1 9 9 7 7 7 312 7 318 12 55 6 188 12 55 12 55 8 8 14 162 12 55 12 55 13 23 11 189 n 194 3 3 11 138 11 14 12 55 14 165 2 2 2 334 2 2a 12 55 2 332 5 5 6 188 11 13 10 188 11 194 12 55 6 304 6 6 6 154 6 188 6 188 6 188 12 55 6 256 9 9 12 307 15 333 11 201 11 337 Event. Lawn Bowls Lawn Games Lawn Tennis Obstacle Races Olympic Game Events — Mar- athon Race, Stone Throw- ing with Impetus, Spear Throwing, HellenicMethod of Throwing Discus. Dis- cus, Greek Sty lef or Youths Pigeon Flying Pin Ball Playground Ball Polo (Equestrian) Polo, Rugby Polo, Water (A. A. U.) Potato Racing Professional Racing, Shef- field Rules Public Schools Athletic League Athletic Rules Girls' Branch ; including Rules for School Games. Push Ball Push Ball, Water Quoits Racquets Revolver Shooting Ring Hockey Roller Polo Roller Skating Rink Roque Rowing Sack Racing Shuffleboard Skating Skittles Snowshoeing Squash Racquets Swimming Tether Tennis Three-Legged Race Volley Ball Wall Scaling Walking Water Polo (American). .... Water Polo (EngHsh) Wicket Polo Wrestling Y. M. C. A. All-Round Test Y. M. C. A. Athletic Rules . . Y. M. C. A. Hand Ball Rules. Y.M.C.A. Pentathlon Rules. Y.M.C.A. Volley Ball Rules. J& sSKUHE SRALDINGtif TRADEMARK GUARAN QUAU SPALDING AUTOGRAPH HOCKEY STIO Having received each season a great number of requests for special hockey sticks similar to thoe we have supplied to the most prominent -players, we* obtained the permission of the following i ^jlayera to supply sticks duplicating their special models exactly, and each bearing the autograph sigi ef the player. The quality, it is needless to say, is the best obtainable, and we feel certain our cust i will appreciate thes6 really superb sticks. Be sure to mention the particular model you desire when ord No. AH. Model Autograph (Forward) Stick Each, 75c. This is a medium-weight forward stick, very fat on the bottom and with a very stiff handle. Strongly endorsed by the Captain of the famous KenoraTeam of Rat Portage. Ont.-, former -Champions of the World. No. AH. W)SaltSR Autograph (Defence) Stick. . Each, 75c. A long-handled defence stick, upright model. This player is very tall and plays the puck very close to himself. <5"*^v5) Autograph (Forward) Sti Each; 75c This is a light-weight forward sti; same as used by a great many of ' most famous players in Canada. Bo^ says: "I have found it to be tone' the best sticks I have ever used." No.AHC.^;^,^^:p,_l* Autograph (Goal) *^* Stil Each, $1.00 This is a Built Up goal stick, made m suggestions of the great goal '^ player, Riley Hem, who says: 'This model of goal stick I con- sider is the best possible model for .any goal tender to use and * highly recommend it." %7^ SPALDING CHAMPIONSHIP HOCKEY SUCKS Made of the finest selected Canadian rock elm. Exclusively used and endorsed by the Ottawa team, of Ottawa; by the Victoria team, of Winnipeg, and the Shamrock team. o£ Montreal, former champions, in addition to the famous Kenora team and many other well-known teams. These sticks will not fray at the bottom where they come in contact with the ice and will retain their shape under all conditions. The very important matter of weight and balance has been carefully considered and the ^Spalding Sticks are much, lighter, yet stronger, than any others on the market. No. Oi Championship Stick, Regular Forward Modd. Ea.,60c. No. O. ChampionshipStick.LongBladeForward-Model." COc. '"••• No. O. Championship Stick, Defence Model. ,., . " 60c. "Knife Blade" TBeveled) Hockeyfiticks. All championship qual- ity, and built with the "Krtife Blade" (Beveled) blade, which ror»»«dTi».»^ is becoming so popular both in Canada and the United States. rh. N No. ears on Puck itself before using. No. 15. The Spalding "Practice" Puck is regula- tion size, and really better than the so-called official pucks turned out by other manufacturers. Each,2^c., Sxtract from Official Rules of the Canadian Amateur Hockey League : J. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the Official Puck of the League, must be used in all match games. JTENTION GIVEN TO IMMUNICATiONS MESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST Of STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER Of THIS BOOK 'P-''«j ifl tftcl /uly 5. 1910. Subject to change without nolKC For Canadian prica see ipeaal Canadian Colalogue. SPALDING LEG, KNEE AND SHIN GUARDS Spalding Hockey Leg and Shin i No. 4. Leg Guards. Leather. Pair, No. 5. Leg Guards. Canvas. No. F. Shin Guards. Canvas. Pair, SI .00*^i(, No. 40. Shin Guards. Leather. Spalding Patent Combined Sliin and Knee Guards (Patent Applied Fob) Made so that it may be worn under stockings. Enthusias- tically approved by the most prominent Hockey players in United States and Canada. No. 6. Extra protection ex- tending down over ankle; special sole leather formed knee protector for goal and defense players. Per pair, S5.00 No. 6X. Special felt padding extending over knee, without extra ankle exten- sion. For forward players. Pr.,$2.50 No. T. Foot and Ankle Protection for Hockey Goal Tenders. Leather, well padded, and with straps to fasten over shoes. . . Per pair, $2.00 Pair, $ I .75 -k $18\ Leg Guards for Goal and D( No. 4G, Leather. Extra long and ! padded. . Per pair, S4. No. 5G. Canvas. Extra long ami Per pair, $3.50 Nos. 1 and 2 are similar to Leg Guards worn by Cricket Players. No. I . A new design. With extra protection for calf and knee. Best white mock buckskin. Per pair, $5.00 No. 9. "Grand Prix "Skeleton style; superior quality tan cape leather. . . . Per pair, $5.00 C No. 4G Nos. Fand40 specially padded. Spalding New Hockey Jerseys We allow two inches for stretch in all our jerseys, aiid sizes are marked accordingly. It is suggested, howe for very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement be ordered to insure a comfort STOCK COLORS PI^^IN COLORS-Wc carry these jerseys in stock In (he (ollowiii|f — — — ^-^— White Navy Blue Black Gray Maroon Caf SPECIAL ORDERS ^^ ''^'' '"rnish withont extra charge, on special orders only, not > in stock in the lollowing colors: Orange Columbia Blue Olive Green Purple Old C Scarlet Peacock Blue Irish Green Yellow Drak Royal Blue Dark Green Pink Seal Brown Other colors than as noted above to order only 25c. each extra. N. B. — We designate three shades which are sometimes called RED. These are Scarlet, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order, Cardinal will be supplied. No. I P. Full fashioned, worsted; solid colors. Each, S4.00 No. 1 2P. Solid colors, worsted. . " 2.50 No. I OPW. Good quality worsted, with solid color sleeve and around body. . " Each, S3.^5 if $33.00 Doz. Spalding Hockey ?ants— Unpadded— Fly Front, Lace Back No. I. White or Black C.-.teen Pah; 9\ .2B ir $12.00 Doz. No. 2. White or Black Satcon "1 .CO * 10.00 " No. 3. White or Black Silesia " .75 * 7.80 " No. 4. White or Black Silesia " .50 * 5.00 " Stripes down sides of any of these pants, per pair extra, 25c. -^ $2.^0 Dozen pairs.. Full Length Tights No. I A. Best worsted, full fashioned, stock colors and sizes. Pair; $4. CO No. 605. Cut worsted, stock colors and sizes. Pair, $2. CO if $21.60 Doz. No.3A. Cotton, full quality. White, Black, Flesh. I .OO -j^ 10.00 " Special Pants for Forwards No. 5B. Made of heavy Brown or White Canvas, hips padded lightly. Very loose fitting Pair, $ I .OO * $9.60 Doz. Spalding Eyeglass Protector for Hockey Made of strong annealed wire, nicely padded, ^ and a thorough protection for eyeglasses or No. 5B Pal. ort. 12. i909"S«>^ spectacles. . . . Each, S2.00 The prices printed in italics opposite items marked with ir will be quoted only on orders for one- more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with ir half I PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST I SEE INSIDE FRONT' OF THIS BOI "Pnca i/i tfftd July 5, 1 9 1 0. SukjaJ toihorig- •...: ~ul nolicc For Canadian prices tee ipeaal Canadian Colalogue. ' ItHtUHE SPALDING TRADEMARK TuTilf =3 SPALDING COAT JERSEYS ^ sizes earned in slocl( reflulariy in all qualities : 28 to 44 inch cliesl. Otlier sizes at an advanced price. We allow two i.nches for Ktretch in all our Jerseys, and sizes are marked accordingly. It is suggested, however, that for very heavy men a size about two inches larg er th an coat measurement be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. The Spalding Coat Jerseys are made of the same worsted yarn from which we manu- facture our better grade Jerseys, Nos. lOP and 12P, and no pains have been spared to turn them out in a well made and attract- ive manner. Plain solid colors (not striped) ; or one solid color body and sleeves with different color solid trim- ming (not striped) on cuffs, collai and front edging. Pearl buttons. '.: Same grade as No. lOP. ti, $3.50 if $36.00 Doz. .^W ||||B||1^^ collar as on regular jerseys. Stock color stripe around body PMPMiiilllll 1 1 llB ■''"'Emffl colors: Navy Blue, Black, Maroon tfs same as No. lUPW. iHINiil ,' ill lift I'fi ^"•' ^^^y- See list above of colors iBach. $2.75 -^ ^m 00 L>oz. 6^111^1 iji I'Tllii' ' ' il'7 P^ supplied on special orders. )PX. Good quality worsted. SS 1 ffllffi WM ^ach, S2 . 7 5 * ^50. 00 Doz. oned ; solid stock color body, CBiKliM ^'"- • 2PX. Worsted, solid color I stock color striped sleeves, ^Ji Mll lill Wlll''''l' 'A 57 body, with striped sleeves, usually 6 lly alternating two inches of Mi ilwIlliHB'K' tf .U H I alternating two inches of same : color as body, with narrow HMiiiiiilll'iM^ ^"^'°'' ^^ body, with narrow stripes es of any other stock color. offiinBSBffi of some other color. Colors same s same as No. lOPW. MHHHWp as No. lOPW. Each, S3. 25 * $33.00 Uoz. Nos^oP)^ndi2PX Each, $2.75 * $30.00 Doz. PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE < / ices printed in italics opposite items marked with * will be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity price§ NOT allowed on items NOT marked with -k AHENTIONGIVENTOl COMMUNICATIONS )DIIE$SEO TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK 'Prices in effect fuly 5, 1910 Suhjecl lo change wilhoul notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Culalogue. sSte THE SPALDING i SpflldinO New and Improved Worsted J^fSC^ FoIIowiiiK sizes carried In stock regularly in all qualities: 28 to 44 Inch chest. Other sizes at an advanced price. We allow two inches, Jar stretch in all our Jerseys, and sizes are marked accordingly. It is SMfljl however, that jor very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement be orde| insure a comfortable ft. ^TAfK ffllARS PLAIN COLORS— We carry la l| jerseys (NOT Nos. I2XB, 6 or 6\) in lollowlng colors: White Black Maroon Navy Bine Gray Cardinal OpCCldl UrOCrS on special orders only, not < slock and NOT supplied in Nos. I2XB. 6 or eX, the lollowing (•)< Orange Dark Green Yell Scarlet Olive Green Seal BrowXi Olive Green Irish Green Pink i« Royal Blue Columbia Blue Peacock Blue M-uriiic ,mf Other colors than as noted above to order only in any fi, u ( tXCEPT Nos. I2XB, 6 and 6X ). 25c. each extra. '^ N. B.^We designate three shades which are soaetimes calM ; These are Scarlet, Cardinal and Maroon. Where RED b sp«q on order, Card.nal will be supplied. No. IP, Full regular made; that is, fashioned or knit to exact sh the machine and then put together by hand, altogether different ' cutting them out of a piece of material and sewing them up on a ma | as are the majority of garments known as Jerseys, Special q' worsted. Solid colors. . Each. $4.00 * $^2.0C\ No. I OP. Worsted.fashioned. Solid colors. 3. CO * $30,061 No. I 2P. Worsted; solid colors. . . " H. BO -k $25.20] No. I 2XB. Boys' Jersey. Worsted. Furnished in sizes 26 to 36 chest measurement only. Solid colors only : White, Navy Blue, Gray and Maroon. No special orders. Each, $2. CO if $21.i SPECIAL NOTICE We will fur nisn any of the above solid] Jerseys (except Nos. 12XB, 6 and 6X), ivith one color body and another > (not striped) collar and cuffs in stock colors only at no extra chargt \ Spalding Cotton Jerseys Na 6. Cotton, good quality, fashioned, roll collar, full length sleeves. Cf 'ors: Black, Navy Blue, Gray and Maroon only Each, S I .CO • $10.80 Doz. No. 6X. Cotton, same as No. 6, but with striped sleeves in following combinations only : Navy with White or Red stripe , Black with Orange or Red stripe; Maroon with White stripe. Each, $ 1 .25 * $13.20 Doz. Woven Letters, Numerals or Designs We weaet into our A«/ grade Jer,ey,. No. IP. LetUn, Numerals and Design, in special colors as desired. Prices quoted on application. Designs submitted. PRICES SUBJECT TO ADVANCE WITHOUT NOTICE extra chargt 1 1 1910 The prices printed in italics opposite items marked xvith * will be quoted only on orders for one-half 1 1 or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on iteTns NOT marked with ir fe- [ PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDIIESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES TOF:'' FOB COMPLETE LIST L,,,, SEE INSIDE FRONT CC''. Of THIS BOQIl. ^ prices in tffect July 5, 1910. Subject la change withoul notice For Canadian firicts see tpedal Canadian Catalogue. 7?i^^^^ THE SRALDINGii:J>)TRADE MARK GUARANTEES QUALITY DING d^^ and Sports SWEATER We allow ton- Inches for ttreteli In il) onr (wealefl. ill^ sizes are marked accordingly. It is suggested, howeveTi that for very heavy men a size about two inches larger thaa coal measarement be ordered to insure a comlortable QL No. WJ. For automobilists, training pur- poses, reducing weight, tramping during cold weather, golfing, shooting, tobogganing, snowshoeing. High collar that may be turned down, changing it into neatest form of button front sweater. Highest quality special heavy weight worsted. Sizes 28 to 44 inches. Carried in stock in Gray only. See list below of colors supplied on special orders. Each, S7.50 * $81.00 Doz. COLORS : supplied in any o( the colors at regular prices. Other order only in any qoality, garment extra. SPECIAL ORDERS in addiUon to stock colors mentioned, we also supply any of the sweaters listed on this page without extra charge, on special orders only, not carried in stock, in any of the following colors : While Maroon Purple Navy Olive Green Black Scarlet Yellow Royal Blue Irish Green Gray Cardinal Orange Columbia Blue Dark Green Drab Pink Old Gold Peacock Blue Seal Brown SPECIAL NOTICE-SoUd color sweaters with one color body and another color (not striped) collar and cuffs fur- nished in any of the colors noted, on special order at no extra charge. Esignate three shades which are sometimes called RED. These are Scarlet, Cardinal, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order.we supply Cardinal Spalding Indoor Exercising Sweater Sweater lity all wool sweater, nade throughout. Standard weight, ighter than No. R. me as No AA.- tS.SO-A $39.00 Doz. SPALDING "HIGHEST QUALITY" SWEATERS Worsted Sweaters. Special quality wool, exceedingly softand pleasant to wear. Full fashioned to body and arms and put together by hand, not simply stitched up on a machine as are the majority of garments sold as regular made goods. All made wiUi 9-inch collars ; Sizes 28 to 44 inches No. AA. The proper style for use after heavy exercise.inducing copious perspira- tion, for reducing weight or getting into condition for athletic contests. Particu- larly suitable also for Foot Ball and Skating. Heaviest sweater made. Carried in stock in White, Navy Blue, Black, Gray, Maroon and Cardinal. See list above of colors supplied on special orders. Each, $8.00 * $8i.00 Doz. No. A. "Intercollegiate." Colors same as No. 'AA. Special weight. Each, $6.00 * $66.00 Doz. No. B. Heavy weight. Colors same as No. AA. Each, $5.00 * $5i.00 Doz. # Spalding Combined Knitted Moiiler and Chest Protector Front View iiwtt^-twt Back View No. M. Special weight; Highest quality worsted. Colors as No.AAsweater.S I .OO PRICES SIBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE The prices printed in italics opposite items marked with * will be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with * For Squash, Racquets, Indoor Tennis and other Athletic Games and exercising indoors. Light weight, soft finish, finest quality worsted. Made from pure imported Shetland wool. Three sizes: Small, to fit from 34 to 36 in. Medium, to fit from 38 to 42 in. Large, to fit from 44 to 46 in. Furnished in Gray or While only. No. IX. Each, S4.00 mENTIONGIVENTOl jOMMUNICATIONS IRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIOE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK •Prfces m effect July 5. 1910. Subject to change xvithoul notice. For Canadian prices xe special Canadian Catalogue. sS^Ke THE SPALDING TRADEMARK Tr Spalding Jacket Sweaters Siies t» lo 44 tochM AtH aetraremat We Mom Im stretch in all oar-sweaters, and sizes are marked i It is suggested, however, that lor very heavy men a two inches larger than coat measurement be ordered coffllortable lit BUTTON FRONT No.VC. Best quality worsted, heavy weight, pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray and White only. See list below , of colors supplied on special orders. ^Each, S6.00 * $66.00 Doz. No. DJ. Fine worsted, standard! weight, pearl buttons, fine knit edging. Carried in stock in Gray and White! only. See list below of colors supplied | on special orders. Each, $5.00 • $5^.00 Doz. WITH POCKETS No. VGP. Best quality worsted, heavy weight, pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray or White only. See -, .,_ -. , list below of colors supplied on special No. VGP ^°g°ndcu«rsu'p'';M:d.!;' decreed In" orders. With pocket on either side and a particularly conveni( jacket sweaters at no extra charge, popular Style for golf players. Each, $6. SO * $69'\ 3JB;, without extra charge, oa special otitis only, not carried in stock, in any oi the lollowingr PINK COLUMBIA BLUE OLrvTE GREEN YELLOW OLD Caj NAVY BLUE PEACOCK BLUE IRISH GREEN SEAL BROWN ROYAL BLUE DARK GREEN PURPLE DRAB Other colors lo order only in any quality 50c. each extra. SPECIAL NOTICE— We will furnish any of the solid color sweaters listed on this oaqe with one color boc, another color (not striped) collar and cuffs in any of the above colors on special ord^r, at no extra charge. Thiit not apply to the Nos. 3J or 3JB Sweaters. WHITE CARDINAL ORANGE MAROON SLACK SCARLET SPAL1>ING SPECIAL JACKET SWEATERS No. CDW. Good quality worsted, ribbed knit. Carried in stock in Gray only. Supplied on special orders in Navy Blue or White only. Trimmed edging and cuffs in colors as noted above on special orders only. Each, $6.00 * $5l,.00 Doz, No. 3J. Standard Vveight, knit, pearl buttons. Cai. stock and supplied only i Gray. l!ach. $3. SO • $3»i Spalding Vest Collar Si^ No. 3JB. Boys' jacket sweater, with pearl buttons; furnished only in sizes from 30 to 36 inches chest measurement. Carried in stock and supplied only in Plain Gray. Each, $3. CO -jir $33.00 Doz. The prices printed in italics opposite items marked with ic will be qiMted only on orders for one-half i more. Quantity prices NOT aUowed on items NOT marked with •*• No. BG. Best quality worsted, good weigl extreme open or low neck. Carried in stock or White only. See list above of colors sup special orders. '£ach, SB.50 ir , PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST Of SEE INSIDE FRONT C OF THIS BOfll I 'PHctt (n tfect July 5,1910. Subject lo changt wilhoul notice. For Canadian prica tte special Canadian Catalogue. IrlJUHE SPALDING (iJDTRADE-MARK ''Sf LETIC TIGHTS AND TRUNKS No 6ED. ent color. No, iF. No eo I . No. 6F. SHIRTS, COLORS AND SIZES, worsted Goods. Best Quality. We carry followniR .oK.r- r^^nhrlv m stock Blue and Maroon, in stock sizes :>liirts, 26 1044 in chest. Tislits. 28 to 42 m waist. Otliir mlui'- .111. 1 si/cs iiiatlc ecial prices Estimates on application. Our No. 600 Line Worsted Goods. FiimishcJ m (.i.i> and U lute, Navy and Black only. Stock si^es Shirts, 26 to 44 m cliest. Tights, 28 to 42 in waist Sanitary Cotton Goods. Colors ite. Navy, Black Maroon and Gray Stock si/es 26 to 44 in. chest . Tights 26 to 42 in wai^t ^ Spalding Sleeveless Shirts No. lE. Best Worsted, full fashioned, stock colors and sizes. Each. S3. OO No. eoO.Cut worsted, stock colors and sizes. Each, $ i .25 * $12.60 Do:. No. 6E. Sanitary Cotton, stock colors and sizes. .50-^ J,. 75 Spalding Striped Sleeveless Shirts No. 6OOS. Cut Worsted, with 6-inch stripe around chest, in following com- binations of colors; Navy with White stripe; Black with Orange stripe; Maroen with White stripe; Red with Black stripe; Royal Blue with White stripe; BLuk with Red stripe; Gray with Cardinal stripe.. Each, $ 1 .50 ^ .$15.00 Do.. No. 6ES. Sanitary Cotton, solid color body, with 6-inch stripe around chest, in same combinations of colors as No. 600S. Each, 75c. •A' -$7.50 Do- Spalding Shirts with Sash Sanitary Cotton, sleeveless, solid color body with sash of differ- Samecombinationsof colors as No. 600S Each, 75c. -^ $7.50Doz. Spalding Quarter Sleeve Shirts Best Worsted, full fashioned.stockcolprs and sizes. Each, $3.00j Cut Worsted, stock colors and sizes Each, $ 1 .50 • $15.00 Do Sanitary Cotton, stock colors and sizes., .50* i.75 Spalding Full Sleeve Shirts No. 3D. Cotton, Flesh. White, Black., Each, $ I .OO • $10.00 Do' Spalding Knee Tights ,«aEm No. IB. Best Worsted, full | fashioned, stock colors and sizes. . Pair, S3 OO No. 604. Ciii Worsted, stock Sicolors and sizes. Pair, S 1 .25 * $12.60 Doz. No. 4B. Sanitary Cotton, stock colors and sizes. Pair, 50c. ir $4.75 Doz. Spalding FuU Length Tights No. I A. Best Worsted, full fashioned, stock colors and sizes. Pair, S4.00 No. 605. Cut Worsted, stock*. sizes. Pair. S2.00 • .$21.60 Doz. Cotton, full quality. White. Black. Pair. SI. OO if $10.00 Doz. Spalding Worsted Trunks No. I . Best Worsted, Black. Maroon and Navy. Pair, S2.00 No. 2. Cut Worsted, N%vy and black. Special colors to order Pair. S I .OO nmaLfflDB.. Spalding Running Pants M ' ."] No. I . White or Black ' , Sateen, fly front, lace back I Pair. S 1 .25 T*r $12.00 Doz. ; No. 2. White or Black ' Sateen, fly front, lace back. ' Pair, S I .OO * $10.00 Doz. No.3. WhiteorBlackSilesia, tlv front, lace back. ^ ' Pair, 75c. -A' $7. SO Doz. No. 4. White, Black or Gny Silesia, flv front, lace back tair, 50c. • $5. GO Doz. Silk Ribbon Stripes down sides of any of these running pants. Per pair, extra, 25c. -Ar $2.40 Doz. Silk Ribbon Stripe around waist on any of these running pants. Pair, extra, 25c. if $2.40 Doz. I Spalding Velvet Trunks No. 3. Fine Velvet. Colors: Black. Navv, Royal Blue. Maroon. Special col ors to order. Pair. S I .OO it $10.00 Do± No. 4. Sateen, Black, White. Pair. 50c. ic .$5.00 Doz. w DING NILE ITS, rS AND JTS No. 65. Sleeveless Shirt, quality of No. 600. Each, S I .OO No.65S. Sleeveless Shirt, quality of No. 600S. " I .25 No.66. Quarter Sleeve Shirt, quality of No. 601. '" 1.25 No.64. Knee Tights, quality of No. 604. ., •■' " 1.15 No.44. Running Pants, quality of No. 4. . Pair, .45 ONLY SIZES SUPPLIED Chest, 26 to 30 inches, Inclusive - Waist, 24 to 26 inches, inclusive. s printed in italics opposite items marked ivith ic xvill be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with ir ■ nENTlONGIVENTOl OMMUNICATIONS IHESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS Boot "Prices ip tfftcl fitly 5, 1910. SutjccI to diange wtthoul notice Fot Canadian priots xe sfiedal Canadian Calalogut, IISe THE SPALDING itrademarkTuaT,! The < \. Each, 75c. if $7.80 Doz. \ Elastic Belt Our elastic foot ball belt stretches with the length of body be attached to jacket and pants, thus forming one continuous suit. By ting the body, the opposing player has less chance of tackling. Allows ■eedom in all positions. No. I. Width 6 inches. . . Each, $l.50_ This style belt is used in our No. VTJ Union Foot Ball Suit. Leather Wrist Supporters No. 50. Grain leather, lined, single strap-and-buckle./ ^-Each, 20c. No. I 00. Solid belt leather, tan or black, single strap-and-buckle. 25c . No. 300. Solid belt leather, tan or black, laced fastening ^}ach, 25c. No. 200. Solid belt leather tan or black, double strap-and-buckle 40c . No. 400. Genuine pigskin, lined, in improved English slitted style. 50^c. Spalding Combination Foot Ball Glove and Wrist Supporter Designed by H. B. Coni- bear. Back of hand pro- tected by a piece of sole leather, and any strain to wrist is avoided by leather strap supporter which forms the upper part of the glove. Made for right or left hand. No. I. Each, $1.25 Mike Murphy "Rub In" Athletic Liniment This preparation is the same as has been used by Mike Murphy, the famous athletic trainer, in con- ditioning the Yale, University of Pennsylvania and other college teams which have been under bis charge. He is famous for the perfect condition in which he brings his athletes into a contest, and the ingredients and proper preparation of his "Rub In" Liniment has been a closely guarded secret. He has finally turned the formula over to A. G. Spalding & Bros, with perfect confidence that the proper materials will always be used in preparing the liniment and that no considerations will induce us to cheapen it in any way. ' Large bottles., "Each, 60c. Small bottles.^ Each, 26o. JTENTION GIVEN TO JMMUNICATIONS IRESSED TO OS A. G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK 'prices ip effect July 5, 1910. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian fttcei tee special Canadian Catalogue. s^SSte THE SPALDING TRADEMARK'S SPALDING TUBULAR STEEL RACING SIL Used b) Champion Skaters Their B Furnished in two lengths of blades, 14^^ and 15% inches. Foot plates arranged to fit small, mediuir '- size shoes. Specify size of shoe worn when ordering, also length of blade required. These skates for use with light racing shoes. Our guarantee will not cover if heavy hockey or skating shoes »j| Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skate. Per pair, $6.00 Some Good Points aboni the Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Sliale Very light weight, all tubular steel construction. Every joint well reinforced, making it the strongest racing skate manufactured. Blades made of chrome nickel steel, hard- ened and drawn, tapered from 1-16 inch at the toe to 1-32 inch at the heel. Toe and heel plates are made of the best, partly hardened steel, left full size, so they can. be cut to fit shoe. lockay Skate fastened Spalding Expert Shoe* No. 337 Spalding "Intercollegiate" Eff Hockey Skate SPECIAL NOTICE— These skates are mad«l naed on Spalding Expert Shoes No. 33T, or* style of shoe made similarly. They Used to good advantage on ordinary street i or with heavy skating shoes made with I * These skates are built especially for expert - players. They represent a distinct advance , manufacture. The model and general features^ I struction have been suggested by some of t ] prominent players on intercollegiate hocke:/i| Runners are ma^e of finest quality chrome nickel steel, highly tem- pered and drawn so as to toughen them and give a razor cutting edge. Toe and heel plates of fine quality cold rolled steel. All highly polished and extra heavy nickel-plated Sizes No. XH. Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skates. . No. 337. Spalding "Expert "IHockey Shoes Skates with Shoes, complete, already attached. Spalding Hockey Skate lO'j. 11. 11% Per pair. $6.01 5.0« 11.0I MADE W ■ ALI MI^UM f- An Impro I Boekey Slot j Canada, I land ol Ei t Si fS ti!^ ^^^^ with special extra quality steel blade, but the top is of aluminum, making the weij I less than the ordinary all-steel hockey skate, but at the same time, takipg nothing away from the ; ^ XT »« and durability. Some of the best hockey players in Canada are imng this style skate. = No. BI. For Men. Sizes : 9%, 10. 10%, 11, 11%. 12 inches. . . . . . Per pair.' S PROMPT mENTION GIVEN ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADORESSED TO US A.G.SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST 01 ,, SEE INSIDE FRONT I ^ OFTHISBflfll^ tricujptffecl July 5. 1910. Sukject to changt mllhoul i Fw Canadian pika tee tfitcial Canadian Calalogue. ;fTfl?JHE SPALDING QUALITY Peck & Snyder's Championship" Hockey Skate A 411 r^- |En^#f ~'>'^' 3K=M«rarr3 ^^H-iTTr -^.^3 Ifi^^^^^^^^^^ ^m ^ ^^nf N-*< , ^m TheSkate that made the GameofHockeyFamous THE BLADES are of the finest quality three-ply razor steel, hand forged and highly tempered. Extra heavy electro -nickel -plated and highly polished through- out. Each pair in box con- taining a piece of Selvyt polishing cloth for keeping skates in perfect condition. W. Made in sizes 9% to 11 hes. . . Perp^ir, $6.00 ML. Ladies'. Like above, but all heel plate and narrow toe te. Sizes 9 to 11 inches. Per pair, $6.00 ECK & SNYDER'S HOCKEY SKATES CANADIAN PATTERN Canadian Hockey Pattern. Finest quality three-ply welded steel runners. Carefully hardened and tempered. No. 5H. Canad No, 5H. Nickeled and buffed, ribbed run- ners. Sizes 9% to 11^ inches. Pair, S3.60 No. 5HL. Ladies'. Nickeled and buffed, ribbed runners, small heel plate and nar- row toe plate. Sizes 8 to 10% inches. Per pair, $3.60 No. 4H. Sizes 9 to 11% inches. " 2.50 I AnENTION GIVEN TO COMMUNICATIONS IDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT GOVEB OF THIS BOOK ^rtc« in tffect luiy 5, 191 0. ^ &»tj w< to ijiangs u/ithoul notice. Fat Canadian prices tee jpedoi Canadian Calatogue, iS«!M(^Wigig = p 1 PECK & SNYDER'S Full Clamp Hockey Skates 'THE full clamp fastening for hockey skates introduced by us some seasons ago has proven efficiency and the wisdom of its adoption through its continued popularity with the great majoi of skaters who prefer flat blade skates for ordinary skating, in addition to those who play hockey,) do not find it convenient to keep a separate pair of shoes particularly for their hockey skates. No. 9H. Full clamp fastening. Extra heavy nickel-plated and specially polished throughout. Blades of absolutely best quality three-ply welded steel, highly tempered, with ribbed flange at bot- tom. Made in both men's and women's models. Each pair in paper box, neatly wrapped. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. . . Per pair, 95. OO No. 9HL. Ladies ', Like above, but small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 9 to 11 inches. .... Per pair, 95.00 No. 7H. Full clamp fastening. Nickel-plated throughout, not polished; ribbed runners; best quality steel. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. Per pair, S4.00 o ' ~ 9H No. CH. Full clamp fastenings. Highly t<^ pered and hardened three-ply welded steel r ' ners. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. Per pair, S3.« No. CHL. Ladies'. Same as No. CH, but srii) heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes : inches Per pair, S3.t No. DH. Full clamp fastenings. Runners of b «cast steel, hardened. Entire skate full plated. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. Per pair, $2.« No. EH. Full clamp fastenmgs. Flat runm, of best cold rolled steel. Entire skate nick:* plated. Sizes 9*2 to 12 inches. Per pair, S 1 .1 No. EHL. Ladies'. Same as No. EH, but w small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizet to la's inches. ... Per pair. $ 1 .1. Peck & Snyder's Special Ladies'" Hockey Skat No. CHLS. Made with key clamp fasten!) in front, and best quality leather heel stra Flat runners of highly tempered and har ened three-ply welded steel. Sizes 8 to 1( ' inches. Per pair, $3.0, PROMPT inmiON GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS AODBtSSED TO UJ A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. 1 FOR COMPLETE LIST OF r SEE INSIDE FRONT C01 OF TlilS BOOK 'Pfiqes- w efaljuy $; 1 91 0, Suijstf to changt u)ilhou( notice. ' For Canadian prica tee special Canadian Catqlosuu KTHE SPALDING TRADE-MARK ^ZiTrf eek & Snyder's Rink Skates " FOR FANCY SKATING ======= runners of these best grade rink skates are absolutely the hardest made and have curved bottoms, as adopted by the leading skating clubs of this country. FULL CLAMP n 6*- Full clamp fastenmg'^, highly pered and concaved, three-ply v^^elded 1 ribbed runners. All parts heavily ;el-plated and polished. Specially de- ^ed for fancy skating. Sizes 9'^ to 12 les. . . , Per pair, $5*00 6L. Ladies'. Same as No. 16, but .1 small heel plate and narrow toe plate. 8 to 10% inches. . Pair, $5.00 n CANADIAN PATTERN No. 18. Foot plates same as our Canadian pattern hockey skates ; highly polished, nickel-plated and buffed throughout. Three-ply welded steel ribbed runners, well tempered and concaved. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. . , Per pair, $5.00 No. 18L. Ladies'. Same as No. 18, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 8 to 10% inches. . Pair, $5.00 eck & Snyder's Full Clamp Rink Skates 15, Nickel-plated throughout, full clamp fastenings, runners of welded steel, ardened and tempered. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. . • . . Per pair, $3.00 15L. Ladies'. Same as No. 15, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate, izes 8 to 10% inches ......... Per pair, $3.00 14. Nickel-plated, tull clamp fastenings, runners of cast steel, hardened beveled dges. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. . . . . , . Per pair,. $1.50 12. Rocker runners, all steel, full clamp fastenings. Sizes 9% to 12 in. " 1.00 'T MENTION GIVEN TO I f COMMUNICATIONS lODHESSEOTOUS A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COYER OF THIS BOOK "Prices ip tfftct Julii 5, 1910. Subject to thonge without notice. For Canadian firicu see special Canadiao-Calqlogue. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE THE SPALDIN6(g)JTRADEMARK GUARA^ QUAli PECK & SNYDER'S ICE SKATES Ladies' Skates No. 4-OL. Welded steel runners, tempered, nickel- plated throughout;_russet'straps. Each pair in paper box. Sizes 8 to 11 inches. Per pair, S3. 00 No. I L, Best cast steel runners, hardened. All parts nickel-plated ; russet leather sh-aps. _ In paper box. ULii^i iSLia^ia, 111 fJ^K Sizes 8 to 11 inches. Per pair, S2.25 No. OOL. Nickel-plated. Runners and other parts cf best steel, nicely finished; russet straps. Sizes 8 to 11 inches. Each pair in paper box. Pair, S 1 .60 No. OL. Bright finish. Pa- per wrapped. Pair, $1.26 No. 19. Made with steel runners and foot plates; russet leather straps. Each pair paper wrapped, "to 11 inches. . . Per pair, 90c. Sizes ', \ No. 4-0. Welded tool steel runners, harder, tempered, nickel-plated throughout. Each paper box. Sizes 8 to 12 inches^ -Per pair, 8 , No. OO. Runners of best cold rolled steel..' tire skate full nickel-plated. Each pair in ' box. Sizes 8 to 12 inches. . Per pair, Si No, 0. Runners of best cold rolled steel. I skate bright finish. Each pair paper wra-' Sizes 8 to 12 inches. . . Per pair, Double Runner Sled Skates No. DR. By using these skates it'j9 possib take a child on the ice without fear of in Th^ runners are so wide apart that any chih stand on them easily,^ They are adjustable fr| to 9% inches and furnished with straps comj i Each pair in paper box. , . Per pair, 6* PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADORESSED TO US A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF Si; SEE INSIDE FRONT COV: OF THIS BOOK ■ T'^^f'j ff'^ /"^ 5' ' ^^ ,. SuhM lo ihange without noliot. Foi Canadian ptiou w ifKixJ Canadian Colalogut. Spalding kating Shoes y properly made skating shoes, designed and mannfac- In the Spalding Factory after suggestions of champion skaters and hockey players. ^g " Special" SkatiiigSIioe 5. Best quality calfskin, extra low at toe. Specially rCed inside, obviating neces- strap on shoe itself, but g support where most re- d; full heel, leather lined Per pair, S5.00 lalding Skating Slioe (2. Made of good quality Ikin, machine sewed. Has 1 1 support over ankle outside; 'heel. A substantial shoe in [y detail, Per pair, $3. BO Spalding "Expert" Racing Shoe No. 337. Fine quality material throughout and extremely light in weight; reinforced inside over ankles; leather very soft and easy; lacing extremely far down ; very light sole. Per pair, S5.00 Spalding Racing Sti02 No. S38. A racing shoe at a mod- erate price. Made after the de- sign of our higher priced shoes, only differing in quality of ma- terial and construction. Light weight and substantially made. Per pair, $3.60 Spalding Ladies* Slcating Shoes These shoes are built as athletic shoes should be, and the principles entering into their construction are the same as those which have made our men's skating shoes so popular. They will be found ab- solutely first-class in material, workmanship and design, are trim and neat in appearance and will give excellent satisfaction. No. 350. Ladies' Skating Shoe. Fine quality leather, nice and pli- able. Reinforced with webbing inside to give support over ankle and at top; lacing extremely far down; full heel; neat toe, medium broad; good oak sole. Pair,S6.00 No. 330. Ladies' Skating Shoe. Good quality, black leather. Full heel, laces down to toe, and has supporting strap-ahd-buckle over ankle. Per pair, 53. 50 PT ATTENTION GIVEN TO r COMMUNICATIONS :AD|IBESSEDTOUS A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK "PrfOJ il\ tfftcS fu[y 5. 1910 Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Colalogue, jj^E^^^^m Spalding Skate SMndri( It Is often the trifling, insignificant item In an atliletlc equipment that makes all the difference between the success or failure, the comfort or otherwise, of an athlete. ==^= With a COMPIXmE Spalding outfit you suffer no regrets. = Spalding Patent perfection Ankle Brai Patented dec. 21, 1909 No. p. Can be used on any skate. This brace i. is complete in itself, the metal foot being sim- ply riveted to the heel plate of the skate and the strap fastened around the ankle to make it the most perfect and satisfactory skate ankle brace ever produced. Strongly made of steel, nickel-plated and furnished with good quality leather straps. . . Per pair, SI. 50 Scabbards for Blades of Racing Skates No. RS. Leather Scabbards to protect blades of racing skates. Made in three sizes to fit 14, 15 and 16-inch blades. Mention size when ordering. . . . Per pair, 75c. Scabbards for Blades of Hockey Skates No. HS. Made of special quality leather, well reinforced. Will fit any size regular style hockey skates. Slot in end for inserting skate strap for carrying, . Per pair, $ I .GO Spalding Skate Bags No. t . Double Pocket, Cloth, No. 2. Double Pocket, Felt. No. 4. Felt, with draw strings. Made with division in center that skates will not rub. Each, 50c. Spalding Ice Skate Key No. SK. Nickel-plated, all steel, well made. Will fit any of the Peck & Snyder key clamp ice skates. Each, lOc. Spalding Spring Catch Skate Strap ji Requires no holes in' strap, and is qui< permanently fastened at any point and - quickly released. i No. S8. Superior quality leather, Russet; Black, 28-inch. . Per pair, 3C No. SO. Superior quality leather. Russet Black, 20-inch. . . Per pair, No. 28. Ordinary quality. Russet or 28-inch. . . . Per pair, 21 No. 20. Ordinary quality. Russet or BlaJ 20-inch. . . . Per pair, 2( Spalding Skate Straps No. Be. Superior quality leather, Black, 28-inch. . Pei No. BO. Superior quality Black, 20-inch. . No. 1 3. Ordinary quality. set or Black. 28-inch. No. 1 I . Ordinary quality. set or Black, 20-inch. Russet ir, 30' leather. Russet Per pair, 26i Plain Buckle. Ri; Per pair, I 5< Plain Buckle, Ru Per pair, ( 0« PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF SI «EE INSIDE FRONT COV OF THIS BOOK _ •P/icw in effect July 5.1910. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian pricei see ifiecial Canadian Catalogue. a THE SPALDING ^SUfS^i TT^^c^ -M ~:^^^k^^- tg^ tiding Long Distance Running Sltoes rQBRRTHON f"M€fe€t^tf»V'- High cut. Corrugated tap rub- and cushioned leather heel; spe- ;ty black leather uppers. Full fin- (ide so as not to hurt the feet in Hand sewed. Pair, $5.00 Made to stand up under unusual conditions — bad roads, rough, hilly and uneven, macadam, dirt, asphalt, brick or wood. Made after sug- gestions of men who are competing in long dis- tance races continually under every conceiv- able condition. No. MO No. MO. Low cut. Corrugated tap rub* ber sole and cushioned leather heel; spe- cial quality black leather uppers. Full fin- ished inside so as not to hurt the feet in alongrace. Hand sewed Pair, $5.00 :o win. The same models as used by many of the competitors in the famous V'-JMcceaiU^" races 908 Olympic Games, London, and in the most important distance races in this country since then. Spalding Cross Country, Jumping and Hurdling Shoes Cross Country Shoe, finest leather; low broad heel, shank, hand sewed, six in sole; with or without heel Per pair, S60OO No. I 4H. Jumping and Hurdling Shoe; fine Kangaroo leather, hand- made, specially stiffened sole; spikes inheelplacedaccordingtolatest ideas to assist jumper. Pair. $6. DO No. I 4J. Calfskin Jumping Shoe, partly machine-made; low broad heel; spikes correctly placed. Satis- factory quality and very durable. Per pair. $4.60 nENTION GIVEN TO MMUNICATIONS BESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER Of THIS BOOH 'Prices in t^ecl July 5, 1910 Subjecl to change without notice. For Canadian prices xe ipecial Canadian Calatogu *ErTHE SPALDING SUBSTITUTE TRADEMARK Tau] Spalding Running Shoes No. 2-0. This Running Shoe is made of the finest Kangaroo leather; extreme- ly light and glove fitting. Best English steel spikes firmly riveted on. Per pair, $6.00 No. lO. Finest Calfskin Running Shoe; lightweight, hand made, six spikes. Per pair, $5.00 No. I I T. Calfskin, machine made,' solid leather tap sole holds spikes firmly in place. Per pair, S4.00 No: I I . Calfskin, machine made Per pair. $3.00 Juvenile Running Shoes No. 1 2. Outdoor Leather Running Shoes, complete with spikes, in sizes 12 to 5 only. Per pair, S2.50 No. I I 5. Indoor Leather Running Shoes, without spikes, in boys' sizes, 12 to 5 inclusive, only Pair.«2»00 Indoor Running Shoes With or Without Spiites No. III. Fine leather, rub- ber tipped sole, with spikes. Per pair, $4. CO No 112. Leather shoe, special corrugated rubber tap sole, no spikes. $3.O0 No. 114. Leather shoe, rub- ber tipped, no spikes. S2. 50 Indoor "* Jumping Slioes With or Without Spikes No. 2 I O. Hand made, best leather, rubber soles.S5.00 tNo.N. Thick wood, shaped and perforated to accomodate snikes Ppr twiir BOo Spalding special Grips With Elastic No. I. Athletic Grips Selected cork, shaped to fit hollow of hand. Pair, I 6o. Ci&amois Pushers No. 5. Fine chamois skin and used with running, walking, jumping and other athletic shoes. Pair, 25c. PROMPT AmNTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ^ ADOBESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST 01 SEE INSIDE FRONT I i OFTHISBflfll' 'Piicti in t£tct July 5, 1910. Sukjecl lo change wUhout notice. Fw Canadian pricci let tfiecial Canadian Catalogue. THE SPALDING Spalding Olympic Walking Shoe ding's Olympic Walking Shoes are ) from designs submitted by ipion walkers, amateur and jssional, and embody le points necessary for I and comfort.- They II hand made, of finest ^aroo leather, by ex- who make nothing but athletic shoes, and come No. 14W LLDiNG Olympic Walking Shoe Per pair, $5.00 ITTENTION GIVEN TO OMMUNICATIONS IBESSEO TO yS A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK ^rtW In tSvit fulif 5, 1910, Subjttl Iq changt wilhoul notice. For CanadiQn prieei Mt >f \ 1 7* I I ^1^ «Jm|- \^^^^ ■■"'■'■■^'^^is^^fella JOHN FLANAGAN ' 16-lh Hammer Thrower ig Rubber Ck>vered Indoor Shot Patented December 19. 1905) ^ This shot is made according to scien- ^ tific principles, with a rubber cover H that is perfectly round; gives a fine V grip, and has the proper resiliency r when it comes in contact with the floor; will wear longer than the ordi- ier covered, and in addition there is no pos- at the lead dust will sift out, therefore itjs always full weight. 5-lb: S I 2. CO I No. Q. 12-lb. S I O.OO Spalding Indoor Shot • improved leather cover, lose weight even when used constantly. 12-lb. Each, S7.00 L6-lb. " 7.50 ilation Shot, Lead, and Iron Guaranteed Correct in Weight k No. I 6LS. 16-lb., lead. Each,S3.SO ■ No. I 2LS. 12-lb., lead. 3. GO W No. I 6 IS. 16-lb., iron. 1.75 W No. I 2 IS. 12-lb., iron. 1 .50 With Ball Bearing Swivel The Spalding Championship Ball Bearing Hammer, originally designed by John Flanagan, has been highly endorsed only after repeated trials in cham- pionship events. The benefits of the ball bearing construction will be quickly appreciated by all ham- mer throwers. Guaranteed absolutely j:orrect in weight. No. I 2FB. 12-lb., with sole leather case. S7.50 No. I 2F. 12-lb., without sole leather case. 5.50 No. I 6FB. 16-lb. , with sole leather case. 7 . 50 No. I 6F. 16-lb. , without sole leather case. 5. 60 Spalding Regulation Hammer With Wire Handle Correct In Wel£jit No. I2LH. 12-lb., lead, practice $4. SO No. I 6LH. 16-lb., lead, regulation. 5. DO Iron No. I 2 IH. 12-lb., iron, practice 3.50 No I6IH. 16-lb., iron, regulation. 3.75 | Extra Wire Handles No. FH. For above hammers, improved ' design, large grip, heavy wire. Each, 75c. Spalding Regulation 56-lb. Weight Made after model sub- mitted by Champion J. S. Mitchel, and endorsed by all weight throwers. Packed in box and guar- anteed correct in weight and in exact accordance with rules of A. A. U. No. 2. Lead 56-lb. weights Complete, $ I 2. CO PALDING JUVENILE ATHLETIC SHOT AND HAMMERS ng Juvenile Athletic Shot and Hammers are. made according to oflScial regulations. Weights are guaranteed accurate and records made with these implements will be recognized. JUVENILE HAMMER No. 8IH. 8-lb., Iron, Juvenile Hammer. Each, $2.60 JUVENIUEI SHOT * 6. 8-lb., Leather Covered Shot, for indoor, schoolyard and playground use. Each, $8. CO 6. 5-lb., Leather Covered Shot, for indoor, schoolyard and playground use. "- 5.00 No. 8 IS. 8-lb., Solid Iron Shot, not covered. Each, $ 1 .25 No. 5 IS. 5-lb., Solid Iron Shot, not covered, " i .OO rENTIONGIVENTOl «MUNICATIONS ESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES )R COMPLETE LIST OF STP1ES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS fricu {/) tfect /uly 5, 1910. §ubjecl to ihgnge wilhoul no/ice. For Cana dian ptiou see ifccial Canadian Cq/a/qgay St!1?e THE SPALDING TRADE-MARK %a5 Spalding Olympic Discus Since the introduction of Discus Throw ing. which was revived at the Olympic i Games, at Athens, in 1896, and which ^ was one of the principal features at the recent games held there, the Spalding Discus has been recognized as the official Discus, and is used in all com- petitions because it conforms exactly to the official rules in every respect, and is exactly the same as used at Athens, 1906, and London, 1908. Packed in sealed box, and guaranteed absolutely correct Pi-ice, $5.00 Spalding Youths' Dis Officially adopted by the Pi Schools Athletic Leagu To satisfy the demand Discus that will be suital the use of the more >i athletes, we have put out cial Discus smaller in t-i, lighter in weight than the rn : Official size. The Youths' D » is made in accordance with i cial specifications. Price, $4 , la Spalding Vaulting Standards These Standards are made carefully and well. There is nothing flimsy about them, and the measurements are clearly and correctly marked, so as to avoid any misunderstanding ordispute. No. I 09. Wooden uprights, graduated in half inches, ad- justable to 13 feet. Complete, S 1 5.00 No. III. Wooden uprights, inch graduations, 7 feet high. Complete, $9. CO No. 112 Cross Bars. Hickory Dozen, «3 OO Spalding Official Javelins -^ No. 53. Swedish model, correct in length, weight, etc., proper balance. Steel shod. . . Each, $5 Spalding Vaulting Poles— Selected Spruce, -^^ The greatest care has been exercised in making these pol^ selecting the spruce only the most perfect and thoroughly se pieces have been used. All of this gees to make them what wel thev are, the only poles really fit and safe for an athlete to i No I OS. 14 ft. long. Ea.,«e.OO No. I 04. 16 ft. long. Ea.,»J We guarantee all of our wood vaulting poles to be per material and workmanship, but we do not guarantee against while in use, as we have found in our experience that they are '■ caused by improper use or abuse. Spalding Bamboo Vaulting Poles mmsmm mmmmmim 31^2 Owing lo dilloronces in rlimatic conditions it is impossible to krrp Bamboo Van Poles from cracking. These cracks or season checks do .not appreciably detract the merits of the poles, although they may be wide open and extend through sever sections on one side. All ol our tests would seem lo prove thai poles with seait checks may be acrepted as sale and durable. Very frequently such splits or seair checks can be entirely closed by placing the pole in a damp place lor a day or > Tape wound at short intervals. Thoroughly tested before leaii our factory. Fitted with special spike. No. lOBV. 10 feet long. No. I2BV 12 feet long a>4.oo 4.50 Competitors' Numbers Printed on Heavy Manila Paper or Strong Linen No- 1 . 1 to 50. No. 2. 1 to 75. No. 3. 1 to 100. No. 4 1 to 150 No. 5. 1 to 200. No. 6. 1 to 250 MANIL.\ ■ Per Set Jg .25 .38 .SO .75 I.OO 1.25 LIN'EM Per Set $i .50 2.25 3.00 4.50 6.00 7.50 No. I 4BV, 14 feet long. S5i No. I 6BV. 16 feet long 6if ' For larger meets we supply Competitors* Ji Numbers on Manila paper only in sets as follof No. PER StCT I No. $1 .50 16. 2. CO I 7. 2.50 I 18. $3. CO 3.50 1 to 300. 1 to 400. 1 to 500. 1 to 600. 1 to 701 1 to 800. Ito 900. 1 to 1000. Ito 1100. sej 4. GO 4.50 5.00 5.50 1 to 1205. 1 to 1300. 6. 1 to 1400. . 7. 19. 1 to 1500. 7. 1 to 1600. 8. 1 to 1700. , 8. 1 to 1800. ■ 9. 1 to 1900 9. 1 to 2000. I O. PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSEO TO US A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF ^ SEE INSIDE FRONT C OF THIS BOD< 'Priau in tfftcl Julif 5, i9tO. SukjctJ to changt viiihaut ootm For Canadian ptiaa set vtiial Canadian Catalagu Ke THE SPALDING TRADEMARK '^'lilS^ f lifting Athletic Paraphernalia Foster's Patent Safety Hurdle WZ~l X hA e is 2 feet 6 inches high, with a swinging wooden feet high, the swinging joint being 6 inches from and 18 inches from the other. With the short measures 2 feet 6 inches from the ground, and long side up, 3 feet 6 inches. The hurdle can be from one height to the other in a few seconds, ild firmly in either position by s. thumb-screw. Single Hurdle, $3. SO Regulation size; Each, $3.00 Spalding 7-Foot Circle The discus, shot and weights are thrown from the 7-foot circle. Made of one piece band iron with bolted bircle painted white. Each, $ I O.OO 'ng Take-off Board -off Board is used for the road jump, and is a nec- junct to the athletic field ted white. ■ Ing Toe Board or Stop Board Used when putting the 16-lb. shot, throwing weights and discus, and is curved on the arc of a 7-foot cirpTe. Toe Board, regulation size, pamted substantially made. Each, $3.5 O ling Referees' Whistles Nickel-plated, heavy metal The most satisfactory lest of any. Each, 75c. No. I. Nickel- plated whistle, well made. Each. 26c. No. 9. Very reli- able. Popular de- j , sign. Each, 25c No. 2. Spalding Lanes for Sprint Races Dly in this set sufficient stakes and cord to lay out )-yard lanes. Stakes are ith pointed end and suf-i f strong, so that they can ren into hard ground. ^3 Per set, $ I 6.00 ^- ding Official SacKs for Sack Races (REINFORCED) Spalding Official Sacks for Sack Races are made in two sizes, for men and boys. They are all strongly reinforced, will wear for a great length of time, and by their construction it is practically impos- sible for racers to work their feet free. These sacks are made in exact accordance with official regulations. S. Men's Sack, reinforced, 3 ft. wide. $ 1 . 60 S. Boys' Sack, reinforced, 2% ft. wide. I .OO roster's Safety Hurdle at the World's Fair, St. Leui Patent Steel Tape Chain on Patent Qedric Reel For MeasarlnB DUUncc* In Athletic Competitions Made of superior steel about % inch The reel allows the entire tape open to dry and can be reeled and un- reeled as easily as tapes in cases. Especially adapted to lay oflf 24. -92 courses and long measurements. No. I B. 100 feet long. , Each, $5.00 No. I IB. 200 feet long. . " 7.50 Patent "Angle" Steel Measuring Tape Especially adapted for laying off base ball diam6nds, tennis courts and all kinds of athletic fields, both outdoors and indoors. Right angles accurately determined; alsoj equally good for straight or any kind of measuring. Enclosed in hard leather case, flush handles. All mountings nickel-plated. No. A. 50 feet long, % inch wide, Each, $4.00 No. B. 100 feet long, % inch wide. " 6^76 Spalding Stop Watch Stem winder, nickel-plated case, porcelain dial, registered to 60 seconds by 1-5 sec- onds, fly back engaging and disengaging mechanism. . "Each, $7.50 Spalding Starter's Pistol 32 caliber, two inch barrel, patent ejecting device. , Each, S6.00 Official Harness for Three-Legged Racing Made according to official rules. Com- plete set of straps for fastening men and with extra straps for keeping fastenings at re- quired height inj long distances races. No. I. OflScial Harness for Three-tegged Racing. Per set, 82. BO ^ r AHENTION GIVEN TO COMMUNICATIONS iODBESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK "Plica in tffect /u(y 5, 1910. Subjecl to thange wilhoul notice. For Canadian prica xe ipeciJI Canadian Calqkgue, SmE THE SPALDING TRADEMARK The Spalding Official Basket B i THE ONL|ri OFFICIAL I >' BASKET BAB WE GUAR ANT] 7 this ball to be perfect ii terial and workmar correct in shape ar when inspected at v tory. If any defect covered during the fir^ in which it is tised, orl the first day's practice ,, and, if returned at once, will replace same voider guarantee. We do not gi , antee against ordina't-y.w nor against defect in shaft ■ size that is not discovered ' mediately after the first d use. Owing to the superb qua i of our No. M Basket Ball, I ^ customers have grown to i pecta sea.son's use of oneli^ and at times make unrecu able claims under our antee, which we tvill A. G. SPALDING OFFICIALLY ADOPTED AND STANDARD. The cover is made in four sections, %i capless ends, and of the finest and most carefully selected pebble grain English leatl We take the entire output of this superior grade of leather from the English tanners, in the Official Basket Ball use the choicest parts of each hide. Extra heavy bladder m especially for this ball of extra quality pure Para rubber (not compounded). Each packed complete, in sealed box, with rawhide lace and lacing needle, and guaranteed ] feet in every detail. To provide that all official contests may be held under absolutely fair and unif< conditions, it is stipulated that this ball must be used in all match games of either men's or women's tA No. M. Spalding <« Official*' Basket Bail. Each, $6.00 Extract from Men's Official Rule Book Rule II -Ball. Sec. 3. The ball made by A. G. Spald- ing & Bros, shall be the official ball. Official balls will be stamped as here with , and will be in sealed boxes. Sec. 4. The official ball must be used in all match games. Extract from Officiat Collegiate Rule Book The Spalding Official Basket Ball No. M is the official ball of the Intercollegi- ate Basket Ball Associa- tion, and must be used in all match games. Extract from Women's Official Rvi Rule II— Ball. Sec. 3. The ball made by A. G.li ing & Bros shall be the officia Official balls will be ^^, stamped as herewith, ^^'^ and will be in sealed boxes. Sec. 4. The official ball mu I used in all match games. PROMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADORESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OK SEE INSIDE FRONT! OF THIS BOOl 'Pricei in tffcci July 5, 1910. Subject to change wilhoul notice. For Canadian prica see apecial Canadian Catalogue. THE SPALDING TRADEMARK TuAurf •AIDING Special No. E E. Fine imported pebble grain leather case. Extra ^ guaranteed bladder, of pure Para rubber (not com- ied). Each- ball complete in sealed box, with rawhide and lacing needle. This ball is superior to any other 3t our No. M. Official Ball . Each, $5.0O SISKET BALL, mm Spalding Practice "No. 18" 1^^^^ No. 1 8. Good "*-, ^^ ^l quality leather ■ ;^^^^^PB cover. Each ball ■MSS^SSU complete in box with pure Para rubber (not com- pounded) blad- der.guaranteed; ace and lacing needle. Each, $3.00 Spalding Canvas Holder For carrying an inflated basket eful for teams to carry properly in- of their own. Each, S \ .OO Spalding Bladders, Guaranteed Quality All rubber bladders bearing our Trade-Mark are made of pure Para rubber (not compounded), and are guaranteed perfect in material and workmanship. Note special explanation of guarantee on tag attached to each bladder. No. OM. For Nos. M and E balls. '£acfi, $2.00 No. A. For No. 18 ball. . . " 1.25 Spal(ting Thumb Protector No. T. A substantia' support that players will appreciate. Each, 50c. Spalding Basket Ball Score Books No. I. Paper cover, 10 games. . . Each, lOc. No. 2. Cloth cover, 25 games. , . ^ " 25c. No. A. Collegiate, paper cover, 10 games. " lOc. Noi B. Collegiate, cloth cover, 25 games. " 25c. Idmg icial" ^tBaU Elxtract from Official Rale Book. RULE in. -GOALS Sec. 3. The goal made by A. G. Spalding & Bros, shall be the offi- cial goal. Sec. 4. The official goal must be used in all match games. Spalding Outdoor Goals Oflicially adopted and must be used in all match We are equipping our basket ball goals now with .tructed so that the bottom may be left open in, fames to permit ball to drop through. The opening is closed y a draw string for match games. Per pair, $4.00 To answer the demand for an extra heavy construction ,rge gymnasiums, we submit this rigid style. Pair, $6.00 Spal1NG°S ATHLETIC LIBRARY GROUP XIU- No. 331. Schoolyard Athletics By J. E. SULLIVAN President Amateur Athletic Union; Member Board of Education Greater New York. H 'T^HE great interest in ath- X letics that has developed ' in the public schools within recent years has led to the compilation of this book with a view to the systemiza- tion of the various events that form the distinctive!; athletic feature of school recreation. With its aid an teacher should be able to conduct a successful meet, whil the directions given for becoming expert in the variou lines will appeal to the pupil. Some of the leadin athletes have contributed chapters on their specialties Ray Ewry, holder of the world's high jump record, tell how to practice for that event; Harry Hillman, holder c the hurdle and three-legged records, gives hints on hurdl racing and three-legged racing; Martin Sheridan, al around champion of America, gives directions for putting the shot; Harry F. Porter, high jump expert, describe how to become proficient in that event. The book i illustrated with photos taken especially for it in publi school yards. PRICE 10 CENTJ PBOMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST SEE INSIDE FRONT OF THIS BOO! 'Prices in effecl July 5. 1910. Subject lo change without notice. For Canadian price} see special Canadian Catalogue. THE SPALDING TRADEMARK "^rr^ Spalding's icial Athletic Almanac td Official lority all Athletic Annually Cents :ORDS Champions- and Field and Senior il ling Swimming Jiastic Punching 'g itling jAssociation A. A. U. ?litan Assoc. A. A. U. Atlantic Assoc. A. A.U. and Assoc. A. A. U. Association A. A. U. "Atlantic Assoc. A. A. U. n Association A. A. U. ional Meets lolastic Edited by J. E. Sullivan Secretary - Treasurer of the Amateur Athletic Union of the United States RECORDS Running High Jumping Walking Broad Jumping Shot Putting Throwing the Hammer Throwing the Discus Three -Legged Race Sack Racing Javelin Kicking Lifting Long Dive Marathon Road Races Parallel Bar Relay Racing Rope Climbing Running Backwards Running the Bases Skating Stone Gathering Pole Vaulting Winners in Olympic Games Women's Athletic Record* ITENTION GIVEN TO MMUNICATIONS MESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES „ SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER l^*' OF THIS BOOK 'Prices in effect July 5, 1910. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian pricu see special Canadian Catalogue. sSiS THE SPALDING Durand'Steel] Lockers pi Wooden lockers are objectionable* because they attract vermin, absorb odors, can be easily broken into, and are dangerous on account of fire. Lockers made from wire mesh or expanded metal afford little secur* My, as they can be easily entered wi th wire cut* ters. Clothes placed in them become coveredl with dust, and the lockers themselves present a poor appearance, resembling animal cages. Durand-Steel Lockers are made of finest grade furniture steel and are finished with gloss black, furnace-baked japan (400°), comparable to that used on hospital ware, which will never flake off nor require refinishing, as do paints and enamels. TRADEMARK -;l! liS|! Some of ihb d.OOO Ourand-Steel Lockers InstalM Public Cymnasiums of Chicago. I2'x IS'x42', Ooii $ 5 Nets- Golf Driving . * 67 Volley Ball . . . 56 Numbers, Competitors , 58 Pads- Chamois. Fencing' «> 91 Foot Ball . '.:; ., 7 Wrestling , . * 65 Paint. Golf '. * j, 67 Pants- Basket Ball . , ■, 126 Boys' Knee ... 65 Foot Ball, College . . 6 Foot Ball, Rugby . . 15 Hockey. Ice . . . 48 Running ... 30 Pennants. College . . 34, 35 Pistol, Starter's . . 59 Plastrons, Fencing . ., 91 Plates— • Teeing. Golf ... 67 Platforms, Striking Bag 74, 75 Poles- Ski 37 Vaulting ... 58 Polo, Roller, Goods . » 49 Protectors- Abdomen i » « 12 Eye Glass . < . 48 Indoor Base Ball . . 52 Thumb , . ^ . . 25 Protection, Runnmg Shoes 61 Pucks, Hockey, Ice . , 47 Push Ball . . s 9 56 Pushers, Chamois » e 61 Quoits . .' Racks, Golf Ball Racquets, Squash Rapiers Referee's.Whistle Rings- Exercising « Swinging Rowing.Machines «x 84 .79.84 . 81 Sacks, for Sack RaciAg Sandals, Snow Shoe Sandow Dumb Bells Scabbards, Skate » Score Books- Basket Ball » « Shin Guards- Association College . ' Shirts- Athletic « I Shoes- Basket Ball « a Fencing . Foot Ball. Association Foot Ball, College Foot Ball. Rugby Foot Ball. Soccer Golf . . Gymnasium . Jumping . Running . Skating . . Squash « • 26 91 18 9 15 18 68 87 61 W.61 46 «8 Shot- . Athletic ,, Indoor . Massage , Skates- Ice . 4 Boiler . , Skate Bag . Skate Key Skate RoUeirs Skate Straps Skate Sundries . i . Skis Sleeve Bands. College Snow Shoes Squash Goods . . Sttindards — Vaulting Volley Ball . . . Straps - Kor Three-Legged Race Skate . . . . Sticks. Polo Stockings . . . >. Foot Ball . . ♦ Stop Boards ; <,, « Striking Bags i « . Suits- Base Ball. Indoor Basket Ball . Gymnasium . Gymnasium, Lad- Running Soccer Union. -FootBall Water Polo . Supporters . Ankle . Wrist . . Suspensories Sweaters . Swivels. Striking Bag Swords. Fencing Swords. Duelling Tackling Machine Take-Off Board Tape- Measuring Steer Tees. Golf . Tether Tennis . Tights- Full Full. Wrestling Knee Toboggans Toboggan Cushions Toe Boards Toques Trapeze'. Ad justable Trapeze. Single Trousers, Y.M.C. Trunks- Velvet , «, Worsted . a, . 3?. 43 49, 50, 51 . 44 . 44 . 49, 51 . 44 44 37 . 34 37 12.13 11 13 12 22,23 72 90 90 Uniforms, Base Ball. Indoor 63 Wands. Calistltenlo . 78 Weights, ee-ib, . . W hiBtlei, Referee's Whitely ExercUers . Wrestling Equipment Wrist Machine . • standard Policy A Standard Quality must be inseparably linked to a Standard Policy. Without a definite and Standard Mercantile Policy, it is impossible for a manufac maintain a Standard Quality. To market his goods through the jobber, a manufacturer must provide a profit for the jobb well as the retail dealer. To meet these conditions of Dual Profits, the manufacturer is oblig set a proportionately high list price on his goods to the consimier. To enable the glib salesman, when booking his orders, to figure out attractive profits to botl jobber and retailer, these high list prices are absolutely essential; but their real purpose will have served when the manufacturer has secured his order from the jobber, and the jobber has secure order from the retailer. However, these deceptive high list prices are not fair to the consumer, who does not, ar. reality, is not ever expected to pay these fancy list prices. When the season opens for the sale of such goods, with their misleading but alluring higl, prices, the retailer begins to realize his responsibilities, and grapples with the situation as bei can, by offering "special discounts," which vary with local trade conditions. Under this system of merchandising, the profits to both the manufacturer and the jobbe assured; but as there is no stability maintained in the prices to the consumer, the keen compel amongst the local dealers invariably leads to a demoralized cutting of prices bj" which the profi | the retailer are practically eliminated. This demoralization always reacts on the manufacturer. -The jobber insists on lower, and;; lower, prices. The manufacturer in his turn, meets this demand for the lowering of prices b( j only way open to him, viz. : the cheapening and degrading of the quality of his product. The foregoing conditions became so intolerable that, ten years ago, in 1899, A. G. Spah ^& Bros, determined to rectify this demoralization in the Athletic Goods Trade, and inaugurated *i has since become known as " The Spalding Policy. " The "Spalding Policy" eliminates the jobber entirely, so far as Spalding Goods are conceti and the retail dealer secures his supply of Spalding Athletic Goods direct from the manufa® under a restricted retail price arrangement by which the retail dealer is assured a fair, legitimat*' certain profit on all Spalding Athletic Goods, and the consumer is assured a Standard Quality ai: protected from imposition. The "Spalding Policy" is decidedly for the interest and protection of the users of Athletic Gi and acts in two ways: First— The user is assured of genuine OflScial Standard Athletic Goods, and ^ the same fixed prices to everybody, 1 : Second— As manufacturers, we can proceed with confidence in purchasing at M the proper time, the very best raw materials required in the manufacture m of our various goods, well ahead of their respective seasons, and this enables ^ us to provide the necessary quantity and absolutely maintain the Spalding Standard of Quality. All retail dealers handling Spalding Athletic Goods are required to supply consumers at regular printed catalogue prices— neither more nor less— the same prices that similar goods are for in our New York, Chicago and other stores. All Spalding dealers, as well as users of Spalding Athletic Goods, are treated exactly alike, an special rebates or discriminations are allowed to anyone. Positively, nobody; not even officers, managers, salesmen or other employes of A. G. Spal & Bros., or any of their relatives or personal friends, can buy Spalding Athletic Goods at a disc from the regular catalogue prices. This, briefly, is the " Spalding Policy, " which has already been in successful operation for past ten years, and will be indefinitely continued. In other words, " The Spalding Policy " is a "square deal " for everybody. A. G. SPALDING & BROS. PUSIOKNT. C i\ copy del. to Cat. Div. ^ l&ib' standard Quality ; An article that is universally given the appellation ** Standard" is thereby Bed to be the Criterion, to which are compared all other things of a similar nature, r stance, the Gold Dollar of the United States is the Standard unit of currency, ae it must legally contain a specific proportion of pure gold, and the fact of its n Genuine is guaranteed by the Government Stamp thereon. As a protection to I ers of this currency against counterfeiting and other tricks, considerable money ;?5nded in maintaining a Secret Service Bureau of Experts. Under the law, citizen racturers must depend to a great extent upon Trade-Marks and similar devices ptect themselves against counterfeit products— without the aid of ''Government t :ives " or " Public Opinion " to assist them. Consequently the *' Consumer's Protection " against misrepresentatibn and "in- •i quality" rests entirely upon the integrity and responsibility of the "Manufacturer." A, G. Spalding & Bros, have, by their rigorous attention to "Quality, "for thirty- n years, caused their Trade-Mark to become known throughout the world as a Kintee of Quality as dependable in their field', as the U. S. Currency is in jts field. The necessity of upholding the guarantee of the Spalding Trade-Mark and main- ii g the Standard Quality of their Athletic Goods, is, therefore, as obvious as is the jcsity of the Government in maintaining a Standard Currency. Thus each, consumer is not only insuring himself but also protecting other con- 03 rs when he assists a Reliable Manufacturer in upholding his Trade-Mark and all Bit stands for. Therefore, we urge all users of our Athletic Goods to assist ts in lataining the Spalding Standard of Excellence, by insisting that our Trade-Mark be la ly stamped on all athletic goods which they buy, because without this precaution UDest efforts towards maintaining Standard Quality and preventing fraudulent rtitution will be ineffectual. Manufacturers of Standard Articles invariably suffer the reputation of being i| priced, and this sentiment is fostered and emphasized by makers of "inferior X3," with whom low prices are the main consideration. ' A manufactiu-er of recognized Standard Goods, with a reputation to uphold and a d antee to protect, must necessarily have higher prices than a manuf actiu-er of cheap !s, whose idea of and basis of a claim for Standard Quality depends principally upon jiloquence of the salesman. I We know from experience that there is no quicksand more unstable than poverty [ality— and we avoid this quicksand by Standard Quality. ^^^^^^^^^^l-.^^^c^^^'j^^-^ ATHLETIC LIBRARY A separate book covers every Athletic S and is Official and Standard Price 10 cents each GRAND PRIZE PARIS ST.L0UIS,1904 vSpZL LDING ^^^^^ ATHLETIC GOODS ARE THE STANDARD OF THE ^V^Oi A. G. Spalding ® Bros. MAINTAIN WHOLESALE and RETAIL STORES /n the FOLLOWING C NEW YORK CHICAGO ST. LOUIS BOSTON MILWAUKEE KANSAS CITY PHILADELPHIA DETROIT SAN FRANCISCO NEWARK CINCINNATI LOS ANGELE BUFFALO CLEVELAND SEATTLE SYRACUSE COLUMBUS MINNEAPI BALTIMORE INDIANAPOLIS ST. PAl' WASHINGTON PITTSBURG DEN VI LONDON, ENGLAND BIRMINGHAM, ENGLAND MANCHESTER, ENGLAND EDINBURGH, SCOTLAND SYDNEY, AUSTRALIA ^Factories owned and operated by A.G.S} ■Marked Athletic Goods are ma CHICAGO ATLANTA DAL LOUISVILLE NEW ORLEANS i MONTREAL, CAN TORONTO, CANAL nj/ & Bros, and wfiere allofSfi 'e located in the fo/lowina en FRANCISCO CHICOPEE» BROOKLYN BOSTON PHILADELPHIA LONDON. ENCH VI. No. 6 Price 10 cents ATHI/BTIC I/IBRARY CA^ICE Hockey ^ '\ Guide %'1 ^ «^ 1912 Contain inff the — ^ OFFICIAL RULES mi; ' 1. ' '" / American Sports Publishing Co I,,,,,,.., ..,„.,„„ 21 Warren Street, NewYorK (|i; <|..i!!! — T-, r ./ .. „ ,. , .. ^ . : .., , .■ . ■■■» ". V Vt ' ■'" A.G.Spalding & Bros. MAINTAIN THEIR OWN HOUSES FOR DISTRIBUTING THE Sf^LDING ^^ COMPLETE LINE OF Athletic Goods Vv./, ' IN THE FOLLOWING CITIES ^ Y^jj.zi.w.'^^'i^ m NEW YORK ''°i24'-°128 Nassau St. '""29-33 West 42d St. NEWARK, N. J. 845 Broad Street BOSTON, MASS. 141 Federal Street BUFFALO, N. Y. 611 Main Street SYRACUSE, N. Y. University Block PITTSBURGH, PA. 608 Wood Street PHILADELPHIA, PA. 1210 Chestnut Street BALTIMORE, MD. 208 E. Baltimore St. WASHINGTON, D. C. 613 14thSt., N.W. LONDON, ENG. Thre« Stores 317-318, High Holbom, W. C. 78, Cheapslde West End Branch 2B,Hayniarket,S.W. Ave. CHICAGO 147-149' ST. LOUIS, MO. 41S North Seventh St. KANSAS CITY, MO. 1120 Grand Ave. DENVER, COL. 1616 Arapahoe St. CINCINNATI, O. 119 East Fifth St. CLEVELAND, O. 741 Enclld Ave. COLUMBUS, O. 191 South High St. DETROIT, MICH. 254 Woodward Ave. LOUISVILLE, KY. 328 West Jefferson St. INDIANAPOLIS, IND. 136 N. Pennsylvania St. BIRMINGHAM, ENG. 57, New Street MANCHESTER, ENG. 4, Oxford St. and I , Lower Moseley St. EDINRURGH, SCOT. 3 South Charlotte St. (Cor. Pi-lnces SI.) SAN FRANCISCO I56-1S8 Geai7 St. SEATTLE, WASH. 711 Second Ave. LOS ANGELES, CAL. 435 South Spring St. MILWAUKEE. WIS. 379 East Water St. MINNEAPOLIS,MINN. 44 Seventh St., Sooth ST. PAUL, MINN. 386 Minnesota St. ATLANTA, GA. 74 N. Broad Street NEW ORLEANS, LA. 140CarondeletSt. DALLAJS, TEX. 'IMI Commerce St. MONTREAL, P. Q. 443 St. James St. TORONTO, ONT. 189 Yonge St. Communications directed to A. G. SPALDING & BROS., at any of the above addresses, will receive prompt attention. THE SPALDING TRADE IWIARK IS REGISTERED INTHE UNITEDSTATES PATENT OFFICE, AND WE HAVE ALSO PROTECTED OUR INTERESTS BY 30 REGISTRATIONS IN FOREIGN COUN- TRIES. INFRINGERS ARE WARNED. THE SP4LDING TRADE-IVIARK IS THE FOUNDATION OF^THE SPALDING BUSINESS m PA'' m. aI^I ICA'S I Mi 11 Binding is in Blue Cloth with Cover Designjtamped m Gold PRICE $2.00 NET Size. 5^3x8 inches; 600 Pages U5 Full Page Plates icluding a Series ot Cartoons by Homer C. Davenport Americans National Game By A. G. SPALDING Price, $2.00 Net A book of 600 pages, profusely illustrated with over 100 full page engravings, and hav- ing sixteen forceful cartoons by Homer C. Davenport, the famous American artist. No man in America is better equipped \o write on all the varied phases of the Na- tional Game than is A. G. Spalding. His observation and experience began when the game was young. He gained fame as a pitcher forty years ago, winning a record as player that has never yet been equalled. He was associated with the management of the pastime through trying years of struggle against prevailing evils. He opposed the gamblers; he fought to eradicate drunkenness ; he urged and intro- duced new and higher ideals for the sport ; he was quick to see that ball playing and the business man- agement of clubs, at the same time and by the same men, were imprac- ticable ; he knew that ball players might be quite competent as magnates, but not while playing the game ; he was in the forefront of the fight against syndi- cating Base Ball and making of a Nation's pastime a sordid Trust; he was the pioneer to lead competing American Base Ball teams to a foreign land ; he took two champion teams to Great Britain in 1 874, and two others on a tour of the world in 1 888-9 ; he was present at the birth of the National League, and has done as much as any living American to uphold and prolong the life of this great pioneer Base Ball organization. When A. G. Spalding talks about America's National Game he speaks by authority of that he does know, because he has been in the councils of the management whenever there have been times of strenuous endeavor to purge it from abuses and Keep it clean for the people of America — young and old In this work Mr. Spalding, after explaining the causes that led him into the undertaking, begins with the inception of the sport ; shows how it developed, by natural stages from a boy with a ball to eighteen men, ball, bats and bases ; gives credit for the first scientific application of system to the playing of the game to Abner Doubleday, of Coopers- town, N. Y.: treats of the first Base Ball club ; shows how rowdyism terrorized the sport in its early days ; how gam- bling and drunkenness brought the pastime into disfavor with the masses, and how early organizations were unable to control the evils that insidiously crept in. He then draws a series of very forceful pictures of the struggle to eradicate gambling, drunkenness and kindred evils, and shows how the efforts of strong men accomplished the salvation of the great American game and placed it in the position it occu- pies to-day — the most popular outdoor pastime in the world. Interspersed throughout this interesting book are remin- iscences of Mr. Spalding's own personal observations and experiences in the game as player, manager and magnate, covering a period of many years. Some of these stories deal with events of great import to Base Ball, and others have to do with personal acts and characteristics of players prominent in the game in earlier days — old time favorites like Harry and George Wright, A. C. Anson, Mike Kelly; Billy Sunday and others. This book should be in the library of every father in the land, for it shows how his boy may be built up physically and morally through a high-class pastime. It should be in the hands of every lad in America, for it demonstrates the possibilities to American youth of rising to heights of eminent material success through a determined adherence to things that make for the upbuilding of character in organizations as well as of men. Mailed postpaid on receipt of price by any Spalding store (see list on inside front cover), or by the publishers, American Sports Publishing Company 21 Warren Street, New York SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY a Giving the Titles of all Spalding Athletic Library Books now J in print, grouped for ready reference c" £> No I lA IC 2 2A 3 4 6 7 7A 8 9 10 I2A SPALDING OFFICIAL ANNUALS Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald Spald ng's Official Base Ball Guide ng's Official Base Ball Record ng's Official College Base Ball Annual ng's Official Foot Ball Guide ng's Official Soccer Foot Ball Guide ng's Official Cricket Guide ng's Official Lawn Tennis Annual ng's Official Ice Hockey Guide ng's Official Basket Ball Guide ng's Official Women's Basket Bali Guide ng's Official Lacrosse Guide ng's Official Indoor Base Ball Guide ng's Official Roller Polo Guide ng's Official Athletic Rules Group I. Base Ball No.l Spalding's Official Base Ball Guide No. lA Official Base Ball Record. College Base Ball Annual. How to Play Base Ball. How to Bat. How to Jlun Bases. How to Pitch. How to Catch. How to Play First Base. How to Play Second Base. How to Play Third Base, How to Play Shortstop. How to Play the Outfield. How to Organize a Base Ball League. [Club. How to Organize a Base Bal 1 How to Manage a Base Ball Club. How toTrain aBaseBallTeam How to Captain a Base Bal 1 How to Umpire a Game. [Team Technical Base Ball Terms. Ready Reckoner of Base Ball Percentages. No. 350 How to Score. No. Ic No. 202 No. 223 No. 232 No. 230 No. 229 No. 225 No. 226 No. 227 No. 228 No. 224 No. 231. No. 219 BASE BALL AUXILIARIES No. 348 Minor League Base Ball Guide No. 352 Official Book National League of Prof. Base Ball Clubs. No. 340 Official Handbook National Playground Ball Assn. Group H. Foot Ball No.2 Spalding' sOffi,cial Foot Ball Guide No. 344 ADigest of the Foot Ball Rules How to Play Foot Ball. Spalding's Official Soccer Foot Ball Guide. How to Play Soccer. How to Play Rugby. No. 324 No. 2a No. 286 No. 335 FOOT BALL AUXILIARY No. 351 Official RugbyFoot Ball Guide. Group ill. crichet No. 3 Spalding's Official Cricket Guide. No. 277 Cricket and How to Play It Lawn Tennis Group IV. No. Spalding's Official Lawn Ten- nis Annual. No. 157 How to Play Lawn Tennis. No. 354 — Official Handbook National Squash Tennis Association. Group V. No. 276 How to Play Golf . GOll Group VI. Hochey No. Spalding's Officia Ice Hock Guide. No. 304 How to Play Ice Hockey. No. 154 Field Hockey. (Lawn Hockey. No. 188 < Parlor Hockey. (Garden Hockey. No. 180 Ring Hockey. Group VII. Basket Ball No. 7 Spalding's Official Basket Ball Guide. No. 7a Spalding's Official Women's Basket Ball Guide. No. 193 How to Play Basket Ball. BASKET BALL AUXILIARY No. 353 Official Collegiate Basket Ball Handbook. 4WY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPON RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS Sroap VIII. Lacrosse No. 8 Spaldi7ig's Official Lacrosse Guide. No. 201 How to Play Lacrosse. Group IX. Indoor 6ase Ball No. 9 Spalding's Official Indoor Base Group X. ^"^^^^^^ Poio No. 10 Spalding's Official Roller Polo No. 129 Water Polo. iGuide. No. 199 Equestrian Polo. Group XI. MIscellaReous Games No. 248 Archery. No. 138 Croquet. No. 271 Roque, [Racquets. No. 194 < Squash- Racquets. (Court Tennis. No. 13 Hand Ball. No. 167 Quoits. No. 170 Push Ball. No. 14 Curling. No. 207 Lawn Bowls. No. 188 Lawn Games. No. 189 Children's Games. No. 341 How to Bowl. Group XII. Athieiics No. 12a Spalding's Official Athletic Rules. No. 27 College Athletics. No. 182 All Around Athletics. No. 156 Athletes' Guide. No. 87 Athletic Primer. No. 273 Olympic GamesatAthens,1906 No. 252 How to Sprint. No. 255 How to Run 100 Yards. No. 174 Distance and Cross Country Running. [Thrower. No. 259 How to Become a Weight No. 55 Official Sporting Rules. No. 246 Athletic Training for School- No. 317 Marathon Running. [boys. No. 331 Schoolyard Athletics, No. 342 Walking for Health and Com- petition. ATHLETIC AUXILIARIES No. 349 Intercollegiate Official Hand- book. No. 302 Y. M. C. A. Official Handbook. No. 313 Public S choo Is Athletic League Official Handbook. No. 314 Girls' Athletics. No. 308 Official Handbook New York Interscholastic Athletic No. 347 Official Handbook Public Schools Athletic League of San Francisco. rPAiin Yiii Ainieiic Group XIII. Accompilsftmenis No. 177 How to Swim. No. 296 Speed Swimming. No. 128 How to Row. No. 209 How to Become a Skater. No. 178 How to Train for Bicycling. No. 23 Canoeing. No. 282 Roller Skating Guide. Group XIV. Manly Sporis No. 18 Fencing. ( By Breck.) No. 162 Boxing. No. 165 Fencing. ( By Senac.) No. 140 Wrestling, No. 236 How to Wrestle. No. 102 Ground Tumbling No. 233 Jiu Jitsu. TvTo. 166 How to Swing Indian Clubs. No. 200 Dumb Bell Exercises. No. 143 Indian Clubs and Dumb Bells. No. 262 Medicine Ball Exercises. No. 29 Pulley Weight Exercises. No. 191 How to Punch the Bag. No. 289 Tumbling for Amateurs. No. 326 Professional Wrestling. Group XV. Gymnasiics No. 104 Grading of Gymnastic Exer- cises. [Dumb Bell Drills. No. 214 Graded Cal i st hen ics and No. 254 Barn jum Bar Bell Drill. [Games No. 158 Indoor and Outdoor Gymnastic No. 124 How to Become a Gymnast. No. 287 Fancy Dumb Bell and March- ing Drills. [Apparatus. No. 327 Pyramid Building Without No. 328 Exercises on the Parallel Bars. No. 329 Pyramid Building with Wands, Chairs and Ladders. No. 345 Official Handbook I. C. A. A. Gymnasts of America. Group XVI. Physical culture No. 161 10 Minutes' Exercise for Busy Men. [andCareof theBody. No. 149 Scientific Physical Training No. 208 Physical Education and Hy- No. 185 Hints on Health. [giene. No. 213 285 Health Answers. No. 238 Muscle Building. [ning. No. 234 School Tactics and Maze Run- No. 261 Tensing Exercises, [nasties. No. 285 Health by Muscular Gym- No. 288 Indigestion Treated by Gym- No. 290 Get Well; Keep Well, [nasties. No. 325 Twenty-Minute Exercises. No. 330 Physical Training for the School and Class Room. No. 346 How to Live 100 Years. ANY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPON RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS Spalding 'Red Cover'' Series of Athletic Handbooks Spalding's Official Athletic Almanac Price 25 cents. Spalding's Official Golf Guide Price 25 cents. Strokes and Science of Lawn Tennis Price 25 cents. Physical Training Simplified Price 25 cents. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY Group VI. No. 6 Official vJ^s ^r- it Ice Hockey Guide 5f?cc-'. cu-P { I9I2 Edited by FREDERICK R. TOOMBS c^®^ PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN SPORTS PUBLISHING COMPANY 21 Warken Strket. New York Copyright. 1912 BY American Sports Publishing Company New York ©CI.A300131 Contents PAGE Season of igio-ii in the Intercollegiate Ice Hockey League 5 American Amateur Hockey League Season 1910-11 . . 13 Hockey in the St. Paul District ...... 23 Interscholastic Ice Hockey, 1910-11 2)7 New York Scholastic Hockey League 41 Laws of Hockey and Championship Rules of the American Amateur Hockey League ,42 Constitution of the American Amateur Hockey League . 52 Official Rules Governing Play for the Stanley Cup . . 59 Ontario Hockey Association Rules 61 Laws Across Border — Conditions which Govern Play of the Eastern Canada League .....,., 65 Eastern Canada Rules 70 Constitution of the Intercollegiate Hockey League . . 72 Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League . 74 ,,, ^ M. W. HOUCK Vice-President Americau Amateur Hyckey League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Season of 1910-11 in the Intercollegiate Ice Hockey League The Intercollegiate Ice Hockey League opened its season as regards the official championship race on January 7, when at the St. Nicholas Rink, Princeton defeated Columbia by a score of 2 to 0. The game was marked by the sensational playing of Kay, the rover of the Princeton team. Enthusiasts who were confident of possessing inside informa- tion regarding various teams asserted that Princeton, although the champion team of the previous season, did not possess the strength it formerly had, and that Cornell would bear watching. Although Cornell had finished low in the race the year before, in spite of its victory over Yale, knowing ones counted on the Ithacans as '"dark horses," and the capture of the championship by them verified these predictions. The other teams in the six-cornered race, in addition to Cor- nell, were Harvard, Yale, Princeton, Columbia and Dartmouth. Columbia showed up stronger than in years past. This was proved by the game on January 11 when the disciples of the blue and white defeated Yale in a swiftly played game at the St. Nicholas Rink. The score was Columbia 6, Yale 4. , The nature of the play of the Cornell team was a subject of con- siderable conjecture. Followers of the game were unable to tell just how the other teams in the race would fare as against the Ithacans. On January 14, however, the ice sport fans were given the chance they craved, to see the Cornellians in action, Princeton, however, was a sufferer thereby, for the gallant skating fiends from upstate New York cleaned up the Jersey Tigers to the tune of 4 to i. On the same day at the Boston Arena another Intercollegiate League contest was held. Yale played Dartmouth, arid showed up favorably by defeating Dartmouth by the decisive score of I KENNETH B. GORDON, Secretary-Treasurer American Amateur Hockey League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 7 7 to 2. Harvard did not make an appearance on the ice in an official game until January i6, although the Cambridge lads had played games with teams not in the league. One of these con- tests was with the seven of the McGill University, which occurred at the Boston Arena. The McGill team represents the well-known Canadian institution which for years has been accus- tomed to sending hockey teams to meet the star outfits of the United States. McGill won, 5 to 2. On January 16 the League race stood as follows : Won. Lost. PC. Won. Lost. PC. Cornell i o i.ooo Princeton i i .500 Harvard i o i.ooo Columbia i 2 .300 Yale I I .500 Dartmouth o i .000 The two defeats of the Princeton team showed the sporters of the orange and black the necessity for taking a brace, so they practised diligently, and as a result showed improved form when they clashed with the Dartmouth seven at the St. Nicholas Rink on January 18, but in spite of their improvement Dartmouth proved able to snow them under by a score of 6 to 3. That Yale, in spite of many predictions to the contrary, would not figure as a champion factor, was demonstrated when the New Havenites succumbed before the puck shooting of the Cornell stars at the St. Nicholas Rink on January 21. This second defeat for Yale as contrasted with Cornell's clean score even at this early stage of affairs demonstrated that the Ithacans were in a most formidable position and would have to be defeated by the team that won the race. However, Cornell had not yet met Harvard, and Harvard, like Cornell, had a clean score. The teams met for the first time on January 28 at the Boston Arena. This contest was awaited eagerly by the enthusiasts, and a general belief seemed to exist that Harvard would defeat Cornell. But predictions seem to go wrong more often than they go right in sporting events, and the Cornell con- tingent turned the hopes of fair Harvard by worsting them by a score of 3 to 2. The line-up of the Cornell team was as fol- lows : Vail, goal; Warner, point; Schleu, cover point; Evans, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 9 rover; Crossweiler, center; Magner, left wing; Vincent, right wing. It was now admitted that if Cornell's team remained intact ^liat it could hardly be prevented from winning the title, and the team practically clinched the championship on February lo when it defeated Columbia 4 to o. The Cornell team which thus garnered new laurels for its colors was made up the same as that given before in this chapter with the exception that Crossweiler player at rover, Evans at left wing and Magner at center. The critics saw that this game was the fastest college match of the season. Magner and Vincent did probably the best work for Cornell. Each scored two of the four goals regis- tered. Cornell ended its season on February 18 when by van- quishing the Dartmouth seven it created a record for itself by defeating all the other teams in the league. Vincent and Magner again excelled in goal scoring, and Crossweiler showed up splen- didly for Cornell. Probably the man who did the best for Dartmouth was Strucklen. Now remained the Harvard-Yale game, which year after year draws large crowds and is usually the scene of great enthusiasm. There was considerable delay over determining the date for this match. Finally, however, representatives of the two colleges came to a definite understanding and the game was set for Feb- ruary 18 at the St. Nicholas Rink. The bitterness with which the contest waged was greater than had been evidenced in almost any other game during the season. Harvard at this time was second to Cornell in the league race, having won three games and lost but one, while Yale had broken even, having won two games and lost two games. The game was in doubt throughout. Horn- blower for Harvard, playing the position of rover, scored the winning tally by passing the puck into the net when checked from invading Yale's territory. In one way the result of the league race was an upset for Princeton, which had won the title the year before, distinguish- ing itself this year by finishing last. Dartmouth, however, had the same percentage as Princeton, .200, and thus reduced Prince- ton's humiliation a trifle. Each team lost four games and won SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. H e. Harvard's defeat of Yale won second position for the imbridgeites and Yale and Columbia tied for third place, each nning two games and losing three. INTERCOLLEGIATE HOCKEY LEAGUE CONTESTS. Season of 1911. January 7, at New York — Princeton, 2; Columbia, 0. January 11, at New York — Columbia, 6; Yale, 4. January 14, at New York — Cornell, 4; Princeton, i. January 14, at Boston — Yale, 7; Dartmouth, 2. January 16, at New York — Harvard, 5; Columbia, o. January 18, at New York — Dartmouth, 6; Princeton, 3. January 20, at New York — Columbia, 3 ; Dartmiouth, 2. January 21, at New York — Cornell, 4; Yale, 2. January 21, at Boston — Harvard, 5; Princeton, i. January 28, at New York — Yale, i ; Princeton, 0. January 28, at Boston — Cornell, 3 ; Harvard, 2. February 4, at Boston — Harvard, 12; Dartmouth, i. February 10, at New York — Cornell, 4; Columbia, 0. February 18, at New York — Cornell, 5; Dartmouth, i. February 18, at New York — Harvard, 3 ; Yale, 2. NTERCOLLEGIATE HOCKEY LEAGUE PERCENTAGE G. W. L. PC. 523 -400 5 I 4 .200 5 I 4 .200 TABLE. G. W. L. PC. Cornell . . . • 5 5 1.000 Columbia . . Tarvard . .. 5 4 I .8co Dartmouth. . i^ ale • 5 2 3 .400 Princeton .. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 13 American Amateur Hockey League Season 1910-1911 The hockey season of 1911 in the American Amateur Hockey ague brought forth a class of play that was not in some spects of the excellence of various years past. The individual ams were not as strong, in the opinion of many of the experts, has been noted in the past, and various players who have one as stars of imposing magnitude in the chase of the elusive ick did not appear on the ice during the exciting campaign. len, too, the injuries that resulted to players in some of the ntests proved a handicap to teams. The victory of the team the Crescent Athletic Club of Brooklyn was won, but it was )t generally anticipated before the season opened, although it as conceded that the premiership would go to either the Cres- nts or the New York Athletic Club. After the season started le Crescents loomed to the fore and became the favorites in le race. They pursued a victorious course that made them the ig champions with a clean record, not losing a single game. he Mercury Footers finished second, losing two of the six ames played. The Hockey Club of New York reversed this cord, losing four of the six games played, and finished third 1 the race. Strangely enough, the St. Nicholas Skating Club ven did not win a single game in spite of the worthy tradi- ons of the club, which for years has been a notable factor in eciding the hockey supremacy. The hockey season opened Tuesday, January 3, with the con- est between the Hockey Club of New York and the New York Athletic Club. It was noticed that William Russell had given vay to James Britton as captain of the Hockey Club team. The Mercury Footers fulfilled the prognostications of their backers 3y defeating the Hockey Club by seven goals to four. The second game of the season revealed the strength of the Cres- cents. This contest, held Thursday, January 5, at the St. Nich- SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 15 olas Rink, New York City, where all of the amateur league contests were held, resulted in the defeat of the St. Nicholas Skating Club by the Brooklynites by the pressive score of 14 to 2. Ernie Dufresne, who played at cover point for the Cres- cents, was formerly with the Wanderers. Shirreff, who won fame as a hockey player with the Crescent A.C. for several years and then went over to the New York A.C, rejoined the Brooklyn team and gave it added strength. By defeating the St. Nicholas Skating Club on January 17, by a score of 5 to 3, the Hockey Club of New York won in the conflict over the cellar position and crowded the Seven Saints into the last position in the percentage list. One of the biggest crowds of the season saw the first battle between the Crescent A.C. and the New York A.C. This game occurred January 20. The contest waged with a fierceness that caused the spectators almost every imaginable sort of a thrill. The New York team was weakened by the absence of Castle- man, and Mallen, Reinmund and Broadfoot of the New Yorks were injured during the game; consequently, there were many delays. Denesha, of New York, was disabled in the first perjod owing to a violent bodycheck on the part of Dufresne, and, he was replaced at right wing by Pemberthy. Only one goal was scored in this contest, and Martin, the clever Crescent forward, was responsible for it. Martin was a former Yale player. He scored the goal on a pretty pass by Lifiiton. This triumph -of the Crescents in spite of the closeness of the score was to many an omen of what was to be the result of the season's campaign. The line-up of the Crescent A.C. in this contest was as fol- lows : Dr. Thomas, goal; Kennedy, point; Dufresne, cover point; Shirreff, rover; Liffiton, center; Martin, left wing; Jackson, right wing. The New York A.C. team was composed as follows : Dr. Mills, goal; White, point; Broadfoot, cover point; Mallen, rover; Reinmund, center; Peabody, left wing; Denesha, right wing. At this stage of the season it was clearly evident that the Crescents and the Mercury Footers were the two best teams in the league. The St. Nicholas team had already been defeated SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 17 iree times. The New York A.C., the Crescents and the [ockey Club of New York had demonstrated defeats to the alwart stickwielders representing the Saints. The Hockey Club I ad already been defeated twice, having lost to the New York L.C. and the Crescents. The St. Nicholas team played its closest game February q, ;hen it lost to the Hockey Club of New York by a score of to 6. This club had been weakened through the fact that cer- ain college men whose aid had been relied on were not allowed play. The breaking up of the Wanderers team naturally esulted in a change in the complexion of the annual league race. he two Cleghorns, who had gained prominence with the team, eturned to Canada and joined one of the well-known Canadian lubs. They became forwards on the Renfrew seven, a profes- ional team. The deciding game of the race occured Tuesday'-, February 14,. vhen the New York A.C. met the Crescent A.C. before a vastly nterested multitude. The Crescents having been the only team o defeat the New Yorks, the situation was that if the New York A.C. won they would tie for the supremacy with the Crescents, and a play-off would result. The play became so fierce as the game progressed that the .Tien exhausted themselves completely. Wall and Dobby, the well-known veterans, who have starred before the public for years as hockey experts of the highest class, were in the line-up of the Crescents. Castleman of the New York A.C. played in a catcher's mask, owing to the fact that he had not totally recovered from the serious injury which he had received in a contest against the St. Nicholas team. The accident was caused through the falling of Kenneth Gordon of the St. Nicks over another player, whereupon Gordon's foot was uplifted and his skate struck Castleman in the mouth. Several of his teeth iwere knocked out and the roof of his mouth was punctured. j The Crescents won by a score of 2 to i. Dobby made the 'winning goal, and so close was the play that this momentous tally was not scored until within thirty seconds before the jnatch ended. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARt. 19 loilowing is the line-up as they appeared in this deciding Ich : escent A.C. Position. New York A.C. Thomas Goal Dr. Mills esne Point Dr. Clarke 1 Cover point Broadf oot reff Rover Mallen ton Center Castlemau tin Left wing Peabody Jiedy Right wing Reinmund Phis match gave the Crescent A.C. two legs on the silver cup up five years ago for the team which should win three impionships. The New York A.C. had already claimed two Is on the emblem and the St. Nicholas team registered one the three claims on it when it gained the premiership in the ison of 1906-1907. The championship was the eighth which the Crescent A.C. had m since the founding of the American Amateur Hockey ague in 1896. The New York Athletic Club has won the ampionship four times, the St. Nicholas Skating Club once, d the Wanderers once. FFICIAL RECORD OF CONTESTS OF THE AMERICAN AMATEUR ICE HOCKEY LEAGUE. All games played at the St. Nicholas Rink, New York City. in. 3— New York A.C, 7; Hockey Club. of N. Y., 4. m. 5 — Crescer^^ A.C, 14; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. m. 10— New York A.C, 7; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. m. 13 — Crescent A.C, 4; Hockey Club of N. Y., i. m. 17— Hockey Club of N. Y., 5 ; St. Nicholas S.C, 3. an. 20 — Crescent A.C, i ; New York A.C, 0. an. 24— New York A.C, 6 ; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2. an. 26 — Crescent A.C, 6; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. eb. I— Crescent A.C, 6; Hockey Club of N. Y., 4. eb. 3— New York A.C, 7; St. Nicholas S.C, 3- eb. 9— Hockey Club of N. Y., 7; St. Nicholas S.C, 6. eb. 14— Crescent A.C, 2; New York A.C, i. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 21 A. H. L. PERCENTAGE TABLE. Club. Played. Won. Lost. PC. rescent Athletic Club 660 i.ooo Jew York Athletic Club 642 .666 lockey Club of New York 624 .333 It. Nicholas Skating Club 6 o 6 .000 GOALS SCORED FOR AND AGAINST TEAMS. For. Agst. For. Agst. Crescent A.C 33 10 Hockey Club of N. Y. 23 32 view York A..C 28 14 St. Nicholas S.C 18 46 CHAMPIONSHIP WINNERS. The table of championship teams since the founding of the American Amateur Hockey League is shown by the attached chedule : 1896-97 — New York Athletic Club. 1897-98— New York Athletic Club. 1898-99 — Brooklyn Skating Club. 1899-1900 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1900-01 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1901-02 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1902-03 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1903-04 — W^anderers Hockey Club. 1904-05 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1905-06 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1906-07 — St. Nicholas Skating Club. 1907-08 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1908-09 — New York Athletic Club. 1909-10 — New York Athletic Club. 1910-11 — Crescent Athletic Club. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 23 Hockey in the St. Paul District By M. B. Palmer. Jince hockey was first played in Minnesota some fifteen years St. Paul and Duluth have been the acknowledged centers the sport in this district, both on account of the number of ms turned out, and their quality. Formerly championship lors went to Duluth with almost monotonous regularity, but late years the order has been reversed. lockey clubs have been organized, and flourished for several irs only to be supplanted by fresh organizations. For the past years St. Paul has always had from four to eight different lbs. The game has always been on a strict amateur basis. me of the pioneer hockey sevens of St. Paul were the Vir- lias, Mascots, St. Pauls, and Victorias, and in Minneapolis, the ke Shores, and Harriets. As early as 1902 the Victorias of Paul won the Twin City Championship, and held it until 1905, len the Mic-Macs of the same city wrested it from them. In e fall of 1908, the Mic-Macs disbanded, and the Phoenix team IS organized. They have held the championship of the two lies ever since, and for the past two winters have held the ate title. Until the close of last season the game has always been played :re on open air rinks with all the attendant disadvantages. The clemency and uncertainty of the weather made adherence to hedules difficult, worked hardships on both players and spec- tors, and made a perfect sheet of ice out of the question, aturally the audiences were small. In spite of these adverse •nditions the sport has prospered and is gaining in favor among )th players and the public. In discussing the game as played in St. Paul during the past /o years it should be considered under three heads : Senior, inior, and Interscholastic. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 25 n 1909 the old Twin City Amateur Hockey League was rganized with the Phoenix, Chinooks, Minnesota Boat Club, 1 Lafayettes, from St. Paul ; and the Lake Shores, Harriets, M. C. A., and Wanderers, of Minneapolis. A schedule was •anged providing for two games between each two teams. The impionship went to the Phoenix that year. In 1910, a similar ledule was adopted between the Phoenix, Chinooks, Lake ores, and Wanderers, the other teams having dropped out, th similar championship results. In both years championship :dals were awarded the members of the Phcenix team by the gue, and in 1910 the Spalding Cup was also awarded them as iblematic of the State title, Duluth having been defeated in ■ir straight games of a post-season series. At the beginning of the season of 1910-1911 the Twin City nateur League, which was by now recognized as a senior j'anization, was broken up by the withdrawal of the Wanderers Minneapolis and the Chinooks of St. Paul. The Phoenix club IS left therefore the only senior team in St. Paul, and was liged, and fortunately so, to schedule games with out of town ims. Two of the St. Paul high school teams were defeated in pre- ninary games. The ex-champions of the Twin Cities, the old ictorias then reorganized to play the Phoenix a two-game series Christmas and New Year's, but the games had to be cancelled ving to the inclemency of the weather. After twice defeating e Lake Shores of Minneapolis and thereby clinching the Twin ty title, the Phcenix team left on January 23 for Cleveland, here the Clevelands were defeated the first night at the Elyseum ink by a 3 to 2 score in the closest and most exciting game of e year. The next night the Clevelands won. The two follow- g evenings the Phoenix were defeated at the Ice Palace in hicago by the Illinois Athletic Club. On their return to St. aul, the Phoenix team defeated Duluth at Duluth and later very scisively at St. Paul. The final game was played with the Fort i/illiam, Ontario, team, and the Phoenix were snowed under, 5 to 2. This game had been twice postponed and the Phoenix :am had ceased practice and broken training, which accounts in SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 27 Si measure for the very one-sided score. The last two games were played on the Hippodrome covered rink, the largest in the country, through the courtesy of its managers, Messrs. Brooke and Dickinson, and before the largest audiences that ever wit- nessed a hockey match here. A band enlivened the occasion and the Governor was the guest of honor. Following is the line-up and scores of the Phoenix Senior team for the season of 191 1 : Goal, Faricy; point, Peterson, and Foley ; cover point, Tierney, captain ; rover, Leonard, and Palmer; center, McNair; right wing, Bawlf ; left wing, Fitzgerald. SCHEDULE AND SCORES. Phoenix. Opponents. Dec. 20 — Second Phoenix 7 2 Dec. 21 — St. Paul Central High School 3 Dec. 24 — St. Paul Mechanic Arts High 2 i Jan. 14 — Lake Shores of Minneapolis 5 i Jan. 21 — Lake Shores of Minneapolis 8 3 Jan. 2^ — Clevelands, at Cleveland 3 2 Jan. 26 — Clevelands, at Cleveland i 3 Jan. 27 — Illinois A. C, at Chicago 5 8 Jan. 28 — Illinois A. C, at Chicago 5 8 Feb. 3— Duluth, at Duluth 6 4 Feb. 1 1— Duluth, at St. Paul 6 o Feb. 28— Ft. William, Ontario, at St. Paul 2 15 53 47 Although the youngest man on the Phoenix team, Bawlf, wag undoubtedly the fastest and perhaps the most brilliant player, Leonard at rover possessed the rare combination of weight, endurance and speed. A serious injury to his eye in practice prevented his participation in the final games of the season. Captain Tierney at cover suffered from sickness early in the season and did not really find himself until toward the close, w^hen he again played his position perfectly. McNair, at center, though not as fast as Bawlf and Leonard, showed great clever- ness in his stick work and deadly accuracy in shooting. Organized junior hockey came into prominence in St. Paul in the fall of 1909. Previous to that, the younger players had teams SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 29 of their own and played informal matches in a sort of impromptu fashion with other teams of their own age. In the year just mentioned, there being but two St. Paul teams in the Twin City League, it became evident that there was a field for another organization to include the younger hockey players. The Junior Amateur Hockey League of St. Paul was therefore organized with eight teams. A constitution and by-laws patterned after the senior T\vin City organization was adopted and a fifty-six game schedule adopted calling for two games between each two teams. The Phoenix and Chinook clubs entered their second teams in this league. These two sevens won respectively first and second places in 1910. Medals were presented to the mem- bers of the championship team at a banquet at the close of the season. Last year this Junior league changed its name to the St. Paul Amateur Hockey League. Eight teams again composed it, two new ones being admitted to fill the vacancies caused by the withdrawal of two teams of the previous season. Under the presidency of Walter B. Palmer in 1910, and John Grace in 191 1, the league has flourished and done much to promote the sport in popular favor. Last year a fifty-six-game schedule w^as again arranged, but weather conditions prevented the playing off of the final seven games. A. G. Spalding & Bros., through its St. Paul manager, Mr. E. B. Macaulay, offered a handsome silver trophy to the championship team. It so happened that the several teams in the league represented different sections of the city, and as each had their own rinks and followers, the rivalry between the con- testants was of the keenest. The teams in the league last year were the Wanderers, Iroquois, Second Phoenix, Second Chinooks, White Bears, Wasecas, Y. M. C. A., and Crocus Hills. At the close of the season their stand- ing on a percentage basis was as follows : W. L. PC. W. L. PC. Second Phoenix.. 10 2 .833 White Bear 5 7 -41/ Wanderers 10 3 -769 Iroquois 4 9 -SOO Chinooks 9 3 -750 Wasecas 3 ') -250 Crocus Hills .... 6 6 .500 Y. M. C. A 2 10 .167 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 31 These teams lined-up as follows : Second Phoenix— Goal, Faricy; point, Hallstrum; cover point, V. Palmer (captain); rover, Peterson; center, J. Grace; right nng, Bawlf; left v^ing, Capser. Chinooks — Goal, Fullerton; point, Holstrom ; cover point, F. Veinhagen (captain), and Boggs; rover, DeVinney; center, )eeger; right wing, Hunt; left wing, C. Weinhagen. Wanderers — Goal, Kartak; point, Knocke; cover point, Lar- on ; rover. Smith ; center, Codden ; right wing, Klinkerfues ^captain) ; left wing, Schaeffer. , Crocus Hills — Goal, Lankester ; point, D. Napier ; cover point, Dobner; rover, Culligan; center, Angell; right wing, Wessel, and Napier (captain) ; left wing. Sales. White Bear — Goal, Thompson, and Spink; point, Haussner; cover point, E. Markoe; rover, Goheen; center, S. Markoe (cap- tain) ; right wing. Lemon; left wing, Castner. Iroquois — Goal, T. Leonard; point, Swain (captain); cover point, H. Smith, and Le Claire; rover, Weidenborner ; center, Fillebrown; right wing, Sexton; left wing, O'Connor. Y. M. C. A. — Goal, Van Bergen ; point, Reilly ; cover point, G. Grace; rover, Hickey (captain) ; center, Hardendorf ; right wing, Milton; left wing, La Bissoniere. Wasecas — Goal, Bannister; point. Fuller; cover point, Dion; rover, P. Eldridge ; center, McGee ; right wing, De Lambert, and A. Eldridge (captain) ; left wing, Vassau. Total scores by teams in the league series were as follows: 0pp. 0pp. Second Phoenix 51 18 White Bear 34 37 Wanderers 39 32 Iroquois 18 36 Chinooks 60 24 Wasecas 25 36 Crocus Hills 19 34 Y. M. C. A .14 43 I The men who scored the greatest number of goals during the season were — Seeger (Chinooks) 21, C. Weinhagen (Chinooks) 17, H. Smith (Wanderers) 13, Goheen (White Bear) 12, Klin- kerfues (Wanderers) 12. and Bawlf (Phoenix) 11. ?;pArj)ixf;s ATnr.KTif ijbuary. 33 The Chinooks ancl Phoenix showed the best team work througli- ut the season, and seemed the best balanced teams. Some of le others showed notable ability m one game only, to be suc- eeded by a slump in the next game. The players deserving special mention for their work were Bawlf, the. cleverest for- ;ard in the league; W. Palmer and Peterson of- the Phoenix; lolstrom and Seeger of the Chinooks; Klinkerfues of the Wan- erers; Lankester and Napier of the Crocus Hills; Hickey of tie Y. M. C. A.; Goheen and Markoe of White Bear; Swain of lie Iroquois ; and McGee and Eldrfdge of the Wasecas, ^t a anquet of the Phoenix club at the Ryan Hotel after the close f the season, sweaters and championship medals were pre- ented to the members of the Second Phoenix team, and Mr. ^acaulay presented them with the Spalding Trophy. Next year the Junior League will be stonger than ever. It las already done much in developing players for the Senior earns and arousing public interest in the sport. As far as Senior lockey is concerned, it is possible that a Northwestern, or Tri- State league will be formed in the near future, including two ;eams from St. Paul, one each from Minneapolis, Duluth, Hal- ock, Crookston, and Bemidji in Minnesota, Fargo and Grand Forks in North Dakota, and Superior and Eau Claire in Wis- consin. Much credit is due to Mr, E. B, Macaulay of A. G. Spalding & Bros., Mr. F. A. Mclnery and Mr. Paul Bliss of the St. Paul Dispatch and Pioneer Press for their interest and imaterial assistance in the furtherance of hockey in St. Paul. Interscholastic hockey, w^hile no*- under any organized ha^gue or association in the Twin Cities, has been growing stronger each year. In 191 1, for the first time in the history oi^tlie game here, the Twin City Interscholastic championship failed to go to the Mechanic Arts High School of St. Paul. Last year St. Paul Central won the title. Mechanic Arts taking second place, Central High of Minneapolis third. West High of Minneapolis fourth, and East High of Minneapolis last. St. Paul Central High had a well-nigh perfect hockey machine. The men worked well 1. Angi'll, ('apt.; 2. G. Napier; 8, Culligan; 4. (Jiven, Mgr.; H, Sales; fi. D. Napier; 7, Bagley; 8. Dabner. CROCUS HILLS HOCKEY TEAM. ST. TAUL. MINN. 1, Peterson: 2, Bawlf; 3, Williams, Asst. Mgr.; 4, Foley; 5, Minser; _, Faricy; 7, W. Palmer, Capt. ; 8, Grace, Mgr.; 9, C-apser. Lee, Photo. PHOENIX SECOND HOCKEY TEAM, ST. PAUL, MINN. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 86 gether and showed the determination and fighting spirit that nabled them, a team lacking in experience, weight and age, to in from the heavier and veteran Mechanic Arts seven. Too inch credit cannot be given to Dick Hallstrum, cover point and aptain of the Central team, for the way he developed a cham- ionship seven of the poorest sort of material at the begin- ling of the season. Next year it is to be hoped a Twin City Interscholastic hockey eague will be formed, as last year some of the games were tancelled owing to the inability of the opposing schools to agree on the time and place where the games would be played. 1. Hatcher. Mj?r. ; 1', (iray. Coach ; ;'.. Eisonhavcr, Facultv Mjjr. : 4 Sampsav 5, Smith; 0, R. King. Cai.t.; 7. Hodges; S. France; I), II. King; 10. Cook. EAST HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, CLEVKI.AND, OHIO. T.. Lilly; -', Sfxtun; 3, Swain; 4, Weideuboruer; 5, Leelair- i, Leonard; 8, O Connor. j-^ti-iaii, IKOQUOIS HOCKEY TEAM, ST. PAUL, MINN. Fillebrown; Golling, Photo. 1 SPALt)ING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 37 Interscholastic Ice Hockey, 1910-11 Four teams comprised the Interscholastic Ice Hockey League. Each team played the other once, just as did the colleges in their league, making the series a round robin. Throughout the series Cutler stood head and should^s above the other three schools, which were Columbia Gramml^Irving School and the Collegiate School. Each team played four games, and Cutler did not lose one. In the game with Irving School a tie resulted and a play-off was necessary. While many other school teams played games in New York and elsewhere, only the four named comprised the league. At the time this Official Guide went to press, active plans were on foot to extend the scope of the Interscholastic League. By ^n increase of teams as members it was rightly concluded by those having the interests of the game at heart that ice hockey would be given needed and valuable stimulus. ji The school teams are an admittedly excellent preparatory medium for the propagation, development and training of prom- ising players for the college teams. Then, on leaving college, the lads are the better fitted to participate on the Amateur Hockey League sevens. Only a thorough training will fit one to win a position with an Amateur Hockey League club. In view of the scarcity of dependable new players at most times, it has long been evident to the followers of hockey, those who.love the sport for itself, that the Amateur League could do a timely and bene- ficial service by devising means to aid the preparatory schools in developing their hockey activities. '-' As evidence of the service rendered by experience on "prep" school hockey teams, it may be mentioned that nyiny of the 'best college players were sent from these institutions, particularly in the East, and that many of these players joined leading ^mateur teams after leaving college. ik&if^Ml 1. Keddy; 2, Lantz; ?,, Marcus; 4, Stanley; 5, Ednio; G, Collins; 7. Ilodge. Capt.; 8, Gale. Beach. Photo. LAFAYETTE HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, BUFFALO, N. Y. L Genereaiix; 2, C. Nelson; 3. Mun. m^u: 4, Hanson; 5. Duvall- 6 CROOKSTON (MINN.) HOCKEY TEAM. x SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LII'.RARY. 39 During the Interscholastic League race of the season of 191 1, several lads of distinctly superior ahility were noticed. We advise the college teams to keep track of them. Among them were James Cannon, Jr., the Cutler center ; John Ferris, captain of Cutler, and W-ashburn, the Cutler goal. The tie game between Cutler School and Irving School resulted in no score being made by either side ; in the play-off the score was: Cutler i, Irving o. This was the only league contest in which Irving met defeat. Irving finished second in the league race. Cutler defeated Collegiate School January 7, at the St. Nicholas Rink, New York, 5 — o; Cannon and Washburn doing brilliant work, and the victors walloped DeWitt Clinton High School January 13, 7 — o (the latter school not being a member of the league). Irving School trounced Columbia Grammar to the tune of 2 — 0, January 14. Columbia Grammar turned around and defeated Collegiate School by the same score on January 28. Many school teams not in the league put up a high class of hockey during the season. Groff school of New York was a case in point, and Stevens Prep was another. Stevens Prep defeated DeWitt Clinton High School January 28 at the St. Nicholas rink, 7 — o, and had played a 2 — 2 tie contest against Irving School on January 21. Stevens lost to Cutler February 21 by the score of 2 — I. Stevens won from Columbia Grammar, by 2 — i. Among other important victories Groff's puck pushers trounced Stevens 3 — o, February 10; the New Rochelle (N. Y.) High School, 3 — 2, on February 24, and the Yonkers (N. Y.) High School, 7 — 0, on February 17. Hackley School, Tarrytown, N. Y., had a successful hockey season as these scores show : Hackley 10, Columbia Grammar 0; Hackley 5, Holbrook i; Hackley 10, Collegiate School o; Hack- ley 5, Yonkers H.S. 0. Other active school teams were Fordham Prep., Stuyvesant High School, Harstrom School, Norwalk, Conn., which defeated Cutler 2 — I on February 10; Manual Training High School, and Syms School. 1. Meyers; 2 Taylor, Mgr. ; 3, French; 4, Barak; 5. McMorrow; G, Thornp- 7, Leeds; 8, Thielcher, Capt. Fisher, Photo' MECHANIC ARTS HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, BOSTON, MASS. 1, Laiikester; 2. Ward. Coach; 3, Tew. Mgr.; 4. J. TowDser.d: .1. L. Town- send; b, tulhgau; 7. Romans; 8, Hallstrom; 0, Stickney; 10, Angell. CENTRAL HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, ST. PAUL, MINN. GoUiug, Photo. SPALDINGS ATHLETIC LIimARY. 41 New York Scholastic Hockey League A. G. Spalding, the veteran follower of sports, has given a [handsome trophy to the newly formed New York Scholastic Hockey League, to become the possession of the school winning the championship for a period of one year. Six high schools are members of the league — Stuyvesant, Manual Training, Boys' High, Erasmus Hall, Townsend Harris Hall and DeWitt Clin- ton. The trophy, according to the plan of the donor, is to become the permanent property of the school winning the hockey championship three times. Fifteen games have been arranged for the league, three games to be played each w^eek until the schedule is completed. At a meeting of the High Schools Games Committee it was decided to recognize the league, and sanction for the sport was granted by Dr. Wright, secretary of the committee. The action of the High Schools Games Committee was the only thing necessary to complete the league's arrangements for adding the sport to the list of activities already indulged in by the high school boys. The Public Schools Athletic League will give eight medals for the winning team. A series of three games will be played between the winner of the New York Scholastic League and the Private School League for the Greater New York championship. 42 ^^ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey and Championship Rules of the American Amateur Hockey League Copyrighted, 1912, by American Amateur Hockey League. Section i. The game of Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. A Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec, 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or displaced, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point, and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play -shall any player who fills this position, lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 43 a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly in front of the point position. The four forward I positions shall be known as the left wing, th^ right wing, the center and the royer, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are supposed to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec S a Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at ihe blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec, 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. puck. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. officials. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires, two game timekeepers, and two penalty t^nekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to ofiiciate. his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in 44 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Other offtcial positions that may occur during a match; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree; or when the selected officials are absent at the advertised starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front He shall have.no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE GAME TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The game timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 4g The game timekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. They shall only tell the expired and unexpired time to the referee. DUTIES OF THE PENALTY TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 13. The penalty timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no penalized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the penalty time- keepers. They shall also keep an- accurate account of the time of any player who has been compelled to withdraw from the game and inform the referee when the said player is due again to report. They shall sit midway between the two goals, and shall be on the opposite side of the rink from the game time- keepers. They shall give an accurate report of all penalties imposed to the referee at the close of the match. All players penalized must sit with the penalty timekeepers. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 14. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minutes between the two periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and play shall be resumed at once, and continued until a goal has been scored. Should the tie remain unbroken at the expiration of twenty minutes of extra play, the referee shall declare the game a draw. The referee must start each period on schedule time. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 15. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by either referee, and shall begin again when the puck is put m play. 4g SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. SECTION l6 — SUBSTITUTES. Clause A — Substitutes shall be allowed only iil the case of injury. The injured player's ability to continue shall at once be decided by the referee. Should the referee decide that the in- jured player cannot finish the game, the opposing side may either allow a substitute or drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the opposing side decide to allow a substitute and no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing side has allowed a substitute he may appear at any time during the balance of the game. Clause B — Should the referee decide that the injured player would be able to continue within seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing team must drop a man until that time has expired, or until the injured player returns to the game. Should the injured player be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitute. If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must' play its full team. Once the opposing side has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a substitute or the player who has been injured. Clause C — Should a player be compelled to leave the game for any reason other than injury, the opposing side must drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the player who has first left the ice be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitution. If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing team has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a sub- stitute or the player who has first withdrawn from the game. Clause D — All substitutes or other players entering or return- ing to the game must first report to the penalty timekeepers and then to the referee. They must obtain the permission of the referee before they resume play. This clause does not refer to players who have been penalized. Clause E — Should it be necessary for the goalkeeper to retire SPALDING'S ATttT.ETTC LIBRARY. 47 rom the game, play shall stop until the player is once more able return to the contest. If at the end of seven minutes the goal- :eeper is not able to resume play the match must go on with 1 substitute being allowed in the position. At any time during he seven minutes the team that has called for time may elect o play a substitute until the original goalkeeper is able to resume he contest. H Clause F — A player other than the goalkeeper who has been replaced by a substitute cannot return to further participation in the game. Clause G — In exhibition or practice games this rule may be altered by the two captains. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. 17. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an oflfside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. FACE. Sec. 18. A face shall consist of the referee dropping the puck to the ice between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The puck shall not be considered in play until it has touched the ice. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at tne beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec. 19. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck 48 SPALDING'S ATfiLEttC LlBflAfii?. himself or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way , whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is him- self to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 20. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall interfere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lifting the puck. No player shall use profane or abusive language or conduct himself in an unsportsmanlike manner. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. PUCK FOULS. Sec. 21. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. i WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 22. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a ponit SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 49 five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there ifaced. PENALTIES. Sec. 23. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant , shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. CHAMPIONSHIP RULES. Section i. All games shall be played under the rules adopted by the American Amateur Hockey League. Sec. 2. The playing season shall be from December i to March 31 both days inclusive. Sec. 3. The championship shall be decided bv a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn by one delegate from each club to the annual convention. The club winning the greatest number of matches shall be declared the champion. Sec. 4. All championship matches shall be played on rinks arranged for by the Executive Committee of the American Ama- teur Hockey League. Sec. 5. The League shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same and to be recognized as the champion of the American Amateur Hockey League. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Any club winning the championship for three years, not necessarily in succession, shall become the permanent owner of the trophy. Sec. 6. Any team making default shall forfeit its right to compete for the championship and be liable to a fine of $ioo unless good reasons can be shown to the Executive Committee for defaulting. In case of default by any team all matches which have been scheduled for this team shall be credited as victories to its opponents. This rule shall also be applied in case of expulsion. Sec. 7. In all matches the Governing Committee shall appoint the referee, assistant referee, two game timekeepers, two penalty timekeepers and two goal umpires. Sec. 8. It shall be the duty of the captains of the contesting 50 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. teams to hand to the referee previous to the start of each match the names of his players written on forms supplied by the Sec- retary of the League. The referee shall fill in the date of the match and the names of contesting clubs, substitutes used, if any, the score at the end of the match, with names of other offi- cials, the whole to be duly signed by himself and forwarded immediately to the Secretary of the League. Sec. 9. "A." A player must have been an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for at least six months previous to being eligible to appear in any Amateur Hockey League Championship match and aiso must have been a bona fide member of the club he represents for at least thirty days before he is eligible to compete m any championship game, with the exception that players, who during the preceding season represented any recognized school or college in the United States of America need be an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for only sixty days previous to being eligible to appear in any League championship match. "B." No player shall compete in any Amateur Hockey League championship match, who, during the then current season has played with another club, school or college in a recognized hockey association championship series without the special permission of the executive committee of the Amateur Hockey League. "C." Any player who represents a club in a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League cannot represent another club m a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League for one full calendar year from his last championship game unless the said club that he formerly represented has withdrawn or has been expelled from the championship series of the Amateur Hockey League or unless he has been released by the said club that he formerly represented. A statement signed by the president and the secretary of the club that the player has left, and filed with the secretary of the Amateur Hockey League, shall be considered an official release, A player who believes that his release is being unjustly withheld may appeal to the Executive Committee of the Amateur Hockey League, The Committee may grant such release after giving due notice to all parties interested. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 51 Sec. 10. Any new player who desires to take part in a cham- pionship game of the Amateur Hockey League must first fill out a certificate supplied by the Secretary of the organization. The certificate must state the full name and address of the player. The club he desires to represent; where he is employed. His legal residence for six months prior to the filing of the certificate and the names of the team or teams with whom he has played during the three years prior to the filing of the document. The certificate must be signed by the president and the secretary of the club with whom the candidate desires to play who also must attest to its accuracy. The filing of the signed certificate shall bind the player and the club named in the document for the period of one year, unless he is regularly released by the organi- zation. A player can file only one such certificate with the Secretary of the League. Sec. II, The Secretary of each club shall file with the Secre- tary of the American Amateur Hockey League at least thirty days prior to opening of the championship season a list of the players of his club. The Secretary of each club shall also file with the Secretary of the American Amateur Hockey League the names of any additional players immediately upon their being elected to membership. Sec. 12. All matches must be started at 830 p. m., and if for any reason there be any delay in the commencement of a match the club at fault shall pay to the League as a penalty the sum of $10, unless good reason be given for such delay. The referee is to see that this rule is observed and to notify the League within two days should any breach of it occur. Sec. 13. The puck used in all championship matches must be the official puck of the League. Sec. 14. Goal nets must be approved by the Executive Com- mittee of the League. gfALDlNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Constitution of the American Amateur Hockey League Adopted at the Convention held in New York, November 9. 1899. Revised November 9, 1911. ARTICLE I. The name of this organization shall be 'The American Amateur Hockey League." ARTICLE II. Its object shall be to improve, foster and perpetuate the game of Hockey in the United States, protect it from professionalism, and to promote the cultivation of kindly feeling among the mem- bers of Hockey clubs. ARTICLE HI. Section i. The Executive Committee shall be named at the annual convention by each respective club, and shall consist of one representative from each club. The officers shall be a Presi- dent, a Vice-President and a Secretary-Treasurer, who shall be elected from and by the Executive Committee. Every member of the Executive Committee shall be entitled to a vote. All officers and members of the Executive Committee shall hold office until their successors are elected. Sec. 2. Any vacancy occurring in the Executive Committee may be filled at a regular meeting of the said Committee. Sec 3. Three members of the Executive Committee shall be elected by it to be a Special Committee, which shall be known as the Governing Committee. ARTICLE IV. Section i. The President shall preside at all meetings of the Association and Executive Committee. He shall have a vote upon all questions. He shall call special meetings of the Executive « SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 53 Committee or of the League whenever he deems them necessary, or when requested in writing to do so by any two clubs in the Association, who shall specify their reasons for desiring such a meeting. Sec. 2. The Vice-President shall perform the duties of the President in his absence. Sec. 3. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep an accurate record of the proceedings of the League and the Executive Committee, a register of the clubs in the League, and the names of office bearers and the address of the club Secretary. He shall conduct all correspondence of the League and the Executive, keep a record of the decisions of the latter on all points of appeal, protest and complaint. He shall notify all officers and clubs of their election, issue all notices of meetings, keep a correct account of moneys received and disbursed by him and report to the League. He shall bank all funds in trust. Sec. 4. "A." The Executive Committee shall view and decide upon all business submitted to them, and shall generally manage the Association, provided, however, that nothing herein contained shall give the Executive Committee jurisdiction over matters coming within the scope of the Governing Committee, unless same come before the Executive Committee in appeal. Sec. 4. "B," In case of a tie at any meeting of the League or Executive Committee, the presiding officer shall cast an additional vote. Sec. 5. The Governing Committee shall hear all appeals, pro- tests and complaints, .and decide all questions arising during the Championship Season relative to the eligibility of players ; dis- putes between contesting clubs or teams ; appeals against rulings of match officers or otherwise; and generally take full charge, control and management of the championship games and all club members of this League. Sec. 6. It shall be the duty of the Governing Committee to make inquiry regarding any player whose amateur status or whose method or manner of playing is questioned and all charges shall be entered with the chairman of the committee, who shall provide for an investigation by a member or members of the 54 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. committee. Pending investigation, the player against whom i charges are brought may be suspended. Suspicious circumstances, ; public or private criticism, which are in the judgment of any y member of the Executive Committee sufficient to make the status s or the rights of any player a matter of reasonable doubt, shall 1 be the basis of investigation in absence of formal charges. The Governing Committee shall immediately communicate with i the player under suspicion, either in person or by registered I letter, lay all charges before him or set forth the circumstances ^ which led to the reasonable doubt as to the player's rights to ) participate in championship games of the Amateur Hockey ' League and call for an answer to the charges or a satisfactory ' explanation of the circumstances which gave rise to the doubt or " the questionable incident. If the athlete cannot satisfactorily prove his innocence, the ■. committee may inflict such punishment as in its judgment shall 1 seem fitting Any player who shall refuse to testify before the : committee or to answer any question that the committee shall rule to be proper, shall be liable to suspension or such discipline as the committee may determine until he has purged himself of such failure or refusal. Such investigation also may be made regarding any player who is suspected of wilfully and persist- ently breaking any or all of the laws of hockey, the championship rules or the constitution of the Amateur Hockey League. ARTICLE V. Section i. The League shall hold its annual convention on the second Thursday in November, in the City of New York. Sec. 2. A quorum at any Executive or League meeting shall consist of not less than three-quarters of the clubs in the league. Sec. 3. Clubs shall be notified of time and place of annual meeting at least two weeks previously. Sec. 4. Each club in the Association shall be entitled to two delegates, and each delegate shall have one vote. Each dele- gate must be in good standing with the club he represents. Sec. 5. No delegate shall be admitted to the convention unless he shall have filed with the Secretary a certificate of his appoint- SrALDING'S ATHLETIC LIRRAUY. 55 ment signed by the President and Secretary of the club he repre- sents. Sec. 6. Order of business for meetings. I. CalHng of the roll. 2 Reading of the minutes of the preceding meeting. (Annual mniutes at annual meeting. Executive minutes at executive meet- ing.) 3 Treasurer's Report. 4. Election of Committees, officers. 5. New business. 6 Election of clubs to membership. 7. Report of Committees. 8, Unfinished business. ARTICLE VI. Section i. The players representing clubs in this League must be Amateurs. definition of an amateur. Sec. 2, An Amateur is one who has never competed for a money prize or staked bet, or with or against a professional for any prize, or who has ever taught, pursued or assisted in the practice of athletic exercise as a means of obtaining a livelihood, or who has never entered any competition under a name other than his own. Sec. 3. The Amateur rule of the A. A. U. is adopted by this League and embodied in this Constitution. Sec. 4. No club shall be admitted to membership in this League unless it adopts in its Constitution the words or senti- ments of this Article. ARTICLE VII. Section i. The annual fee for each club in the League shall be $10, payable when application for membership in the League is made and at each annual meeting thereafter. Sec. 2. Any club whose fee shall remain unpaid later than January ist in any year shall not be entitled to representation, or to vote at any meeting, nor be represented by any team in the 56 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Championship Series, and shall be considered to have forfeited all right to membership in this League. ARTICLE VIIL Section i. Any Hockey Club desiring to join this League shall send to the Secretary an application for membership not later than November ist; also copies of its Constitution and By-Laws sufficient in number to furnish one to each club in the League and one additional for the Secretary-Treasurer of the League, a list of its officers and names of members together with mem- bership fee as prescribed in Article VIL Sec. 2. Tlie League shall have the privilege of limiting the number of clubs in the League. ARTICLE IX. Section i Any club wishing to make an appeal, protest or complamt to the Governing Committee must within three days i from the time at which the cause of complaint, appeal or protest : occurred, submit to the Governing Committee, in writing (in duplicate), a full and detailed account of the matter in appeal, protest or complaint, signed by the President and Secretary of the Complainant Club. All such appeals, protests or complaints shall be accompanied by the sworn statements of all witnesses in sup- port thereof. Such complaint shall be mailed, postage prepaid, by registered letter to the Chairman of Governing Committee, who shall within one day of the receipt of same mail one copy thereof m like manner to the Secretary of the Club complained against. Within three days of the receipt of any such appeal, protest or complaint the answer of the responding club must be in the hands of the Chairman of the Governing Committee, duly signed by the President and Secretary of such club, accompanied also by the sworn statement of all witnesses to be used in reply to such appeal, protest or complaint. A failure to make appeal, protest or complaint, or to answer as hereinbefore provided, shall finally and absolutely debar the defaulting club of a hearing. Sec. 2. The Governing Committee shall at once meet and con- sider the appeal, protest or complaint, and within three days after SrALDlNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 57 receipt of reply render its decision in the premises, and forth- with notify both clubs by registered letter as above provided. Such decision shall in all cases be final and without appeal, except as hereinafter provided. Sfx. 3. Any club wishing to appeal from the decision of the Governing Committee may, within three days after receipt of decision, as provided in Section ii of this Article, take appeal to the Executive Committee in the following manner ■ The club so desiring to appeal shall at the same time furnish the Secretary of the Association with two copies of its appeal, protest or complaint (with sworn statements of its witnesses), signed by the President and Secretary of such club, and shall deposit with him the sum of $25. Upon these conditions being complied with, the Secretary of the Association shall immediately forward one copy to the club complained against, which shall within three days make reply to such appeal, protest or complaint and submit sworn statements of its witnesses. The Secretary of the Association shall then call a meeting of the Executive to be held within thre? days, stat- ing the object of such meeting. Both clubs shall submit their briefs of evidence at this meet- ing, and the decision of the Executive on a two-thirds vote of those present on the hearing of the appeal, protest or complaint shall be filed. If the decision be in favor of the complaining club, the deposit of $25 shall forthwith be returned, but if the decision be adverse, the deposit shall be forfeited to the League Sec. 4. The Executive, on motion may direct both clubs to appear with their witn-esses for examination orally by the Execu- tive on any such appeal. ARTICLE X. Section i. The League may suspend or expel any player or any club for notorious or continued foul play or unfair conduct, or for any persistent infringement of the laws of the game or the rules of the League. Sec. 2. Any player or any club so suspended may be read- mitted by making an ample official apology, in writing, to the 58 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARif. Executive Committee and promising future compliance with the Constitution and By-Laws of the League. ARTICLE XL Sfxtion I. No amendment or alteration shall be made in any part of the Constitution, except at the Annual Convention of the League and by a three-fourths vote of the members present. Notice of and full particulars of any proposed alterations or amendment must be made to the Secretary of the League, in writing, and by him communicated to the clubs in its membership, in writing, at least two weeks before it can be voted upon. When notice of alteration or amendment has been given, as above, both the notice and amendment thereto may be voted upon at the Annual Convention. i' ^-^ y^u"' ^^^^^' -: <^ai"t*'r. Faculty Mgr.; 3, Cobb. Student Mgr.; 4. Cruder; 5, bmith; 6 Huggius; 7, Keeler, Capt.; 8, Francis; 9, Gordon; 10, Brick; 11, Way; 12, Young. SHAW HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, CLEVELAND, OHIO. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 9FFICIAL RULES GOVERNING PLAY FOR THE STANLEY CUP The cup was given, as Lord Stanley said in his letter, "To be leld by the champion hockey team of the Dominion." The con- iitions he imposed were : 1. The winners to give bond for the return of the cup in good Dfder when required by the trustees for the purpose of being landed over to any other team who may in turn win. 2. Each winning team to have at their own charge engraved Dn a silver ring fitted on the cup for the purpose the names of the team and the year won. ^. The cup shall remain a challenge cup, and will not become the property of any team, even if won more than once. ' 4. In case of any doubt as to the title of any club to claim the position of champions, the cup shall be held or awarded by the trustees as they may think right, their decision being absolute. 5. Should either trustee resign or otherwise drop out, the remaining trustee shall nominate a substitute. In dealing with challenges and matches since 1893, the trustees have observed the following principles : 1. So far as the A. H. A. of C. is concerned, the cup goegj with the championship each year without the necessity of any special or extra contest. Similarly in any other association. 2. Challengers from outside the A. H. A. of C. are recognized by the trustees only from champion clubs of senior provincial associations and in order received. 3. When a challenge is accepted the trustees desire the two competing clubs to arrange by mutual agreement all terms of the contest themselves, such as a choice of date, of rink, division of the gate money, selection of officials, etc. The trustees do not wish to interfere in any way, shape or form if it can be avoided. 4. Where competing clubs fail to agree, the trustees have observed and will continue to observe as far as practicable the following principles : 60 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRABX. (a) The cup is to be awarded by the result of one match or of best two out of three, as seems fairest as regards other fix- tures. The trustees would be willing, however, if desired, to allow / the contest to be decided by a majority of goals scored in two : matches only (instead of the best two matches in three). (b) Contest to take place on ice in the home city, the date and choice of rink to be made or approved by the trustees. (c) The net gate money given by the rink to be equally divided li between the competing teams. j (d) If the clubs fail to agree on a referee, the trustees to ; appoint one from outside the competing cities, the two clubs to ] share the expenses equally. (e) If the clubs fail to agree on other officials, the trustees to ) authorize the referee to appoint them, the expenses, if any, to be '.' shared equally by the competing clubs. (f) No second challenge recognized in one season from the i same hockey association. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY 01 ONTARIO H. A. RULES 1. The game Is played on ice by teams of seven on each side, with a puck made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all .through and three inches in diameter. STICKS. 2. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at 'any part, and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. They shall consist entirely of wood, with tape binding per- missible. GOAL. I 3. A goal is placed in the middle of each goal line, composed ! of official goal nets supported by two upright posts, four feet in height, placed six feet apart, and at least five feet from the end of the ice. The goal posts shall be firmly fixed. In the event of a goal post or net being displaced or broken, the referee shall blow his whistle, and the game shall not proceed until the post or net is replaced. It shall be the duty of the referee before each match to measure the goals. §. MATCH. - 4. Each side shall have a captain (a member of his team), who, before the match, shall toss for choice of goals. 5. Each side shall play an equal time from each end, a ten minutes' rest being allowed at half time. The duration of cham- pionship matches shall be one hour, exclusive of stoppages. The team scoring the greater number of goals in that time shall be de- clared the winner of the match, subject to the qualifications con- tained in Rules of Competition, No. 15. If at the end of that time the game is a draw, ends shall be changed and the match continued for ten minutes, each side playing five minutes from each end with a rest of five minutes between such five minute ends, and if neither side has then scored a majority of goals, similar periods of ten minutes shall be played in the same way until one side shall have scored a majority of goals. 62 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. TIME-KEEPERS. 6. Two time-keepers shall be appointed, one by each captain, before the commencement of the match, whose duty it shall be to keep an accurate account of the time of each game, deducting time for stoppages in the actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in their time, and the matter shall be at once decided by him. The referee also shall appoint a time-keeper, who shall keep the time of penalized players, and \. shall direct them to enter the game. The time-keepers shall be ;. under the control of the referee. A gong shall be kept for their f use. REFEREE. 7. There shall be only one referee for a match, and in no case ; shall he belong to either of the competirig clubs, and he may be an amateur or a professional. He is to enforce the rules; ad- judicate upon disputes or cases unprovided for by rule; appoint or remove goal umpires ; control the time-keepers ; keep the score, announcing each goal as scored ; and at the conclusion of the match declare the result. The puck shall be considered in play until the referee stops th- game, which he may do at any time, and which he must do at once when any irregularity of play occurs, by sounding a whistle. His decision shall be final. SCORE. 8. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed be- tween the goal posts from in front and below the tops of the posts. GOAL UMPIRES. 9. There shall be one umpire at each goal ; they shall inform the referee when arranged for by the home club, subject to the approval of the ; Association. Rink must be at least one hundred and seventy-five : feet long by sixty-five feet in width. Goals shall be six feet : wide and four feet high, and provided with goal nets, such as i approved by the Association. The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 5. The home club shall furnish the referee with a new ' puck for each match. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the official puck of the league, -must be used in all matches. Sec. 6. All matches shall be started at 8.30 P. M., unless other- wise agreed upon by the competing clubs, and if, for any reason, there be more than fifteen minutes' delay in the commencement of a match, the club at fault shall, unless good reasons be given to the President for the delay, pay to the Association as a pen- alty the sum of twenty-five dollars. The referee shall state in his report to the Secretary of the Association if more than fifteen minutes' delay occurred in the commencement of the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 71 match, giving cause of such delay and naming the club at fault. [Upon receipt of this information the President shall decide Whether or not the club be fined. Sec. 7. Visiting clubs shall be allowed traveling expenses (by the home club) as follows : Between Montreal and Ottawa, eighty-five dollars ;" between Montreal and Quebec, one hundred dollars; between Ottawa and Quebec, one hundred and twenty- five dollars. Sec. 8. — The Association shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same, and be recognized as champions. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Sec. 9. — Any club winning the championship three times shall become absolute owners of the trophy. Sec. id. Any team making default shall forfeit the right to compete for the championship for that season, no matches played with defaulting clubs shall count. Unless a written notice signed by the President and Secretary of the club be sent to the Secre- [ taries of the opposing team and Association, five days previous to the match, signifying the club's intention to default, the , defaulting club shall pay to the opposing team within thirty days : a fine of one hundred dollars. 72 SPALDING'S ATHLEiTIC LIBRARY. Constitution of the Intercollegiate Hockey League ARTICLE I. The title of this orgamzation sliall be "The Intercollegiate Hockey League."' ARTICLE IL The object of the organization shall be to govern the playing of the game of ice hockey among its members, to provide rules therefor, and to arrange annually a series of games for the cham- pionship of the League. ARTICLE III. The League shall consist of ice hockey teams representing Columbia University, Dartmouth College, Harvard University, Princeton University, Yale University, and such others as m-ay be admitted at any annual meeting by a majority vote. (Cornell University admitted November 8, 1909.) ARTICLE IV. (a) The annual meeting shall be held in New York City dur- ing the month of October of each year on a day to be fixed by the Advisory Committee, hereinafter provided for, a majority of the members constituting a quorum. (b) Special meetings may be called by the Advisory Committee whenever in their judgment one is necessary and a special meet- ing must be called by the Secretary upon the written request of any three members of the League. (c) At all meetings each member shall have one vote but may be represented by three delegates. ARTICLE V. (a) At the annual meeting, or thereafter, each member shall be entitled to designate a representative, preferably a graduate, *\ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 73 serve on an Advisory Committee, until the following annual I neeting. Should the representative so designate fail or cease to erve, another may be designated to take his place. (b) The Advisory Committee shall interpret the playing rules, .rrange for playing, off any tie in the League Championship and liall decide all questions of dispute which may arise among the nembers of the League and all other points not covered by the Constitution ; it shall generally do all such things as it may be •equested to do by the League. ARTICLE VL (a) Shortly after the annual meeting, the nuembers of the Aidvisory Committee shall meet and elect from their own num- ber a Chairman, a Vice-Chairman and a Secretary-Treasurer. ;Vacancies shall be filled as they may occur. 'I (b) The Chairman, or in his absence the Vice-Chairman, shall preside at all meetings of the League and of the Advisory Com- mittee. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep a record of all meetings of the League and Advisory Committee, shall notify members of the annual and special meetings and shall keep an account of the funds of the League, reporting whenever called upon to do so. ARTICLE VIL Annual dues shall be fixed by the Advisory Committee but shall Inot exceed Ten dollars a year. ARTICLE VIII. Additions and amendments to this Constitution may be made at any annual meeting by a majority vote. 74 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League (Adopted October 30, 1909.) Section i. The game of Intercollegiate Hockey shall bi played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be oi skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. Tht team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. The Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet .apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or dis-j placed, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow playj to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point and forwards, respectively. The goal position 1 shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period I during the play shall any player who fills this position lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly A SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 75 in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the centre and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are intended to fill when the teams face oflf in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5. A Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. OEFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires and two timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in other official positions that may occur during a match; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree ; or when the* selected 76 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. officials are absent at the agreed starting hour. In the ever of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee maj remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see ths the other officials are in their proper places. He shall see th£ the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply witi the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencemeni of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He] shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. He shall begin and suspend play by means of a whistle. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing timie that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front. He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance Sf»ALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 77 time, and the referee shall decide the matter. The timekeepers iiall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no pen- lized player shall return to the ice without the permission of e timekeepers. The timekeepers shall be notified by the feree when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record the tallies. The' final score shall be given by them to the feree at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, tify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes ave expired. They shall, at half time notify the referee when m minutes have expired. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 13. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, rith an intermission of ten minues between the two periods of lay. At the end of the forty minutes' play, should the score e tied, the teams shall change goals, and after an intermission of ve minutes play shall be resumed for a period of ten minutes. )hould the score be tied at the end of this period, play shall be resumed after an intermission of five minutes and continued mtil a goal has been scored. The captains of the contesting .:eams with the consent of the referee, after the regular periods md the first extra period have been played, may agree on another nethod of playing off a tie score, but in the absence of such igreement and consent, the tie must be played off in accordance with the provisions of this Law. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 14. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by the referees, and shall begin again when the puck is DUt in play. No delay of more than five minutes shall be allowed. SUBSTITUTES. Sec. 15. Substitutes shall be allowed at any time during a 2^ame, but a player who has been replaced by 9 substitute shall lot be allowed to re-enter the game. 78 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. i6. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowei that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, ai offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shal decide upon these points, and may render his decision even aftei the puck has passed between the goal posts. A line not men than one-half an inch wide shall be drawn on the ice from the center of one goal post to the center of the other. To effect a score the puck must have completely passed this line. FACE. Sec. 17. A face is the placing by the referee of the puck upon the ice on its largest surface between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The referee shall then order the play to begin. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at the beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. i OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec 18. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line thanr is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck himi- self or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is himself to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 79 FOUL PLAYING. 1 Sec. 19. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player 'shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand, body or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall inter- fere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lift- ing the puck. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. ^^^^ ^^^^^ Sec. 20. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, .however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. '[ Sec. 21. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind ! the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point \ five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul I occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck I shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec. 22. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. POWERS OF CAPTAINS. Sec. 23. The captains of the opposing teams shall have the powder to agree upon any matter not covered in the aforesaid laws. JACK SPRATT, Dixon, Photo. St. Michael's Hockey Team, Toronto, Can. Liffiton, Crescent Athletic Club, ^ SbJrreff, Crescent Athletic Club; 4 Britton. Hockey Club of New York; „„ *- a;; 3. Walk^n-; 4. Field: .-, Dewing; 0. Little; Hiiuter: n. A. Johnson. Capt. ; 9. Parkor; 10. P. Johusou, Mg?. HARTFORD (CONN.) HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEA??"' ^*'°^''' A Dion WASECA HOCKEY TEAM. ST. PAUL, MINN. r. Kklrcdgo; Jackson: Remor, Mgr. ; 7. I'mb. I'buto. 1. Morse; 2, Brett; 3. Carreau: 4 Knott B. Brower. Capt.; 8, Pope; 9. Bloilgett. COLLEGIATE SCHOOL HOCKEY TLAM. ^L\^ \OKK tir\. |||l|||H|l|flK **j^^BMRHiHI mm ■1 IH m ^1 ^^H ijibw Wh 1 1 PI I^^B * ^f'T^^^^^^^B i 1 4t% :.mm ^ "- ' -A a -"^m' ^ '1 * - i^^^^l ^^M- ^^b i^,, > /^ '-^^^C- 1^ H BB.|||||||>- ^^H 1, Hamilton; 2. F'arrell: 3 Mayoi; 4. Silverthorue; 5, Cunningham; <; Bayne; 1.. Brown; 8, Bryant. Pach, I'hotu GROFF SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, NEW YORK CITY. Bot&{; I. g^^les '' P'^"'^^'!^-: ^- Grafton; 5. Bray; 6. Mackle; 7. BRAE BURN SECOND HOCKEY TEAM, BOSTON, MASS. !!?E THE SPALDING TRADEMARK '^Klf .DING AUTOGRAPH HOCKEY STICKS ;ived each season a great number of requests for special hockey sticks similar to those that pplied to the most prominent players, we obtained the permission of the following famous lupply sticks duplicating their special models exactly, and each bearing the autograph signature - The quality, it is needless to say, is the best obtainable, and we feel certain our customers these really superb sticks. Be sure to mention the particular model you desire when ordering. '^: "ZiJL* .Model ph (Forward) Each, 75c. Model ph (Defence) > Each, 75c. Model iph (Forward) Each, 75c. Tom Phillips Model This is a medium-weight forward stick, very fat on the bottom and with a very stiff handle. Strongly endorsed by the Captain of the famous Kenora Team of Rat Portage, Ont., former Champions of the World. A long-handled defence stick, upright model. This player is very tall and plays the puck very close to himself. Russell Bowie Model This is a light weight forward stick, same as used by a great many of the most famous players in Canada. Bowie says : "I have found it to be one of the best sticks I have ever used." ^^^ y* xuiey nem noaei ^ ^XA«c-t-t<__Model "Phis is a Built Up goal stick, made after suggestions of the great _ _ , _ -. ^^^ goal player, Riley Hern, who says: "This model of goal stick ipn (fxOal) Up I consider is the best possible model for any goal tender to Each, $1.00 use and I highly recommend it." LDING CHAMPIONSHIP HOCKEY STICKS ffr^^ -tj^^jj: it.- tt w RcKolar Forward No. O TT rr— ir-T)-^t Ix>nK Blade For he finest se- aadian rock .usively used -sed by the 2am of Ot- the Victoria innipeg, and •ock team of former champions, in addition to the famous Kenora team and many other well ms. These sticks will not fray at the bottom where they come in contact with id will retain their shape under all conditions. The very important matter of d balance has been carefully considered and the Spalding Sticks are much lighter, :er, than any others on the market. Tnampionship Stick, Regular Forward Model. Championship Stick, Long Blade, Forward Model. [Championship Stick, Defence Model iTTENTIONGIVENTOl OMMUNICATIONS IRESSEBTOUS A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIOE FRONT COVEB OF THIS BOOK • in effect July 6. 191 1- Subject (o change without notiCf. fv C»n««lian price, .ee ipecial Canaduin Cat.logu« Spalding << Official" Hockey Pucks No. 13. The Spalding "Official" Trade-Mark has been adopted as the official puck of "The adian Amateur Hockey League," composed ol; following world-famed teams: Montreal, ShamJ Quebec, Victoria and Westmount. Each, ej No. I 5. The Spalding "Practice Puck is n '. tion size, and really better than the so-called tff pucks turned out by other manufacturers. Each.SJ Extract firom Official Rales of thcl Canadian Amateur Hockey Leagm Sec. 13. The Spalding Hockey Puck, t\ Official Puck of the League, must be used all match games. I THAT OCR IKADE ITSEXF DOC ^- < - No. I . Made on the lines of our best grade Regular Forward Stick, and of selected and well seasoned timber. Very popular as an all-around stick. . . Each. 60c. No. a. Spalding "Practice" Hockey Stick. Regulation size and made of good quality timber. A very serviceable stick. , it \ . Each, 26c. Spalding **Regulsim Hockey StI Spalding "Practil Hockey Stick Spalding Hockey Gloves No. HG. This is one of the best hockey gloves ever made, giving ample pn tion to all bones and joints in the player's hand, at the same time I extremely light and comfortable to wear. Made of brown leather, witlt buckskm palm, and gauntlet padded with rattan reeds. Furnished int sizes, large and medium. .... Per pair, 83 No. L. Unpadded drab buck- skin gauntlet glove. Made extra long and a very popu- lar style. Per pair, 83.00 Spalding Ice Hockey Goals No. A. Special goals, with extra spikes to stick into ice. Strong steel frame, with Jfieavy twine netting. Per pair. 820.00 No. B. Regulation style goals, with steel frame and twine netting. Uprights arranged to go into ice. Per pair, 8 1 8.00 PROMPT AnENTION GIVEN TO jm COMMUNICATIONS •^ MDmSiOTOUS ^ A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST of; SEE INSIDE FRONT C OFTHISBOOtii Prie»» in •ffiet July 5, 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Cuudian pric«» aee (peciar Can«diM Cat«l«l' Spalding Leg, Knee and Shin Guards Spalding Le^ Guards for Goal and Defense No. 6G.- This special leather covered leg guard for goal keepers is made specially for ice hockey. It extends from the instep to and above the thigh, is hinged at the knee, affording perfectly free action and gives ample protection to the whole leg. Well padded with reeds which are covered with soft pads to allow the puck to fall to the ice at the feet of the goal tender, thus enabling him to send it out of danger. Per pair, $6.00 No. 60. Canvas Leg Guard. Specially padded. Per pair, $3. 50 Spalding Shin Guards for Forward Players. No. 6X. Fiber molded shin guard, with special felt padding extending over knee and extra felt piece at bottom to ward off shin. For forward players. Enthusiastically approved by the most prominent Hockey players in the United States and Canada. Per pair, $2.50 No. 7. Made of .molded 'fiber, with leather straps to ward off shin bone, and bound with felt at ankle. To be worn under stockings. Per pair, $l,.00 Spalding Hockey Pants Unpadded— Fly Front— Lace Back No. • . White or Black Sateen. Pair, $1.26^ $12.00 Doz. No. 2. White or Black Sateen.. I.OO* 10.00 " Na3. White or Black Sateen. .75 • 7.80 " No. 4. White, Black or Gray Jean, -50* 6.00 " Stripes down sides of any of these pants, ( per pair extra, 2 S c if$2.W Dozen pairs. Spalding Hockey Pants for Forwards Nok 6B. Made of heavy Brown or White Canvas, hips padded lightly. ^^^p loose fitting. , Jpalding Hockey Jerseys Mixes carried !n stock regularly in all qualitin :. 2S to 44 ' hei cheat. Other ailel at an advanced price. II' two inchei for stretch in all our jerseys, and sizes m d accordingly. It is suggested, however, that for b' y men a size about two inches larger than coat Itiment be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. I!' Full regular made.that is.knit to exact f;n machine and then put together by Soecial quality worsted; solfd colors. Each, $4.00 • $42.00 Doz. P. Solid colors, worsted. ] Each, $2. 60 -Ar $25.20 Doz. I COLORS-PLAIN C0L0RS-W« eairy these Jersey* f the followini colors: if Blue BUck Cray Maroon ^L ORDERS- We aUo fumUh without extra charge. oS J er» for one-half doien or more, not carried in stock, io ling colort. (On orders for leu than one-half doteo, lit wUI be added to regular price.) 1 Scarlet Dark Green Yellow Royal Rlae Irish Green Seal BroWB Columbia Blae Purple Old Gold tlort than as noted above, to order only, SOc. each extra, designate three shades which are sometimes called RED. >caret, Cardinal and Marooo. Where R£0 it specified .ardual wUI be suppUed. Very Pair, Sl.OO • $9.60 Dof, Spalding Full Length Tights Best worsted; full fashioned, stock colors and Per pair, $4.00 Cut worsted, stock colors and sizes. Per pair, S2.00 • $21 60 Doz. No.SA. Cotton, full quality White. Black, Flesh. . Per pair, s i - oo ■4f$i0M Doz. Spalding Eyeglass Protector for Hockey Pat. Oct. 12. 1909 Made of strong annealed wire, nicely pad- ded, and a thorough orotection for eye- glasses or spectacles- Each, S2.00 The prices printed in italics opposite items marked with -k will be quoted only on orders for one-half doz'in or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with ir TAHENTIONGIVENTOl COMMUNIGATIIINS IDDRESSED TO US O I A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES .SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER |0 OFTKISBOOI C «es ia t/ U t et Mg 9^ IM>, SHhi«a to change without noti^ Foir Oinadiao price* «e« tpecial CanadI; SEETHE SPALDING IRADEiyiARK^ui Spalding " Intercollegiate ' Expert Hockey Skates SPECIAL NOTICE-These skates are i ade to be used on the chocs or with heavy skating shoes made with (nil I These skates are built especially for expert hockey flayers, and represent a distinct advance in skate manufacture. The model and general features of construction were suggested to us by some of the most prominent players on intercollegiate hockey teams. Runners aremadeoffinestqualitychromenickel steel, highly tempered and drawn so as to toughen them and give a razor cutting edge. Toe and heel plates of fine quality cold rolled steel. All highly polished and ex- tra heavy nickel-plated. Sizes 10,10%, 11, 11%, 12 in. No. XH. Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skates. . . Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing "Intercollegiate" Hockey Skate fattAlltii to Spalding Shoe No. 339 -• No. XH. Spalding sreollegiate" Expert Hockey Skate Spalding Tubular Hockey Skates IMPROVED MODEX TheSe skates represent a considerable advance over anything ever produced before in the way of tubular hockey skates. Our experience during the past seven years in turning out properly made tubular ice skates enables us to build skates which while ex- tremely light in weight are at the same time the strongest tubular skates made, and this means much, to the expert hockey player. Runnersof extra quality chrome nickel steel, specially tempered. This steel is very tough and is absolutely the best obtainable for the purpose. The model has the endorsement of actual use by the most famous players in Canada. Sizes 9%, 10, 10%, 11, 11%, 12 inches foot length. Spalding Tubular Steel Hockey Skates. Alumi- num finish. . . . Per pair, $6.00 Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, complete, attached Per pair, $11.00 Showing Spalding Tubular Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 339 PROMPT MENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US FOR COMPLETE LIST OF !j SEE INSIDE FRONT CO j OF THIS BOO^ J effect July 5, 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Catalog A. G. SPALDING &, BROS. STORES- IN ALL LARGE CITIES 1?p THE SPALDING QUALITY Spalding 'Xhampionship'' Hockey Skates-Men's THE SKATES THAT MADE THE GAME OF HOCKEY FAMOUS Blades of finest quality chrome nickel steel, hard- ened. This steel is specially noted for its toughness. Extra heavy electro-nickel-plated and highly pol- ished throughout. Each pair in a box No. XS. Made in sizes 9% to 12 in. Pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 336 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair. $10.00 The selection of the proper style skates is no more important than the selection of correct model shoes to be worn with them. Spalding shoes are built particularly to fit Spalding skates, and the styles we illustrate in combination are the ones most suit- able and which will give the best of satisfactior>^ No. XS. Championship Patte Wng Cha ,- - [fastened to 5 p Ladies' Hockey Skate ng Shoe No. 350 Spalding "Championship" Hockey Skates-Ladies* No. XSL. Ladies' Championship Hockey Skates, similar to No. XS Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 9 to 10% inches. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. . Per pair, $10.00 Spalding Sliating Shoes are made in various quaN ities and styles. NTIONGIVENTOI MUNICATIONS SSEDTOUS A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES , FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK i effect July 5, 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Catalogue sSbSeTHESPALDINGJ^ TRADEMARK Spalding Men's Hockey Skates CANADIAN PATTERN Canadian Hockey Pattern. Special steel runners, carefully hardened and tempered. Heavily nickel-plated and finely polished. No. YH. Sizes dh to 12 inches. Per pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 332 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $6.50 Showing Canadian Pattern No. YH Hoekeyl fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 332 Spalding Ladies' Hockey Skates CANADIAN PATTERN Made similar to Men's No. YH but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. No. YHL* Heavily nickel-plated and finely polished* Ladies*. Sizes 9 to 10% inches. Per pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 330 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $6.50 Showing Canadian Pattern No. YHL Ladies' 1-1(4 Shate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 330 ' PROMPT mENTION GIVEN TO ^JNY COMMUNICATIONS^ ^ ADDRESSED TO US @ I A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST 0! SEE INSIDE FRONT ' OF THIS BOOi Prices in effect July 5, 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices see special dnadian Cata» HMESRfttDINe TRADEIVIARKa^rl^^ Snyd cr's Peck & il Clamp Hockey Skates T^HE full clamp fastening for hockey skates has proven its efficiency and the wisdom of its adoption through its con- tinued popularity with the great number of skaters who prefer flat blade skates for ordi- nary skating, in addition to those who play hockey and do not find it convenient to keep a separate pair of shoes particu- larly for their hockey skates. See previous pages of Spalding Hockey Skates for Canadian Pattern to be riveted or screwed on shoes. Peck & Snyder's Skates are not made in Canadism Pattern ,. ■{. Full clamp fastening. Extra heavy cV plated and specially polished throughout. Ia< of absolutely best quality three-ply welded eeiighly tempered, with ribbed flange atbot- ini Made in both men's and women's models, acpair in paper box, neatly wrapped. Sizes ^ 12 inches. . . . Per pair, $5.00 0. HL. Ladies'. la and narrow ic' .. Like above, but small heel toe plate. Sizes 9 to 11 . Per pair, S5.00 fo.H. Full clamp fastening. Nickel-plated ir?hout, not polished; ribbed runners; best u! y steel. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. Per pair, S4.00 No. CH. Full clamp fastenings. Highly tem> pered and hardened three-ply welded steel run- ners. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. Per pair, S3. 00 No. CHL. Ladies'. Same.as-No. CH, but small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 9 to lOH inches Per pair, $3.00 No. DH. Full clamp fastenings. Runners of best cast steel, hardened. Entire skate full nickel- plated. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. Per pair, $2.00 No. EH. Full clamp fastenings. Flat runners of best cold rolled steel. Entire skate nickel- plated. Sizes 9% to 12 inches. Per pair, $ 1 .50 No. EHL. Ladies'. Same as No. EH, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 91 to 10% inches. . Per pair. S 1 .50 Peck & Snyder's ''Special Ladies'" Hockey Skate No. CHLS. Made with key clamp fasten- ing in front, and best quality leather heel strap. Flat runners of highly tempered and hardened three-ply welded steel. Sizes 8 to lOJs inches. . Per pair, $3.00 30 UnENTIONG!V[NTO| COMMUNICATIONS ODflESSED 10 IIS A G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES IFOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK ^SS?E THE SPALDING TRADEMARK Tu) MORRIS WOOD Spalding Tubular Racing Skatea Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates IMPROVED MODEL iTsed by the Champion Speed Skaters in All 1 r Races VERY LIGHT WEIGHT, all tubular steel construction, joint well reinforced, making them the strongest tubular skates manufactured. Blades made of chrome nickel steel, hai ei and drawn, tapered from 1-16 inch at the toe to 1-32 inch at th ;|. Toe and heel plates are made of the best, partly hardened i: left full size, so they can be cut to fit shoe. Furnished in two lengths of blades, and 15% inches. Foot plates arranged td small, medium or large size shoes. Speo size of shoe worn when ordering, length of blade required. These skates ?i built for use with light racing shcl Spalding No. 337 preferably. Our gug antee will not cover if h^avy hockey; skating shoes are used. Spalding Tabular Steel Racing Skates. Nickel-plated and. Polished. Pair, $(■ ) Price, including Spalding No. 337 Shoes, complete, attached. .. . . . . " I£ I Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates. Aluminum Finish. Price, including Spalding No. 337 Shoes, complete, atuched. ... * Per pair, $€ I II I PROMPT AnENTION GIVEN TO I JNYCOMMUNICATIONS^. ADDRESSED TOIiSOl A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST C I SEE INSIDE FRONT M OF THIS BOOlii July 5, 1911. Subject to diange without notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Catali: THE SPALDING QUALITY Showing Spalding Rink Skate No. XR fastened to Spalding Shoe No, 339 Spalding Rink Skates FOR FANCY SKATING CANADIAN. PATTESN No. XR. Foot plates same as on Canadian pattemi hockey skates, highly polished, nickel-plated and' buffed. The runners on these skates are special chrome steel, selected for its peculiar fitness for a skate of this character, and ground with curved bottoms, as adopted by national skating associations Sizes 9»g to 12 inches. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00i> No. XRL. Ladies'. Same as No. XR, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 9 to lO's inches Per pair. $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00> lilding All-Sfeel 2'ground Apparatus acknowledged as the Standard. Ipecified and purchased by practi- cally all Municipal Park and Play- ifround Commissions in America, correspondence invited. Special l.-'lans and Estimates on request. ( SPALDING & BROS., Inc. Jynnasioin and Playground Contract Department, t Chicopee, Mass. IN — Alameda, Cal. Allegheny, Pa. Baltimore, Md. Bayonne, N. J. Bloomlield, N. J. Boston, Mass. Brooklyn, S Y. Bryn Mawr.. Pa. Bnllalo. N. V. Catekill. N. Y. Chicago. III. Cincinnati. 0. Cleveland. 0. Dallas. Texas Dayton. 0. Denver. CoJ. Doagan HilU, N. Y. East Orange, N. J. Forest Park, Md. Ft Plain. N. Y. Ft. Wayne. Inl fialesburg. III. Geneva, N. Y. Greeley. Col. Bamillon. Ont..Cao. Havana. Cuba Hoboken. N. J. Jersey City, N. J. Kansas City. Mo. Kentfield. CaL Lancaster. Pa. Leavenworth. Kan. Lexington. Ind. Lockbart. Ala. Los Angeles. Cal. LoDisville, Ky. Lowell, Mass. Lynn, Mass. , Madison, N. J, Melrose, Mass. Meridian, Miss. MUwanliee, Wis. N. J. Nashville. Teon. Naugatuck, Ct. Newark. N. J. New Bronswick, N.J. New Haven, CI. New London. CL New Paltz, N. Y. New York. N. Y. OakJand. Cal. Omaha. Neb. Orange. N. J. Oswego, N. Y. Pasadena, Cal. Passaic, N. J. Philadelphia, Pa. Pittsburg, Pa. Pocalello, Idaho Polk, Pa. Portland, Me. Portla.id, Ore. PortoBarrios,S.Ani. Pueblo, Col. Reading, Pa. Rochester, N. V. Rye. N. Y. Sag Harbor. N. V. San Jose, Cal. Seattle. Wash. Somervill?,Mass. SL Louis, Mo. Summit. N. i. Itica, N. Y. Walla Walla, Wash. Washington, D. C Watertown. Mass. Watervlejt. N. Y. Westfield, Mass. Wilkesbarre. Pa. Winnipeg, Man., Caa.> Winthrop, Mass. Worcester, Mass. Ypsilanti, Midi. PT ATTENTION GIVEN TO Y COMMUNICATIONS ADDBESSEDTOUS ^1 A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK s STHESRALDING TRADEMARK Peck & Snyder's Rink Skates FOR FANCY SKATING The runners of these best grade rink skates are absolutely the hardest ma have curved bottoms, as adopted by the leading skating clubs of this count See previous pages of Spalding Ice Skates for Canadian Pattern Rink Skates to be riveted on shoes. Peck & Snyder's Skates are not made in Canadian Pattern. FULL CLAMP No. 16. Full clamp fastenings, highly tempered and concaved, three-ply weld steel ribbed runners. All parts heavily nickel-plated and polished. Specialfl designed for fancy skating. Sizes 9h to 12 inches. . . Per pair, $j No. 16L. Ladies'. Same as No, 16, but with small heel plate and nar toe plate. Sizes 8 to 10'.. inches Per pair, $IS Peck & Snyder's Full Clamp Rink Skates No, 15. Nickel-plated throughout, full clamp fastenings, runners of welded steet hardened and tempered. Sizes 9h to 12 inches, . . . Per pair, $9i No. 15L. Ladies*. Same as No, 15, but with small heel plate and narro* toe plate. Sizes 8 to 10'^ inches Per pair, $3 No. 14. Nickel-plated, full clamp fastenings, runners of cast steel, hardene beveled edges. Sizes 9ii to 12" inches Per pair, $1 No. 12. Rocker runners, all steel, full clamp fastenings. Sizes 9h to inches. Per pair, $1 PROMPT mENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMMUNICATIONS U ADORESSFO TO US . A.G.SPALDiNG & BROS.I STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES - rOR CCyPlETE LIST \^[[ INSIDE fRONl'l Of THIS Price* in effect July 5, Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices ice i>pc PECK & SNYDER'S ICE SKATES Ladies' Skates >. OL. Welded steel runners, tempered, nickel- It* throughout; russet straps. Each pair in paper box. Sizes 9! to 11 inches. Per pair, $3.00 0. L. Best cast steel runners, hardened. All ir uckel-platedj russet leather straps. In paper box. Sizes 8 to 11 inches. Per pair, $2.25 [o^OL. Nickel-plated. Runners and other parts t ^t steel, nicely finished ; russet straps. Sizes 8 to 11 inches. Each pair in paper box. Pair, S 1 .60 No. OL. Bright finish. Pa- per wrapped. Pair, $1.25 i I 9. Made with steel runners and foot plates; .et leather straps. Each pair paper wrapped. R 8 to 11 inches. . . Per pair, 90c. Men's Skates No. 4-0. Welded tool steel runners, hardened and tempered, nickel-plated throughout. Each pair in paper box. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. Per pair, $2. 50 No. I . Runners of best cast steel, hardened and nickel-plated throughout. Each pair in paper box. Sizes 8 to 12 inches. . . Per pair, SI. 6 O No. OO. Runners of best cold rolled steel. En- tire skate full nickel-plated. Each pair in paper box. Sizes 8 to 12 inches. . Per pair, 9 1 .OO No. O. Runners' of best cold rolled steel. Entire skate bright finish. Each pair paper wrapped. Sizes 8 to 12 inches. . . Per pair, 76c. Double Runner Sled Skates No. DR. By using these skates it is possible to take a child on the ice without fear of injury. The runners are so wide apart that any child can stand on them easily. They are adjustable from 6 to 9^^ inches and furnished with straps complete. Each pair in paper box. . . Per pair, 50c. :>TmENTIONGIVENTO| $ COMMUNICATIONS i MDBESSEDTOUS A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS Boot c«t in effect July 5, 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian price* •ee tpeciat Canadian Catalogue Sr THE SPALDING TRADEMARK Spalding ''Special" Skating Shoe No. 336. Best quality calf. Laced down over toe ; reinforced inside, obvi- ating necessity for strap on shoe itself. Special counter that supports ankle and arch of foot, giving support where most required ; full heel, padded tongue. \ Per pair, $5.00 Vst No. 336 Shoes with Spalding No. \S "Champion- Ship" Bocliey Sliales and any style Clamp Fastening Ice or Hockey Skates. Spalding "Expert" Racing Shoe No. 337. Fine quality kangaroo leather, !^ very soft and pliable and extremely light (^ in weight ; reinforced inside over anki laces down over toe. Special coun' that supports the foot without tiring the ,,, wearer. Very light sole. Pair, $5.00 We recommend these shoes lor use especially wiH Spalding Tubular Racing Skates, and with oUkt racing skates made lo be riveted to shoes. dit Spalding "Championship" Hockey Shoe No. 339. Fine quality calf Reinforced with web over ankle. Padded tongue. Special counter that supports ankle, instep and arch of foot. Hard box toe for special protection. Laced "low. Blucher cut. Trimmed with maroon colored leather. Per pair, $5.00 Recommended particularly lor use with the Spalding "Expert" Bockey Skates No. XH and with Spalding Tubular Hockey Skates and No. XR Rink Skates, but they are equally suitable lor ose with any Canadian Pattern Hockey Skates. Spalding Hockey Shoe No. 338. A good shoe at a moderate i. price. Made after the design of our No. 339 shoe, only differing in quality i of material and construction. Light., weight, but substantially made. Per pair, $4.00 . (Jse No. 33S shoes with Canadian Pallem Bockey Skates to be rivefd on. PROMPT AnENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST Of Si SEE INSIDE FRONT COVa OF THIS BOOt . B J ^^?JHE SPALDING iST JTE iTRADEMARK'^Kll^^ QUALITY oalding Men's Skating Shoe «; 32, Made of good quality leather, ;hine sewed. Has outside strap port o^er ankle. A well constructed e. Per pair, $3.50 132 Shoes with Spalding No. YH Canadian Pattern Hockey al 'No. Yl Rinli Skates and with regnlar Qofflp Fastening Ice Skates. Spalding Ladies' Skating Shoe No. 350. Fine quality leather, nice and pliable. Reinforced with webbing in* side to give support over ankle and at top; laced down over toes. Padded tongue and special counter to support arch of foot. Per pair, $5.00 Use No. SSO Shoes with Spalding No. XSL " Championship" Hockey Skates, No. XRL Rink Skates and with regnlar C Pattern Hockey or Clamp Fastening Ice Skates. 3QE palding Ladies' Skating Shoe 360. Fine quality calf, reinforced th webbing over ankle and instep, d laced down over toes; padded igue; special counter that supports arch. Fitted with the Murphy ikle brace, giving that perfect poise sired by all skaters and preventing the ikle from turning, ' Per pair, $5.50 360 Shoes with Canadian Pattero Hockey or Clamp Fastening Ice Skates. fiiA.360 Spalding Ladies' Skating Shoe No. 330. Good quality black leather; laces low. Blucher style, and ha's sup* porting strap-and-buckle over ankle. Per pair, $3.50 Use No. 330 Shoes with Spalding No. YHL Canadian Pattern Hockey Skates, No. YRL Rink Skates and with regular Claap Fastening Ladies' Ice Skates. 930 mENTIONGIVENTOl COMMUNICATIONS DDBESSEDTOUS A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF SEE INSIDE FRONT CO OF THIS BOOK ISuMHESIWP TRADEMARK Spalding Skate Sundrii It Is ' ften the trifling. Insignificant Item In an athletic equipment that makes all the dlff'.frence between the success or failure, the comfort or otherwise, of an athlete. — With a COMPLETE Spalding outfit you suffer no regrets. — (\ Spalding Patent perfection AoMc Bratdi PATENTED DEC. 21, 1909 No. p. Can be used on any skate. This brace is complete in itself, the metal foot being sim- ply riveted to the heel plate of the skate and the strap fastened around the ankle to make it the most perfect and satisfactory skate ankle brace ever produced. Strongly made of steel, nickel-plated and furnished with good quality leather straps. « * Per pair, _$ 1.50 Scabbards for Blades of Racing Skates No. RS. "Leather Scabbards to protect blades of racing skates. . Made in three sizes to fit 14, 15 and 16-inch blades. JVIention size when ordering, . . Per pair, 75c. Scabbards for Blades of Hockey Skates No. HS. Made of special quality leather, well reinforced. Will fit any size regular styh hockey skates. Slot in end for insertir.:: skc'.^ strap for carrying. " Per pair, C I .OO Spalding Skate Bags No. I . Double Pocket, Cloth, No. 2. Double Pocket, Felt, No. 4. Felt,with draw strings. Made with division in center so that skates will not rub. Each, 50c. Ea.,25c. 5c. '-^^ Spalding Ice Skate Key No. SK. Nickel-plated, all steel, well made. Will fit any of the Peck & Snyder key clamp ice skates. . -Each, I Oc. Spalding Spring Catch Skate Strap Requires no holes in strap, and is quickly and permanently fastened at any point and as quickly released. No. S8. Superior quality leather, Russet or Black, 28-ihch. . ' Per pair, 36c. No. SO. Superior quality" leather, Russet ot Black, 20-inch. .. ", f Per pair, 30c, No. 28. Ordinary quality. Russet or Black, 28-inch. . . " . '' Per pair, 26c, No. 20. Ordinary quality. Russet or Black, 20-inch. . f Per pair, 20c. Spalding Skate Straps No. B8. Superior quality leather. Russet oi Black, 28-inch. ' ' .^ ..Per pair, 30c, No. BO. Superior quality leather. Russet oi Black, 20-inch. . ' " . * Per pair, 25c, No. 1 3. Ordinary quality. Plain Buckle, Rus set or Black, 2S-inch.. "' , ^' Per pair, 15c, No. II. Ordinary quality. Plain Buckle, Rus set or Black, 20-inch. " ~ , * Per pair, I Oc PfiOMPTAnENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADORESSEDTOOS A. G.SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES fOBGOHnHEUSTOFSm ssMsiKnuniTCOiia f«iB— J» j|fl^l"«- g "" dbABfl^Hil^HI^MiM IB ITUTE THE SPALDING SPALDING AUTOMOBILE AND WIMTEl. J SWEATERS Cut« on this page 4U. show the No. WJ Sweater with collar turned in various shapes to suit the convenience and conttfort of the wearer. \iiA ^^■^ W^ POR automobiling, training purposes, ^ reducing weight, tramping during cold weather, golfing, shooting, tobogganing, snowshoeing. High collar may be turned down quickly, changing into neatest form of button front sweater Sizes 28 to 44 inches. Carried in stock in Gray and White only. See list below of colors sup- plied on special orders. iNo. WJ. Highest quality special heavy weight worsted. Each, $7.50 irSSl'OO Doz. No. WDJ. Fine quality standard weight worsted. Same style as No. WJ, but lighter weight. Each, $6.00 • $63.00 Dot. The dozen prices printed in italics will be quoted only on order f fox one-half dozen or more. We allow four inches for stretch in all our sweater*, and sizes are marked accordingly. |t 'u> suggested! however, that for very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement be or- dered to insure a com» fortable fit. iL ORDERS- " In addition to stock colors mentioned, we supply these sweaters without extra charge, on special orders only, not in slock, in any of the following colors: Black Scadet Navy Dark Green Maroon Cardinal Columbia Blue Seal Brown e designate three shades which' are sometimes called RED. They are Scarlet, Cardinal, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order, we supply Cardinal. Ilin colors, other than the above, to order only, 50c. each garment extra. [\L NOTICE— Solid colored sweaters with one color body and another color (not IcoUarand cuffs furnished in any of the colors noted, on special order at no extra charge. 'TAHENTION GIVEN TO r COMMUNICATIONS UDDHESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST Of STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK THE SPALDINGIHDTRADEMARK Spalding Jacket Sweatei Sizes: 28 to 44 inches chest measurement. We allow four inches for stretch in all our sweaters, and sizes are marked accordingly. It is suggested, however, that for very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement he ordered to insure a comfortable fit. Tf^ N 9. VG. Showing special trimmed edg. Iiig and cuffs supplied, if desired, on Jj^cket sweaters at no extitl charge. BUTTON FRONT No. VG. Best quality worsted, heavy weight, pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray or White only. See list below of colors supplied on special orders. Each, Se.OOir $63.00 Doz. No. DJ. Fine worsted, standard weight, pearl but- tons, fine knit edging. Car- ried in stock in Gray or White only. See list below of colors supplied on special orders. Each, 95.00 ir$5i.0ODoz. Nd. VK. Special broad knit, good quality worsted, pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray or White only. See list below of- colors supplied on special orders. Each, $5.00 * $5^.00 Doz. WITH POCKETS No. VGP. Best quality worsted, heavy weight, pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray or White only. See list below of colors supplied on special orders. With pocket on either side, and a partic- ularly convenient and popu- lar style for golf players. Each, 96.BO if $69.00 Doz. Shaker Sweater No. 3J. Standard weight, Shaker knit, pearl buttons. Carried in stock and supplied only in Plain Gray. Each, 93.BOir $39.00 Doz. CARDINAI, GDI?njlI ADMTDC '" addilioo to stock colors mentioned, we also supply any ol the sweaters listed on this page (exccpl N*.) OrlA/liUL UKlUuniJ withoot extra charge, on special orders only, not carried in stock, in any oi the loUowiag cotors: MAROON NAVY BLUE DARK GREEN SCARI£T COLUMBIA BLUE SEAL BROWN Other colors 1o order only in any qaality, SOc each extra. SPECIAL NOTICE-We will furnish any of the solid color sweaters listed en this page with one color body «r another color (not striped) collar and cuffs in any of the above colors on special order, at no extra charge. Thia dot not apply to the No. 3J Sweater. 2%e prices printed in italics opposite items marked with -k wUl be quoted cily on orders for 42 inch waisl SANITARY COTTON GOODS. Colors: Bleached While, Navy, Bladi. Maroon, and Gray. Stock sizes: Shirts. 2S to 44 inch chesL Tighls, 26 to 42 inch waist. Spalding Sleeveless Shirts— Plain Colors 600. Good quality worsted, stock colors- and eiz^s. Each, $ 1 .26 * $12.60 Doz. No, 800. Worsted, stock colors and sizes. Each, S I .OO ^'$10.50 Doz. No. 6E. Sanitary Cotton, stock colors and sizes. Each, 60c.* ^4.75 Doz. Spalding Striped Sleeveless Shirts N0.6OOS. Good quality worsted, with 6-inch stripe around chest, in following combinations of colors: Navy with White stripe; Black with Orange stripe; Maroon with White stripe; Red with Black stripe; Royal Blue with White stripe; Black with Red stripe; Gray with Cardinal stripe Each, S 1 .60 :Ar $15.00 Doz. No. 800S. Worsted. Colors same as No. 600S. Stock sizes. ■ ~ _ ^. ^Each, $ 1 .26 • $13.50 Doz. No. 6ES. Sanitary Cotton, solid color body, with 6-inch stripe around chest, in same combinations of colors as No. 600S. Each, 7Gc.i( $7.50 Dot. Spalding Shirts with Sash N0.6WD. Sanitary Cotton, sleeveless,with woven sash of differ- ent color from body. Same combinations of colors as No. 600S. Toorderonly; 7io< carried in stock -Each.SI .0.6 i^ $12 .00 Doz. No. 6ED. Sanitary Cotton, sleeveless, solid color body with sash stitched on of different color. Same combinations of colors as No. 6003. . . . ' Each, 75c. • ^7.50 Z?aj. Spalding Quarter Sleeve Shirts No. 60I. Good quality I No. 6F. Sanitary Cotton. worsted, stock colors and sizes, stock colors and sizes.._. '^'^ .Each. S 1 .60 * $15.00 Doz. \ Each, 60c. * $A.75 Doz. Spalding Full Sleeve Shirts No.3D. Cotton, Flesh, White. Black. E&..S\ .OQ^ $10.00 Doz. Spalding Knee Tights No. 604. Good quality ^worsted, stock colors and sizes. Pair, S 1 .26 * ^22.60 Z?02. No. 604. Worsted, stock colors and sizes. Pair, $ I .OO * $10.80 Doz. No. 4B. Sanitary Cotton, stock colors and sizes. .'Pair. 60c. • ^4.75 Z?02. Spalding FuU Length Tights No. I A. Best worsted, full fashioned. Stock colors: Black, Navy Blue, and Maroon. Sizes, 28 to 42 inch waist. Pair.$4.00 No. 606. Good quality worsted, stock colors and sizes. ^ ^ Pair, S2.00 • $21.60 Doz. No. 3A. Cotton, full quality. White. Black, Flesh. Pair. $ 1 .OO * $10.00 Doz. Spalding Worsted Trunks^ No. I . Best worsted, Black, Maroon, and Navy. Pair, S2.00 No. 2. Good quality worsted. Navy, and Black. Special colors to order ^ ^ Per pair, $ 1 .00 Spalding Juvenile Shirts and Tights ONLY SIZES SUPPLIED : Chest.. 26 to 30 Inches, inclusive; ^alst, 24 to 26 Inches. IncInslT^ -EACH ^ACH Sleeveless Shirt, quality of No. 600. $'l .OO | No.66. QuarterSleeveShirt,qualityofNo.601.»l.2e 5. Sleeveless Shirt, quality of No. 600S-. . 1.26 I No.64. Knee Tights, qualityof No. 604. -1.16 ii pes printed in italics opposite items marked with ir wdl be quoted only on orders fof one'half dozen ot more. Qua^itity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with if r AHENTION GIVEN TO COMMUNICATIONS ' iPORESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK ^ in effect July 5, 191 1. Subject to clian^e without notice. For Coaadiao price* tee special Canadian Catalogue St ?eTHE SPALDING Diirand-Steel lockers^ Wooden lockers are objectionable^ because they attract vermin, absorb odors, can be easily broken into, and are dangerous on account of fire. Lockers made from wire mesh 6t expanded metal aflford little scour* Ity, as they can be easily entered with wire cut* ters. Clothes placed in them become coveredl with dust, and the lockers themselves present a poor appearance, resembling animal cages Dnrand-Steel Lockers are made of finest grade furniture steel and are finished with gloss black, furnace-baked japan (400°), comparable M that used on hospital ware, which will never flake off nor require refinishing, as do paints and enamels. Durand- Steel Lockers are usually buiuwiir; doors perforated full length in panel design wiAsidti ' and backs solid. This prevents clothes in onekdnr' from coming in contact with wet gannoiliL in adjoining lockers, while plenty of tact" lation is secured by having the doorperfC rated its entire length, but, if the pnrduW' prefers, we perforate the backs also. , "; The cost of Dnrand-Steel Lockci Is no more than that of flrst-da^ wooden lockers, and they last as b as the building, are sanitary, secure, m ' irt addition, are fire-proof. The following Standard Sizes m THOSE MOST COMMONLY USED: DOUBLE TIER SINGLE nil 12 X 12x36 Inch I2x 12x00 Ineh 13 X ISx36 Inch 15x13x60 iMh 12x12x42 Inch l2xl2x73llMII I3x 13X42 Inch l8xlBx72llMl ▼)ir*« kookar* In SingI* Tl«r Special Sizes made to ordbb. i, We are handhng lockers as a specW coj-' tract business, and shipment will in everj case be made direct from the factory is Chicago. 1 f you will let us know the num- ber of lockers, size and arrangement, m shall be glad to take up, through «om spondenc«c th^ matter of prion FOR COMPLETE LIST OF SW SEE INSIDE FRONT COVEI PROMPTJinENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES Prices in effect July 5, 1911. Subject to cfiange witliout notice. For Canadian price, «e« special Canadi^ ir[|?E THE SPALDING (TRADE-MARK TuTiTf €atal@iuii@ \ following selection of items from Spalding's latest Catalogue will give idea of the great variety of ATHLETIC GOODS manufactured G. SPALDING & BROS. SEND FOR A FREE COPY. e( ist of Spalding Stores on inside front cover of this book.) Vaulting iinpic iGolf olfShoe. ingBatr Home Felt Letters . Fencing Sticks Finger Protection, I FUes- CoIIege . Marking. Golf Foils. Fencing . Foot Balls- Assoiiation • College , Rugby . . Foot Ball Clothing Foot Ball Goal Nets Foot Ball Timer Cloves- Boxing . Coif . . Handball Hockey. Field Hockey, Ice . Goals- Basket Ball . . Foot Ball Hockey, Field Hockey. Ice . Goal Cage. Roller Polo Golf Clubs Golf Sundries . Golfette . Athletic Golf . . Gymnasium. Home Gymnasium Board. Home 95 Gymnasium.HomeOutfits 96-97 Hammers. Athletic , 65 Hangers for Indian Clubs 88 Hats. University . . 40 Head Harness . .,- . 9, 17 . 76-77 Hob Nails . Hockey Pucka , . , 66 Hockey Sticks, Ice . .65,66 Hockey Sticks. J-ield . 64 Holder. Basket Ball. Canvas, 28 Hole Cutter, Golf . . 76 Hole Rim. Golf . , . 76 Horse. Vaulting . . 93 Hurdles, Safety . . 67 Indian Clubs ... 88 Foot Ball ... 6 Striking Bag ... 83 Jackets- Fencing , . . ,100 PAGE Foot Ball . . 7 Jiu Jitsu. Wrestling . 38 Javelins . . . . 66 Jerseys . . 17.22 23. 67 Knee Protectors 29,60 Knickerbockers, Foot Ba 11 20 Lace. Foot Ball 6 Lacrosse Goods Ladies- Fencing Goods . 100 Field Hockey Goods 64 Gymnasium Shoes 80-32 Gymnasium SuiU 36. 37 ■ Skates. Ice . . 46-51 Skates. Roller . 68.69 Skating Shoes . 62.53 Snow Shoes . . 43 Lanes forSprints . 67 Leg Guards- Foot Ball . . 9 Ice Hockey . . 87 Polo. Roller . . {8 Letters- 35 Felt . . . S.'i. 41 Liniment. "Mike Murphj •■ 15 Masks- Fencing , . , lOO Nose . . . 9 Masseur, Abdominal 96 Mattresses, Gymnasium Mattresses, Wrestling 38 Megaphones, . . 6 Mitts- Handball . . 62 Striking Bag. . 83 Moccasins . . . 43 Monograms 35,41 Mouthpiece. Foot Ball 9 Mufflers. Knitted .. . 26 Needle, Lacing 6 Nets- Golf Driving . . 76 Volley Ball . . 63 Numbers, Competitors' 66 Pads- Chamois, Fencing 100 Foot Ball . . 8.9 Wrestling . • . 38 Paint. Golf . . 76 Pants- Basket Ball . . 29 Boys- Knee . . 34 Foot Ball, College 7 Foot Ball. Rugby. 17 Hockey. Ice. 67 Running . . 34 Pennants. College . 39 Pistol. Starter-a . 67 Plastrons. Fencing. 100 Plates- Teeing. Golf . . 76 Platforms, Striking Bag 84.85 Poles- Skale Straps . . . Ski ... 43 Skate Sundries. . . Vaulting . . 66 Skis Polo. Roller. Goods . 68 Snow Shoes . . . Protectors- Sprint Lanes . Abdomen . . 14.68 Squash Goods . . . Eye Glass . . 67.58 Stahdards— Finger. Field Hockey 64 Vaulting . . . Indoor Base Ball . 60 Volley Ball . . . Knee . . . 60 Straps- Thumb. Basket Ball 28 For Thrce-Lcgged Race Protection. Running Sho es 69 Skate . . . , Pucks. Hockey, Ice 66 Sticks. Roller Polo . . Push Ball . . . 63 Stockings .... Pushers, Chamois . 69 Foot Ball , . . Quoits . . . •63 Stop Boards Racks. Golf Ball . 76 Striking Bags . , . Racquets, Squash . 78 Suits- Rapiers. Fencing . 100 Base Ball. Indoor . . Referee's Whistle . 29.67 ■Basket Ball . . . Rings- Gvmnasium . . • . Exercising , . 94 Gymnasium. Ladies' ; Swinging . . 811.94 Running ' . . . Rowing Machines . 91 Soccer .... Sacks, for Sack Racing Swimming . . . Sandals. Snow Shoe 42 Union Foot Ball . . Sandow's Dumb Bells 86 Water Polo . . . Scabbards. Skate . 64 Supporters Score Books- Ankle .... Basket Ball . . 28 ■Wrist .... Shin Guards- Association . 20 Sweaters ... 24, College. Swivels, Striking Bag . Field Hockey 64 Swords, Fencing . Ice Hockey . . Swords. Duelling . . Polo. Roller . , 68 Tackling Machine . . Shirts- Take-0(t Board . . Athletic . 33 Tape, Measuring, Steel . Soccer . . , 20 Tees. Golf. . . . Shoes- ■ Tights- Basket Ball . . 30 Full ... .5 Fencing . i 100 Full. Wrestling . . Toot Ball. Association 20 Knee . . . Foot Ball. College 10.11 Toboggans Foot Ball. Rugby . 17 Toboggan Cushions. . Foot Ball, Soccer . 20 Toe Boards . . . Golf . . . 77 Trapeze. Adjustable . Gymnasium . . 31,32 Trapeze. Single Shoes- Trousers- Jumping , . . 70.71 Y.M.C.A. . . . Running , . 68.71 FootBaU . . . Skating . .■ . 62.63 Trunks- Snow . . . 43 Velvet .... Squash . . " . 78 Worsted. . . . Shot- Athletic . . . Indoor . . . MassagK. , . 6B 65 95 Uniforms- Base Ball. Indoor . . Foot Ball . i . Skates- Wands. Calisthenic . Ice . 44-61 Watches. Stop . . . Roller : : : 68.59 Weights, 66-lb. . .. Skate Bag . . . 64 Whistles, Referee's . .S Skate Keys . . 64, 69 Wrestling Equipment . Skate Rollers . , 68,69 Wrist Machines . . INTION GIVEN TO] ElMUNICATIONS ESSEDTOUS A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOn COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK n effect July 5. 1911. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices »ee special Canadian Catalogue standard Policy A Standard Quality must be inseparably linked to a Standard Policy. Without a definite and Standard Mercantile Policy, it is impossible for a Manufacturer to long maintain a Standard Qyality. To market his goods through a jobber, a manufacturer must provide a profit for the jobber as well as for the retail dealer. To meet these conditions of Dual Profits, the manufacturer is obliged to set a proportionately high list price on his goods to the consumer. i i • i . To enable the glib salesman, when bookmg his orders, to figure out attractive profits to both the jobber and retailer, these high list prices are absolutely essential; but their real purpose will have been served when the manufacturer has secured his order from the jobber, and the jobber has secured his order from the retailer. However, these deceptive high list prices are not air to the consumer, who does not, and, in reality, is not ever expected to pay these fancy list prices. When the season opens for the sale of such goods, with their misleading but alluring high list prices, the retailer begins to realize his responsibilities, and grapples with the situation as best he can, by offering "special discounts," which vary with local trade conditions. Under this system of merchandising, the profits to both the manufacturer and the jobber are assured ; but as there is no stability maintained in the prices to the consumer, the keen competition amongst the local dealers invariably leads to a demoralized cutting of prices by which the profits of the retailer are practically eliminated. _, . , , This demoralization always reacts on the manufacturer. The jobber insists on lower, and still lower, prices. The manufacturer, in his turn, meets this demand for the lowering of prices by the only way open to him, viz. : the cheap- ening and degrading of the quality of his product. The foregoing conditions became so intolerable that, 1 3 years ago, in 1 899, A. G. Spalding & Bros, determined to rectify this demoralization in the Athletic Goods Trade, aid inaugurated what has since become known as "The Spalding Policy." The "Spalding Policy" eliminates the jobber entirely, so far as Spalding Goods are concerned, and the retail dealer secures the supply of Spalding Athletic Goods direct from the manufacturer by which the retail dealer is assured a fair, legitimate and certain profit on all Spalding Athletic Goods, and the consumer is assured a Standard Qyality and is protected from imposition. The "Spalding Policy" is decidedly for the interest and protection of the users of Athletic Goods, and acts in two ways : First. — The user is assured of genuine Official Standard Athletic Goods and the same prices to everybody. Second. — As manufacturers, we can proceed with confidence in purchasing at the proper time, the very best rav^r materials required in the manufacture of our various goods, well ahead of their respective seasons, and this enables us to provide the necesssary quantity and absolutely maintain the Spalding Standard of Quality. All retail dealers handling Spalding Athletic Goods are requested to supply consumers at our regular printed catalogue prices — neither more nor less — thesame prices that similar goods are sold for in our New York, Chicago and other stores. All Spalding dealers, as well as users of Spalding Athletic Goods, are treated exactly alike and no special rebates or discriminations are allowed to anyone. This briefly is the " Spalding Policy," which has already been in successful operation for the past 13 years, and will be indefinitely continued. In other words, " The Spalding Policy " is a " square deal " for everybody. A. G. SPALDING & BROS. . PRESIDENT, ^^ Iltandard Quality An article that is universally giren the appellation " Standard " is thereby c;eded to be the criterion, to which are compared all other things of a similar Hire. For instance, the Gold Dollar of the United States is the Standard unit ^lurrency, because it must legally contain a specific proportion of pure gold, the fact of its being Genuine is guaranteed by the Government Stamp eon. As a protection to the users of this currency against counterfeiting and ;r tricks, considerable money is expended in maintaining a Secret Service sau of Experts. Under the law, citizen manufacturers must depend to a it extent upon Trade-Marks and similar devices to protect themselves against nteifeit products — without the aid of "Government Detectives'* or "Public nion " to assist them. Consequently the "Consumer's Protection" against misrepresentation and ferior quality" rests entirely upon the integrity and responsibility of the anufacturer." A G Spalding & Bros, have, by their rigorous attention to " Qyality," for ty-four years, caused their Trade-Mark to become known throughout world as a Guarantee of Qyality as dependable in their field as the 5. Currency is in its field. The necessity of upholding the Guarantee of the Spalding Trade-Mark and ntaining the Standard Qyality of their Athletic Goods, is, therefore, as obvi- as is the necessity of the Government in maintaining a Standard Currency. Thus each consumer is not only insuring himself but also protecting other sumers when he assists a Reliable Manufacturer in upholding his Trade- k and all that it stands for. Therefore, we urge all users of our Athletic ids to assist us in maintaining the Spalding Standard of Excellence, by sting that our Trade-Mark be plainly stamped on all athletic goods which f buy, because without this precaution our best efforts towards maintaining? idard Qyality and preventing fraudulent substitution will be ineffectual. Manufacturers of Standard Articles invariably suffer the reputation of being (i-priced, and this sentiment is foster*»rl and emphasized by makers of main consideration. ds, with a reputation to uphold higher prices than a manufac- f a claim for Standard Qyality lesman. ]uicksand more unstable than y Standard Qyality. copy del. to Cat. Div. ^c:^ )^^^H^t;< PALDINGS A separate book covers every Athletic S and is Official and Standard Price 10 cents each PARIS, 19, sT.Louis,i904 Spalding paris.h ATHLETIC GOODS ARE THE STANDARD OF THEWORl A. G. Spalding ® Bros. MAINTAIN WHOLESALE and RETAIL STORES /n the FOLLOWING CIT NEW YORK CHICAGO ST. LOUIS BOSTON MILWAUKEE KANSAS CITY PHILADELPHIA DETROIT SAN FRANCISCO NEWARK CINCINNATI LOS ANGELE BUFFALO CLEVELAND SEATTLE SYRACUSE COLUMBUS MINNEAPOi BALTIMORE INDIANAPOLIS ST. PAl WASHINGTON PITTSBURG DENVI LONDON, ENGLAND ATLANTA DALI BIRMINGHAM. ENGLAND LOUISVILLE MANCHESTER, ENGLAND NEW ORLEANS EDINBURGH, SCOTLAND MONTREAL, CAN SYDNEY. AUSTRALIA TORONTO, CANAD Factories owned and operated I •adc-Markcd Athletic Good: IfEW YORK V CHICAGO SAN FRANCISCa ^ROOKIiYN BOSTON PHILADELPHIA CHICOPEE>lM XONPON^EKga Price 10 cents \sy^ A^ICE HOCKEY i^ Guide h Ha Mt'- ■ MA ft^ 6m i "i^'^B " Containing the OFFICIAL RULES American Sports Publishing Co y..,„m\k 21 Warren Street, NeM'YorK r'''iii,,:y(ii A. G. Spalding & Bros. : V ,, MAINTAIN THEIR OWN HOUSES ,' FOR DISTRIBUTING THE "J., Spalding ^^^ COMPLETE LINE OF ' , i Athletic Goods ,. '' IN THE FOLLOWING CITIFS ^^^^^^^ ii NEW YORK ''°"l2"4-128 Nassau St. "■"^aT-aa wesi 42d s«. NEWABK. N. J. 845 Broad Street BOSTON, MASS. 141 Federal Street BUFFALO, N. Y. 611 Main Street SYRACUSE, N. Y. 357 So. Warren Street PITTSBUBGH, PA. 608 Wood Street PHILADELPHIA, PA. 1210 Chestnut Street BALTIMORE, MD. 110 E. Baltimore St. WASHINGTON, D. C. 613 14tli Street, N.W. ^ LONDON. ENGLAND Three Slores Higli Hol'born, W. C. 78, Cheapside, E. C. Aesi End Branch 29, Haymarket, S.W. PARIS, FRANCE 26 Rue Cadet CHICAGO 28-30 So. Wabash Ave. ST. LOUIS, MO. 415 North Seventh St. KANSAS CITY. MO. 1120 Grand Avenue DENVER, COL. 1616 Arapahoe Street SAN FRANCISCO 156-158 Geary Street CINCINNATI. O. 119 East Fifth Avenue CLEVELAND, O. 741 Euclid Avenue COLUMBUS, O. 191 South High Street LOUISVILLE, KY. 328 West Jefferson St. INDIANAPOLIS, IND. 1 36 N. Pennsylvania St. MANCHESTER, ENG. 4, Oxford St. ~ Lower Mosley St. BIRMINGHAM. ENG. 57. New Street EDINBURGH, SCOT. 3 South Charlotte St. I Cor. Princes St.) GLASGOW, SCOTLAND 68 Buchanan Street Commimicalions directed (o A. G. SPALDING ^ liROS.. at any o( the ubo\e addresses, ■will receive prompt allinlion. THE SPALDING TRADE IMARK IS REGISTERED IN THE UNITED STATES PATENT OFFICE, AND WE HAVE ALSO PROTECTED OUR INTERESTS BY 39 REGISTRATIONS IN FOREIGN COUN- TRIES INFRINGERS ARE WARNED ^-...^^mii W^^ssis^^j;^ ^ '"^f^^rllrf ^l ?^%;>Z<0^ji li^^r:^^^s..:J d^k^^^ ^:<^^\ ..l^hZZ^JLl THE SPALDING TRADE - WIARl* QUALITY ANE SELLING POLIC^ ICoNSTiTUTE THE Solid Foundation of the Spalding Businksi Binding is in Blue Cloth with Cover Design Stamped in Gold PRICE $2.00 NET Size, 5%x8 inches; 600 Pages 115 Full Page Plates Including a Series of Cartoons by- Homer C. Davenport America's National Game By A. G. SPALDING Price, $2.00 Net A book of 600 pages, profusely illustrated with over 100 full page engravings, and hav- ing sixteen forceful cartoons by Homer C. Davenport, the famous American artist. No man in America is better equipped to write on all the varied phases of the Na- tional Game than is A. G. Spalding. His observation and experience began when the game was young. He gained fame as a pilcher forty years ago, winning a record as player that has never yet been equalled. He was associated with the management of the pastime through trying years of struggle against prevailing evils. He opposed the gamblers; he fought to eradicate drunkenness ; he urged and intrc- duced new and higher ideals for the sport ; he was quick to see tha{ ball playing and the business man- agement of clubs, at the same time and by the same men, were imprac- ticable ; he knew that ball players might be quite competent as magnates, but not while playing the game ; he was in the forefront of the light against syndi- cating Base Ball and making of a Nation's pastime a sordid Trust; he was the pioneer to lead competing American Base Ball teams to a foreign land ; he took two champion teams to Great Britain in 1 874, and two others on a tour of the world in 1 888-9 ; he was present at the birth of the National League, and has done as much as any living American to uphold and prolong the life of this great pioneer Base Ball organization. When A. G. Spalding talks about America's National Game he speaks by authority of that he does know, because he has been in the councils of the management whenever there have been times of strenuous endeavor to purge it from abuses and keep it clean for the people of America — young and old In this work Mr, Spalding, after explaining the causes that led him into the undertaking, begins with the inception of the sport ; shows how it developed, by natural stages from a boy with a ball to eighteen men, ball, bats and bases ; gives credit for the first scientific application of system to the playing of the game to Abner Doubleday, of Coopers- town, N. Y.: treats of the first Base Ball club ; shows how rowdyism terrorized the sport in its early days ; how gam- bling and drunkenness brought the pastime into disfavor with the masses, and how early organizations were unable to control the evils that insidiously crept in. He then draws a series of very forceful pictures of the struggle to eradicate gambling, drunkenness and kindred evils, and shows how the efforts of strong men accomplished the salvation of the great American game and placed it in the position it occu- pies to-day— the most popular outdoor pastime in the world. Interspersed throughout this interesting book are remin- iscences of Mr. Spalding's own personal observations and experiences in the game as player, manager and magnate, covering a period of many years. Some of these stories deal with events of great import to Base Ball, and others have to do with personal acts and characteristics of players prominent in the game in earlier days — old time favorites like Harry and George Wright, A. C. Anson, Mike Kelly, Billy Sunday and others. This book should be in the library of every father in the land, for it shows how his boy may be built up physically and morally through a high-class pastime. It should be in the hands of every lad in America, for it demonstrates the possibilities to American youth of rising to heights of eminent material success through a determined adherence to things that make for the upbuilding of character in organizations as well as of men. Mailed postpaid on receipt of price by any Spalding store (see list on inside front cover), or by the publishers, American Sports Publishing Company 21 Warren Street, New York SPALDING ATHLETIC LIBRARY 0= Giving the Titles of all Spalding Athletic Library Books now - J in print, grouped tor ready reference c SPALDING OFFICIAL ANNUALS D 1 Spalding's lA Spalding's iC Spalding's 2 Spalding's 2A Spalding's 4 Spalding's 6 Spalding's 7 Spalding's 7A Spalding's 8 Spalding's 9 Spalding's 12A Spalding's Group I. No. 1 Official Base Ball Guide Official Base Ball Record Official College Base Ball Annual Official Foot Ball Guide Official Soccer Foot Ball Guide Official Lawn Tennis Annual Official Ice Hockey Guide Official Basket Ball Guide Official Women's Basket Ball Guide Official Lacrosse Guide Official Indoor Base Ball Guide Official Athletic Rules No. 231 Base Ball Spalding's Official Base Ball Guide. No. lA Official Base Ball Record. No. Ic College Base Ball Annual. No. 202 How to Play Base Ball. No. 223 How to Bat. No. 232 How to Run Bases. No. 230 How to Pitch. No. 229 How to Catch. No. 225 How to Play First Base. No. 226 How to Play Second Base. No. 227 How to Play Third Base. No. 228 How to Play Shortstop. No. 224 _ How to Play the Outfield. How to Organize a Base Ball League. [Club. How to Organize a Base Ball How to Manage a Base Ball Club. How to Train a Base Ball Team How to Captain a Base Ball How to Umpire a Game. [Team L. Technical Base Ball Terms. No. 219 Ready Reckoner of Base Ball Percentages. No. 350 How to Score. BASE BALL AUXILIARIES No. 355 Minor League Base Ball Guide No. 356 Official Book National League of Prof. Base Ball Clubs. No. 340 Official Handbook National Playground Ball Ass'n. Group n. Foot Ball No. 2 Spalding's Official Foot Ball Guide No. 324 How to Play Foot Ball. No. 2a Spalding's Official Soccer Foot Ball Guide. No. 286 How to Play Soccer. No. 335 How to Play Rugby. FOOT BALL AUXILIARY No. 351 Official Rugby Foot Ball Guide Group IV. Lawn Tennis No. 4 Spalding's Official Lawn Ten- nis Annual. No. 157 How to Play Lawn Tennis. Group VI. Hockey No. 6 Spalding's Official Ice Hockey Guide. No. 154 Field Hockey. No. 180 Ring Hockey. Group VII. Basket Ball No. 7 Spalding's Official Basket Ball Guide. No. 7a Spalding's Official Women's Basket Ball Guide. No. 193 How to Play Basket Ball. BASKET BALL AUXILIARY No. 353 Official Collegiate Basket Ball Handbook. Group VIII. Lacrosse No 8 Spalding's Official Lacrosse Guide No. 201 How to Play Lacrosse. Group IX. Indoor Base Ball No. 9 Spalding's Official Indoor Base Ball Guide. Group X. Polo No. 129 Water Polo. No. 199 Equestrian Polo. Group No. 248 No. 138 No. 271 No. 194 No. 13 No. 170 No. 207 No. 188 No. 189 No. 341 XI. Miscellaneous Games Archery. Croquet. Roque. f Racquets. Squash-Racquets. \ Court Tennis. Hand Ball. No. 167 Quoits. Push Ball. No. 14 Curling. Lawn Bowls. {Lawn Hockey. Parlor Hockey Garden Hockey. Lawn Games Children's Games. How to Bowl. ANY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPON RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS Group XII. Athletics No. 12a Spalding's Official Athletic College Athletics. [Rules. All Around Athletics. Athletes' Guide. Athletic Primer. Olympic Games at Athens, 1906 How to Sprint. How to Run 100 Yards. Distance and Cross Country Running. [Thrower. How to Become a Weight Official Sporting Rules. Athletic Training for School- Marathon Running. [boys. Schoolyard Athletics. Walking for Health and Com- petition. ATHLETIC AUXILIARIES No. 357 Intercollegiate Official Hand- Girls' Athletics. [book. Y. M. C. A. Official Handbook. Public Schools Athletic League Official Handbook. Official Handbook New York Interscholastic A. A. Group XIII. Athletic Accomplishments No. 177 How to Swim. Speed Swimming. How to Row. How to Become a Skater. How to Train for Bicycling. Canoeing. Roller Skating Guide. Group XIV. Manly Sports No. 18 Fencing. (By Breck.) No. 165 Fencing. (By Senac.) No. 236 How to Wrestle. No. 27 No. 182 No. 156 No. 87 No. 273 No. 252 No. 255 No. 174 No. 259 No. 55 No. 246 No. 317 No. 331 No. 342 No. 314 No. 302 No. 313 No. 308 No. 296 No. 128 No. 209 No. 178 No. 23 No. 282 Group XIV. Manly Sports— Con. No. 102 Ground Tumbling. No. 143 Indian Clubs and Dumb Bells No. 262 Medicine Ball Exercises. No. 29 Pulley Weight Exercises. No. 191 How to Punch the Bag. No. 289 Tumbling for Amateurs. Group XV. Gymnastics No. 104 Grading of Gymnastic Exer- cises. [Dumb Bell Drills. No. 214 Graded Calisthenics and No. 254 Barnjum Bar Bell Drill. No. 158 Indoor and Outdoor Gymnas- tic Games. No, 124 How to Become a Gymnast. No. 2*7 Fancy Dumb Bell and March- ing Drills. [Apparatus. No 327 Pyramid Building Without No. 328 Exercises on the Parallel Bars No. 329 Pyramid Building with Wands, Chairs and Ladders. No. 345 Official Handbook I. C. A. A. Gymnasts of America. Group XVI. Physical Culture No. 161 10 Minutes Exercise for Busy Men. [and Care of the Body. No. 149 Scientific Physical Training No. 208 Physical Education and Hy- No. 185 Hints on Health. [giene. No. 234 School Tactics and Maze Run- No. 238 Muscle Building. [ning. No. 285 Health by Muscular Gym- No. 261 Tensing Exercises, [nasties. No. 288 Indigestion Treated by Gym- No. 213 285 Health Answers, [nasties. No. 325 Twenty-Minute Exercises. No. 330 Physical Training for the School and Class Room. ANY OF THE ABOVE BOOKS MAILED POSTPAID UPOIV RECEIPT OF 10 CENTS Spalding *'Red Cover'' Series of Athletic Handbooks No. IR. Spalding's Official Athletic Almanac. No. 2R. Strokes and Science of Lawn Tennis No. 3R. Spalding's Official Golf Guide No. 4R. How to Play Golf No. 5R. Spalding's Official Cricket Guide No. 6R. Cricket and How to Play It No. 7R. Physical Training SimpHfied No. 8R. The Art of Skating No. 9R. How to Live 100 Years No. lOR. Single Stick Drill No. IIR. Fencing Foil Work Illustrated No. 12R. Exercises on the Side Horse No. 13R. Horizontal Bar Exercises No. 14R. Trapeze, Long Horse and Rope Exercises No. 15R. Exercises on the Flying Rings No. 16R. Team Wand Drill No. 17R. Olympic Games. Stockholm, 1912 No. 18R. Wrestling No. 19R. Professional Wrestling No. 20R. How to Play Ice Hockey No. 21R. Jiu Jitsu No. 22R. How to Swing Indian Clubs No. 23R. Get Well ; Keep Well No. 24R. Dumb Bell Exercises No. 25R. Boxing No. 26R. Official Handbook National Squash Tennis Association. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. Price 25c. CORNELIUS FELLOWES. JR., Director St. Nicholas Skating Rink, New York City. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY Group VI. No. 6 Official Ice Hockey Guide 191 3 Edited by FREDERICK R. TOOMBS C^®^3D PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN SPORTS PUBLISHING COMPANY 21 Warren Street, New York < Copyright. 1912 BY American Sports Publishing Company New York ©C!,A330586 /fj Contents PAGE American Amateur Hockey League Season 1911-12 , , 5 The Intercollegiate Hockey Season of 1912 Interscholastic Hockey in the East The Advent of Hockey in Syracuse, N. Y. Cleveland Athletic Club Hockey Team Hockey in Canada Laws of Hockey and Championship Rules of the Ar^erican Amateur Hockey League Constitution of the American Amateur Hockey League Official Rules Governing Play for the Stanley Cup Ontario Hockey Association Rules .... Laws Across Border — Conditions which Govern Play of th Eastern Canada League Eastern Canada Rules Constitution of the Intercollegiate Hockey League Laws of'Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League Ice Hockey in Wisconsin 17 21 27 31 37 42 52 59 61 65 70 72 74 80 Hockey Season About Boston . , . , , ,82 M. W. HOUCK, Vice-President American Amateur Hockey League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. American Amateur Hockey League Season 1911-12 While the hockey season of 1911-1912 was not the greatest in the history of the sport in New York as regards the quahty of the playing, it was the greatest in the point of interest manifested by the general public and in the closeness of the contests. During the seventeen years league hockey has been played in New York it is doubtful whether ever before the teams compris- ing the American Amateur Hockey League have shown an equality of strength such as featured the last championship season. There have been years in the past when the caliber of the play has been better, but in such instances the "class" was usually centered in one team, and the ultimate result was so apparent early in the season that interest lagged. The introduction of hockey to the American public has been a tedious and at times an apparently almost futile effort on the part of the pioneer sponsors of the sport. In this respect a sea- son such as last is far better for the game than one where the quality of the play is better but the general strength less uniform. Closeness of play incites interest, and interest is what the well wishers of the sport most desire at this time. The preseason estimates had favored the New York Athletic Club, Wanderers and Crescents as the real championship con- tenders, while the St. Nicholas and Hockey Club teams were con- sidered as lacking in strength. The soundness of this idea was borne out by the final standings which showed the Crescents out in front for the second time in succession, the Wanderers one game behind, and the St. Nicks and New York Athletic Club teams tied for third and fourth places. The Hockey Club of New York was so unfortunate as to lose all of its games, although they played a hard, strong game throughout the season. They suffered very heavily from penalties and played the greater part of every game with only five and six men on the ice. There were several changes in the makeup of the teams. Doc Mills left the New York Athletic Club to play with the Crescents ; Woods, a newcomer, started with the Wanderers, but moved over to the Hockey Club, and finished the season with the New SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 7 York Athletic Club; Lacken and McGrath came from Canada to play with the New York Athletic Club, but at the last moment switched over to the Wanderers, where they performed at top speed all season. Other newcomers were: Norsworthy and Stewart of the Wanderers; Kinsella and McKay of the Hockey Club, and Goodwin of the New York Athletic Club. The race for the championship opened on January 3, when at the St. Nicholas Rink the reorganized Wanderers defeated the Hockey Club of -New York by a score of 7 to i. The sensational playing of Harmon and McGrath of the Wanderers was a fea- ture and showed the great power of the team. The Crescents were next to show, and went down to defeat at the hands of the St. Nicholas seven in a slashing game to the tune of 3 to 2. The St. Nicks kept up their speedy gait by defeating the Hockey Club on January 9 by the same score. Captain Stanley starred for the Saints. On the night of January 12 the \Vanderers routed the New York Athletic Club team, 6 to i, and the Crescents won their first game of the season on January 16, defeating the Hockey Club, 9 to 3. The standing of the clubs at the end of the first two weeks was as follows : Team. Games. Won. Lost. P.C. Wanderers , 2 2 O I.ooo St. Nicholas 220 i.ooo Crescents 2 I I .500 New York A. C. i O I .000 Hockey Club 303 .000 At this stage of the race the St. Nicks were playing away above their expected form, while the New York Athletic Club and the Crescents had not been able to get into their stride. The New York Athletic Club team came to hfe with a jump in the game against the Santa Claus seven on January 17, and defeated them decisively by the score of 7 to 3. They repeated their good work on January 23 and won from the Hockey Club by the same score. The rink was taxed to its utmost to hold the big crowd that turrcd out for the first clash between the Crescents and the Wanderers. After a hard fought battle the New Moon puck chasers triumphed by the score of 5 to 4- The game was marked by a great deal of roughness, ten of the fifteen men who played being penalized at different times. The Wanderers 1, White; 2, Peabody; 3, Reinmund; 4, Deiiesha; 5, Strange. NEW YORK ATHLETIC CLUB HOCKEY TEAM. 1, Davison; 2, Frederick's, 5, Weeks; Rogers: 10, Woods. HOCKEY CLUB OF NEW YORK , Bulger; 7, Britton; 8, MacKenzie; 9, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 9 regained their lost ground in the next game, however, by win- ning from the St. Nicholas team 7 to 6. The Crescents beat the Winged Foot contingent on February 2 by the score of 3 to 2, making the standings at the end of the first month as follows: Club. Games. Won. Lost. PC. Crescents 4 3 i .750 Wanderers 4 3 i . 750 New York A.C 4 2 2 . 500 St. Nicholas 4 2 2 .500 Hockey Club 4 4 .000 The Wanderer's jumped into the lead on February 6, after winning from the Hockey Club team, 4 to 3. Their slay was short lived, however, as the Crescents came through with a brilliant victory over the New York Athletic Club on February 8, winning by 4 to 2. This was one of the decisive games of the season, as it showed the rejuvenated ability of the veteran Crescent quintette, Wall, Shirreff, Liffiton, Kennedy and Dobby, and proved definitely that the Winged Foot seven was out of the race. St. Nicholas beat the Hockey Club, 4 to 3, on February 15, and the Wanderers won from the New York Athletic Club, 8 to 7, on the following day. The standings at the end of the sixth week were as follows: Club. Games. Won. Lost. PC. Wanderers 6 5 i .833 Crescents 5 4 i . 800 St. Nicholas 6 3 3 .500 New York A.C 523 .400 Hockey Club 6 o 6 .000 The New York Athletic Club crept up by beating the Saints on February 21 by a score of 3 to 2. The Crescents blanked the Hockey Club on February 24, winning by 9 to o. The New York Athletic Club chalked up another victory over the Hockey Club on February 2"], by a score of 6 to 2. This ended the Hockey Club's schedule with eight defeats and no victories. The second game between the Crescents and the Wanderers brought out a horde of fans. The Wanderers turned the tables, winning 4 to i, through the sterling work of their two new- comers, Lacken and McGrath. 1, Captain Kay, Princeton; 2, Harmon, Yale; 3, "Hobe" Baker, Princeton. THREE PROMINENT INTE'RCOIXEGIATE PLAYERS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. IJ It looked like easy sailing for the Wanderers from this point, as their next game was with the New York Athletic Club, but the Winged Footers upset all the dope and ran away with the game, 7 to 4. This tightened up the race considerably and when the Crescents defeated the New York Athletic Club, 6 to 5, on March 8, the league schedule ended in a tie for first place between the New Moon seven and the Wanderers. The New York Athletic Club and St. Nicholas teams were tied for third and the Hockey Club was last. The standings were as follows : Club. Games. Won. Lost. PC Crescents 8 6 2 Wanderers 8 6 2 New York A.C 844 St. Nicholas 8 4 4 Hockey Club 8 8 750 750 500 500 000 This necessitated a playoff between the two leaders, which took place on March 13, before one of the greatest and most enthusiastic crowds that ever witnessed a hockey game in New York. The Crescent team showed their superiority from the start and won hands down by the score of 4 to i. The game was featured by the spectacular playing of Liffiton of the Crescents, who scored three of his team's four goals. The players roughed it up continually during the second period and there was someone off the ice nearly the whole time. An unpleasant incident, which came near marring the other- wise splendid season, occurred just before this game, when sev- eral of the Wanderers' players refused to take part in it unless they received some remuneration from the rink management. They were finally induced to play the game and the matter was later placed before the American Amateur Hockey League. As a result of the affair the entire Wanderers team was suspended and two of the players were debarred from amateur hockey in this country for good. Following is the line-up of the extra game: Crescent A.C. Positions. Wanderers. Mills Goal Mitchell Brown Point Kinsella Wall Cover point Garon Shirreff Rover Bulger Liffiton Center Lacken Scarborough Left wing Harmon Kennedy , Right wing McGrath 1, Bill Dobby. right wing and coach, Crescent Athletic Club, Brooklyn, N. Y,; 2, Burt White, New York Athletic Club; 3, Artie Liffiton, center, Crescent Athletic Club, Brooklyn, N. Y. A TRIO OF METROPOLITAN PLAYERS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 13 This match gave the Crescents permanent nossession of the ver cup which was offered six years ago for the team which puld win three championships. The New York Athletic Club id already registered two legs on the emblem and the vSt. jcholas team held the other claim, when it gained premier nors in 1906-07. The championship was the ninth which the Crescent Athletic ub has won since the founding of the American Amateur )ckey League in 1896. The New York Athletic Club has won t title four times, the St. Nicholas Skating Club once, the anderers once and the defunct Brooklyn Skating Club once. The official record of contests of the American Amateur Ice )ckey League for the season of 1911-1912 is as follows (all mes played at St. Nicholas Rink, New Y'ork City) : i[an. 3 — Wanderers, 7; Hockey Club of New York, i. an. 4 — St, Nicholas S.C., 3; Crescent A.C., 2. |Jan 9 — St. Nicholas S.C., 3 ; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2. Jan. 12 — Wanderers, 6; New Y^ork A.C., i. Jan. 16 — Crescent A.C., 9; Hockey Club of N. Y., 3. Ijan. 17 — New Y^ork A.C., 7; St. Nicholas S.C, 3. Jan. 23— New Y^ork A.C., 7; Hockey Club of N. Y., 3. Jan. 26 — Crescent A.C., 5 ; Wanderers, 4. Tan. 30 — Wanderers, 7; St. Nicholas S.C, 6. Feb. 2 — Crescent A.C., 3 ; New York A.C., 2. Feb. 6 — Wanderers, 4; Hockey Club of N. Y., 3. Feb. 8 — Crescent A.C., 4; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. Feb. 15— St. Nicholas S.C, 4; Hockey Club of N. Y., 3. Feb. 16— Wanderers, 8; New York A.C, 7. Feb. 21 — New York A.C, 3; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. Feb. 24 — Crescent A.C, 9; Hockey Club of N. Y., o. Feb. 27 — New York A.C, 6; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2. Mar. I — Wanderers, 4; Crescent A.C, i. Mar. 5 — St. Nicholas S.C, 7; Wanderers, 4. Mar. 8— Crescent A.C, 6; New York A.C, 5. Mar. 13 — Crescent A.C, 4; Wanderers, i. A. A. H. L. PERCENTAGE TABLE. Club. Played. Won. Lost. PC. Crescent A.C 9 7 2 .778 Wanderers 9 6 3 .667 New York A.C 844 -Soo St. Nicholas S.C 844 -SOO Hockey Club of N. Y... 8 8 .000 A FAIR CHECK. 1— Kinsolla and :McGratti, Wanderers Hockey Clnb. 2 — McGrath, Ellison and Lacken. O'Neill, Photo. Sr ALBINO'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 15 GOALS SCORED FOR AND AGAINST TEAMS. For. Agst. For. Agst. Crescent A.C 39 23 St. Nicholas 30 32 Wanderers 44 31 Hockey Club of N.Y. 17 49 New York A.C... 3« 33 The ten leading scorers of the season follow: McGrath, Wanderers 15 Chew, St. Nicholas. Liffiton, Crescents . . . , Reinmund, N.Y.A.C. , Harmon, Wanderers.. Stanley, St. Nicholas. 14 Lacken, Wanderers 13 Dene-^ha, N.Y.A.C. . 12 Shirreff, Crescents... II Britton, Hockey Club CHAMPIONSHIP WINNERS. The table of championship teams since the founding of the American Amateur Hockey League is shown in the attached schedule : 1896-97— New York Athletic Club. 1897-98— New York Athletic Club. 1898-99— Brooklyn Skating Club. 1899-1900 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1900-01 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1901-02 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1902-03 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1903-04 — Wanderers Hockey Club. 1904-05 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1905-06 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1906-07 — St. Nicholas Skating Club. 1907-08 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1908-09 — New York Athletic Club. 1909-10 — New York Athletic Club. 1910-11 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1911-12 — Crescent Athletic Club. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, The Intercollegiate Hockey Season of 1912 The intercollegiate hockey season of 1912 showed one of the nost remarkable reversals of form on record. Cornell, the itle holder of the previous season, finished in fourth place,' with 3ne game won and three lost. Princeton, which had finished the previous season in last place, winning one game and losing four, went through the season without a defeat. Only four points were scored against the Tigers, and they ran up a total of thirty goals in the four games played. Most of the glory for this splendid showing must go to "Hobey" Baker, the wonderful Princeton rover. He is the fastest man seen in intercollegiate hockey in a good many years. The Columbia team played a steady, consistent game all season, losing only to Princeton, and finishing second. Yale broke even, winning from Dartmouth and Cornell and losing to Columbia and Princeton. Cornell was unable to defeat Yale, Columbia and Princeton, but ran away from Dartmouth. The latter team lost all of its games, although putting up a hard fight against Yale and Columbia. The league season opened on January 6, when Princeton defeated Dartmouth, 14 to o, at Boston. This was the only over- whelming defeat of the schedule, and showed the strength of the Princeton attack. On the same day Columbia played Cornell at Syracuse and surprised followers of the game by defeating the former champions by a score of 6 to 2. Princeton defeated the Ithacans even more decisively on January 13 by 6 to i. It was now evident that the Cornell team had lost its power and that Princeton was the team to be reckoned with. Columbia and Dartmouth met on January 15 at Boston, the New Yorkers winning, 5 to 4, after a hard fought battle. Yale made its first appearance of the season on January 20 and kept the slate clean by the narrowest of margins, defeating Cornell 2 to i. The decisive game of the season was played in New York on January 22. Princeton and Columbia were recognized as the two strongest teams in the field, and the outcome of their meet- ing was watched with interest. The game was closely contested during the first period, but in the second period the speed of the Princeton attack swept the New Yorkers off their feet and 1, Wasburn; 2, Harris; 3, T. A. Howard, Coach; 4. A'. H. Burroughs, Asst. Mgr.; 5, Whitlock; 6, E. H. Koenig, Mgr. ; 7, Bangs; ", Bates; 9, R. J. Trimble, Capt. ; 10, Lovejoy; 11, Milbank. Pach, Photo. COLUMBIA FNITERSITY HOCKEY TEAM. 1, Kimball; 2, Gore; 3, Howe; 4, Wainwright: 5, E. O'Brien, Mg*-. ; 6. Bake- well; 7, Msrtin; 8, Carhart; 9, A. Harman, Capt.; 10, Cox; 11, Chauncey. American Press Ass'n, Photo, YALE UNIVERSITY HOCKEY TEAM. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 19 ; game closed with the score 6 to 2 in favor of the Tigers. ker was the star of the game. Several times he got the puck lind his own goal and carried it the length of the rink through : entire opposing team. Bates and Lovejoy played well for jie losers. The Jerseyites kept up their terrific pace by defeating Yale p January 27 by a score of 4 to i, clinching the championship id ending the season with an unbroken string of victories. Columbia made sure of second place by winning from Yale, to 4, on February 10. After this defeat Yale found herself in a bad way. But the am picked up enough to nose Dartmouth out in the last game • its schedule, 4 to 3, an indication of the hammer and tongs iture of the game. The final game of the league schedule was one of the most ■cciting and interesting of the year. Neither Cornell nor Dart- outh had won a game all season and when they met at Syracuse n February 17, they faced the chance of going through the :hedule without a victory. , Dartmouth apparently had not recovered from the strenuous ame against Yale and was easily defeated by Cornell, the latter iam rallying desperately and displaying a flash of their old Drm. INTERCOLLEGIATE HOCKEY LEAGUE CONTESTS. At Boston ; Princeton 14, Dartmouth o. At Syracuse ; Columbia 6, Cornell 2. At Syracuse; Princeton 6, Cornell i. At Boston ; Columbia 5, Dartmouth 4. At New York; Yale 2. Cornell i. At New York ; Princeton 6, Columbia 2. At New York; Princeton 4, Yale i. At New York; Columbia 7, Yale 4. At New Haven ; Yale 4, Dartmouth 3. At Syracuse ; Cornell 5, Dartmouth 2. The Intercollegiate Hockey League percentage table, with lumber of goals made by each team and by opponents is ap- ended : Games. Won. 'rinceton 4 4 Columbia 4 3 fale 4 2 'ornell 4 i Dartmouth .... 4 o Tan. 6. Jan. 6. Jan. 13- Jan. 15- Jan. 20. Jan. 22. Jan. 27. Feb. 10. Feb. 14- Feb. 17- ost. P.C. Goals Opponents 1.000 30 4 I .600 20 16 2 .500 II IS 3 .200 9 16 4 .000 9 28 1. Wurts, Asst. Mgr.; 2, Scbcu; 3. Nesbit: 4, More; 5, Clark Flack, Mgr.; 8, Tewkesbury; 9, Vail, Capt. ; 10, Smith. CORNELL UNIVERSITY HOCKEY TEAM. , 6, Hill; T/t c . :. .* « 11 H D T 5 .f'f ^m^sm IT B3y 1 1 1 T . \ - / \ PJlHi 1, McCarthy; 2, Bigelow; 3, McAllister, Asst. Mgr.; 4, Johnson; 5, Taylor; 6, Bullard; 7, Bellinger; 8, Schulte; 9, Luitwieler; 10, Wells, Capt.; 11 Mason; 12, Fahey. DARTMOUTH COLLEGE HOCKEY TEAM. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. \ Interscholastic Hockey in the East By Odgers T. Gurnee. The interscholastic hockey play in New York was divided into two classes : the private prep schools in one and the public high schools in another. Among the private schools Browning had the best team record, defeating Cutler and Collegiate, the runners-up.. in well played contests. Cutler won from Collegiate in their only game, but was tied twice by Irving School, which in turn was defeated twice by Collegiate. This showing puts Cutler and Collegiate on about the same basis, with Irving close behind. Columbia Grammar and Syms Schools ran up against a bad year on the ice and lost nearly all of their games. Syms took a decided brace on the thirteenth of February, however, and beat Collegiate, keeping the latter school out of second place in the year's standing. The absence of Grofif School from the ice for the first time in several years made a hole in the season's play, as they had always managed to put out a strong team. There were also several boarding schools in the East which were well represented on the ice. Hackley School of Tarry- town, N. Y., had one of its most successful seasons and defeated its rival, Harstrom School of Norwalk, Conn., 3 to o. Hackley also played the Yale freshmen team, but lost, 2 to i. Harstrom put up a strong game all season, one of its most notable vic- tories being the game with Irving, which took place on January 20, and was won by the score of 8 to o. Other active school teams were : St. Paul's School, Concord Vt. ; Lawrenceville School, Lawrenceville, N. J.; Kent School, 1, Reichardt; 2, Kronheim; 3, Goode; 4, Harmon; 5, Mr. Jacobson, Coach; 6 Bergen- 7, Higg-ins; 8, Seaver, Capt.; 9, Titus; 10. Thomas. MANUAL TRAINING HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, BROOKLYN, N. Y. RhSnff- -^\'rn^;.^«'''i''nPv \ L iyingston: 4, Goodman; 5, Littlefield; 6. layloi, 13, Trenholm. Whitef Photo. DE WITT CLINTON HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, NEW YORK CITY SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 23 Cent, Conn.; Taft School, Watertown, Conn.; Gunnery School Vashington, Conn. ; Holbrook Academy, Fordham Prep and itevens Prep. During the season several embryo stars were uncovered who ,ave promise of supplying excellent timber for college and mateur hockey league teams. Among them were Captain Ferris .nd Ronderbrock of Cutler, Blodgett and Charlie Pope of Col- egiate, the Cravat brothers of Irving, and Gussenrode and A^hitney of Columbia Grammar. In the Public School League, five teams were entered for the \. G. Spalding trophy. They were Manual Training and Boys' riigh of Brooklyn, Curtis of Staten Island and DeWitt Clinton md Stuyvesant of New York. The race was close from the start, Manual opening the season on January 13 by defeating Curtis, 2 to I. This game was protested by Curtis and had to be played over at the end of the schedule. The second game took place on January 15, when the Stuyvesant team over- ivhelmed Boys' High, 11 to o. Clinton played its first game on January 20 and won from Curtis, 2 to I. Boys' High forfeited to Manual on January 27, making the league standings at the end of the first month as follows : Won. Lost. PC. Won. Lost. PC. Manual i i.ooo Curtis o i ,000 Clinton I o i.ooo Boys' High o 2 .000 Stuyvesant .... i i.ooo [The protested game on February 13 between Manual and Curtis does not figure in the records.] Stuyvesant opened the second month with a victory over the strong Clinton team, winning 2 to i. Curtis followed suit by defeating Boys' High to the tune of 10 to i. Manual won its game from Stuyvesant on the loth by the score of 3 to i. At this stage of the race it was apparent that Manual had the strongest team and, barring accident, would capture the title. Clinton, Curtis and Stuyvesant, all had strong teams, however, and interest in the race continued as keen as ever. Clinton showed her strength in the Boys' High game on Feb- ruary 27, which she won, 16 to 0. On February 19 Curtis outplayed Stuyvesant and won, 3 to 2. The decisive game of the season came on February 25, when Manual and Clinton clashed. The game was bitterly contested from start to finish, but the Brooklyn boys showed better team work and won out 2 to i. . On the following night the protested game with Curtis was 1, Elliott, Mgr. ; 2. Smart : /.. Jinu^ion; 4. Palmer; 5, Gardner; 6, "Wllletts; 7, Huntington, Capt.; 8, Blackall; 9, Sortwell; 10, Duncan; 11, Pierce. HARVARD UNIVERSITY HOCKEY TEAM. ^§0 f WHM Hip 'M^ 1, Wooley; 2. Needham; 3, Walker; 4. Little; 5. Wood, Mgr.; 6. Ackerman; 7, Jones; 8, Peckham. Capt.; 9, Hutchinson; 10, Sanctuary. MASSACHUSETTS AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE HOCKEY TEAM, AMHERST, MASS. .1 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 26 Ilayed and although the Manual team had to take the ice with le same lineup that had faced Clinton, they rose to the occasion jind defeated the Staten Islanders by the close score of 2 to i. the game was very hard fought. Both teams showed good team vork, but the superior work of their forwards enabled Manual ,i> win. j The final standing of the teams was as follows : Won. Lost. PC. Won. Lost. PC. .Manual 4 o i .000 Stuyvesant 2 2 .500 Curtis 2 2 .500 Boys' High 4 .00c Clinton 2 2 .500 The winners kept their slate clean throughout the season, while Curtis, Clinton and Stuyvesant were tied for second p'ace with two won and two lost. Boys' High was oi'itclassed by the other teams and did not win a game. , DeWitt Clinton scored the largest number of points (20). , Manual had the least number of points scored against her (3) and Boys' High had the most {37). They did not score a point during the whole season. The league schedule follows: Jan. 13 — Manual, 2; Curtis, 0. Jan. 15 — Stuyvesant, 11; Boys' High, o. Jan. 20 — Clinton, 2; Curtis, i. Jan. 27 — Manual won from Boys' High by default. Feb. 3 — Stuyvesant, 2; Clinton, i. Feb. 5 — Curtis, 10; Boys' High, 0. Feb. 10 — Manual, 3; Stuyvesant, i. Feb. 17 — Clinton, 16; Boys' High, o. Feb. 19 — Curtis, 3; Stuyvesant. 2. Feb. 25 — Manual, 2; Clinton, i. Feb. 26 — Manual, 2; Curtis, i. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIKKARY. 27 The Advent of Hockey in Syracuse, N. Y. By Charles E. Parker. With the completion of the Syracuse Arena, in the early winter season of 1911-12, the game of ice hockey made its advent in Syracuse, N. Y. Prior to the construction of the Arena, the jpopular Canadian pastime was little known to sport lovers of the city. Local newspapers devoted columns of space to the isport. The Cornell University team entered into an agreement, whereby, in the absence of a rink in Ithaca, it would play its home games at Syracuse; the Arena management collected together a number of former college and club stars; Syracuse University issued a call for hockey team candidates, and when the time came for the formal opening of the mammoth rink the game had thousands of warm supporters. The first game of the season was played on the evening of December 22, with Cornell and the Arenas as the opposing teams. Over 2,000 rooters were on hand to witness the contest. The game was closely contested throughout the first half. Cornell's speed began to tell on the local boys in the second period and the visiting team captured the game by an 8 to 4 score. That game placed hockey pn a firm footing in the city. Other teams were organized ; enth^siast'c crowds attended the games, and long before the season was well under way, Syracuse became the recognized hockey center of central New York. The Hockey team representing the University was one of the last to get under way. Having made no previous plans, and not having taken part previously in this branch of athletic endeavor, the local institution had little or nothing to begin with, and it was not until Professor Northcott, a member of the faculty and a former Canadian university player, volunteered his services as a coach that the sport began to boom. A call for candidates was issued, to which twenty-five men responded. A schedule of three games was arranged and when the season opened with the Massachusetts Institute of Technology team as opponents the local 'varsity team was in fair shape. The greater experience of the Massachusetts boys counted, however, and Syracuse lost the game by the score of 5 to 0. Two games were played with the Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute team, the first of which was captured by the Troy team after an exciting iwt H-Pi :-^iii|" mm 1, Blind: -J, Adams; ?,. Stulil; 4. Paino; 5, Mackey; €>. Perkins; 7, Grafton 8,' "a-::;; I), Foctj. BRAE BURN HOCKEY TEAM, BOSTON, MASS. 1, Gerlrtis: 2, Rollirprs: 3, Tackson; 4, Lacey; 5, Richardson; G. Brown; ' Cliue; 8, Ilobbs; 9, Fallow; 10, Walker. Baker, Phot DETROIT (MICH.) Y.M.C.A. HOCKEY TEAM. City Hockey League Champions SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 29 finish, the final score being 3 to 2. The final intercollegiate game resulted in an o to o tie after an extra &ession, featured with some of the fastest defensive work ever witnessed in Syracuse. Considering the University's inexperience in the game and the fact that it was necessary to develop a team from raw material, the showing made by the team was not disappointing, A new athletic insignia was adopted by the University Athletic Associa- tion, and awarded to the members of the team, and arrange- ments made for a. schedule of games covering the entire 1912-13 season. The Arena team fared considerably better in its showing than did the University aggregation. It lost its opening contest with the intercollegiate champions, but in the succeeding games of the season, which included contests with Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Rochester, Cleveland A.C., and the Buffalo .Hockey Club, the Arenas made a very creditable showing. I Toward the close of the season the local high schools tc^ok up (the game with such success that it is assured a place among local ! interscholastic sports during the coming years. The Syracuse University schedule for laat season was as follows : Syracuse, 2 ; Arena 3. Syracuse, o; Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 5. Syracuse, 2; University of Rochester, i. Syracuse, 2; Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 3. Syracuse, o ; Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, 0. Syracuse, 4; Arena, 5. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Cleveland Athletic Club Hockey Team By E. a. Binyon. The hockey team of the Cleveland Athletic Club for the season of 1911-12 succeeded in establishing a record which was not only remarkable but one that has never been equalled by any one team in the United States since the introduction of the game into this country. In all they played thirty-three games, winning twenty-five, losing seven and tieing one. They met and defeated the finest teams from the Ontario Hockey Association, such aggregations as the Parkdale Canoe Club of Toronto, whom they defeated, 4 — 3 and 4 — 2; the New Edinburghs of Ottawa, by a score of 3 — 2 ; Toronto Athletic Club, 6 — o and 4 — i ; Senior Stratfords, 4 — 2 and 4 — 0; Kingston, 7 — 2 and — o. A complete schedule of all games played and their respective scores is given at the end of this article. They won the first game with the Montreal Stars by the one- sided score of 7 — 2, but lost the second game by the close score of 3 — 4, through nothing more than over-confidence during the first half and over-anxiety in the second. They greatly out- played the visitors, having the puck almost the entire time in the vicinity of their opponents' goal. They defeated the Manitoba University team, champions of Northwestern Canada, by the score of 5 — 3. The University team was composed of star players. They played a rough, dash- ing game, but failed to win, because of the fact that although their rushes were made by the whole forward line, the man carrying the puck, when he reached the defense, undertook to carry it through unaided, and lost it. One of the most exciting games of the season was the first game with the Crescent Athletic Club of New York. The score was 3 — 2, in favor of the Cleveland team. The feature of the game was the brilliant work of Mills in the nets for the Cres- cents, who made thirty-six stops, only missing three out of thirty-nine. The Clevelands won the second game by the one- sided score of 12 to 4, Mills having been called home, leaving a substitute goal tender, who was unequal to the task allotted him. The champions defeated the Inter-Colonials of Boston by the scores of 7 — 2 and 5—1, completely outclassing them. Later on in Boston they lost by the score of i — 2. On their trip East they stopped over in Syracuse for a game and were defeated by the score of i — 2. The whole Syracuse team had been imported for the occasion and consisted of stars 1, Binyon, Coach; 2. Lock; 3, Robinson, Student Mgr.; 4, Breck; 5, Carter, Faculty Mgr.; 6, Way, Capt.; 7. Huggins; 8. Kaull; 9, Gordon; 10. Francies. SHAW HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, CLEVELAND, OHIO. 1, Lind, Coach; 2, Smith; 3, King; 4, Cofall; 5, Ashmun. Mgr.; 6, N. Gross; 7, Gaines; 8, Cook, Capt.; 9. W. Gross; 10, Sawyer. EAST HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, CLEfVELAND, OHIO. SfALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 33 from all over Ontario. Such men as De Roche, goal, and Doheny, left wing, of Peterboro ; Brown, point, of Gait; Hunter, cover-point, of Toronto Parkdales ; McCammos, rover, Whitby ; Beatty, center, Midland, and Jupp, right wing, Orillia. The last two games of the season were played with the All Stars. This team is selected each year by the officials of the Ontario Hockey Association. They are the pick of the multitude of teams which play under the Association's control and super- vision. The Cl^velands won the first game, 4 — 2, but lost the second by the score of 2 — i. The games were very fast and exciting and belonged to either team until final time was called. The attendance at the games during the season was far larger in numbers and greater in enthusiasm than ever before. Hockey is fast becoming to Cleveland in winter what base ball is to it in jSummer — the premier sport. A great deal of the success of the team was due to the efficient [coaching of Fred Poland and the excellent management of Harrison Shannon. The distinguishing feature of the team's play was the lack of "individualism. The forward line played together at all times, rushing their opponents always on a line, checking back con- sistently, the team work at times being dazzling. The defense was like a stone wall. It was seldom penetrated, which, together with the sensational work of Marchand in goal, formed a com- bination which was extremely hard to score upon. The team consisted of the following players, who were each presented with a gold watch and gold cuff links as a token of appreciation for their splendid efforts which resulted in winning the championship of the United States. Raymond Marchand (Goal) — Marchand was easily the star of all the goal tenders who appeared at the Elysium during the year. At all times he played a steady, consistent game, and on many occasions put up such a sensational exhibition as to call forth frequently the noisy plaudits of the spectators and the admiration of the opposing players. He is really a wonderful player. "Coddy" Winters (Point) — Winters was captain of the team and is undoubtedly the speediest amateur playing the game to-day. His swift rushes were spectacular and exciting, often carrying the puck the whole length of the ice, passing through the entire opposition, and scoring unassisted. He scored almost as many goals as the highest scoring players on the forward line, which in a measure indicates his worth to the team. HosiE Elder (Cover-point) — On the defensive Elder was a tower of strength to the team. His body checking was deadly 1, Moore; 2, L. Post; 3. Dowlins?; 4 1' orris; 8. L. Cohu ; 9, Pamlebrook.^ Hoyt; W. Cohii; 0, A. Post; 7, Pach Bros., Photo. CUTLER SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, NEW YORK CITY. 1. Wing, Capt.; 2, Knovvlton; 3, Haskell; 4, Eaton; 5. Davis; 6. Bellinger; 1, Alexandre. Photo by Curtiss Studio. POMFRET (CONN.) SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 35 and sure, and the man who tried to pass him unassisted usually regretted his efifort. On the (offensive he is very fast, but has a tendency to overskate the puck when he reaches the defense. He is a valuable man for any team. Earl Gustine (Rover) — Gustine is a fast skater and as a stick handler is without a peer. A clever, tricky player, who presents the unusual combination of a fine dribbler and a con- sistent teamwork player. His shooting is swift and sure, getting the puck away the instant it strikes his stick and from any angle. He was the greatest goal shooter on the team. When in condi- tion he can hardly be improved upon. Clarence McFarland (Right Wing)— McFarland learned the game in Pittsburgh in the old Duquesne Garden Rink. Next to Gustine he is the best stick handler on the team, a fast skater and a fair shot. He plays a steady aggressive game, checks back well, and during the season was seldom outplayed. Harry Poland (Center) — Poland is a good skater, a rattling good shot, and a hard theck. He plays a strong, hard game, always fighting to win. As center he played against some of the finest players both in Canada and this country, and was always able to hold his own against the best of them, Elmer Irving (Left Wing) — Irving is probably the most aggressive player on the team, his checking back and stealing the puck from opponents who were rushing his goal was a fea- ture of nearly every game. Being blessed with a pair of won- derful shoulders and arms, he shoots the puck like a bullet from a rifle. His control is not always good, however, so that he often shoots wide. He is undoubtedly one of the finest defensive for- ward men who played in Cleveland during the season. The substitutes, Jamieson, Baker and McGiffon, played in sev- eral games and displayed their worth, and were only kept off the team by the fact that all of the regular men were stars and fitted in better in combination work as a team. The record of the team for season is as follows : 6— Duluth 7— Intercolonial 2 4 — Stratford 2 8 — Duluth 5 — Intercolonial i 4 — Stratford o 5 — Detroit 3 12 — St. Paul 3 i — Syracuse 2 3— Detroit 2 9— St. Paul 2 3— Boston A. A. i 3 — Crescents 2 4 — Detroit i — Intercolonial 2 12— Crescents 4 4 — Detroit o 6 — Montreal A.S. 5 2— Detroit 8 6— Toronto o o— Montreal A.S. i 2 — Detroit 4 4— Toronto I 7— Kingston O. 2 3 — New Edinburgh 2 7 — Montreal 2 — Kingston O. o 4— Parkdales 3 3— Montreal 4 4— All Stars 2 4— Parkdales 2 5— Manitoba U. 3 i— All Stars 2 1, Glass, rover, "Wanderers of Montreal: 2. Frank Kavanagh, Victorias; 3, Angus Campbell, rover, Toronto Hockey Team. WELL KNOWN CANADIAN PLAYERS. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 37 Hockey in Canada By Frank Calder, Montreal. "Onward, ever onward," was the watchword in Canadian hockey in the season 1911-1912 and never since the gentle art of chasing the puck over the ice was devised has so much progress been made. Canadian hockey enthusiasts look forward to the time when Canada's national winter sport will be placed on the footing of the great game of base ball in the United States; to the time when Canada will have a National Hockey Commission ; to the time when Canada will have major and minor leagues and Class C and Class D leagues and the other paraphernalia of organized base ball. And the winter of 1911-1912 saw quite an advance in the right direction. There are two outstanding features connected with the game during the last season : one, the introduction of artificial ice to a section of the country in which the natural article is a rarity; the other, the elaboration of a new set of rules which virtually revolutionized the game from the point of view of the spectator and of the player to a very large extent. Mainly through the enterprise of the brothers Lester and Frank Patrick, British Columbia was able to see for the first time hockey played under the same conditions, and to a large extent by the same players, as delighted the great crowds of the East, where natural ice can be relied on for at least ten weeks out of the winter. Spacious rinks, equipped with artificial ice olants, were built in Vancouver and Victoria, players from the East were engaged to play the game, a league composed of Vancouver, Victoria and New Westminster clubs was organized and, hey, presto, the hockey habit caught on like magic. Caught on not only as a source of sightseeing amusement but, better still, caught on as a sport for Canada's youth, so that where in years gone by the great game had been unknown, the ring of the skates was heard in the land and the puck was chased gleefully by the youth of British Columbia, or that portion of it which was fortunate enough to be located in Vancouver and Victoria. In the East a long established idea that six men a side, instead of seven, as prescribed by the original rules would make for a better game, was put to the test. It made good. The idea orig- inated with William Northey, the genial secretary of the Mon- treal Arena Company, and though, to tell the truth, there was at 1, Schiller; 2, Conover; 3. Lomax; 4, Bangs; 5, Gano; 6, Burgess; 7, Sproul; 8, Heron, Capt.; 9, McDonald. ST. PAUL'S SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, CONCORD, N. H. f :.| f 1, Moore; 2, Smith; 3, Devinny; 4, Cox; 5, Hickey, Capt.; 6, La Bissoniere; 7, Graves; 8, Kartak; 9, Leonard; 10, xMilton. Gollmg, Photo. MECHANIC ARTS HOCKEY TEAM, ST. PAUL, MiNN. Sl'AI.DINirS ATHLETIC I.IBRAUY. 39 first some opposition, it soon vanished and at the end, of the season there were more converts to the new idea than there were adherents of the old-time seven-men-a-side faith. Conditions, also, made it expedient that a cut should be made, and expediency, in this case, went a long way towards establishing the six-men-a- side idea. When the Western League, previously mentioned, was organ- ized, it attracted, as the needle is attracted to the magnet, many of the stalwarts of the game in the East. The supply of hockey players was therefore depleted for the professional league, though brave efforts were made to fill up the ranks. The new crop, however, except in one or two notable instances, scarcely matched up with the remainder of the players. •It remained to Emmett Quinn, the very capable president of the National Hockey Association of Canada to formulate a set of rules that fitted with the six-men-a-side idea, and these rules were a success from the start, though they differed radically from the code superseded. In the first place President Quinn deemed it best for the game, if six men a side were to play, that there should be six men a side on the ice all the time. Under the old order a player who com- mitted a foul was suspended for a brief period, such suspensions varying in time from two minutes to twenty minutes. During that time the team played a man short. It was easily foreseen, therefore, that with six men a side a team with two or more players ruled off for fouls, which might be purely technical offences, was unfairly handicapped. Moreover, the game became too much of a defence effort on one side to make it interesting to the public. To cater to the public was ever the object of pro- fessional sporting organizations. Therefore, said President Quinn, let there be six men a side on the ice all the time — and there were six men a side. The temporary suspension was banished entirely. Its place was taken by a system of fines and total banishment for a serious offence. At that, however, the side losing the player who had seriously offended was allowed to replace him. For purposes of the new rules fouls were divided into two categories, major fouls and minor fouls. A major foul was a deliberate attempt to foul a player in such a manner as to do him bodily injury. For this crime the punishment was instant banishment by the referee and a fine by the president of the league. Minor fouls were those petty, technical offences, such as tripping, hooking and the like. Offenders in these respects were cautioned once, twice, thrice, but the fourth time it was a fine. They were allowed to continue in the game, however, fines SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 41 ccumulating as offences increased. In spite of the much adverse riticism from many quarters the new system worked like a harm and kept down a growing tendency to rough play to a ery large degree. Combined with the six-men-a-side system the public of Mon- real, Ottawa and Quebec were treated to the most brilliant ;eason's hockey in many years. Four teams only composed the eague— Wanderers of Montreal, Ottawa, Canadians (French) Df Montreal, and Quebec. The championship was won by the ast named after many brilliant exhibitions. Quebec had gath- Iired together a young team who were able to stay in the game avery minute of the sixty, and youth was served. Quebec won one of the closest races in the history of senior hockey in the home of the game. , In the West, meanwhile, the Western teams, Vancouver, Vic- toria and New Westminister, played a triple schedule, out of which New Westminster, with the veteran Eastern player, Jimmie Gardner, at the helm, won the pennant after a close contest. One other professional organization existed — the Maritime Hockey League, composed of the Moncton, N. B., New Glasgow and Halifax teams. Here Moncton were the winners and had [the honor of playing the National Hockey Association cham- pions, Quebec, for the Stanley Cup, the world's championship trophy. Quebec had no difficulty whatever in retaining possession of the historic trophy, which was theirs by virtue of their National Hockey Association championship. While the professionals were experimenting with new rules the amateurs continued under the old regime. But the amateur game in Canada appears to be attractive now only to amateur players, which, perhaps, is theoretically as it should be. Anyway the great crowds of excited hockey fans who sometimes waited for hours during a bitter Canadian blizzard to gain admittance to a rink where two amateur teams were to meet in a decisive battle are now altogether missing. They had gone over to the professionals. In the East the Interprovincial Hockey Union played through a successful season, while in Ontario the Ontario Hockey Associa- tion, as usual, gathered together all the hockey teams in sight in one compact sectional organization. The clever team of the Eaton A.A.xA.., of Toronto, won the Ontario hockey championship and thereupon challenged the holders of the Allan Cup, the emblem of the amateur hockey championship of Canada, which the Victorias of Winnipeg held. The "Vies" had little difficulty in retaining their honors and later in the season also defended the trophy against a team from Calgary, which had won the Alberta championship. 42 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey and Championship Rules of the American Amateur Hockey League Copyrighted, 1912, by American Amateur Hockey League. Section i. The game of Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. A Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or displaced, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point, and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play .shall any player who fills this position, lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 43 a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the center and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are supposed to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec 5 A Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. OFFICIALS. Sec. 8, There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires, two game timekeepers, and two penalty tMnekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in 44 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Other official positions that may dtcur during a match; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree; or when the selected officials are absent at the advertised starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall,, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. duties of the umpires. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall mform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retam the same goal throughout the entire game. duties of the game timekeepers. Sec. 12. The game timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting t.-me for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 45 The game timekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. They shall only tell the expired and unexpired time to the referee. DUTIES OF THE PENALTY TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 13. The penalty timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no penalized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the penalty time- keepers. They shall also keep an accurate account of the time of any player who has been compelled to withdraw from the game and inform the referee when the said player is due again to report. They shall sit midway between the two goals, and shall be on the opposite side of the rink from the game time- keepers. They shall give an accurate report of all penalties imposed to the referee at the close of the match. All players penalized must sit with the penalty timekeepers. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 14. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minutes between the tw^o periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and play shall be resumed at once, and continued until a goal has been scored Should the tie remain unbroken at the expiration of twenty minutes of extra play, the referee shall declare the game a draw. The referee must start each period on .schedule time. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 15. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by either referee, and shall begin again when the puck is put m play. 46 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. SECTION l6 — SUBSTITUTES. Clause A — Substitutes shall be allowed only in the case of an injury. The injured player's ability to continue shall at once be decided by the referee. Should the referee decide that the in- jured player cannot finish the game, the opposing side may either allow a substitute or drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the opposing side decide to allow a substitute and no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing side has allowed a substitute he may appear at any time during the balance of the game. . Clause B— Should the referee decide that the injured player would be able to continue within seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing team must drop a man until that time has expired, or until the injured player returns to the game. Should the injured player be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitute. If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing side has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a substitute or the player who has been injured. Clause C — Should a player be compelled to leave the game for any reason other than injury, the opposing side must drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the player who has first left the ice be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitution. If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing team has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a sub- stitute or the player who has first withdrawn from the game. Clause D — All substitutes or other players entering or return- ing to the game must first report to the penalty timekeepers and then to the referee. They must obtain the permission of the referee before they resume play. This clause does not refer to players who have been penalized. Clause E — Should it be necessary for the goalkeeper to retire SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 47 from the game, play shall stop until the player is once more able to return to the contest. If at the end of seven minutes the goal- keeper is not able to resume play the match must go on with a substitute being allowed in the position. At any time during the seven minutes the team that has called for time may elect to play a substitute until the original goalkeeper is able to resume the contest. Clause F — A player other than the goalkeeper who has been replaced by a substitute cannot return to further participation in the game. Clause G — In exhibition or practice games this rule may be altered by the two captains. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. 17. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. FACE. Sec. 18. A face shall consist of the referee dropping the puck to the ice between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The puck shall not be considered in play until it has touched the ice. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at tile beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec. 19. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck 48 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. himself or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any wayj whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is him-j self to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the, puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offsidej play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the bodjj of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players ot his team shall be considered on side. FOUL PLAYING, Sec. 20. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No playei shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand or stick, kick! push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall interfere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. Nc player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lifting the puck. No player shall use profane or abusive language oi conduct himself in an unsportsmanlike manner. A player being' out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. PUCK FOULS. Sec. 21. A player may stop the puck with any part of h'u stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick oi carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He maji not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he m.ust at once drop th« puck to the ice at his own feet WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 22. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occun behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee tc a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at righ angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or when the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned case:| the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left oij the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off th< ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a poin 1 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 49 ve yards out at right angles with the nearer side Hne and there ■raced. PENALTIES. Sec. 23. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. CHAMPIONSHIP RULES. Section i. All games shall be played under the rules adopted by the American Amateur Hockey League. Sec. 2. The playing season shall be from December i to March 31 both days inclusive. Sec. 3. The championship shall be decided bv a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn by one delegate from ; each club to the annual convention. The club winning the [ greatest number of matches shall be declared the champion. Sec. 4, All championship matches shall be played on rinks arranged for by the Executive Committee of the American Ama- teur Hockey League. Sec. 5, The League shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same and to be recognized as the champion of the American Amateur Hockey League. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Any club winning the championship for three years, not necessarily in succession, shall become the permanent owner of the trophy. Sec. 6. Any team making default shall forfeit its right to compete for the championship and be liable to a fine of $100 unless good reasons can be shown to the Executive Committee for defaulting. In case of default by any team all matches which have been scheduled for this team shall be credited as victories to its opponents. This rule shall also be applied in case of expulsion. Sec. 7. In all matches the Governing Committee shall appoint the referee, assistant referee, two game timekeepers, two penalty timekeepers and two goal umpires. Sec. 8. It shall be the duty of the captains of the contesting 50 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. teams to hand to the referee 'previous to the start of each match the names of his players written on forms supplied by the Sec- retary of the League. The referee shall fill in the date of the match and the names of contesting clubs, substitutes used, if any, the score at the end of the match, with names of other offi- cials, the whole to be duly signed by himself and forwarded immediately to the Secretary of the League. Sec. 9. "A." A player must have been an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for at least six months previous to being eligible to appear in any Amateur Hockey League Championship match and aiso must have been a bona fide member of the club he represents for at least thirty days before he is eligible to compete in any championship game, with the exception that players, who during the preceding season represented any recognized school or college in the United States of America need be an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for only sixty days previous to being eligible to appear in any League championship match. ''B." No player shall compete in any Amateur Hockey League championship match, who, during the then current season has played with another club, school or college in a recognized hockey association championship series without the special permission of the executive committee of the Amateur Hockey League. "C." Any player who represents a club in a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League cannot represent another club in a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League for one full calendar year from his last championship game unless the said club that he formerly represented has withdrawn or has been expelled from the championship series of the Amateur Hockey League or unless he has been released by the said club that he formerly represented. A statement signed by the president and the secretary of the club that the player has left, and filed with the secretary of the Amateur HoCkey League, shall be considered an official release. A player who believes that his release is being unjustly withheld may appeal to the Executive Committee of the Amateur Hockey League. The Committee may grant such release after giving due notice to all parties interested. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 51 Sfx. 10.. Any new player who desires to take part in a chani- jionship game of the Amateur Hockey League must first fill out I certificate supplied by the Secretary of the organization. The :ertificate must state the full name and address of the player. The club he desires to represent; where he is employed. His egal residence for six months prior to the filing of the certificate md the names of the team or teams with whom he has played luring the three years prior to the filing of the document. The ;ertificate must be signed by the president and the secretary of he club with whom the candidate desires to play who also must ittest to its accuracy. The filing of the signed certificate shall )iiul the player and the club named in the document for the period of one year, unless he is regularly released by the organi- sation. A player can file only one such certificate with the Secretary of the League. Sec. II. The Secretary of each club shall file with the Secre- ary of the American Amateur Hockey League at least thirty lays prior to opening of the championship season a list of the flayers of his club. The Secretary of each club shall also file kvith the Secretary of the American Amateur Hockey League ;he names of any additional players immediately upon their being elected to membership. Sfx. 12. All matches must be started at 8 30 p. m., and if for iny reason there be any delay in the commencement of a match the club at fault shall pay to the League as a penalty the sum of $10, unless good reason be given for such delay. The referee is to see that this rule is observed and to notify the League within two days should any breach of it occur. Sec. 13. The puck used in all championship matches must be the official puck of the League. Sec. 14. Goal nets must be approved by the Executive Com- imittee of the League. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Constitution of the American Amatem Hockey League Adopted at the Convention held in New York, November 9, 1899. Revised November 9, 1911. ARTICLE I. The name of this organization shall be "The America; Amateur Hockey League." : ARTICLE II. i| Its object shall be to improve, foster and perpetuate the gam'l of Hockey in the United States, protect it from professionalisn and to promote the cultivation of kindly feeling among the men bers of Hockey clubs. ARTICLE HI. Section i. The Executive Committee shall be named at til annual convention by each respective club, and shall consist one representative from each club. The officers shall be a Pre^ dent, a Vice-President and a Secretary-Treasurer, who shall 1 elected from and by the Executive Committee. Every member the Executive Committee shall be entitled to a vote. All office, and members of the Executive Committee shall hold office um their successors are elected. Sec. 2. Any vacancy occurring in the Executive Committ] may be filled at a regular meeting of the said Committee. Sec. 3. Three members of the Executive Committee shall elected by it to be a Special Committee, which shall be kno\i as the Governing Committee. ARTICLE IV. Section i. The President shall preside at all meetings of t Association and Executive Committee. He shall have a vote upi all questions. He shall call special meetings of the Executi| SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 53 'ommittee or of the League whenever he deems them necessary, >r when requested in writing to do so by any two clubs in the ^.ssociation, who shall specify their reasons for desiring such a leeting. Sec. 2. The Vice-President shall perform the duties of the i'resident in his absence. Sec. 3. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep an accurate record if the proceedings of the League and the Executive Committee, register of the clubs in the League, and the names of office )earers and the address of the club Secretary. He shall conduct ill correspondence of the League and the Executive, keep a •ecord of the decisions of the latter on all points of appeal, )rotest and complaint. He shall notify all officers and clubs of ;heir election, issue all notices of meetings, keep a correct account if moneys received and disbursed by him and report to the -eague. He shall bank all funds in trust. Sec. 4. "A." The Executive Committee shall view and decide jpon all business submitted to them, and shall generally manage :he Association, provided, however, that nothing herein contained ihall give the Executive Committee jurisdiction over matters :oming within the scope of the Governing Committee, unless same :ome before the Executive Committee in appeal. Sec. -4. "B." In case of a tie at any meeting of the League or Executive Committee, the presiding officer shall cast an additional vote. Sec. 5. The Governing Committee shall hear all appeals, pro- :ests and complaints, .and decide all questions arising during the 'hampionship Season relative to the eligibility of players; dis- putes between contesting clubs or teams ; appeals against rulings iOf match officers or otherwise; and generally take full charge, control and management of the championship games and all club members of this League. Sec. 6. It shall be the duty of the Governing Committee to make inquiry regarding any player whose amateur status or , whose method or manner of playing is questioned and all charges shall.be entered with the chairman of the committee, who shall provide for an investigation by a member or members of the 54 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. • committee. Pending investigation, the player against whom charges are brought may be suspended. Suspicious circumstances, pubhc or private criticism, which are in the judgment of any member of the Executive Committee sufficient to make the status or the rights of any player a matter of reasonable doubt, shall be the basis of investigation in absence of formal charges. The Governing Committee shall immediately communicate with the player under suspicion, either in person or by registered letter, lay all charges before him or set forth the circumstances which led to the reasonable doubt as to the player's rights to participate in championship games of the Amateur Hockey League and call for an answer to the charges or a satisfactory explanation of the circumstances which gave rise to the doubt or the questionable incident. If the athlete cannot satisfactorily prove his innocence, the committee may inflict such punishment as in its judgment shall seem fitting Any player who shall refuse to testify before the committee or to answer any question that the committee shall rule to be proper, shall be liable to suspension or such discipline as the committee may determine until he has purged himself of such failure or refusal. Such investigation also may be made regarding any player who is suspected of wilfully and persist- ently breaking any or all of the laws of hockey, the championship rules or the constitution of the Amateur Hockey League. ARTICLE V. Section i. The League shall hold its annual convention on the second Thursday in November, in the City of New York. Sec. 2. A quorum at any Executive or League meeting shall consist of not less than three-quarters of the clubs in the league. Sec. 3. Clubs shall be notified of time and place of annual meeting at least two weeks previously. Sec. 4. Each club in the Association shall be entitled to two delegates, and each delegate shall have one vote. Each dele- gate must be in good standing with the club he represents Sec. 5. No delegate shall be admitted to the convention unless he shall have filed with the Secretary a certificate of his appoint- SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 55 ment signed by the President and Secretary of the club he repre- sents. Sec, 6. Order of busmess for meetings. 1. Calling of the roll. 2. Reading of the minutes of the preceding meeting. (Annual mmutes at annual meetmg. Executive minutes at executive meet- ing.) 3. Treasurer's "Report. 4. Election of Committees, officers. 5. New business. 6 Election of clubs to membership. 7. Report of Committees. 8. Unfinished business. ARTICLE VI. Section i. The players representing clubs in this League must be Amateurs. DEFINITION OF AN AMATEUR. Sec. 2. An Amateur is one who has never competed for a money prize or staked bet, or with or against a professional for any prize, or who has ever taught, pursued or assisted in the practice of athletic exercise as a means of obtaining a livelihood, or who has never entered any competition under a name other than his own. Sec. 3, The Amateur rule of the A. A. U. is adopted by this League and embodied in this Constitution. Sec. 4. No club shall be admitted to membership in this League unless it adopts in its Constitution the words or senti- ments of this Article. ARTICLE Vn. Section i. The annual fee for each club in the League shall be $10, payable when application for membership in the League is made and at each annual meeting thereafter. Sec. 2. Any club whose fee shall remain unpaid later than January ist in any year shall not be entitled to representation, or to vote at any meeting, nor be represented by any team in the 56 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Championship Series, and shall be considered to have forfeited all right to membership in this League. ARTICLE VIIL Section i. Any Hockey Club desiring to join this League shall send to the Secretary an application for membership not later than November ist; also copies of its Constitution and By-Laws sufficient in number to furnish one to each club in the League and one additional for the Secretary-Treasurer of the League, a list of its officers and names of members together w^ith mem- bership fee as prescribed in Article VIL Sec. 2. The League shall have the privilege of limiting the number of clubs in the League. ARTICLE IX. Section i Any club wishing to make an appeal, protest or complaint to the Governing Committee must within three days from the time at which the cause of complaint, appeal or protest occurred, submit to the Governing Committee, m writing (in duplicate), a full and detailed account of the matter in appeal, protest or complaint, signed by the President and Secretary of the Complainant Club. All such appeals, protests or complaints shall be accompanied by the sworn statements of all witnesses in sup- port thereof. Such complaint shall be mailed, postage prepaid, by registered letter to the Chairman of Governing Committee, who shall within one day of the receipt of same mail -one copy thereof in like manner to the Secretary of the Club complained against. Within three days of the receipt of any such appeal, protest or complaint the answer of the responding club must be in the hands of the Chairman of the Governing Committee, duly signed by the. President and Secretary of such club, accompanied also by the sworn statement of all witnesses to be used in reply to such appeal, protest or complaint. A failure to make appeal, protest or complaint, or to answer as hereinbefore provided, shall finally and absolutely debar the defaulting club of a hearing. Sec. 2. The Governing Committee shall at once meet and con- sider the appeal, protest or complaint, and within three days after SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 57 receipt of reply render its decision ni the premises, and forth- with notify both clubs by registered letter as above provided. Such decision shall in all cases be final and without appeal, except as hereinafter provided. Sec. 3. Any club wishing to appeal from the decision of the Governing Committee may, within three days after receipt of decision, as provided in Section ti of this Article, take appeal to the Executive Committee in the following manner • The club so desiring to appeal shall at the same time furnish the Secretary of the Association with two copies of its appeal protest or complaint (with sworn statements of its witnesses) signed by the President and Secretary of such club, and shall deposit with him the sum of $25 Upon these conditions being complied with, the Secretary of the Association shall immediately forward one copy to the club complained against, which shall within three days make reply to such appeal, protest or complaint and submit sworn statements of its witnesses. The Secretary of the Association shall th^n call a meeting of the Executive to be held within thre? days, stat- ing the object of such meeting. Both clubs shall submit their briefs of evidence at this meet- ing, and the decision of the Executive on a two-thirds vote of those present on the. hearing of the appeal, protest or complaint shall be filed. If the decision be in favor of the complaining club, the deposit of $25 shall forthwith be returned, but if the- decision be adverse, the deposit shall be forfeited to the League ■* '' Sec. 4. The Executive, on motion may direct both clubs to appear with their witnesses for examination orally by the Execu- tive on any such appeal. ARTICLE X. Section i. The League may suspend or expel any player or any club for notorious or continued foul play or unfair conduct, or for any persistent infringement of the laws of the game or the rules of the League. Sec. 2. Any player or any club so suspended may be read- mitted by making an ample official apology, in writing, to the 58 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY Executive Committee and promising future compliance with the Constitution and By-Laws of the League. ARTICLE XI. Section i. No amendment or alteration shall be made -in any part of the Constitution, except at the Annual Convention of the League and by a three-fourths vote of the members present. Notice of and full particulars of any proposed alterations or amendment must be made to the Secretary of the League, in writing, and by him communicated to the clubs in its membership, in writing, at least two weeks before it can be voted upon. When notice o'f alteration or amendment has been given, as above, both the notice and amendment thereto may be voted upon at the Annual Convention. 1. Armstrong, Mgr.; 2, Grossius; 3, McAdam; 4, Gould; 5, Donnelley; 6, Clarkson; 7, Marston; 8, Taylor; 9, Berner. Capt.; 10, Upson; 11, Parker; 12, Woodward. PAWLING (N. Y.) SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. OFnCIAL RULES GOVERNING PLAY FOR THE STANLEY CUP The cup was given, as Lord Stanley said in his letter, "To be held by the champion hockey team of the Dominion." The con- ditions he imposed were : 1. The winners to give bond for the return of the cup in good order when required by the trustees for the purpose of being handed over to any other team who may in turn win. 2. Each winning team to have at their own charge engraved on a silver ring fitted on the cup for the purpose the names of the team and the year won. 3. The cup shall remain a challenge cup, and will not become the property of any team, even if won more than once. 4. In case of any doubt as to the title of any club to claim the position of champions, the cup shall be held or awarded by the trustees as they may think right, their decision being absolute. 5. Should either trustee resign or otherwise drop out, the remaining trustee shall nominate a substitute. In dealing with challenges and matches since 1893, the trustees have observed the following principles : 1. So far as the A. H. A. of C. is concerned, the cup goe^ with the championship each year without the necessity of any special or extra contest. Similarly in any other association. 2. Challengers from outside the A. H. A. of C. are recognized by the trustees only from champion clubs of senior provincial associations and in order received. 3. When a challenge is accepted the trustees desire the two competing clubs to arrange by mutual agreement all terms of the contest themselves, such as a choice of date, of rink, division of the gate money, selection of officials, etc. The trustees do not wish to interfere in any way, shape or form if it can be avoided. 4. Where competing clubs fail to agree, the trustees have observed and will continue to observe as far as practicable the following principles: 60 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. (a) The cup is to be awarded by the result of one match or of best two out of three, as seems fairest as regards other fix- tures. The trustees would be willing, however, if desired, to allow the contest to be decided by a majority of goals scored in two matches only (instead of the best two matches in three). (b) Contest to take place on ice in the home city, the date and choice of rink to be made or approved by the trustees. (c) The net gate money given by the rink to be equally divided between the competing teams. (d) If the clubs fail to agree on a referee, the trustees to appoint one from outside the competing cities, the two clubs to share the expenses equally. (e) If the clubs fail to agree on other officials, the trustees to authorize the referee to appoint them, the expenses, if any, to be shared equally by the competing clubs. (/) No second challenge recognized in one season from the same hockey association. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY 61 ONTARIO H. A. RULES 1. The game is played on ice by teams of seven on each side, with a puck made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all .through and three inches in diameter. STICKS. 2. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at any part, and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. They shall consist entirely of wood, with tape binding per- missible. GOAL. 3. A goal is placed in the middle of each goal line, composed of official goal nets supported by two upright posts, four feet in Height, placed six feet apart, and at least five feet from the end of the ice. The goal posts shall be firmly fixed. In the event of a goal post or net being displaced or broken, the referee shall blow his whistle, and the game shall not proceed until the post or net is replaced. It shall be the duty of the referee before each match to measure the goals. MATCH. 4. Each side shall have a captain (a member of his team), who, before the match, shall toss for choice of goals. 5. Each side shall play an equal time from each end, a ten minutes' rest being allowed at half time. The duration of cham- pionship matches shall be one hour, exclusive of stoppages. The team scoring the greater number of goals in that time shall be de- clared the winner of the match, subject to the qualifications con- tained in Rules of Competition, No. 15. If at the end of that time the game is a draw, ends shall be changed and the match continued for ten minutes, each side playing five minutes from each end with a rest of five minutes between such five minute ends, and if neither side has then scored a majority of goals, similar periods of ten minutes shall be played in the same way until one side shall have scored a majority of goals. 62 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. TIME-KEEPERS. 6. Two time-keepers shall be appointed, one by eacK captain, before the commencement of the match, whose duty it shall be to keep an accurate account of the time of each game, deducting time for stoppages in the actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in their time, and the matter shall be at once decided by him. The referee also shall appoint a time-keeper, who shall keep the time of penalized players, and shall direct them to enter the game. The time-keepers shall be under the control of the referee. A gong shall be kept for their use. REFEREE. 7. There shall be only one referee for a match, and in no case shall he belong to either of the competing clubs, and he may be an amateur or a professional. He is to enforce the rules; ad- judicate upon disputes or cases unprovided for by rule; appoint or remove goal umpires ; control the time-keepers ; keep the score, announcing each goal as scored ; and at the conclusion of the match declare the result. The puck shall be considered in play until the referee stops the game, which he may do at any time, and which he must do at once when any irregularity of play occurs, by sounding a whistle. His decision shall be final. SCORE. 8. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed be- tween the goal posts from in front and below the tops of the posts. GOAL UMPIRES. 9. There shall be one umpire at each goal ; they shall Inform the referee when the puck has been put into the goal from the front. FACE. 10. The game shall be started and renewed by the referee blowing his whistle or calling "Play" after dropping the puck in the centre of the ice between the sticks of two players, one from SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 63 each team, who are to face it. After a goal has been scored the puck shall be faced in like manner in the centre of the ice. OFF-SIDE. 11. A player shall always be on his side of the puck. A player IS off-side when he is in front of the puck, or when the puck has been hit, touched or is being run with, by any of his own side behind him (i. e., between himself and the end of the rink near which his goal is placed). A player being off-side is put on-side when the puck has been hit by, or has touched the dress or person of any player of the opposite side, or when one of his own side has run in front of him, either with the puck or having played it when behind him. If a player when off-side plays the puck, or annoys or obstructs an opponent, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the off-side play occurred. A player on the defending side shall not be off-side when he takes a pass from or plays the puck as it bounds off his goal-keeper within a space of three feet out from goal and extending to the side of the rink. KNOCKING-ON. 12. The puck may be stopped with the hand but not carried or held or knocked on by any part of the body. CHARGING, TRIPPING, ETC. 13. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking, cross-checking, or push- ing shall not be allowed. And the referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player who, in the opinion of the referee, has deliberately offended against the above rule. If a player makes any unfair or rough play, or dicputes any de- cision of the referee or uses any foul or abusivt language, the referee may rule him off for the remainder of the game or for such time as he may deem expedient, and no suDstitute shall be allowed. 64 SPALDING'S XTHLETIC LIBRARY. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. 14. When the puck goes ofif the ice behind the goal line it shal be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice, and there faced. When the puck goes off the ice at the sid^, it shall be simi- larly faced three yards from the side. GOAL-KEEPER. 15. The goal-keeper must not during play, lie, sit or kneel upon the ice; he may stop the puck with his hands, but shall not throw or hold it. He may wear pads, but must not wear a garment such as would give him undue assistance in keeping goal. The referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player, who, in the opinion of the referee, has offended against this rule. CHANGE OF PLAYERS. 16. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced. Should any player be injured during a match, break his skate, or from any other accident be compelled to leave the ice, the opposite side shall immediately drop a man to equalize the teams and the match proceed, without such players until such time as the player so compelled to leave the ice is ready to return. In event of any dispute, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee. STOPPAGES. 17. Should any match be stopped by the referee by reason of any infringement of any of the rules or because of an accident or change of players, the puck shall be faced again at the spot where it was last played before such infringement, accident 01 change of players shall have occurrecl. i SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 65 ► LAWS ACROSS BORDER CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN PLAY OF THE EASTERN CANADA LEAGUE. Section i, A team shall be compoR'^d of seven players who shall be bona fide members of the clubs they represent. No player shall be allowed to play on more than one team in the same series during a season, except in a case of bona fide change of residence from one city to another at least fifty miles apart. Sec. 2, The game shall be commenced and renewed by a face in the center of the rink. definition of a face. The puck shall be faced by being placed between the sticks of two opponents, and the referee then calling "play." The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 3. Two half-hours, with an intermission of ten minutes between, will be the time allotwed for matches, but no stops of more than fifteen minutes will be allowed. A match will be de- cided by the team winning the greatest number of games dur- ing that time. In case of a tie after playing the specified two half-hours, play will continue until one side secures a game, unless otherwise agreed upon between the captains before the match. Goals shall be changed after each half-hour. Sec. 4. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced, except for reasons of accidents or injury during the game. Sec. 5. In the event of a player being injured or compelled to leave the ice during a match, he may retire from the game for the period of ten minutes playing time, but play must be con- tinued immediately without the teams leaving the ice, the op- posing team dropping a player to equalize. If at the expiration 66 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. of ten minutes the injured player is unable to resume his positic on the ice, his captain may put on a substitute, providing tl injury occurred during the first half of the match. If, howevej the player was injured during the second half, the opposinj captain shall have the option of dropping a man for the balanc of the playing time or allowing the injured player's side to put o\ a substitute. The man dropped to equalize shall return to tl ice when the injured player does or when substitute is put oi In the event of a dispute between the captains as to the injured player's fitness to continue the game, the matter shall at onc^ be decided by the referee, and his decision shall be final. An i injured player may not resume play after his place has been filled by a substitute, without the consent of the opposing team's i captain. Sec. 6. Should the game be temporarily stopped by the in- fringement of any of the rules, the captain of the opposite team may claim that the puck be taken back and a face take place where it was last played from before such infringement occurred. Sec, 7. When a player hits the puck, anyone of the same side, who at such moment of hitting is nearer the opponent's goal line is out of play, and may not touch the puck himself or in any way whatever prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been played. A player should always be on his own side of the puck. In the event of the puck rebounding off the goal keeper's body, players of his team touching the puck are to be considered on side. Sec. 8. The puck may be stopped but not carried or knocked on by any part of the body, nor shall any player close his hand on, or carry the puck to the ice in his hand. No player shall raise his stick above the shoulder, except in lifting the puck. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking or shinning shall not be allowed, and for any infringement of these rules, the referee or his assistant may rule the offending player off the ice for that match, or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit, but it shall not be necessary to stop the game to en- force this rule. Sec. 9. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 67 he goals it shall be taken by the referee to five yards at rig^i* ngles from the goal line and there faced. When the puck goes ff the ice at the sides it shall be taken by the referee to five rards at right angles from the boundary line and there faced. Sec. id. The goal keeper must not during play, lie, kneel or it upon the ice, but m.ust maintain a standing position. Sec. II. Goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed tetween the goal posts from in front below an imaginary line cross the top of posts. Sec. 12. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches /ide at any part. Sec. 13. The puck must be made of vulcanized rubber, one ich thick all through and three inches in diameter. The Spalding hockey puck, the official puck of the League, lust be used in all matches. The home club to furnish the eferee with a new puck previous to the match. Sec. 14. The captains of the competing teamis shall agree upon A^o timekeepers, one penalty timekeeper, two umpires (one to e stationed behind each goal, which position shall not be changed uring a match). In the event of the captains failing to agree n umpires and timekeepers, the referee shall appoint them. Sec. 15. All disputes during the match shall be decided by the eferee, and he shall have full control of all players and of- als from the commencement to finish of matches, inclusive of ops, and his decision shall be final. Sec. 16. All questions as to games shall be settled by the mpires, and their decision shall be final. Sec. 17. In the event of any dispute as to the decision of an mpire or timekeeper the referee shall have power to remove and place him. Sec. 18. Any player guilty oif using profane or abusive lan- uage to any officials or other players shall be liable to be ruled ff by the referee or his assistant for the match or for such Drtion of actual playing time as he may see fit. Sec. 19. The referee shall, previous to the commencement of le match for which he has been duly appointed or agreed upon, 3tain frp;t?i the raptains of each of the competing clubs a full 68 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. • list of the players of their respective teams, and, if during the match a substitute is used by either chib, the captain of the club using such substitute shall give to the referee the name of such substitute player, and same will be inclined in the list of names of said team. The referee shall, before starting a match, see that the neces- sary penalty timekeeper, timekeepers and umpires have been ap- pointed and are in their respective places. In the event of the competing clubs failing to agree upon umpires and timekeepers the referee shall appoint same. The referee shall have full con- trol of all officials and players during the match (including stops), he shall face the puck at the commencement of each half and at such other times as may be necessary, he shall also call off-sides or rule offending players off for such period of playing time as he may see fit, and perform such other duties as ' may be provided for hereinafter or in the laws of hockey or i championship rules. The referee shall order the teams on the ice at the advertised time, and if for any reason there be more than fifteen minutes delay in the commencement of the match, the referee shall state in his report to the Secretary of the Association the cause of the delay, and name the club or clubs if they be at fault. It will be . the referee's duty to record the time of the starting and finish- ing of the match, as well as the games scored, mailing to the Secretary of the Association, within three days of date of match, on the forms provided for the purpose, a report of the match in detail, including the names of players penalized, together i with the number and length of penalties imposed (this informa- j tion to be obtained from the penalty timekeeper, who shall also I keep for the referee a record of the games scored, and, if pos- sible, who by and the time). Should the assistant appointed or agreed upon be made to act at the last minute, or through sickness or accident be un- able to finish the match, the referee shall have power to appoint j another in his stead, if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captains of one of the competing teams. Sec. 20. The assistant referee will during the period of a i SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 69 [natch be under the control of the referee ; he shall, however, lave full power to stop the game should an offside or foul occur which has escaped the notice of the referee. He shall also have power to rule off for such time as he may see fit any player :ommitting a foul. He shall also perform such other duties as may be assigned to him by the referee from time to time. If pwing to illness or accident, the referee is unable to continue to officiate, the assistant shall perform such duties as devolve upon the referee during the balance of the match, selecting an as- sistant if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captain of one of the competing teams. Sec. 21. The penalty timekeeper shall keep a complete record of the penalties imposed by the referee or his assistant, and shall have control of all players while serving the time of their penal- ties, and any player ruled off shall not return to the ice .until the playing time for which he was penalized has expired and then only by permission of the penalty timekeeper. A record of the games scored, who scored by and the time of each shall be recorded by the penalty timekeeper, and this, to- gether with a record of the penalties imposed, shall be hande(il the referee at the close of the match. 70 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. EASTERN CANADA RULES Section i. The season shall be from the first of January ti the tenth of March, both days inclusive. Sec. 2. The championship shall be decided by a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn up by one delegate from each club at the annual convention. The club winning the most matches shall be declared champions. Sec. 3. Unless President is notified jointly by the competing elubs at least four clear days before a match, that a referee and assistant have been agreed upon and have consented to act, the appointments shall be made at a meeting of a committee com- posed of one delegate from each club, to be called three days previous to the date set for each game. In the event of a tie, the President or his representative to have casting vote. Sec. 4. All championship matches shall be played in rinks arranged for by the home club, subject to the approval of the Association. Rink must be at least one hundred and seventy-five feet long by sixty-five feet in width. Goals shall be six feet: wide and four feet high, and provided with goal nets, such as. approved by the Association. The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 5. The home club shall furnish the referee with a new puck for each match. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the official puck of the league, must be used in all matches. Sec. 6. All matches shall be started at 8.30 P. M., unless other-f wise agreed upon by the competing clubs, and if, for any reason' there be more than fifteen minutes' delay in the commencemeni of a match, the club at fault shall, unless good reasons be giver to the President for the delay, pay to the Association as a pen^ alty the sum of twenty-five dollars. The referee shall state it his report to the Secretary of the Association if more thai fifteen minutes' delay occurred in the commencement of thi k SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 71 match, giving cause of such delay and naming the club at fault. Upon receipt of this information the President shall decide whether or not the club be fined. Sec. 7. Visiting clubs shall be allowed traveling expenses (by the home club) as follows : Between Montreal and Ottawa, eighty-five dollars ; between Montreal and Quebec, one hundred dollars ; between Ottawa and Quebec, one hundred and twenty- five dollars. Sec. 8. — The Association shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same, and be recognized as champions. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Sec. 9. — Any club winning the championship three times shall become absolute owners of the trophy. Sec. 10. Any team making default shall forfeit the right to compete for the championship for that season, no matches played with defaulting clubs shall count. Unless a written notice signed by the President and Secretary of the club be sent to the Secre- taries of the opposing team and Association, five days previous to the match, signifying the club's intention to default, the defaulting club shall pay to the opposing team within thirty days fine of one hundred dollars. 72 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Constitution of tlie Intercollegiate Hockey League ARTICLE I. The title of this organ-ization shall be "The IntercollEvIIAte Hockey League." ARTICLE II. The object of the organization shall be to govern the playing of 'the game of ice hockey among its members, to provide rules therefor, and to arrange annually a series of games for the cham- pionship of the League, ARTICLE III. The League shall con«sist of ice hockey teams representing Columbia University, Dartmouth College, Harvard University, Princeton University, Yale University, and such others as may be admitted at any annual meeting by a majority vote. (Cornell University admitted November 8, 1909.) ARTICLE IV. (a) The annual meeting shall be held in New York City dur- ing the month of October of each year on a day to be iixed by the Advisory Committee, hereinafter provided for, a majority of the members constituting a quorum. (b) Special meetings may be called by the Advisory Committee whenever in their judgment one is necessary and a special meet- ing must be called by the Secretary upon the written request of any three members of the League. (c) At all meetings each member shall have one vote but may be represented by three delegates. ARTICLE V. (a) At the annual meeting, or thereafter, each member shall be entitled to designate a representative, preferably a graduate. ^^ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 73 to serve on an Advisory Committee, until the following annual meeting. Should the representative so designate fail or cease to serve, another may be designated to take his place. (b) The Advisory Committee shall interpret the playing rules, arrange for playing off any tie in the League Championship and shall decide all questions of dispute which may arise among the members of the League and all other points not covered by the Constitution ; it shall generally .do all such things as it may be requested to do by the League. ARTICLE VL I (a) Shortly after the annual meeting, the mtembers of the Advisory Committee shall meet and elect from their own num- ber a Chairman, a Vice-Chairman and a vSecretary-Treasurer. Vacancies shall be filled as they may occur. (b) The Chairman, or in his absence the Vice-Chairman, shall preside at all meetings of the League and of the Advisory Com- mittee. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep a record of all meetings of the League and Advisory Committee, shall notify members of the annual and special meetings and shall keep an account of the funds of the League, reporting whenever called upon to do so. ARTICLE VIL Annual dues shall be fixed by the Advisory Committee but shall not exceed Ten dollars a year. ARTICLE VIII. Additions and amendments to this Constitution may be made at any annual meeting by a majority vote. 74 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League (Adopted October 30, 1909.) Section i. The game of Intercollegiate Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. The Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or dis- placed, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play shall any player who fills this position He, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly \ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 75 in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the centre and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are intended to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5. A Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the mqment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. OFFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires and two timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in other official positions that may occur during a match ; or when the competing teams h^ye been unable to agree ; or when the selected 76 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. officials are absent at the agneed starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places. He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. He shall begin and suspend play by means of a whistle. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. ID. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front. He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance \ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 77 in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no pen- alized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the timekeepers. The tim;ekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall, at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 13. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minues between the two periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes' play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and after an intermission of five minutes play shall be resumed for a period of ten minutes. Should the score be tied at the end of this period, play shall be resumed after an intermission of five minutes and continued until a goal has been scored. The captains of the contesting teams with the consent of the referee, after the regular periods and the first extra period have been played, may agree on another method of playing off a tie score, but in the absence of such agreement and consent, the tie must be played off in accordance with the provisions of this Law. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 14. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by the referees, and shall begin again when the puck is put in play. No delay of more than five minutes shall be allowed. SUBSTITUTES. Sec. 15. Substitutes shall be allowed at any time during a game, but a player who has been replaced by a substitute shall not be allowed to re-enter the game. 78 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. i6. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. A line not more than one-half an inch wide shall be drawn on the ice from the center of one goal post to the center of the other. To effect a score the puck must have completely passed this line. FACE. Sec. 17. A face is the placing by the referee of the puck upon the ice on its largest surface between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The referee shall then order the play to begin. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at the beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec 18. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck him- self or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is himself to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. » SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 79 FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 19. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand, body or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall inter- fere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lift- ing the puck. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. ^^ PUCK FOULS. Sec. 20. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 21. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point fiye yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec. 22, In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. POWERS OF CAPTAINS. Sec. 23. The captains of the opposing teams shall have the power to agree upon any matter not covered in the aforesaid laws. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Ice Hockey in Wisconsin By a. J. ScHiNNER, Milwaukee. Although ice hockey is still in its infancy in Wisconsin, especially in the southern section of the State, the merits of the game have been recognized, especially in Superior and Mil- waukee. The sport has thrived in Superior through contact with the Copper Country towns of the northern peninsula and because of the urban rivalry between Duluth and Superior, which finds out- let in athletic competition. Natives of the Dominion have also aided in bringing hockey to the fore and the history of the league, which one time contained all the flower of the puck pushers in the country, and which at various times centered in Superior, is for the most part ancient history. The professional side of the sport has not been in the ascend- ancy of late years, and the perpetuation of the game has been left to amateur organizations, which in a great measure have aided in popularizing and furthering interest in the winter sport. In the southern section of the State, Milwaukee and Madison principally, hockey has been played by several leagues and clubs for the last twenty years. Hockey to be at its best, as is well known, must be played on a glassy surface, which is best ob- tained on an artificial, enclosed rink. This factor in the upbuilding of the game is lacking in Mil- waukee, but, nevertheless, hockey has managed to struggle along through the period mentioned, during which time it has been played with more or less interruption on the portable outdoor rinks built on the upper Milwaukee river. The season of 1911-12 was probably the most successful in the history of the two organizations, the Milwaukee Hockey League and Milwaukee Hockey Club, which have their head- quarters within hailing distance of each other above the dam. The long cold spell and the absence of the usual number of blizzards, allowed ample opportunity for play on the open river, and as the city officials provided space for the enthusiasts in one of the municipal parks which border on the river, postpone- ments in the schedule because of poor ice or too much snow were missing. The Milwaukee Hockey Club, playing its twentieth year, is probably the oldest active organization of its kind in the country. It is made up of Milwaukee business and professional men who SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 81 either learned hockey while puttering around with a "shinny" club in Milwaukee or took to the game at college and on return played it again as a means of exercise, thus providing the men- tal relaxation most required after a week of arduous office work. Among the most distinguished members of the club is the Hon. Francis E. McGovern, the present Governor of Wisconsin, who was an enthusiastic hockey player when acting as district attor- ney for Milwaukee county. The younger element is found in the Milwaukee Hockey League, which, under various guises, has been active for the last six years. During that time teams varying from the number of four to ten have made up the circuit, but of late years the officials, desiring to raise the standard of play, cut the number to six and then to four. While made up mostly of local talent the teams have a sprink- ling of Canucks who have aided in coaching the players and developing the speed of the puck shooters until at the present time the standard of the sevens, as well as most of the individual players, is as high as can be found anywhere in this section. The league pennant last season was won by the White Squadron club, the latter nosing out the Gordons by one game in an exciting I to o battle, which marked the wind-up of the season. Last winter the high school efement, including a number of grade school students, organized a junior hockey league, playing at Riverside Park, on the upper river, and it served to intro- duce the game to the youngsters and pave the way to an increase in popularity in the greatest of winter sports. Outside of the play of the Milwaukee League, the real feature of the season, and a move which means wd.1 for the future of the game in the West, was the attempt on the part of the Nitchie Cheeman Canoe Club of Madison, a University of Wisconsin organization, to interest the Badger athletic authorities in the game and indirectly taking the first step towards the organiza- tion of a Western Intercollegiate Hockey League, similar to the one in the East. The Nitchie Cheeman club supported a hockey team during the season and at the time of the annual winter carnival im- ported the Gordon club, then leading the Milwaukee Hockey League, for a series of games. The contests, although played in the open, on Lake Mendota, were witnessed by a good crowd of students, the Milwaukee seven being victor in three out of four games. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Hockey Season About Boston By S. T. Hicks. The hockey season in Boston in the season of 1911-12 showed what gains the game of hockey has made with the sport loving public. Great crowds went to the Arena to witness all the im- portant matches. The class of hockey displayed by club, college and school teams was of a high class. Practically every promi- nent amateur and college team in Canada was seen in action against the local teams and, as the records printed herewith show, the advantage was usually with the Boston teams. AMATEUR HOCKEY IN BOSTON. The amateur situation in Boston was unique in many ways. There was no organized local league, but two teams, the Boston Atheltic Association seven and a team representing the Inter- colonial Club of Boston, met most of the visiting teams. Great rivalry existed between the two local teams as to which was the better. This rivalry was carried over from the previous season, when the same two teams battled for the city championship in the Boston Hockey League. In 191 1 the teams played under the names of the Boston Hockey Club and the Boston Crescents. At the beginning of the 1912 season the Boston Hockey Club was taken over by the Boston Athletic Association, while the Crescents came under the colors of the Intercolonial Club, a Canadian or- ganization of Greater Boston. In 191 1 the Boston Hockey Club, a team made up entirely of Harvard graduates who had played the game at Cambridge swept everything before them, winning the local championship and also defeating many of Canada's best amateur teams. Such teams as Sherbrooke, the Cliffsides of Ottawa, and the Montreal Athletic Association, were among the teams that fell before the Boston Hockey Club. In all, seventeen games were played, of which the club won fourteen and scored a total of 90 goals to their opponents' 2il- In November of last season the old Boston Hockey Club went out of existence and the team, with one or two changes in the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 83 lineup, started the season wearing the Unicorn of the Boston Athletic Association. The team had a successful season, and more than upheld the fine reputation they had won the previous season. Their only local rivals were the Intercolonial and great interest was aroused in the two teams by a tie game played early in the season, December 9, 191 1. It was not until January 18, 1912, that the two teams met a second time. The game proved to be one of the most sensational ever played and kept the throng of five thousand spectators on their feet and shouting with excitement for every minute of the two twenty-five minute halves. The B. A. A. won the game by one goal, scored by a pretty piece of combination work late in the second half. The score was all the more remarkable in that it was made while the winners had only five men on the ice, two of their men serving penalties in the timer's box at the time. The two teams again met on March 2, 1912. This third game proved to be even more exciting than the other two and both teams were stronger. The B. A. A. team had picked up three of the best men on the Harvard team, as the latter's season had closed. The Intercolonial had gone to Canada and secured three strong Canadian players from the Sherbrooke team. By doing this the Intercolonial ceased to be identified as an American team and much of the interest, so far as any local rivalry was concerned, was lost. The game on March 2 was the first of a five-game series between the two revised teams. The Arena management offered a cup- to the winner of the series and there was much interest in the outcome. The B. A. A. again won this game by i to score, scoring a goal early in the first half and managing to hold this small lead to the finish. They could not keep up their winning, however, and lost the next three games in succession, thereby losing the series and the Arena Cup All these games were well attended and great enthusiasm was shown. The B. A. A., although beaten, was not in the least disheart- ened, as was shown by their impressive defeat of the Victorias of Winnipeg, by the score of 8 to 6. The Victorias were then and are now the holders of the Allen Cup, emblematic of the amateur championship of Canada, and hence their defeat was a great feather in the cap of the B. A. A. The prospects are bright for an even more successful season of amateur hockey in 1912-13 in Boston. The following are the records of the B. A. A. and Intercolonial teams for the season : 84 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. I9II. Nov. 18 — B. A. A., 6; Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 2. Nov. 30 — B. A. A., 11; St. Nicholas of New York, o. Dec. 6 — B, A. A., 10; Massachusetts Agricultural College, i. Dec. 9 — B. A. A., 3; Intercolonials of Boston, 3. Dec. 16 — B. A. A., 9; Westmounts of Montreal, i. Dec. 23— B. A. A., 5 ; New York Athletic Club, 2. Dec. 30 — B. A. A., 3; McGill University of Montreal, 6. Jan. 3— B. A. A., 4 Jan. 13 — B. A. A., 6 Jan. 18— B. A. A., i Feb. 6— B. A. A., 4 Feb. 10— B. A. A., 3 Feb. 13— B. A. A., 2 Feb. 14— B. A. A., 4 Feb. 24— B.A.A., i Mar. 2— B. A. A., i Mar. 5— B. A. A., 1 912. Ottawa University, 3. Montreal Athletic Association, p. Intercolonials of Boston, o. Grand Mere of Quebec, 5. Victorias of Montreal, 4. Harvard, o. Toronto University of Toronto, 2. Sherbrooke, 3. Intercolonials, o. Intercolonials, 4. ' Mar. 9 — B. A. A., 15; Ramblers of Amherst, N. S., i. Mar. 12 — B. A. A., i ; Intercolonials, 2 Mar. 14— B. A. A., i ; Cleveland A.C., 3. Mar. 23 — B. A. A., 2; Intercolonials, 4. Mar. 28 — B.A.A., 8; Victorias of Winnipeg (Allen cupholders), 6. The Intercolonial Club's record for 1911-12 was: 1911. Dec. 9 — Intercolonial, 3 ; Boston Athletic Association, 3. Dec. 28 — Intercolonial, 2; McGill University, 4. 1912. Jan. 18 — Intercolonial, o; Boston Athletic Association, i. Feb. 10 — Intercolonial, i ; Victorias of Montreal, 4. Feb. 22 — Intercolonial, 7 ; Sherbrooke, 13. Mar. 2 — Intercolonial, o; Boston Athletic Association, i. Mar. 7 — Intercolonial, 4; Boston Athletic Association, i. Mar. 13 — Intercolonial, 2; Boston Athletic Association, i. Mar. 15 — Intercolonial, 2; Cleveland A.C., i. Mar. 23 — Intercolonial, 4; Boston Athletic Association, 2. Mar. .30 — Intercolonial, i ; Victorias of Winnipeg, 3. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 85 THE COLLEGE SEASON. Harvard started the season for the first time playing as an independent team, having resigned from the old Intercollegiate League. All the members of the league, except Columbia, were played, however, so that Harvard could be rated with the cham- pions by comparative scores. One great innovation was the arrangement of a three-game series with Yale as a windup of the season. One of the games was played in Boston, one in New Haven, and a third in Boston. Harvard won two out of three games with Yale, losing only the New Haven game. They also played two games with the Princeton team, one in the St. Nicholas Rink in New York, which Harvard won by 3 to 2, and a return game, which went to Princeton by the same score reversed. These two games caused Harvard to be tied with Princeton, the champions of the old Intercollegiate League. The games were most interesting and proved to be a contest between the exceptional brilliance of H. Baker for Princeton against a well balanced and drilled Harvard team. One of the regrets of the season was that these teams could not arrange to play a third game in some such rink as the Boston Arena. The best played game in Harvard's schedule was that with McGill University. This game throughout was lightning fast and aggressive. Harvard played a strong team against the brilliant Canadian collegians and won by a 3 to o score. The following is Harvard's record for the season : — 1911. Harvard, i ; Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 4. Harvard, 3 ; Princeton, 2. Harvard, 2; Princeton, 3. Harvard, 3; Cornell, 2. 1912. Harvard, 7; St. Francis Xavier, 2. Harvard, 3 ; McGill University, 0. Harvard, 7; Dartmouth, 3. Harvard, 4; Yale, o. Harvard, i ; Yale, 2. Harvard, 4; Yale, 2. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE thespald1ng(Q))trademark GUARANTtti> QUALITY These sticks are exact duplicates in shape, weight, balance, specially selected grade of rock ehn, and every other particular of the actual sticks that we supply to the famous players whose autographs they bear and who use them exclusively in all their games. BE SURE tO MENTION THE PARTICULAR MODEL YOU DESIRE WHEN ORDERING. Spalding Ch AMFiOMseip Hockey Sthcbss Made of the (inestselected Canad ian rock elm. Elx> clusivelyused and endorsed by the Que- bec Hockey [ Club, Cham- pions of the World, holders of the Stanley Cup; by the Victorias, Winnipeg, Champions (Amateurs) Allen Cup, and the Canadian Hockey Club of Montreal, and many other well known teams. These sticks will not fray at the bottom where they come in contact with the ice -and will retain their shape under all conditions. The very important matter of ■weight and balance has been carefully; jconsidered and the Spalding Sticlcs are much lighter, yet stronger, than any others on the marketfi No. 0. Championship Stick, Regular Forward Model. No. 0. Championship Stick, Long Blade, Forward Model No. 0. Championship Stick. Defence Model. FOICOMPIETEUSTOFSTOIES « INSIDE nONTGOVB M V i/lP rli l Al iyiM A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. ■i'l II tii B STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES PrtcM lA «(f««t July S, 1912. Subjact to chang* without notice. For Cooadian prices see special Canadian Catalogue. bstituteTHESPAL TRADEMARK l»IIM*J.1!lbdd^^ QUALITY Extract from Official Rule* of the Canadian Amateur Hockey League : Sec. 13. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the Official Puck of the League, must be used in all DMitch games. Mocll^es^ Ftiacks No. 13. The Spalding "Official" Trade- Mairk Puck has been adopted as the officizd puck of "The Canadian Ama- teur Hockey League," composed of the . following world-famed teams: MontreaJ, Sljamrock, Qyebec, Victoria emd Westmount Each, 50o. No. 15. The Spedding "Practice" Puck is regulation sip:e, and really better than the so-ceJled ofHcieJ pucks turned out by other memu- facturers. Each, 25c« SEE THAT OUR TRADEMARK APPEARS ON PUCK ITSELF BEFQRE USING. SpaldlEag **Reg^lataoira" Hockey Stick No. 1 . On lines of our best grade Regular Forward Stick. Selected and well seasoned timber. Very popular as an all around stick. Each, SOc Sps^MsEag o" P2»actice '" Hockey Stick No. 2. Spalding "Practice" Hockey Stick. Regulation size and made of good quality timber. A very serviceable stick. . . . Each, 25c. See Hockey Caoals 0. A. SpeciaJ goals, with extra spikes to stick into ice. Strong steel frame, with Keavy twine netting. , - t 1. B. Regulation style goals, with steel frame and twine netting. Uprights arranged to go into ice. . - - -^ ^ tSpaSdlirag Hockey Gloves No.HG. This is one of the best hockey gloves ever made, giving ample protec- tion to all bones and joints in the player's hand, at the same time being extremely light and comfortable to weeur. Made of brown leather, with soft buckskin palm, and gaunt- let padded with rattzin reeds. Fui'nished in two No.HG sizes, large and medium. Per pair. $4.00 No. L. Unpadded drab buckskin gaunt- let glove. Extra long and a very popular style. . . . Per pmr; $3.00 inWrTATTDIDOli GIVEN TO I ANY CMNWIIIfiATIOIIS A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES [fOI COMPUTE UST Of STORES SEE INSIDE nONT COVER Of mis loot Pr{«ula«ffwtiiitrS.Ul2. Safejact lo clMiif* wilboot aotic*. ' C a in dia w prica* ••• tpaciaJ Pamdian Catalofiaa. THE SPALDING(B))TRADE-MARK '^'g No. XS. "Championship" Pattern. Men's Blades of finest quality chrome nickel steel, hardened. This steel is specially noted for its toughness. Extra heavy electro-nickel-plated andi highly polished throughout. Each pair in a box. No. XS. Made in sizes 9>^ to 12 inches Per pair, $5,001 Price, including Spalding No. 336 Shoes, complete, attached. " 10.001 The selection of the proper style i skates is no more important than thei selection of correct model shoes to bei worn with them. Spalding shoes are; built particularly to fit Spalding skates, and the styles w^e illustrate in combina- tion are the ones most suitable and which will give the best of satisfaction. Showing Spalding "Championship" Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 336 PROMPT ATTENTION 6IVEII TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS AODBESSEOTOOS A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPUTE LIST OF STORE SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OFTHISBOOt Pric«> in effect Jul7 S, 1912. Subject to change «rithout notice. For Canadian price* tee (pedal Canadian Catalogue. vCEPT NO JBSTITUTE iK^;^?^^ S;^THESRALDING(|giJTRADE-MARK Championship" Pattern. Ladies' No. XSL. Ladies* "Champion- ship" Hockey Skates, similar to No. XS Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8>^ to \0)4 ixu Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing "Championship" Ladies* Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 350 OMFT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDIIESSEliTOyS A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES irOli;OMPlETE.USrOFSTOIIES SS INSIDE FMWTGOVQ. OFTHttBOBI ' fHcMin tffeet Jalr 5» 1912. Subject to change withont notice. For GuuEdiMi i GUARANT THE SPALDInW OFRADE-MARK ''Z Intercollegiate'' Expert I 3mU ixxr&^cfuitc. No. XH. Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skate SPECIAL NOTICE— These skates are made to be used on the Spalding Shoes No. 339, or some style of shoe made similarly. They cannot be used to good ad- vantage on ordinary street shoes or with heavy skating shoes made with full heels. These Skates are built especially for expert hockey players, and represent a distinct advance in skate ntianufacture. The model and general features of construction were suggested to us by some of the most prominent players on intercollegiate hockey teams. Runners are made of finest quality chrome nickel steel, highly tempered and dravvm so as to toughen them and give a razor cutting edge. Toe and heel plates of fine quality cold rolled steel. All highly polished and extra heavy nickel-plated. Sizes 9y2, 10. ]0y2, II, 11 >^ and 12 inches. No. XH. Spalding "Intercollegiate" Ex- pert Hockey Skates. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding Nb. 339 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing "Intercollegiate" Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 339 PROMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSEOTOOS A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STOt SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK Price! in effect July 5, 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian pr special Canadian Catalogue. Ke THE SPALDING TRADE-MARK 'rr//v^^ aiain; ''Intercollegiate'' Ladies' Hocliey Sllates No. XHL. Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skate. Ladies' No. XHL. Ladies' "Intercollegiate" Hockey Skates, similar to No. XH Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8>2 to 10/4 inches. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 370 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing Ladies' "Intercollegiate" Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 370 PT ATTENTION GIVEN TO y COMMUNICATIONS AODIIESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST Of STORES SE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK icet in effect July 5, 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian price* »ee special Canadian Catalogu SKte THE SPALDING TRADEMARK No. YH. Canadian Pattern. Men's Canadian Hockey Pattern. Special steel runners, carefully hardened and tempered. Heavily nickel-plated and finely polished. Mo. YH. Sizes 9>^ to 12 inches. Per pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 332 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $6.50 Showing Canadian Pattern No. YH Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 332 PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TBI ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDBESSEOTOUS AG.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITlEiS FOR COMPLETE LIST Of Si SEE INSIDE FRONT ^ OF THIS BOOt Price* in effect July 5. 1912. Subject to duuige without notice. For Caiwdiao pricec tee tpecial Canadian Catalogua.1 ISTHESRAtDING TRADEMARrZfln' iL^di No. YHL. Canadian Pattern. Ladies' Made similar to Men's No. YH, but with small heel plates and narrow toe plates. No. YHL. Heavily nickel-plated and finely polished. Ladies'. Sizes 8/^ to ]0l4 inches. Per pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 330 Shoes, coi iplete„attached. Per pair, $6.50 Showing Canadian Pattern No. YHL Ladies' Hockey Skate fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 330 PROMPT ATTENTIOX GIVEN TO tNr COMMUNICATIONS AB08ESSED T8 US A. G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE IIST Of ^OIIES SEE INSIDE fRDNTCOYEI OF THIS BOOK Price* in effect July S. I9I2. Subject to dwnce %irithout notice. For Canadian price* tee ipecial Canadian Catalogue. SUBSTITUTE PAILDIMG THE Key Clamp Fastening for hockey skates has proven its efficiency and the wisdom of its adoption through its continued popularity with the great number of skaters who prefer flat blade skates for ordinary skating, in addition to those who play hockey and do not find it convenient to keep a separate pair of shoes particularly for their hockey skates. No. 9H No. 9H. Key clamp fastenings. Extra heavy nickel-plated and specially polished through, out. Blades of absolutely best quality three-ply welded steel, highly tempered, with ribbed flange at bottom. Made in both men's and women's models. Each pair in paper box, neatly wrapped. Sizes 9/< to 1 2 in Per pair, $5.00 No. 9HL. Ladies'. Like above, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 9 to 1 1 inches Per pair, $5.00 No. 7H. Key clamp fastenings. Nickel-plated throughout, not polished; ribbed runners; . best quality steel. Sizes 9 to 12 inches Per pair, $4.00 No. CH. Key clamp fastenings. Highly tempered and hardened three-ply welded steel runners. Sizes 9^ to 12 inches Per pair, $3.00 No. CHL. Ladies'. Same as No. CH, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8 to II inches Per pair, $3.00 No. DH. Key clamp fastenings. Runners of best cast steel, hardened. Entire skate full nickel-plated. Sizes 9 to 1 2 inches Per pair, $2.00 No. EH. Key clamp fastenings. Flat runners of best cold rolled steel. Entire skate nickel- plated. Sizes 9/^ to 12 inches . Per pair, $1.50 No. EHL. Ladies'. Same as No. EH, but with small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8 to I OK inches Per pair, $1,50 '"Special Lsidies' '' No. CHLS. Made with key clamp fastening in front, and best quality leather heel strap. Flat runners of highly tempered and hardened three-ply welded steel. Sizes 8to lOM inches. . Per pair. $3.00 PROMPTAnENTIONGIVEKTOl ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES IrORCOMPlETEllSIOFSTORt ^SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOKS _j Price, in effect July 5. 1912. Suluect to change without notice. For Canadian ] 5^ ;S?E THE SPALDING f iTRADE-MARK'^'Kin^i FOR FANCY SKATING The runners of these best grade rink skates are absolutely the hardest nade and have curved bottoms, as adopted by the leading skating clubs of his country. No. 16. Full key clamp fastenings, highly tempered and concaved, three-ply welded steel ribbed runners. All parts heavily nickel-plated and polished. Specially designed for fancy skating. Sizes 9/^ to 12 in. Per pair, $5.00 No. 16L. Ladies'. Same as No. 16, but with small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8 to \0)4 inches Per pair, $5.00 No. 15. Nickel-plated throughout, full key clamp fastenings, runners of welded steel, hardened and tempered. Sizes 9/^ to 12 in. Per pair, $3.00 No. 15L. Ladies'. Same as No. 15, but with small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 8 to 10^ inches Per pair, $3.00 No. 14. Nickel-plated, full key clamp fastenings, runners of cast steel, hardened beveled edges. Sizes 9//2 to 12 inches. . . Per pair, $1.50 No. 12. Rocker runners, all steel, full clamp fastenings. Sizes 9/4 to 12 inches Per pair. $1.00 PUMrrATTEimONSIVENTO ANYIOIMUNICATIONS iDDKSaEBTDDS A.G.SPALDING &, BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES F08 COMPLETE LISr OF STORES SEE INSIDE FMilTCOVEl, OF THIS MM - Pric«* in «ffact Juty "Sk 1^1^ S<>l'J«<^ to «huig« without notice. For Canadiwi pricM •«• tpecUl C«owliil> Qtltalogut^ ;eTHESPALDIN6(B!)TRADEM GUARANTl QUAUT ^fci^lar JrlocQies^ o)M.at IMPROVED MODEL Our experience during the past eight years in turning out properly madci tubular ice skates enables us to build skates which while extremely light inr weight are at the same time "he strongest tubular skates made, and this means; much to the expert hockey player. : Runners of extra quality chrome nickeli steel, specially tempered, very tough and absolutely the best obtainable fori the purpose. The model has the endorsement of actual use by the most famous players in Canada. Sizes 9^, 10, 10>^, 11, 11;^, 12 inches; foot length. Spalding Tubular Steel Hockey Skates, aluminum finish. . Per pair, $6.00 j Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, ! complete, attached. Per pair, $11.00] Showing Spalding Tubular Hockey Skate fastened to j Spalding Shoe i No. 339 PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDBESSEO TO OS - A. G.SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOB COMPLETE LIST OF STQ SEE INSIDE FRONT COVE) OF THIS BOOK Price* in effect July 5, 1912. Subject to change without — tice. For' Canadian prices see special Canadian Catalogue. I iSTHE SPALDING TRADE-MARK QUALITY )paldliimg :lllg, Steel IMPROVED MODEL 'Ikat« Used by the Champion Speed Skaters in All Their Races ery light weight, all tubular steel construction. Every joint well reinforced, laking them the strongest tubular racing skates manufactured. Blades lade of chrome nickel steel, hardened and drawn, tapered from 1-16 inch at .le toe to 1-32 inch at the heel. Toe and heel plates made of best partly lardened steel, left full size, so they can be cut to fit shoe. Furnished in wo lengths of blades, 14 '2 and 15 'i inches. Foot plates arranged to fit mall, medium or large size shoes. Specify size of shoe worn when ordering, .Iso length of blade required. These skates are built for use with light racing hoes, Spalding No. 337 preferably. Our guarantee will not cover if heavy hockey or skating shoes are used. Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates, nickel- plated and polished. . . Per pair, $8.00 Price, including No. 337 Shoes, complete, attached Per pair, $13.00 Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates, alum- inum finish Per pair, $6.00 Price, including No. 337 Shoes, com- plete, attached. Per pair, $11.00 Showing Spalding Tubular Racing Skate, Nickel-plated, attached to Spalding Shoe No. 337 fmrTAmilTIOII GIVEN TO] ANT COWHIinCATIOIIS ;■ MWESSEBTODS' A. G. SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPIETEUST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVEB^ OF THIS Boot PrioM io effect Jlil^-% 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian price* aee tpecial Canadian Catalosua. No. CR, Rink Skate. Men's No. CR. Foot plates same as on Cana- dian pattern hockey skates, highly pohshed, nickel-plated and buffed. The runners on these skates are special chrome steel, selected for its peculiar fitness for a skate of this character, and ground with curved bottoms, as adopted by national skating associations. Teeth on toe placed correctly. Sizes 9% to 12 inches Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 336 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing Spalding Rink Skate No. CR fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 336 PRONPTmENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADBBESSEDTOUS A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STO^ SEE INSIOE FRONT COVEB OFTHISBOOI Pricei in effect July 5, 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Catalogue. ;^!J^THES t^LDINa(a)TRAPE-MARK lg No. CRL. Rink Skate. Ladies' No. CRL. Ladies'. Same as No. CR, but with small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes &}i to 10^ inches. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Showing Spalding Ladies' Rink Skate No. CRL fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 350 rROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO tNT COMMUNICATIONS AMBESSEOTOOS k. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES JOB COMPUTE UST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FBONT COYER Of THIS 8001 Prica* (D affad July S. 1912. Sutyoct to chui«e wiUtoat DOtic& For C « M < ft « n pdcM am fp«ci*l < iCiOAlogo^ SPALDING "EXPERT" RACING AND HOCKEY SHOE This shoe has been gotten up especially for racing and is just the thing for expert and particu- larly fast hockey players. No. 337. Fine quality kangaroo leather, very soft and pliable; extremely light weight; reinforced inside over ankle; laces low. Blucher style. Special counter supports foot without tiring wearer. Very light sole. Pair, $5.00 We recommend these shoes for use especially with Spalding Tubular Rac- ing and Hockey Skates, and with No. XH Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skates, also with any style racing skates made to be riveted to shoes. SPECIAL" SKATING SHOE No. 336. Best quality calf. Laces low. Blucher style. Special lined and made with counter that supports ankle and arch of foot, giving support where most required; full heel. Pair, $5.00 Use No. 336 Shoes with Spalding Nos. XS or YH Hockey Skates, No. CR Rink Skates and any style Clamp Fastening Ice or Hockey Skates. SPALDING 'CHAMPIONSHIP" HOCKEY SH( This is a heavi| weight shoe thj the No. 337. No. 339. Fine quality calf. Reinforct^J inside over ankle. Padded ton| Special counter supports ankle, instt and arch of foot. Hard box toe speci protection. Laced low. Blucher ci Large brass eyelets. Per pair, $5.(i Recommended particularly for use wi, the Spalding "Expert" Hockey Skat No. XH and with Spalding Tubul Hockey and Racing Skates. Suital: also for use with any Canadian Patt© Hockey Skates. SPALDING HOCKEY SHOE No. 333. A good shoe at a modera price. Made after the design of oi; No. 339 Shoe, but differing in quality ■ material and construction. Light weig! and substantially made. Per pair, $3.£ 1 Use No. 333 Shoes with No. XH Hock* ) Skates, Tubular Hockey and Racii j Skates and with any Canadian Pattel j Hockey Skates to be riveted on. PROMPT AmNTIONGIVEII TO AlirCOllMONieATIONS ADOKSSEBTOyS A.G.SPALDING & BROS, FORCOHPlfTELISTOFSTOBEl Sa INSIDE FRONT CQYU^ OFTHSBOfll * Prieai in' effect Jtily^ 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Cenadiaa price* tee iped&l Ouuulian C&talofua. JSTITUTE THE SPALDING (BgTRApgif^ QUALITY SPALDING MEN'S SKATING SHOE , 332. Made of good quality leather, Inachine sewed. Has outside strap fupport over ankle. Padded tongue. ""uU heel. Laced low. Blucher cut. l\ well constructed shoe. Pair, $3.50 Jse No. 332 Shoes with Spalding No. XS 'Championship" Hockey Skates, No. YH !^anadian Pattern Hockey Skates, No. ZR Rink Skates and with regular Clamp astening Ice Skates. LADIES' SKATING SHOE o. 370. Special quality leather, nicely lined and reinforced with web in- side over ankle. Laced low. Blucher cut. Made with special long counter. Per pair, $5.00 Use No. 370 Shoes with Spalding No. XHL Ladies' Expert "Intercollegiate" Hockey Skates and with Spalding Tubu- lar Hockey and Racing Skates. Suitable for use w^ith any style ladies' hockey or racing skate made to be riveted to shoes. LADIES' SKATING SHOE No. 350. Fine quality leather,nice and pli- able. Reinforced with webbing inside to give support over ankle and at top. Laces low. Blucher cut. Special counter to support arch of foot. Pair, $5.00 Use No, 350 Shoes with Spalding No. XSL *' Championship " Hockey Skates, No. YHL Canadian Pattern Hockey Skates, No. CRL Rink Skates and with regular Canadian Pattern Hockey or Clamp Fastening Ice Skates. LADIES' SKATING SHOE No. 330. Good quality black leather. Laces low. Blucher style. Strap- and-buckle support. Per pair, $3.50 Use No. 330 Shoes with Spalding No. XSL " Championship " Hockey Skates, No. YHL Canadian Pattern Hockey Skates, No. CRL Rink Skates and with regular Clamp Fastening Ladies' Ice Skates. PROMPT HmNTION GIVEN TO I m COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPimllST Of STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK Price! in effect July 5, 1912. Subject to change without notice. For Canadian price* tee (pecial Canadian Catalogue. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE E THE SPALDING (igJTRADE MARK GUARAN" QUALI Spaldiia^ Jerseys foE» Foot Ball asad Ice HocRey This season we are putting in our regular line the special style jerseys, same as we have been supplying on spe- cial orders to the large col- lege foot ball and ice hockey teams. Made with low collar, woven particularly strong for hard usage and of special <;uality long fiber all wool yrorsted. » SPALDING WORSTED JERSEYS Following sizes carried in stock regularly in all quali- ties : 28 to 44 inches chest. Other sizes at an advanced price. We allow two inches for stretch in all our jerseys, and the sizes are marked ac- cordingly. It is suggested, however, that for very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measure- ment be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. Spalding 'Varsity Jersey No. IPF This jersey we consider in a class by itself along with our No. IP. ^o other Jmakes a garment of anywhere near the same grade. We recommend it to those who want the best. No. IPF. Full regular made; that fUp CI7 VQ «"■« be'ns u»e«J "ore and mo hape JC-IVOE. I a foot ball player Full regular made; that is, fashioned or knit to exact sh on the machine and then put together by hand, altogether dif- ferent from cutting them out of a piece of material and sewing them up on a machine as are the ma- jority of garments known as jer- seys. Special quality worsted. Solid colors. Each, $4.00 if $12.00 Dos. ^Io. lOPF. Special quality worsted, fashioned. Solid colors. Each, $3.00 i( $30.00 Doz. players instead of ci jackets. On account of the special Spalding knil are very durable, and at the same time they off restraint on the free ihovement of the pi Woven Letters, We weave into our be»l grade lersi Numr^ralx or ' ^^ »"<* ' P- Le«e". Numerals and numerals or j^ ^p^^;^, ^^|^^, ^, desired. Price Uesigns. on application. Designs submitted Striped IJsually alternating two inches of same coloi ai CI with narrow stripes of some other color specilii' Sleeves. i<,„ Extra 2Sc. p« g.^ STOCK PLAIN COLORS- We carry pp.. i^pc ■" Spalding Stores these worsted CWLOKO ,eys in following colors: Navy Blue Black Gray Marooti " SPECIAL ORDERS-We also furnish, without t»^ charge, on special orders for one-half dozen or - not carried in stock, the following colors. On ( for less than one-half dozen, 10 per cent will be ; to regular price. White Cardinal Orange Sc Columbia Blue Royal Blue Purple Old Yellow Dark Green Irish Green Sea) Br Other colors than as noted above to order only i% quality, 50c. each extra. ^ N. B.— We designate three shades which ar« iRED They are Scarlet, Cardinal, and Maroon. Where is specified on the order. Cardinal will be supplied. SPECIAL NOTICE-We will furnish any of the aboi c6lor jerseys with one color body and another cok striped) collar and cuffs in stock colors only at no extra ch.: PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTl Ihe prices printed in italics opposite items ynarked with 4 I be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOTmarktd witt PBOMPTAnENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADOBESSEDTOUS A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STOI SEE INSIDE FRONT COVEf] OF THIS BOOK I Prices in effect July S, 1912. Subject to change without noUce. For Canadian prices se« special Canadian Catalogue^ *• a THE SPALDING TRADEMARKS^' Atitoinofeile aiid Winter Sports Sweaters HEAVY AND MEDIUM WEIGHTS SPALDING SWEATERS are not only durable in quality but they are very neat in appearance and are carefully finished by hand, both inside and out. For ladies' use we know of no more sensible and comfortable garment, particularly while out during cold or inclement weather, automobiling, snow shoeing, etc. Cuts illustrate especially the convenient form of collar with which we equip theNos.WJ and WDJ styles listed on this page. No. WJ. Highest quality, heavy weight rsted. Without pockets. . . Each, $7.50 * $81.00 Doz. A^DJ. Fine qUcJity standard weight worsted. Style as No. WJ, t lighter weight. Without pockets. Each, $6.00 * $63.00 Doz. KETS— We supply two pockets in either of above iters, if ordered at time sweater is made, not after, ) extra charge of 50c, .ORS— Above sweaters carried in stock In Gray or te only. '/^I AI DRrkFR^'In addition to stock colors mentioned, vre sup- .UlAL. ^KLTCKO |.,y j,,^^^ sweater, without extra charge, on \y, not carried in stock, in any of the following colors : BLACK MAROON SCARLET CARDINAL NAVY COLUMBIA BLUE DARK GREEN SEAL BROWN —We designate three shades which are sometimes called RED. They are let. Cardinal, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order we supply CardinaL colors, other than the above, to order only, 50c. each garment extra. 3AL NOTICE — Solid colored sweaters with one coloi* body and euiother (not striped) collar and cuffs furnished in any of the colors noted, on ial order, at no extra charge. .ES— Carried in stock regularly in sizes 28 to 44 inches ;st measurement. Other sizes at an advanced price. allow four inches ^or stretch jnlingly. It is suggested, he Jinches larger than coat II our Siireaters, and sizes are marked that for very heavy men a size about be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. Je prices printed in Ualics opposite items marked with i( wilt be iited only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Qvfantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with itr ICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE nOHPTIHlimONGIVENTOl MT ciiunniiCitiHuis "flgSSEDTOM A.G.SPALDING &, BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES fORCOMPUrEUSTOFSTOilES SEE ttSlOE FRONT COVEB, or THIS Boot "l Mew te «flMt 'Mr 8, 1912. Subject to chMig* witboat netico. For C«a*diaii pricM aM (p^dal C«n»di>B CauiocM. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE Spalding' 'Official National Iveag'ue Ball Patent Cork Center No.1 Each, . - $1.^5 Per Dozen, $15.00 Th» Spalding "OffidaF National League" Ball ha« been the Official Ball of the Game lince 1878 Adopted by the National League in 1878, is the only ball used in Championship games since that time and has now been adopted for twenty years more, making a totail adoption of fifty-four years. In adopting the Spalding "Official National League" Ball for twenty years more the Secretary of the National League, Mr. John A. Heydler, gave the following as the reason for this action: "The Spalding Ball was adopted by the National League for twenty year*, because we recognized it aa the best ball made. We have used it satisfactorily for thirty-four year*. The new Cork Center Ball intro- duced for the first time last year and used in the World's Series, we beUeve to'be the only ball for the future, and it is absolutely the best that has been used by the National League in it* history." This ball has the Spalding "Patent" Cork Center, the same as used since August t, 1910, without change in size of cork or construction. Elach hal\ wrapped in tinfoil packed in a separate box, and seeiled in accordance with the latest League regulations. Warranted to last a full game when used under ordi- nary conditions. ^dlng Complele Calalogne of Athletic Goods Mailed Free, PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TIT ANY COMMUNICATIOI AOOBESSEDTOUS A.G.SPALDING ». \.'-\ 1914 Containing the *• OFFICIAL RULES AMERICAN 5 PORTS PUBLISHING Co „„ 21 Warren Street. NeM'YorK ,f ,M A. G. Spalding & Bros::^ '%. ■=V, %V. MAINTAIN THEIR OWN HOUSES ' .^ ■ .>. **'■ ^^■''' ' FOR DI^RIBUTING THE ^*^ Spalding ^^ COMPLETE LINE OF , . -x Athletic Goods ,. m THE FOLLOWING CITIES \ 124.128 Nassao St. Vp4.«ih-S20 Fifth Aveaae NEWARK, IW. J, 845 Broad Street BOSTON, MASS. 141 Federal Street BUFFALO, N. Y. All Main Street SYRACUSE, N. Y. 357 So. Warren Street ROCBESTER, N. Y. 40 CUnton Ave., North PITTSBURGH. PA. 608 Wood Street PHILADELPHIA. PA. 1210 Chestnut Street BALTIMORE, MD. 110 E. Baltimore St, WASHINGTON, D, C. 613 14th Street. N.W. LONDON, ENGLAND 317 High Hoibom,W.C. 78. Cheapslde. E. C. West End Branch 29.Haymarl(et,S.W. LIVERPOOL 72, Lord Street PARIS. FRANCE 35 Boalcvord da Capoclno CHICAGO 28-30 So. Wabash Ave. ST. LOUIS, MO. 415 North Seventh St. KANSAS CITY, MO. 1120 Grand Avenue DENVER, COL. 1616 Arapahoe Street COLUMBUS. O. 191 South High Street LOUISVILLE, KY. 328 West Jefferson St. INDIANAPOLIS, IND. 1 36 N. Pennsylvania St. BIRMINGHAM, ENG. 57, New Street MANCHESTER, ENG- 4, Oxford St. and 1, Lower Mosley St. EDINBURGH. SCOT. 3 South Charlotte St. Cor. PHnces SI.) GLASGOW, SCOTLAND 68 Buchanan Street SAN FRANCISCO 1 56- 158 Geary Street SEATTLE, WASH. 711 Second Avenue LOS ANGELES, CAL. 435 South Spring St. PORTLAND, ORE. 345 Washington St. MILWAUKEE, WIS. 379 East Water Street MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. 44 Seventh St., South ST. PAUL. MINN. 386 Minnesota Street ATLANTA, GA. 74 N. Broad Street NEW ORLEANS, LA. 140 Carondelet Street MONTREAL, P. «. 443 St. Jamei. &cv-vi-aws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League PAGE 5 15 17 21 23 27 29 31 33 37 43 49 59 69 76 78 82 87 89 91 TOM nOWAKD. JuU'riuitioiial I'cputatinii, SPALDlNO'S ATHI.ETin T.IBRARY. Review of New York Hockey Season of 1912-13 By Tom Howard. AMERICAN AMATEUR HOCKEY LEAGUE. The officials of the American Amateur Hockey League for the season of 1912-13 were as follows : President, Wm. C. Russell, Hockey Club of New York; vice- president, Stirling Martin, Crescent Athletic Club ; secretary and treasurer, R. L. von Bernuth, St. Nicholas Skating Club. Governing Commitlee, Wm. C. Russell, chairman; Stirling Martin, M. W. Houch, Wanderers Hockey Club. Only four clubs entered teams for the American Amateur Hockey League championship series of 1912-13 — the Crescent Athletic Club of Brooklyn, St. Nicholas Skating Club, Hockey Club of New York and the Irish- American Athletic Club. For the first time since the formation of the League the New York Athletic Club failed to be represented on the ice. The Wander- ers Hockey Club also were missing, but both these clubs retained membership in the League. Tne Irish-American Athletic Club entered a team for the first time, having been admitted to the League at the annual convention on November 14, 1912. The schedule of games arranged to decide the championship of 1912-13 called for a series of eighteen games, divided into three rounds, the teams meeting each other once in every round. In previous seasons the schedule called for two games between each team, but on account of only four teams entering for the 1912-13 contests, the three game schedule was adopted in order to have the playing season run about the customary length of time. The race for the championship opened on January 7, and before the honors had been decided, in the latter part of March, it produced on the whole, the closest fought games in the history of the league, there being no less than four extra period games, two of which remained tied at the end of the extra period and had to be replayed at a later date. The Hockey Clul:) of New York eventually won out, with six games won and three lost ; the Crescents were runners-up. with five games won and four lost ; St. Nicholas finished third, with four games won and five lost, and the Irish-American last, with three games won and six lost. SrALDlNO'S ATITLETK" URKAUY. 7 HOCKEY CLUB OF NEW YORK. The Hockc}' Clul) got away to a good start by winning llieir first three games. They suffered a slump, however, owing mainly to injuries to Britton and Castleman, two of their best players, and in their next tive games were played to a tie twice and beaten three times. Recovering their ])est form, they won their last schedule game and the play-off of both tie games, landing in First place and bringing the championship to the Hockey Club of New York for the first time, after seventeen years' persistent efforts. While they are the first team to win the championship of the American Amateur Hockey League and yet suffer three defeats, it was the consensus of opinion that they were entitled to the honors. CRESCENT ATHLETIC CLUB. The Crescents got together for the season minus two of their veteran standbys, Wall and Liffiton, who have retired. Not- withstanding this, however, they put up a hard fight to retain the championship which they had held for two years. Winning their opening game against the Irish-Americans, they felt the loss of Browne at point and Mills al goal in some of their other early games in which they met defeat. Browne was injured in a preliminary game and Mills did not put on the pads regularly until the season had well advanced. The New Moon- ers kept in the running throughout, nevertheless, and were strong contenders for first place up to the end, finishing one gnme behind the Hockey 'Club. ST. NICHOLAS SKATING CLUB. The St. Nicholas, with a large squad of players from which to pick a team, were considerably favored to win the cham- pionship as the race was about to start. They did not come up to expectations, however, and while Captain Stanley was unable for various reasons to always present what appeared to be his strongest line-up, his team played an in-and-out game all sea- son, falling down on games where they looked like the one best bet and had to be satisfied with third place. IRISH-AMERICAN ATHLETIC CLUB. The Irish-Americans, possessing several players of merit, had the smallest squad of any of the clubs from which to pick a team. ' Although finishing in last place, they put up a stiff argument every time they went on the ice. xA.fter losing their first four games they came along. stronger, but were never able to get back in the running. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 9 Mainly on account of the withdrawal of the New York Athletic Club and Wanderers from active competition there were a number of changes amongst the players. Castleman, White, Gordon, Berry and McKenna, formerly with the New York Athletic Club, went to the Hockey Club of New York, as also did Lewis, formerly sub-goal with the Crescent Athletic Club. Reimund, formerly of the New York Athletic Club, played with the Crescents, and Peabody, also previously a New York Athletic "Club player, was with St. Nicholas. Mitchell, Rogers, Garon, Harmon, Kinsella and La Pat, all former Wanderers, played with the Irish-American Athletic Club. Newcomers showing for the nrst time in American Amateur Hockey League games were : Bates, former hockey captain of Columbia, and Young, with the Hockey Club. Carhart, former Yale goal keeper, Piel and Hallock with the Crescents. Turrell, Pierson, Gross and Loutrell, the former Yale hockey captain, with St. Nicholas, and Macdonnell, Smith and Stickney with the Irish-Americans. Following were the players taking part in championship games : Hockey Club of Ne7v York — A. G. MacKenzie, captain; Lewis, White, Britton, Castleman, Young, Fredericks, Gordon, McKenna, Berry, Bates. Crescent Athletic Club of Brooklyn — C. J. Shirrefif, captain; Mills, Carhart, Browne, Dufresne, Kennedy, Dobby, Reimund, Scarborough, Hallock, Piel. St. Nicholas Skatinc/ Club — Harold Stanley, captain; W^ash- burne, Pierson. Richards, Loutrell. von Bernuth, JMorgan, Chew, Peabody, Turrell, Gross. Irish-American Athletic Club — George Harmon, captain; Mitchell. Rogers. Garon, Macdonnell, Smith, Kinsella, La Pat, Stickney. The official record of the championship games of the Ameri- can Amateur Hockey League season. 1912-13, is given herewith. All games were played in St. Nicholas Rink, New York. Jan. 7— Hockey Club of N. Y., 3; St. Nicholas S.C, i. Jan. 10 — Crescent A.C., 5; Irish-American A.C., i. Jan. 13 — Hockey Club of N. Y., 2, Irish- American A.C., i.* Jan. 15 — St. Nicholas S.C, 5; Crescent A.C., 3. Ian. 21— St. Nicholas S.C, 3; Irish-American A.C, 2.t Jan. 24 — Crescent A.C, 2; Hockey Club of N. Y., t. Jan. 28 — Crescent A. C.. 5; Irish-American A.C, 0. Jan. 31— St. Nicholas S.C, 2; Hockey Club of N. Y., 2.$ Feb. 3 — Irish-American A.C, 4; Hockey Club of N. Y., i. Feb. 5 — St. Nicholas S.C, 4; Crescent A.C, 3. 1, Dol)l)y, veteran player C'rescj-iit A.C i, Kuhn, I'riiieetoii. O'Neil, Phutu. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY Feb. Feb. Feb. Feb. Feb. Feb. Mar. Mar. II — Irish-American A.C., 3; St. Nicholas S.C, 2. 14 — Crescent A.C., 4; Hockev Club of N. Y., 2. 18— St. Nicholas S.C, 3; Ho'ckey Club of N. Y., 2. 21 — Crescent A.C., 4; Irish American A.C., 2. 24 — Hockey Club of N. Y^, i ; Irish-American A.C. 26 — Crescent A.C, 4; St. Nicholas S.C, 3. 4 — Irish-American xV.C, 2; St. Nicholas S.C, i. -Hockey Club of N. Y., 2; Crescent A.C, o. *Played 12 seconds of extra period to decide. i Played 15 minutes of extra period to decide. JPlayed full extra period without brcakino- tie, play-otT resulted as below. Mar. [ — Play-olT tie game of January 31, Hockey Club vs. St. Nicholas, wt)n by Hockey Club, 4-2. Mar. 19 — Play-off tie game of February 24. Hockey Club vs. Irish-American A.C, won by Hockey Club. 2-0. Summary of N. Y Team. Hockey Club Crescent A.C St. Nicholas S.C Irish-American A.C. . The twelve leading Shirreff, Crescents... \Voi . 6 • • • ■ 4 ... . 3 scorers .... 8 Goals Scored. 23 29 26 16 Opp's Goals. 19 21 28 26 ot Castleman, Hockey Club.. 7 Morgan, St. Nicholas 7 Reimund, Crescents 7 Harmon, Irish- A. A.C... 6 Fredericks, Hockey Club.. ^ Lost. PC. 3 .667 4 .556 5 -444 6 .333 the season were : Stanley, St. Nicholas Scarborough, Crescents IJritton, Hockey Club Macdonnell, Irish-A. A.C. Chew, St. Nicholas MacKenzie, Hockey Club, Following were the players penalized and the number of times Uufresne, Crescents Richards, St. Nicholas.... 15ritton, Hockey Club Scarborough. Crescents. ... Macdonneib Irish--\. A.C. Garon, Irish-A. A. C Castleman, Hockey Club.. Shirreff, Crescents Young, Ht^ckey Clul) Fredericks, Hockey C4ub. . Kinsella, Irish-.\. A.C... Smith, Irish-A. A. C Reimund, Crescents MacKenzie, Hockey Club . . 3 Browne, Crescents 3 Chew, St. Nicholas 3 Kennedy, Crescents 3 Harmon, Irish-A. A.C... 2 Stanley, St. Nicholas 2 Gordon, Hockey Club .... 2 Piel. Crescents i Rogers, Irish-A. A. C i A\'ashl.)urne, St. Nicholas., i Peabody, St. Nicholas 1 Turrell, St. Nicholas i \^^^l y \ 2. 1 1, I>?\vit;, H(nkty Clul. of New \urk; 2, Mitcli ^li Ameiican A.C. O'Noil. Plioto, SPALDlNrrS ATHT-ETir T.ir.RARY. 13 CHAMPIONSHIP WINNERS. The table of championship teams since the founding of the American Amateur Hockey League is shown by the attached schedule: 1896-97 — New York Athletic Club. 1897-98— New York Athletic Club. 1898-99 — Brooklyn Skating Club. 1899-1900 — Crescent Athletic Club, 1900-01 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1901-02 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1902-03 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1903-04 — Wanderers Hockey Club. 1904-05 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1905-06 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1906-07 — St. Nicholas Skating Club. 1907-08 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1908-09 — New York Athletic Club. 1909-10 — New York Athletic Club. 1910-11 — Crescent Athletic Club. 1912-13 — Hockey Club of New York. ,^L' iOimKil^l^ m'^^ L .) p n* 5 "^' r^^W iC ..,1 fe^4 ^„ jIII M ■ .^^^^^^^^^^^I^^BiHBP^^^^^^ W- K ^^^HUh ■HHJ S^Fta ffilPI 1, Kinsella; 2, Stickney; 3. Cavanagh; 4. O'Brien: 5, Smith: 6. Brvan: 7. Garon; 8, Mitchell; 9, Harmon; 10, xMcDonald; 11, Murphy, Mascot. O'Neil, Phota. IRISH-AMERICAN ATHLETIC CLUB HOCKEY TEAM. 1, CflsttemaTi, Hoctey Clnb of New York, formerly of New Ynrlc A.C. ; 2, Brlt- lou, Uockty Club 01 iNew ioik. O'Neil, I'hotu. «l'AI.DiXr,-S ATHrFTJC T.IBUAKY What the Season's Play Showed r.v Tom Howard. While the officers of the American /Amateur Hockey League and those others intert-sied in fostering the great winter game in New York can' l)e well satisfied with results the past season, ii cannot be said that the quality of the playing was of very high caliber or up to the standard of some former years, and it is undoubtedly a fact that the local teams have fallen off in class Primarily, the reasons for this have been the many and fre- quent changes of late in the personnel of the teams, the retire- ment of veteran players and the removal of some good players to other localities. The best teams that we have had here were composed of players, the majority of whom had played together for, several seasons. Of course, that is generally found to be .the case wherever hockey is played. While there are some veteran players of merit still in the ranks of the local teams and a number of young players of promise, there are at present too few experi- enced and finished players to make up a number of well-bal- anced teams having the necessary skill to produce good hockey. Considering the not over-abundance of good players and other local conditions, reducing the number of players composing a team from seven to six, the position of rover, being eliminated, might be for the betterment of the game in Nevv •\\)rk. Certainly the necessity for the seventh man has meant, of late, the having on a team at least one player who was not qualified to hold down his position, lowering the standard of a team as a whole. A six-man. t^eam would undoubtedly work better on an ice surface as smallV'gs the St. Nicholas Rink, on which all the local teams play.';"" it ^would allow of less crowding, consequently putting ;i iiigher premium on speed and clean-cut work, and while the dropping of one man might tend to create too much individual effort, that fault is not beyond guarding against. The six-men-a-side game was adopted two years ago by the National Hockey Association of Canada, composed of profes- sional teams, and has met with approval by both their players and followers, and while it is open to argument whether seven or six men on a side makes a better or more scientific game, local cond;itions and the need for improvement in the quality of hockey shown of late by the New York teams would warrant the six- men idea being at least given a trial. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 17 All-New York Team By Tom Howard. Name. Position. Club. Lewis Goal Hockey Club Browne ' Point Crescent A.C. Duf resne Cover Point Crescent A.C. Reimund Rover Crescent A.C. Castleman Center Hockey Club Britton Left Wing Hockey Club Turrell Right Wing St. Nicholas GOAL. Lewis Hockey Club of New York Lewis of the Hockey Club at goal was a consistent performer all season and the "class" of the league in that position. His work was nearly up to the standard set by Dick Mills of the Crescents when that player was at his best. During the past season pressure of business pre- vented Mills from devoting much time to practice and he did not show the form of other years. Browne POINT AND COVER-POINT. Crescent A.C Dufresnc a consistently good in the league than Dufresne. Browne and Dufresne of the Crescents at point and cover-point, respectively, are both strong, defensive players, use good judg- ment in backing up the forward line and are fast and effective on the offensive. While Browne is not shot, there is not a more dangerous shot SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. I ROVER. Reimund. Crescent A.C. Reimund of the Crescents, formerly with the New York A.C. for several seasons, who is placed at rover, was the fastest skating forward in the league last winter, and used his speed to good advantage. While his old weakness, lack of head- work, was in evidence and minimized his effectiveness at times, he was away above the form he displayed when in the ranks of ihe New York A.C. and there was a remarkable improvement in his shooting. CENTER. Casileman Hockey Club Castleman of the Hockey Club al cen- ter can be relied on to take care of that section of the ice. He was the best defensive forward playing last season, and in the center position would be of great assistance to the defense. A vet- eran, and although past his prime, always being a very heady player, he can still hold his own with the best of them, and his all-around, effective playing the past season can hardly be disputed. LEFT WING. Britton Hockey Club Britton of the Hockey Club at left wing, while preferably a defense player, can play a strong game on the line. Very aggressive, Britton is a fast, straight- ahead skater and has a good shot. On his showing last season he is the logical selection for the left wing position. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. ¥ RIGHT WING. Tun-ell St. Nicholas Turrell is one of the young players who had his first season in league hockey. He has all the qualifications that go to make a first-class player and, vvitli experience and under good management, should de- velop into a player of the highest order. He has ideal style for a right wing- player, handling his stick right hand down, which, while not ahsolutely essen- tial, is always preferahle in playing the starboard side. 1, Peabody, St. Nicholas Hockey Club, formerlv with New York A.C • 2 Ken nedy, Crescent A.( O'Neil, Photo. I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 21 St. Nicholas S. C. vs. Boston A. A. By Tom Howard. The St. Nicholas team of New York and the Boston A. A. team came together three times in exhibition games, twice in Boston and once- in New York. On December 14, at Boston, Boston A. A. won by 3 to 2 in overtime play, and on December 28, at Boston, St. Nicks again met defeat by 7 to 3 in another hard-fonght game. St. Nicks, leading by 3 to 2 up to the last five minutes of play, apparently went to pieces, Boston A. A. going- through them for five goals in that many minutes. On January 25, at New York, St. Nicks went down to defeat for the third time by the one-sided score of 10 to i. The B.x\.A. players, while not particularly finished stick handlers, were a fast aggre- gation in splendid condition and a team undoubtedly capable of at least holding their own with any amateur team playing last winter either in this country or Canada. The following players took part in these games : Boston A.A. — Canterbury, Foster, Huntington. Hicks, Clifford, Leslie, Hornblower, Osgood, Duncan. St. Nicholas S.C. — Pierson, Richards, Loutrell, Morgan, Chew, Peabody, Stanley, von Bernuth, Turrell, Ellis. 1, Garon, Irish-American Athletic Club, New York; 2, Louis Loutrell. formerly captain Yale Hockey team; with St. Nicholas team, New York, 1912-13. ■• I SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBKAllY. 23 Canadian Amateur Hockey in New York By Tom Howard. Three of the leading" Canadian amateur teams visited New York last winter and played exhil)ition games with teams of the American Amateur Hockey League, all the games resulting in victories for the Canadians. On December 28 Toronto University defeated the Crescents of Brooklyn, 3 to 4. On February i the Victorias of AI(-)ntreal also defeated the Crescents, 8 to 5, and on March 26 the Winnipeg Hockey Team, amateur champions of Canada, defeated a team representing the Hockey Club of Xew \'ork by the score of 7 to I. The teams in these games lined up as follows : DECEMBER 28. Crescents. Posifioii. Toronto Uiih'ersity. Carhart Goal Parker Browne Point Frith Dufresne Cover Point German Shirreff Rover Webster Reimund Center Jupp Scarborough Left Wing Aird Hallock Right Wing Strome Goals — Toronto University 5. Crescent A.C. 4. FEBRUARY i. Crescents. Position. Victorias. Carhart Goal Law Kennedy Point Bignell Dufresne Cover Point Smart Shirreff Rover Hale Reimund Center Chambers Scarborough Left Wing Mowatt Piel Right Wing Watt Goals — Victorias 8, Crescent A.C. s. 1, Kinsella, Irish-Aiui'iiian A.C: L'. M; II. Iri-i. \i,-.ri.>aii A.C. O'Neil, Photo. ?;rALDI\OS ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 25 MARCH 26. Hockey Club. Position. Winnipeg. Lewis Goal Gannon risne Point Turnbull Britton Cover Point Ruttan Macdonnell Rover Andrews Mackenzie Center Aldons Gordon ; Left Wing Adamson Young Right Wing McKenzie Goals — Winnipeg 7, Hockey Club of New York i. The two leading college teams of Canada, Ottawa and McGill, played an exhibition game at the St. Nicholas Rink, New York, on January 4, Ottawa winning by 4 to 3, after a hard-fought game. The teams lined up as follows : Ottazca. Position. McGill. Derocher Goal Mann O'Leary Point Hughes Goodwin Cover Point Rankin Brousc Rover Fawcett Nagle Center I^hompson Dore Left Wing Sargent Desjardins , . . Right Wing Foreman Substitutes — For Ottawa, O'Neil for Desjardins: for McGill. Kendell for Fawcett, Ryley for F^oreman, Wickson for Sargent. Goals — Ottawa 4, McGill 3. ' *'^|W • ■ ^ Hi H Hi ^H ■^k^^^^^^^^^ i 1 m 1 Mm 1 1 K 1 1 1 ''M w 1 ^^^SlJ H lit J 1 i^^^^SP^ 1 ^JH|^^^^^L m 1 P 1 J m IBP '4.-' I 1, Dr. LaFlamme, St. Mirhael's Hockey Club, Toronto; 2, T. Smith, Quebec. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 27 Exhibition Professional Games in New York By Tom Howard. Following his usual custom, Cornelius Fellowes, Jr., Director of the St. Nicholas Rink, New York, arranged a post-season series between the three leading professional teams of eastern Canada during the latter part of the 1912-13 season. Wanderers of Montreal and the Ottawa team were matched for two games, March 8 and 10, the aggregate number of goals for both games to decide winner, winning team to meet Quebec, champions of the National Hockey Association of Canada, in two games, winner to be decided on same basis. The games were well patronized b}^ the general public, and some fast hockey was seen, the Wanderers winning the series. The games resulted as follows : March 8 — Wanderers 8, Ottawa 2; March 10, Wanderers 7, Ottawa 6; total — Wanderers 15, Ottawa 8. March 13 — Wan- derers 9, Quebec 5; March 15 — ^W'anderers 3, Quebec 5; total- Wanderers 12, Quebec 10. Following were the players seen in the professional games : Position. Wanderers. Qnchcc. Oftazvo. Goal Boyce. Moran. LaSeur. Point Ross. Hall. Merrill. Cover point S. Cleghorn. Mummery. S. Love. Right w^ing O. Cleghorn. Marks. Broadbent. Center^ Hyland. J. Malone. Ronau. Left wing Roberts. Smith. Lowry. Substitutes — Cadotte for Boyce. Price for Ross, Russell for Roberts, Crawford for Malone. Professional teams of the National Hockey Association of Canada play six men on a side. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 29 New York Interscholastic Hockey Season 1912-13 By Tom Howard. The quality of hockey played during the past season by the interscholastic teams showed very little, if any, improvemeni over that of the season before, and the season was interesting mainly on account of the great record made by the team which represented Stevens Preparatory School of Hoboken, N. J. Going through the season without a defeat and with a total of sixty-three goals to their credit, as against two scored by their opponents in the thirteen games they played, the Hoboken boys can be justly proud of their record. Aside from defeating the teams of Cutler, Irving and Col- legiate for the championship and winning the cup presented by George G. Hallock, Jr., of the Crescent Club of Brooklyn, the Stevens players earned victories over Manual, Stuyvesant, Horace Mann, and South Orange Field Club. The sevens of Cutler School and Stuyvesant alone were successful in scoring against the Jersey boys. George Hallock of Brooklyn, cover-point and captain of the Stevens team, and son of the donor of the championship cup, was the individual star of the interscholastic season. Of the sixty- three goals scored by his team forty-two were placed to his credit. Muller, on the forward line for Stevens, also did good work, as also did Benzinger at goal and Taylor at point. W. Cohu at goal and Wainwright on the forward line did the best work for Cutler, and Cravat and Pope of Irving are deserv- ing of mention. Following are the teams that made up the Interscholastic Hockey League of 1912-13 and the order in which they finished : Stevens, Cutler, Irving, Collegiate. The players that represented Stevens were : Hallock, captain ; Benzinger, Taylor, Hopkins, Muller, Van Cleve, McGee, O'Dougherty, Glasby, Blaser. The record of Stevens team for the season of 1912-13 : 2 — Irving, o 5 — Irving, o 7 — Cutler, i 2 — Cutler, o 4 — Collegiate, o 12 — Horace Mann, o 5 — Manual, o 3 — Montclair, 9— Irving, o 4 — Stuyvesant, i 6 — Collegiate, o 3 — Cutler, o I — South Orange F.C., SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 31 Dual Events By ToxM Howard. YALE-ST. PAUL'S. The annual game between Yale and St. Paul's bchool of Concord, N. H., was played in the St. Nicholas Rink, New York, on December 19, 1912, and drew the usual large crowd of spectators. St. Paul's School won, 4 to i, all the goals being scored in the second period. The teams lined up as follows : Yale Position St. Paul's. Tilney Goal Ford Gore Point Schreiber Martin Cover Point J. S. Humphreys (Capt.) Cox Rover Tritch Harmon (Capt.) Center W. G. Humphreys Heron Left Wing Hills Chauncey Right Wing Sharpies Goals — St. Paul's 4, Yale i. PRINCETON-WILLIAMS. The annual game between Williams College and Princeton was played on December 20 at the St. Nicholas Rink, New York, and resulted in an overwhelming victory for Princeton by the score of 14 to i. Baker, the Princeton star, went through the Williams team at will, and being ably assisted by Kuhn and Kilner. The line-up was as follows : Princeton. Position. Williauis. Winants Goal Rogers Lee Point MacNamee Bryan Cover Point Michaels Baker Rover Gellette Kuhn Center de Brankart Patterson Left Wing Sevain Kilner Right Wing Curtis Goals — Princeton 14, Williams i. Substitutes — Cowan for Kilner, McCall for Patterson, Campbell for Bryan, Carter for Winants; Lewis for Curtis, Cole for Rogers. 1, Gardner, Capt., Harvard; 2, Sbortwell, Harvard. O'Neil, Photo. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRAKY. ' 33 The Intercollegiate Hockey Season of 1913 The season of 1913 saw the probable end of the Intercollegiate Hockey League. Harvard continued to play independently and Yale and Columbia followed her lead. This left only Princeton, Dartmouth and Cornell in the league, and as neither of the last named colleges were able to put their usual class of teams on the ice, Princeton won with ease. Only three league games were scheduled. The first, between Princeton and Dartmouth, was played on January 3 and went to the Tigers, 3 to 2. A week later the Jerseyites swamped Cornell, 9 to o. This ended the schedule so far as the Tigers were concerned and, on February 14, Dartmouth and Cornell met to decide the claim for second place. The Ithacans fell down badly and Dartmouth won, 7 to I. The league standing was as follows: Won. Lost. PC. Princeton 2 i .000 Dartmouth I I . 500 Cornell o 2 . 000 With the league teams disposed of, the Tigers faced the hard- est part of their schedule, namely, the series with Harvard and Yale. The Elis tuned up for the first Princeton game by defeating Columbia on January 8, 6 to o. This was Columbia's only appearance on the ice during the season, as the team was dis- rupted, owing to a discussion over the three-year eligibility rule. Harvard easily defeating Cornell, 8 to 2, on January 18, and, on the same day Yale and Princeton met for their first game. It was closely contested throughout and Yale led up to within a few minutes of the end, when a great shot by Kilner tied the score and in the extra period Patterson and Baker scored in quick succession, the game ending, 7 to 5, in favor of the Tigers. The first meeting between Harvard and Princeton came four days later and the game was another overtime affair. Harvard covered Baker fairly eiTectively and, aided by the wonderful playing of Captain Gardner at goal, won by the score of 5 to 3. Hopkins and Sortwell caged the extra period goals and brought victory to the Crimson. In the interim between the next game with Yale, Harvard toyed with the Massachusetts Aggies to the tune of 9 to 3. The Yale game came on January 30. Harvard's superior phys- 34 ■ SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. ical condition and team work played an important part in the game, as Yale had been handicapped by lack of ice for practice. The first half ended even up, but in the second half, Harvard broke loose and rang up four goals. Schiller's goal fending saved the Blue from a much heavier defeat. The final score was 4 to o. Yale was unable to get together after the defeat in the Harvard game and lost to Dartmouth on February 6. The score was 3 to 2. Princeton and Harvard came together for their second encounter on February 7. The Tigers needed the game and they won it, 3 goals to i. Baker and Winants were the heroes. The Princeton captain scored the first goal for his team and aided materially in making the others, in spite of the fact that three and four Crimson skaters were constantly on his track. Winants at goal blocked cleverly time and time again. Kuhn and Emmons scored the remaining goals for the Tigers and Sortwell regis- tered the lone tally for Harvard. The Jerseyites continued their winning ways by overwhelming Yale by the score of 8 to 2 on February 11. The Elis played them- selves out in the first half, which ended with the score 2 to o in their favor. The closing chapter, however, was a walkover for Princeton, who rained shots at Schiller in the Yale cage, eleven going through for scores. The Tiger forwards. Baker, Kuhn and Patterson worked together like the cogs of a machine and the New Haven team was completely outclassed. This ended the season series between the two colleges, Princeton having won both games. Yale felt the need of practice badly and played the Massa- chusetts Aggies on the fourteenth of February winning easily, 4 to o. On the same day Harvard and Princeton met in the deciding game of their series. Each had won a game and each had defeated all other opponents. The championship of the hockey world consequently rested upon the outcome and a great deal of interest centered in the match. Harvard played for Baker from the whistle and finally won by a score of 3 to o. Baker was as fast as usual, but when- ever he was able to elude Sortwell, the Harvard rover, there were always two or three other Crimson men waiting to intercept him. Largely through Baker's speed the play was usually in Harvard territory and the goal fending of Captain Gardner, who made twenty-nine stops, was one of the strongest points in the Johnnies' defense. All of the scoring was done in the first period and Harvard, with a three-goal lead, was content to play on the defensive throughout the last half of the game. SPAIvDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 35 The line-up for the game was as follows: Harvard. Position. Princeton. Hopkins Left Wing Patterson Claflin Right Wing Kilner Phillips Center Kuhn Sortwell Rover Baker Goodale Cover Point Emmons Willetts Point Lee Gardner '. Goal Winants This virtually gave the championship to Harvard, but as the Yale series was still unfinished, no claims were made by the Cambridge sextette. The final game of the season between Yale and Harvard was played on February i8. Harvard won, 3 to 2, after the most bitterly contested game of the season. Harvard reserved her scoring until the last five minutes and then cut loose with such a furious attack that the weary Eli players were swept off their feet. In rapid succession, Phillips tallied twice and Sortwell caged a shot just before the game ended. Harman and Gore bolstered the Yale line-up and the team fought tooth and nail. The body checking was particularly savage and men were being dumped continually. Ordway scored for Yale in the first half and Harman in the second in a belated Eli rally. Tilney of Yale starred in the cage, keeping the Har- vard sharpshooters at bay throughout the game. With the victory Harvard gained undisputed possession of the 1913 championship, with Princeton second and a toss-up between Dartmouth and Yale for third place. INTERCOLLEGIATE SCORES. Princeton 3, Dartmouth 2. Yale 6. Columbia o. Princeton 9, Cornell o. Harvard 8, Cornell 2. Princeton 7, Yale 5. Harvard 5, Princeton 3. Harvard 9, Massachusetts Aggies 3. Harvard 4, Yale o. Dartmouth 3, Yale 2. Princeton 3, Harvard i. Princeton 8, Yale 2. Dartmouth 7, Cornell i. Yale 4, Massachusetts Aggies o. Harvard 3, Princeton 0. Harvard 3, Yale 2. .Tan. 3- Jan. 8. Jan. II. Tan. 18. Jan. 18. Tan. 22. Jan. -/ • Jan. .30. Feb. 6. Feb. 7- Feb. II. Feb. 14- Feb. 14- Feb. 14. Feb. 18. 1, Jt'im.Mi: i;, Feuclit\vjU)fr(M-; :!, I'aiker: 4. F. c Mgr. ; ti. TJpson; 7, Van Scbaafk; 8. Gould. TAWLING (N. Y.) yCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM rksoii, I'iipi.; •>, <'. Wri'il, Pach, Photo. 1, Paton, Coach; 2. Powers; 3, Haggerty; 4, H. Schwartz, Mgr. ; 5, Goodman; 6, Cleary; 7, Bird; 8, Heinsohu, Capt. ; 9, More; 10, Scott. White, Photo. DE WITT CLINTON HIGH SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, NEW YORK CITY. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 37 Interscholastic Hockey in New York Season of 1912-13 By Odgers T. Gurnee. The scholastic hockey sea- son in New York in 1912- 1913 was probably the best, both in _point of playing and interest shown, since the schools of the city first adopted the game. Unfor- tunately no Public Schools League was formed, as the rink was unavailable except very early in the morning. However, Clinton, Manual and Stuyvesant formed teams and arranged games between themselves and with the numerous private preparatory schools. Stevens, with the greatest team in the school's history, went through the season undefeated and outclassed the majority of their opponents in every game. This remarkable record was due principally to tho stellar work of Hallock, the big cover point, who did most of the scoring and was a tower of strength on the defense. Stevens, being an out of town team, must give place to. Clinton for the championship of Greater New York. Unfor tunately these two teams did not meet and it was impossible to get a line on their ability, although the paper estimates favors Stevens. Clinton also went through the season unbeaten and was credited with victories over such teams as Cutler, Browning and Stuyvesant. While not a "one man team" quite to the degree that Stevens was, Clinton relied entirely upon Captain Heinsohn to do the scoring. That he responded ably is shown by the season records which credit him with all but one of the goals made by the team. Cutler had a splendidly organized sextette and went through 1, Ells; 2. Donuelley; 3, Andrews; 4, Jacob; ">, McKee; Metcalf; 8, Cowles; 9, Farwoll. TAFT SCHOOL PIOCKFA' TEAM. WATERTOWN, N. Y, Benner, Capt. ; 7. Pach, Photo. 1, Post; 2, J. O'Brien. Coach; 3, Van Horn; 4, H. W. Cohn; 5, Oiiaiiviu; 6, L. T. Cohn, Capt.; 7, Dowling; 8, A. Post. Pach, Photo. CUTLER SCHOOL HOCKEY TEAM, NEW YORK CITY. SiPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 39 a long schedule with but three defeats, losing twice to Stevens and once to Clinton. Of the remaining teams Irving and C'ol- legiate did not meet and Browning, aside from the game v/itli Clinton, did not appear on the ice. Stuyve$ant and Manual played one game which was won by Stuyvesant, placing them next to Clinton in the Public Schools standing. Horace Mann made but two appearances on the ice, losing to Stevens and tieing Irving. Of the neighboring prep schools, Pawling, Harstrom, Hotch- kiss, Taft, Gunnery, McKenzie and Hackley had successful sea- sons, although all were handicapped by lack of outdoor ice. The two most important games of the year were the Cutler- Clinton contest, on January 22, and the last Stevens-Cutler game, on February 27. When Clinton met Cutler, both teams had yet to lose a game and the Greater New York championship was at stake. The game was characterized chieflly by its roughness and the speed of Heinsohn, Clinton's leader. He scored the only two goals of the game and won single handed. Dowling and Captain Cohu starred in the defense for Cutler. The line-up of the game was as follows : Cutler. Position. Clint 0)1. W. Cohu Goal Scott Dowling Point More L. Cohu Cover Point Bird Wainwright Center Goodman Onativia Rover Heinsohn Post Left Wing Cleary Van Horn Right Wing Haggerty Cutler was later defeated rather easily by Stevens and when the second encounter took place they were out for blood. The game was fast and clean, but the more experienced Stevens team finally triumphed. 3 goals to o. As usual, Hallock. the cover point for the winning team, was a tower of strength on the defense, and at those times when he elected to leave his position and make carries he showed to distinct advantage. Glasby, the left wing for Stevens, contributed the only goal tallied in the first half on a pretty shot at a difficult angle, the rubber beinp- brought down by Hopkins and cleverly passed. In the second period Hallock got into the game in real earnest and made many carries nearly the length of the rink, but the effective checking of Dowling kept the puck clear of his team's 1, Culligan; 2, Wessell; 3. Patterson; 4. Randall; 5. Hyde; 6, Given, Mgr. ; 7, Townsend; 8; Stickney. Capt. ; 9, Koiuaus: 10, Herrmann, Coach. CENTRAL HIGH SCHOOL TEAM, ST. PAUL, MINN. 1, Kartak; 2, V. Hauser, Mgr.: 3, Moersck; 4. Bagley; 5, Hlckey; 6, La Bis- sonier; 7, C. Hauser; 8, De Winney, Capt.; 9, Haas; 10, Hawkins. GoUing, Photo. MECHANIC ARTS HIGH SCHOOL TEAM, ST, PAUL, MINN. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 41 cage time and again. Both Hallock and Muller scored toward the end of the half as the result of scrimmage plays. The line-up : Stevois. Position. Cutler. Benzinger Goal W. Cohu Taylor Point Dowling Hallock Cover Point L. Cohu Hopkins Rover Onativia Muller : Center Wainwright Glasby Left Wing Post Van Cleve Right Wing Van Horn This ended the season with Stevens on top of the heap, Clin- ton second and Cutler next, with a toss-up between Stuyvesant, Collegiate and Irving for the remaining positions. i ""^;^i-'^-^^^'i:# "^^ 1 io| *^ UNIVERSITY OP NEW YORK HOCKEY TEAM. Pach, Photo. 1, R. W. Cramer. Com.; 2, Bordeau; 3, Doouor; 4. Martin; '>, Fatlitr K. Cloran, S.J., Dir. of Athletifs; (5. II. M. ilyland. Coacli; 7. J. O'N. Gallery, Com.; 8, Aubin; 1), Clement, Capt. ; 10, T. Brady, Com.; 11. .McTeigue; 12. Kearney; 13. Murphy. Gordon, Photo. LOYOLA COIJvEGE SENIOR HOCKEY TEAM. Championr. of the Junior Amateur Hockey Association of Canada, 1913. 1. Flannagan; 2, Clucas; 3. Bowman; 4, Parks; 5, Lalonde; 6. Mackay; 7, Smith. Hunter, Photo. ANACONDA (MONT.) HOCKEY TEAM, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 43 Interscholastic Hockey in the East By Nat Fleischer, New York. A review of interscholastic hocke}'^ in the metropolitan district during the season of 1912-1913 requires that the subject be treated in four sections,, namely, the New York Interscholastic League, Public Schools Athletic League, New Jersey Interscholastic League and the group of uncombined preparatory schools in New York and Connecticut. Meriting first consideration because of its greater importance in all around superiority of play, is the New York Interscholastic League, which is composed of Stevens "Prep," Cutler, Collegiate and Irving schools. Columbia Gram- mar School, Syms, Browning, Berkeley and Fordham "Prep," which supported teams in previous yearc, failed to get the proper material and abandoned the sport. Horace Mann sent a seven on to the ice for the first time and its showing guarantees its presence in the league next season. Stevens "Prep" made probably the greatest record compiled by any hockey team either in the United States or Canada. Aided by a remarkable faculty for team play, the Hoboken seven went through the season without the loss of a single game, in a long schedule of seventeen contests with every team that was willing to face it. It discriminated against no one, and welcomed chal- lenges from any scholastic hockey combination in the country. Lawrenceville, Princeton "Prep," St. Paul's, St. Mark's, and Pompfret, were given opportunities to test the Stevens seven, but declined the issue. Standing head and shoulders above all the schoolboy hockey plaj'-ers in the country and ranking high even in comparison with collegiate and amateur league players, was George Hallock, Stevens "Prep's" cover-point. It was a common occurrence for Hallock, despite his defensive position, to score all the goals made by his team. Without him, it is hard to say just how the Stevens seven would have figured, but with him it was invincible. There are many close followers of scholastic hockey who ques- tion whether a player who is so superior to all others, as was Hallock, is not a deterring influence to tie welfare of the sport. Hallock played several games with the Crescent A.C. team of the Amateur Hockey League, which finished second in that organiza- tion, and even in such fast company, the :5tevens star created a favorable impression. It is recommended in many quarters that interscholastic leagues pass rules prohibiting schoolboy hockey *^%^ vJrfiS^ P"i'' ^ JJIlljlJ 1- - f i-u^ -^^ r "*^j| ^K^i j^^BBF; ^m vM|^ i^M- \:iBP\i ■■ ^ '^^ /■ H Vt \/ Photo, Dominion Co. 'ALL-STARS" HOCKEY TEAM, WINNIPEG, CAN. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 45 players, who are affiliated with any other organization, to com- pete in association contests. Such a rule would have, in a way, been an injustice to a player of the standing of Hallock had he chosen to remain with the Crescents. All this is not to be taken to mean that the Interscholastic League race was a funeral procession all the way. The other teams in the league, although failing to defeat Stevens, were of sufficiently high caliber to keep its scores down to close propor- tions, and amang themselves enjoyed a real interesting contest for second honors. Cutler School, with the Cohu brothers as the leading players, gave a very good account of itself, finishing second in the league race. In the deciding game, played on ]7ebruary 27, Stevens defeated Cutler by a score of 3 to o, the goals being tallied by Hallock, O'Dougherty and Muller. Irving School, with L. Cravat as the bright star, finished third, and' Collegiate School, with Brett, Lent and Knott, as the leaders, came in fourth. The teams played a round robin tourney of two games each, the season opening on December 12 and closing on March 5. All games were played in the St. Nicholas Rink. On the opening day, the Stevens puck chasers defeated the Cutler seven, 2 to o, with Hallock scoring both rf the Hoboken team's goals. The Stevens team, by winning the championship last season, scored a leg on the beautiful Hallock trophy, valued at $150. Hallock led in the season's scoring in the league games with a high mark of thirty goals. Muller and Hopkins of the same school, got four goals each, while McGee, Glasby and O'Dough- erty each tallied twice. For Cutler School. A. Post scored five goals, while Wainwright and Onativia got three each. For Collegiate School, Lent, Brett, Carroll and Knott were the principal scorers, while on the Irving team, L. Cravat, with four goals, and F. Pope and P. Pope, with two each, accounted for that team's scoring in league contests. In view of Stevens' showing it would only be a safe proposi- tion to choose the entire Hoboken team as first selection for an All-Star Interscholastic Hockey League seven. However, there were several boys on other combinations who fought their way against heavy odds and undoubtedly deserve the honor. First and second All-Star selections are as follows : First Team. Position. Second Team. Benziger. Stevens Goal W. Cohn, Cutler Ta.vlor. Stevens Point H. Cravat, Irving Hallock. Stevens Cover Point Onativia. Cutler F. Pope. Irving Rover Wainwrigbt, Cutler L. Cravat. Irving Center Muller. Stevens Glashy. Stevens Left Wing P. Pope. Irving A. Post, Cutler Right Wing Van Horn, Cutler 46 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. • PUBLIC SCHOOLS ATHLETIC LEAGUE CHAMPIONSHIP. De Witt Clinton, aided materially by "Art" Heinsohn, captain and rover, was easily entitled to the championship of the Public Schools Athletic League. Stuyvesant fell before the Red and Black, 2 to I ; Manual Training, .winner of the championship in 1911, was defeated, 2 to o, and Curtis, 2 to i. Outside of the Public Schools Athletic League, the Clintonians showed their greatest strength by whitewashing Cutler School, 2 to o, and Browning School, 6 to o. Bird, point, and More, cover-point, were able assistants to Heinsohn in keeping their team in the van. Stuyvesant ranked second to Clinton, with Fisher, rover, as its leading exponent. Baker, at point, was a close second. Schwind and House also contributed materially to the Scarlet and Blue's success. Curtis merits third position. The Staten Island boys had excel- lent facilities for practice at Spring Lake, but with an unusually small body of male students in the school, had little material to draw upon. Bernstein and Von Mechow, the all around athletes of the school, were the team's best players. Keppler, at wing and center, was one of Curtis High's best players. Manual Training played a fine defensive game, but, somehow, the team could not muster up any kind of an attack. The Brooklyn school's best exhibition was with Clinton, in which Montrose. Paracette and Humphries worked like Trojans and kept the Manhattan boys to two goals. To pick an All-Star seven composed of members of teams in the Public Schools Athletic League is not so difficult a matter as in past years. The players showed excellent improvement in the knowledge of the finer points of the game, in stick handling and in speed on skates. There was also a noticeable improvement in team play and discipline, and the squabbles of previous seasons were conspicuous by their absence. The first and second choices follow : . First Team. rosition. Second Team. Scott. Clinton Goal House. Stuyvesant More, Clinton Point Baker. Stuyvesant Bird, Clinton Cover Point Paracette. Manual Training Heinsohn. Clinton Rover Titus, Manual Training Bernstein, Curtis High Center ..Goodman, Clinton Fisher, Stuyvesant Left Wing Cleary, Clinton Keppler, Curtis High Right Wing Haggerty, Clinton In explanation of the above choice, it must be said that some of the players are placed in positions other than those they regu- larly occupied. Fisher of Stuyvesant, for instance, is placed at one of the wings, whereas he was a rover. He merits a position StALDlNG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 47 on the first team, and as he was not quite up to the caliber of Heinsohn, the writer beheves he would fit in very nicely on the foKward line, as he was Stuyvesant's big scorer. The New Jersey Interscholastic Hockey League never really got started last season. Only Stevens and Montclair high schools entered the tourney, East Orange and Barringer failing to be represented. One game was played, Stevens defeating Montclair, 3 to 0, the contest being played in the St. Nicholas Rink. But for the fine defensive work of Redall, Osborne and Andrus, Stevens would hav ; rolled Lp a much larger tally. Until the proposed rink is built in the Orange district, the New Jersey League is bound to be an in-and-out organization, as the St. Nicholas Rink cannot offer the teams coming across the Hudson River any practice hours, and natural ice has become quite a rarity. Taft School of Watertown, Conn., was entitled to the leading honors among the uncombined private schools in upper New York and Connecticut. The boys from Connecticut showed their caliber by taking Pawling School into camp, on Pawling's home ice, 5 to 0. McKay and Donnally, cover-point and center of the Taft seven, showed the makings of coming college stars. Gould and Hutchinson on the defense, Clarkson and Hudson on the attack, made the Pawling seven a formidable combination in other contests. Brunswick School of Greenwich, McKenzie of Dobb's Ferry, Newman School of Essex Falls, N. J., Carlton, Morristown and Hackley schools all placed fast sevens on the ice. New Rochelle high school's team won the Westchester County championship, in which Yonkers, Mount Vernon and White Plains, also were contestants. The New Kochelle boys showed their strength by playing a 2 to 2 tie with Irving School. SPALDING'S ATHLE'l.C LIBRARY. 49 Hockey in Syracuse With the opening of the Arena in 191 1, hockey really made its initial debut to the future fans of Syracuse. The season of 1912 and 1913 was the most remarkable and gratifying in nearly every way. A new game' arouses interest slowly, as was the case in Detroit, Cleveland and Boston. That hockey is now on the homestretch as the king of winter sports in Syracuse is shown by the increase of attendance from a few curious spectators, at the beginning, to a steadily increasing crowd of enthusiastic fans and followeis who never miss a chance to see a game. The marvelous record of the Syracuse hockey team last season did more than anything else to stimulate interest in this great game. The public can rest assured that this winter it will see Syracuse represented by practically the same team. The record of the Syracuse Hockey Club for the season of 1912 1913 was as follows : 5— N. Y. Hockey Club I 2 — Brockville, Ontario 3 3 — N. Y. Hockey Club..., 2 4 — Kingston, Ontario 2 10 — St. Patrick's, Montreal. 2 10 — Kingston, Ontario 3— St. Patrick's, Montreal. 3 8 — Buffalo Hockey Club. . . o o — Detroit 2 2 — Smith Falls, Ontario... i 3 — Detroit 3 i — Smith Falls, Ontario. . . 2 10 — Saranac O 2 — Smith Falls, Ontario. . . 5 II — Saranac 2 — Irish-/\merican H. C, . . i 4 — Shamrock, Montreal... 2 3 — Irish- American H. C. . . 2 8 — Shamrock, Montreal... 2 i — Winnipeg All Stars.... 3 6— Boston Tech 2 2 — Winnipeg All Stars. ... i 5 — Brockville, Ontario.... 4 The Syracuse Journal says : "People who love a clean and speedy sport are learning to understand that hockey is a great game. In Cleveland and Detroit crowds of 4,000 are not unusual and it's a safe prediction that with as good a hockey team next season, Syracuse will become a hotbed of hockey as in the other big cities where it has been introduced." Besides the Syracuse hockey team, Syracuse University, the City League hockey teams, St. John's School of Manlius and the Sedgwick Farm Club, use the Arena for their home games. This year there will probably be representative hockey teams from every grammar school in the city. Several local athletic clubs of note also contemplate entering teams. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Hockey in Canada, 1913 By Frank Calder. With three solid months of hockey, and with the game in full blast from the Atlantic to the Pacific, the season of 1913 was one of the best in the history of the Canadian game. One of the most pronounced features of the season was probably tlie great advances made by the game in the way of organization. Canadian hockey has a long way to go yet, it is true, before it begins to approach the organization of base ball. But every year now a step further is made in progress, and 1913 saw some very decided steps. The eyes of the whole hockey world in Canada were cen- tered during the season of 1913 principally on the three pro- fessional leagues, the National Hockey Association, the Mari- time Provinces Hockey Association and the British Columbia Hockey Association. For various reasons there had been a lack of cohesion among these three organizations. To one the other was "outlaw" and vice versa. A step forward in the right direction, however, was taken at the opening of the 1913 season when the Maritime Provinces Hockey Association entered an alliance with the National Hockey Association, the articles of agreement being principally in regard to a mutual respecting of contracts. The end of the 1913 season saw still another step forward when the way was smoothed for a better understanding between the clubs of the two Eastern leagues and the clubs of the Western leagues. A National Hockey Commission, in principle resembling the National Commission of the professional base ball leagues of the United States, has been for a long time the moving spirits in professional Canadian hockey. Happily, the goal appears now to be in sight. The incidents mentioned above have led to an agreement between the three great leagues and the outcome anticipated is better hockey on a sounder basis. The league race in the senior organization, senior in point of age, the National Hockey Association, was full of incident. The opening of the big artificial ice plant in Toronto, known as the Arena Gardens, gave a great fillip to the game. Toronto put two clubs into the league, of which one, the Toronto club, gave a very satisfactory account of itself. Under the guidance of the veteran Jack Marshall, one of the greatest exponents of the game in his day and still, though approaching the forties, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 63 a mighty clever stick handler, the Toronto club served to fur- nish several thrills to the leaders in the race. The championship honors fell to Quebec, for the second year in succession. The club won the season's honors entirely on its merits. A raid by the Western clubs at the opening of the season had left the champion sextet of 1912 in a badly shattered condition. In the gamest manner possible, however, the Quebec club recruited its forces from the enemy's territory, bringing a pair of player-s, Mummery and Crawford, right from under the noses of the westerners. The pair were more or less of an unknown quantity. One settled down to the peculiarities of National Association hockey, however, they more than com- pensated for the players who had been lost and assisted materi- ally in winning the championship. In the Maritime Provinces the championship was won by the Sydney club, and the usual challenge series for the Stanley Cup, held by the N.H.A. champions, was played. Quebec maintained its hold on the trophy, winning the series of two games by a score of 20 goals to 5. In the Western league the honors fell to Victoria, with Van- couver, the champions of the previous year, and New West- minster tied for second place. Previous to the season of 1912, ice hockey was entirely unknown in southern British Columbia. In that year, how- ever, the Patrick brothers, Frank and Lester, organized a com- pany for the erection of what actually is the largest artificial ice plant in Canada and, probably, in America. It was a pretty big venture for the Patricks, who were little more than boys, and indeed had played hockey regularly in the east nearly every winter up to that time. The Patricks, however, realized that, like the rest of the country, British Columbia was hockey hungry. They took a chance and succeeded. The erection of rinks in Vancouver and Victoria was followed by the organization of clubs in the two places mentioned and in New Westminster, the club from the latter city playing its matches in Vancouver. So great is the hold that the game has taken on the Pacific Coast that hockey rinks are now seriously talked of for Seattle and Portland, Oregon. When the Panama Exposition, to be held in San Francisco in 1915, was mooted, the Patrick brothers were awarded the con- tract for the erection of a building and installation of an ice plant characteristic of wnnter sport — a striking tribute to the energy and foresight of these two young Canadians. Organization is not the only direction in which the game in Canada has progressed. The begt critics are generally agreed SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 55 that the game itself has improved out of sight by the introduc- tion of the six-men-aside game. Up to the season of 1912 teams composed of seven men a side had taken the ice. In igi2 the six-men game was tried as an experiment. In the face of much opposition it was demonstrated to the pubHc that six-men hockey on a confined surface of ice made a far better brand of hockey than the seven- men game. Toronto, however, at the opening of the season of 1913, wanted to be shown. The seven - men game had always been considered the only thing in Toronto, and there was much opposition to the introduction of the cur- tailed teams. A compromise was made, wdiereby the first half of the season was played under six -men rules, and the second half under seven -men rules. By the time the date for the seven men game had arrived the public and the press were quite willing to waive the seven-men order and continue with the six- men game. Prospects for the season of 1914 are brighter than ever. There seems to be every indication that the game in Canada is in for still further development. During the season of 1913 many teams, both professional and amateur, visited the United States to play exhibition games at various points. Hockey in its inter- natonal aspect, however, is believed to be just at the beginning. Enthusiasts in Canada look forward to the day when the game will have advanced so far that an international league will be an accomplished fact, or if not an international league, an inter- national post-season championship series betw^een the champions of the United States and the champions of Canada. The following is the standing of the clubs : BRITISH COLUMBIA HOCKEY ASSOCIATION. Played. Won. Lost. Played. Won. Lost. Victoria 16 12 4 Vancouver 16 6 10 New Westminster... 16 6 10 NATIONAL HOCKEY ASSOCIATION. ^ Goals ^ Won. Lost. For. Against. Quebec 16 4 112 75 Wanderers 10 10 95 88 Toronto 9 11 84 97 Canadians 9 11 84 81 Ottawa 9 11 87 81 Tecumseh 7 13 59 99 MONTREAL CITY LEAGUE. Qoals ^ Won. Lost. For. Against. Hochelaga* 8 2 .38 17 Champetre* 8 2 28 13 Garnets 6 4 32 23 St. Jacques 4 6 21 32 Stars 2 8 20 34* Shamrocks 2 8 18 38 * In tbe play-off to break the tie. Champetre defeated Hochelaga, 3 — 0, F SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 57 MONTREAL COMMERCIAT Won. Mussens s R. & O 7 Swell Caps H Domiuiou Express 8 Canadian Pacific Raihva.v 1 Canadian Cement 1 MANUFACTURERS' Won. Dominion Bridge 8 Canadian Pacific Railwaj' G Grand Trunk Railway 5 Light, Heat and Power 3 A. C. B 4 Bell Telephone 1 AL LEAGUE. Lost. Drawn. Points. 1 1 17 1 15 3 1 13 4 3 9 7 2 4 9 2 LEAGUE. Lost. Drawn. Points. 1 1 17 14 3 •:> 12 4 3 9 6 8 8 1 3 CORNELIUS FELLOWES. JR., Director St. Nicholas Skating Rink. New York City. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Laws of Hockey and Championship Rules of the American Amateur Hockey League Copyrighted, 1912, by American Amateur Hockey Leafirue. Section i. The game of Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. A Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the event of a goal post or net being broken or displaced, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point, and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play -shall any player who fills this position, lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain 60 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. • a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly m front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly in front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the center and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are supposed to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5 A Hockey stick shall not be more than three inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. /. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/i6 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces, OFFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires, two game timekeepers, and two penalty timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 61 other official positions that may occur during a match ; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree; or when the selected officials are absent at the advertised starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in *heir proper places. He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall mform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retam the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE GAME TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The game timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting t.'me for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. 62 SPALDING'S ATHI^TIC LIBRARY. The game timekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. They shall only tell the expired and unexpired time to the referee. DUTIES OF THE PENALTY TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 13. The penalty timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no penalized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the penalty time- keepers. They shall also keep an accurate account of the time of any player who has been compelled to withdraw from the game and inform the referee when the said player is due again to report. They shall sit midway between the two goals, and shall be on the opposite side of the rink from the game time- keepers. They shall give an accurate report of all penalties imposed to the referee at the close of the match. All players penalized must sit with the penalty timekeepers. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 14. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minutes between the tw^o periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and play shall be resumed at once, and continued until a goal has been scored. Should the tie remain unbroken at the expiration of twenty minutes of extra play, the referee shall declare the game a draw. The referee must start each period on schedule time. TIME TAKExNT OUT. §EC. 15. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by either referee, and shall begin again when the puck is put m play. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 63 SECTION l6 — SUBSTITUTES. Clause A — Substitutes shall be allowed only in the case of an injury. The injured player's ability to continue shall at once be decided by the referee. Should the referee decide that the in- jured player cannot finish the game, the opposing side may either allow a substitute or drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the opposing side decide to allow a substitute and no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing side has allowed a substitute he may appear at any time during the balance of the game. Clause B — Should the referee decide that the injured player would be able to continue within seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing team must drop a man until that time has expired, or until the injured player returns to the game. Should the injured player be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitute If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing side has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a substitute or the player who has been injured. Clause C — Should a player be compelled to leave the game for any reason other than injury, the opposing side must drop a man to equalize the teams. Should the player who has first left the ice be unable to continue at the expiration of seven minutes of actual and not playing time, the opposing side may either continue to drop a man or may allow a substitution. If no substitute is ready, the opposing side must play its full team. Once the opposing team has resumed its full strength, the other aggregation at any time thereafter may either play a sub- stitute or the player who has first withdrawn from the game. Clause D — All substitutes or other players entering or return- ing to the game must first report to the penalty timekeepers and then to the referee. They must obtain the permission of the referee before they resume play. This clause does not refer to players who have been penalized. Clause E — Should it be necessary for the goalkeeper to retire 64 SPALDING'S ATHM:TIC LIBRARY. from the game, play shall stop until the player is once more able to return to the contest. If at the end of seven minutes the goal- keeper is not able to resume play the match must go on with a substitute being allowed in the position. At any time during the seven minutes the team that has called for time may elect to play a substitute until the original goalkeeper is able to resume the contest. Clause F — A player other than the goalkeeper who has been replaced by a substitute cannot return to further participation in the game. Clause G — In exhibition or practice games this rule may be altered by the two captains. WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. 17. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. FACE. Sec. 18. A face shall consist of the referee dropping the puck to the ice between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The puck shall not be considered in play until it has touched the ice. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at tne beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec. 19. Arty player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 65 himself or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is him- self to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 20. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall interfere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lifting the puck. No player shall use profane or abusive language or conduct himself in an unsportsmanlike manner. A player being out of* the play shall not interfere with an opponent. PUCK FOULS. Sec. 21. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck. The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. \ WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 22. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point 66 SPALDIN'5'S ATI^^ETIC LIBRARl. five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec 2^. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. CHAMPIONSHIP RULES. Section i. All games shall be played under the rules adopted by the American Amateur Hockey League. Sec. 2. The playing season shall be from December i to March 21 both days inclusive. Sec. 3. The championship shall be decided bv a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn by one delegate from each club to the annual convention. The club winning the greatest number of matches shall be declared the champion. Sec. 4. All championship matches .shall be played on rinks arranged for by the Executive Committee of the American Ama- teur Hockey League. Sec. 5. The League shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same and to be recognized as the champion of the American Amateur Hockey League. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Any club winning the championship for three years, not necessarily in succession, shall become the permanent owner of the trophy. Sec. 6. Any team making default shall forfeit its right to compete for the championship and be liable to a fine of $100 unless good reasons can be shown to the Executive Committee for defaulting. In case of default by any team all matches which have been scheduled for this team shall be credited as victories to its opponents. This rule shall also be applied in case of expulsion. Sec. 7. In all matches the Governing Committee shall appoint the referee, assistant referee, two game timekeepers, two penalty timekeepers and two goal umpires. Sec. 8. It shall be the duty of the captains of the contesting SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 67 teams to hand to the referee previous to the start of each match the names of his players written on forms supplied by the Sec- retary of the League. The referee shall fill in the date of the match and the names of contesting clubs, substitutes used, if any, the score at the end of the match, with names of other offi- cials, the whole to be duly signed by himself and forwarded immediately to the Secretary of the League. Sec. 9- "A." A player must have been an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for at least six months previous to being eligible to appear in any Amateur Hockey League Championship match and aiso must have been a bona tide member of the club he represents for at least thirty days before he is eligible to compete in any championship game, with the exception that players, who during the preceding season represented any recognized school or college in the United States of America need be an actual resident within fifty miles of the place in which his club is located for only sixty days previous to being eligible to appear in any League championship match. ''B." No player shall compete in any Amateur Hockey League championship match, who, during the then current season has played with another club, school or college in a recognized hockey association championship series without the special permission of the executive committee of the Amateur Hockey League. "C." Any player who represents a club in a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League cannot represent another club in a championship game of the Amateur Hockey League for one full calendar year from his last championship game unless the said club that he formerly represented has withdrawn or has been expelled from the championship series of the Amateur Hockey League or unless he has been released by the said club that he formerly represented. A statement signed by the president and the secretary of the club that the player has left, and filed with the secretary of the Amateur Hockey League, shall be considered an official release. A player who believes that his release is being unjustly withheld may appeal to the Executive Committee of the Amateur Hockey League, The Committee may grant such release after giving due notice to all parties interested. 68 SPALDING'S ATHfETIC LIBRARY. Sec. 10. Any new player who desires to take part in a cham- pionship game of the Amateur Hockey League must first fill out a certificate supplied by the Secretary of the organization. The certificate must state the full name and address of the player. The club he desires to represent; where he is employed. His legal residence for six months prior to the filing of the certificate and the names of the team or teams with whom he has played during the three years prior to the filing of the document. The certificate must be signed by the president and the secretary of the club with whom the candidate desires to play who also must attest to its accuracy. The filing of the signed certificate shall bind the player and the club named in the document for the period of one year, unless he is regularly released by the organi- zrfltion. A player can file only one such certificate with the Secretary of the League. Sec. il The Secretary of each club shall file with the Secre- tary of the American Amateur Hockey League at least thirty days prior to opening of the championship season a list of the players of his club. The Secretary of each club shall also file with the Secretary of the American Amateur Hockey League the names of any additional players immediately upon their being elected to membership. Sec. 12. All matches must be started at 830 p. m., and if for any reason there be any delay in the commencement of a match the club at fault shall pay to the League as a penalty the sum of $10, unless good reason be given for such delay. The referee is to see that this rule is observed and to notify the League within two days should any breach of it occur. Sec. 13. The puck used in all championship matches must be, the official puck of the League. Sec. 14. Goal nets must be approved by the Executive Com- mittee of the League, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Constitution of the American Amateur Hockey League Adopted at the Convention held in New York, November 9, 1899. Revised November 9, 1911, ARTICLE I. The name of this organization shall be 'The American Amateur Hockey League." ARTICLE II. Its object shall be to improve, foster and perpetuate the game of Hockey in the United States, protect it from professionalism, and to promote the cultivation of kindly feeling among the mem- bers of Hockey clubs. ARTICLE III. Section i. The Executive Committee shall be named at the annual convention by each respective club, and shall consist of one representative from each club. The officers shall be a Presi- dent, a Vice-President and a Secretary-Treasurer, who shall be elected from and by the Executive Committee. Every member of the Executive Committee shall be entitled to a vote. All officers and members of the Executive Committee shall hold office until their successors are elected. Sec. 2. Any vacancy occurring in the Executive Committee may be filled at a regular meeting of the said Committee. Sec. 3. Three members of the Executive Committee shall be elected by it to be a Special Committee, which shall be known as the Governing Committee. >:i ARTICLE IV. Section i. The President shall preside at all meetings of the Association and Executive Committee. He shall have a vote upon all questions. He shall call special meetings of the Executive 70 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. Committee or of the League whenever he deems them necessar}', or when requested in writing to do so hy any two ckibs in the Association, who shall specify their reasons for desiring such a meeting. Sec. 2. The Vice-President shall perform the duties of the President in his absence. Sec. 3. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep an accurate record of the proceedings of the League and the Executive Committee, a register of the clubs in the League, and the names of office bearers and the address of the club Secretary. He shall conduct all correspondence of the League and the Executive, keep a record of the decisions of the latter on all points of appeal, protest and complaint. He shall notify all officers and clubs of their election, issue all notices of meetings, keep a correct account of moneys received and disbursed by him and report to the League. He shall bank all funds in trust. Sec. 4. "A." The Executive Committee shall view and decide upon all business submitted to them, and shall generally manage the Association, provided, however, that nothing herein contained shall give the Executive Committee jurisdiction over matters coming within the scope of the Governing Committee, unless same come before the Executive Committee in appeal. Sec. 4. "B." In case of a tie at any meeting of the League or Executive Committee, the presiding officer shall cast an additional vote. Sec. 5. The Governing Committee shall hear all appeals, pro- tests and complaints, .and decide all questions arising during the Championship Season relative to the eligibility of players ; dis- putes between contesting clubs or teams; appeals against rulings of match officers or otherwise ; and generally take full charge, control and management of the championship games and all club members of this League. Sec. 6. It shall be the duty of the Governing Committee to make inquiry regarding any player whose amateur status or whose method or manner of playing is questioned and all charges shall be entered with the chairman of the committee, who shall provide for an investigation by a member or members of the St^ALDlKG'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 7i- Committee. Pending investigation, the player against whom charges are brought may be suspended. Suspicious circumstances, public or private criticism, w^hich arc in the judgment of any member of the Executive Committee sufficient to make the status or the rights of any player a matter of reasonable doubt, shall be the basis of investigation in absence of forrhal charges. The Governing Committee shall immediately communicate with the player under suspicion, either in person or by registered letter, lay all charges before him or set forth the circumstances which led to the reasonable doubt as to the player's rights to participate in championship games of the Amateur Hockey League and call for an answer to the charges or a satisfactory explanation of the circumstances which gave rise to the doubt or the questionable incident. If the athlete cannot satisfactorily prove his innocence, the committee may inflict such punishment as in its judgment shall seem fitting Any player who shall refuse to testify before the committee or to answer any question that the committee shall rule to be proper, shall be liable to suspension or such discipline as the committee may determine until he has purged himself of such failure or refusal. Such investigation also may be made regarding any player who is suspected of wilfully and persist- ently breaking any or all of the laws of hockey, the championship rules or the constitution of the Amateur Hockey League. ARTICLE V. Section i. The League shall hold its annual convention on the second Thursday in November, in the City of New York. Sec. 2. A quorum at any Executive or League meeting shall consist of not less than three-quarters of the clubs in the league. Sec. 3. Clubs shall be notified of time and place of annual meeting at least two weeks previously. Sec. 4. Each club in the Association shall be entitled to two delegates, and each delegate shall have one vote. Each dele- gate must be in good standing with the club he represents Sec. 5. Xo delegate shall be admitted to the convention unless he shall have filed with the Secretary a certificate of his appoint- 1^ SPALDING'S ATHLEO^IC LlBRAllY. ment signed by the President and Secretary of the club he repre- sents. Sec. 6. Order of business for meetings. 1. Calhng of the roll. 2. Reading of the minutes of the preceding meeting. (Annual mmutes at annual meeting. Executive mmutes at executive meet- ing.) 3. Treasurer's Report. 4. Election of Committees, ofificers. 5. New business. 6 Election of clubs to membership. 7. Report of Committees. 8, Unfinished business. ARTICLE VI. Section i. The players representing clubs in this League must be Amateurs. DEFINITION OF AN AMATEUR. Sec. 2. An Amateur is one who has never competed for a money prize or staked bet, or with or against a professional for any prize, or who has ever taught, pursued or assisted in the practice of athletic exercise as a means of obtaining a livelihood, or who has never entered any competition under a name other than his own. Sec. 3, The Amateur rule of the A. A. U. is adopted by this League and embodied in this Constitution, Sec. 4. No club shall be admitted to membership in this League unless it adopts in its Constitution the words or senti- ments of this Article. ARTICLE VII. Section i. The annual fee for each club in the League shall be $10, payable when application for membership in the League is made and at each annual meeting thereafter. Sec. 2. Any club whose fee shall remain unpaid later than January ist in any year shall not be entitled to representation, or to vote at any meeting, nor be represented by any team in the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 73 Championship Series, and shall be considered to have forfeited all right to membership in this League. ARTICLE VIIL Section i. Any Hockey Club desiring to join this League shall send to the Secretary an application for membership not later than November ist; also copies of its Constitution and By-Laws sufficient in number to furnish one to each club in the League and one additional for the Secretary-Treasurer of the League, a list of its officers and names of members together with mem- bership fee as prescribed in Article VIL Sec. 2. The League shall have the privilege of limiting the number of clubs in the League. ARTICLE IX. Section i. Any club wishing to make an appeal, protest or complaint to the Governing Committee must within three days from the time at which the cause of complaint, appeal or protest occurred, submit to the Governing Committee, in wntmg (in duplicate), a full and detailed account of the matter in appeal, protest or complaint, signed by the President and Secretary of the Complainant Club. All such appeals, protests or complamts shall be accompanied by the sworn statements of all witnesses in sup- port thereof. Such complaint shall be mailed, postage prepaid, by registered letter to the Chairman of Governing Committee, who shall within one day of the receipt of same mail one copy thereof m like manner to the Secretary of the Club complained against. Within three days of the receipt of any such appeal, protest or complaint the answer of the responding club must be in the hands of the Chairman of the Governing Committee, duly signed by the President and Secretary of such club, accompanied also by the sworn statement of all witnesses to be used in reply to such appeal, protest or complaint. A failure to make appeal, protest or complaint, or to answer as hereinbefore provided, shall finally and absolutely debar the defaulting club of a hearing. Sec. 2. The Governing Committee shall at once meet and con- sider the appeal, protest or complaint, and within three days after 74 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. receipt of reply render its decision m the premises, and forth- with notify both- clubs by registered letter as above provided. Such decision shall in all cases be final and without appeal, except as hereinafter provided. Sec, 3. Any club wishing to appeal from fhe decision of the Governing Committee may, withm three days after receipt of decision, as provided in Section ii of this Article, take appeal to the Executive Committee in the following manner • The club so desiring to appeal shall at the same time furnish the Secretary of the Association with two copies of its appeal, protest or complaint (with sworn statements of its witnesses), signed by the President and Secretary of such club, and shall deposit with him the sum of $25. Upon these conditions being complied with, the Secretary of the Association shall immediately forward one copy to the club complained against, which shall within three days make reply to such appeal, protest or complaint and submit sworn statements of its witnesses. The Secretary of the Association shall then call a meeting of the Executive to be held within three days, stat- ing the object of such meeting. Both clubs shall submit their briefs of evidence at this meet- ing, and the decision of the Executive on a two-thirds vote of those present on the hearing of the appeal, protest or complaint shall be filed. If the decision be in favor of the complaining club, the deposit of $25 shall forthwith be returned, but if the decision be adverse, the deposit shall be forfeited to the League Sec. 4. The Executive, on motion may direct both clubs to appear with their witi>esses for examination orally by the Execu- tive on any such appeal. ARTICLE X. Section i. The League may suspend or expel any player or any club for notorious or continued foul play or unfair conduct, or for any persistent infringement of the laws of the game or the rules of the League. Sec. 2. Any player or any club so suspended may be read- mitted by making an ample official apology, in writing, to the SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 75 Executive Committee and promising future compliance with the Constitution and By-Laws of the League. ARTICLE XL Section i. No amendment or alteration shall be made in any part of the Constitution, except at the Annual Convention of the League and by a three-fourths vote of the members present. Notice of and full particulars of any proposed alterations or amendment must be made to the Secretary of the League, in writing, and by him communicated to the clubs in its membership, in writing, at least two weeks before it can be voted upon. When notice of alteration or amendment has been given, as above, both the notice and amendment thereto may be voted upon at the Annual Convention. 76 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. OFFICIAL RULES GOVERNING PLAY FOR THE STANLEY CUP The cup was given, as Lord Stanley said in his letter, "To be held by the champion hockey team of the Dominion." The con- ditions he imposed were : 1. The winners to give bond for the return of the cup in good order when required by the trustees for the purpose of being handed over to any other team who may in turn win. 2. Each winning team to have at their own charge engraved on a silver ring fitted on the cup for the purpose the names of the team and the year won. 3. The cup shall remain a challenge cup, and will not become the property of any team, even if won more than once. 4. In case of any doubt as to the title of any club to claim the position of champions, the cup shall be held or awarded by the trustees as they may think right, their decision being absolute. 5. Should either trustee resign or otherwise drop out, the remaining trustee shall nominate a substitute. In dealing with challenges and matches since 1893, the trustees have observed the following principles : 1. So far as the A. H. A. of C. is concerned, the cup goe3 'vith the championship each year without the necessity of any special or extra contest. Similarly in any other association. 2. Challengers from outside the A, H. A. of C. are recognized by the trustees only from champion clubs of senior provincial associations and in order received. 3. When a challenge is accepted the trustees desire the two competing clubs to arrange by mutual agreement all terms of the contest themselves, such as a choice of date, of rink, division of the gate money, selection of officials, etc. The trustees do not wish to interfere in any way, shape or form if it can be avoided. 4. Where competing clubs fail to agree, the trustees have observed and will continue to observe as far as practicable the following principles : SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 77 (a) The cup is to be awarded by the result of one tiiatch or of best two out of three, as seems fairest as regards other fix- tures. The trustees would be willing, however, if desired, to allow the contest to be decided by a majority of goals scored in two matches only (instead of the best two matches in three). (b) Contest to take place on ice in the home city, the date and choice of rink to be made or approved by the trustees. (c) The net gate money given by the rink to be equally divided between the competing teams. (d) If the clubs fail to agree on a referee, the trustees to appoint one from outside the competing cities, the two clubs to share the expenses equally. (e) If the clubs fail to agree on other officials, the trustees to authorize the referee to appoint them, the expenses, if any, to be shared equally by the competing clubs. (f) No second challenge recognized in one season from the same hockey association. 7ft SPALDIKG'S ATHLETIC LlfiRARt ONTARIO H. A. RULES 1. The game is played on ice by teams of seven on each side, with a puck made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all .through and three inches in diameter. STICKS. 2. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at any part, and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. They shall consist entirely of wood, with tape binding per- missible. GOAL. 3. A goal is placed in the middle of each goal line, composed of official goal nets supported by two upright posts, four feet in neight, placed six feet apart, and at least five feet from the end of the ice. The goal posts shall be firmly fixed. In the event of a goal post or net being displaced or broken, the referee shall blow his whistle, and the game shall not proceed until the post or net is replaced. It shall be the duty of the referee before each match to measure the goals. MATCH. 4. Each side shall have a captain (a member of his team), who, before the match, shall toss for choice of goals. 5. Each side shall play an equal time from each end, a ten minutes' rest being allowed at half time. The duration of cham- pionship matches shall be one hour, exclusive of stoppages. The team scoring the greater number of goals in that time shall be de- clared the winner of the match, subject to the qualifications con- tained in Rules of Competition, No. 15. If at the end of that time the game is a draw, ends shall be changed and the match continued for ten minutes, each side playing five minutes from each end with a rest of five minutes between such five minute ends, and if neither side has then scored a majority of goals, similar periods of ten minutes shall be played in the same way until one side shall have scored a majority of goals. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 79 TIME-KEEPERS. 6. Two time-keepers shall be appointed, one by each captain, before the commencement of the match, whose duty it shall be to keep an accurate account of the time of each game, deducting time for stoppages in the actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance in their time, and the matter shall be at once decided by him. The referee also shall appoint a time-keeper, who shall keep the time of penalized players, and shall direct them to enter the game. The time-keepers shall be under the control of the referee. A gong shall be kept for their use. REFEREE. 7. There shall be only one referee for a match, and in no case shall he belong to either of the competing clubs, and he may be an amateur or a professional. He is to enforce the rules; ad- judicate upon disputes or cases unprovided for by rule; appoint or remove goal umpires ; control the time-keepers ; keep the score, announcing each goal as scored ; and at the conclusion of the match declare the result. The puck shall be considered in play until the referee stops the game, which he may do at any time, and which he must do at once when any irregularity of play occurs, by sounding a whistle. His decision shall be final. SCORE. 8. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed be- tween the goal posts from in front and below the tops of the posts. GOAL UMPIRES. 9. There shall be one umpire at each goal ; they shall inform the referee when th^^ puck has been put into the goal from the front. FACE. 10. The game shall be started and renewed by the referee blowing his whistle or calling "Play" after dropping the puck in the centre of the ice between the sticks of two players, one from 8n St>ALt)lKG'S AtfiLETIC LlfaftAflir, 'each team, who are to face it. After a goal has been scored the ■puck shall be faced in like manner in the centre of the ice. OFF-SIDE. 11. A player shall always be on his side of the. puck. A player is off-side when he is in front of the puck, or when the puck has been hit, touched or is being run with, by any of his own side behind him (i. e., between himself and the end of the rink near which his goal is placed). A player being off-side is put on-side when the puck has been hit by, or has touched the dress or person of any plaj^er of the opposite side, or when one of his own side has run in front of him, either with the puck or having played it when behind him. If a player when off-side plays the puck, or annoys or obstructs an opponent, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the off-side play occurred. A player on the defending side shall not be off-side wnen he takes a pass from or plays the puck as it bounds off his goal-keeper within n space of three feet out from goal and extending to the side of the rink. KNOCKING-ON. 12. The puck may be stopped with the hand but not carried or held or knocked on by any part of the body. CHARGING, TRIPPING, ETC. 13. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking, cross-checking, or push- ing shall not be allowed. And the referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player who, in the opinion of the referee, has deliberately offended against the above rule. If a player makes any unfair or rough play, or dicpufes any de- cision of the referee or uses any foul or abusirfe language, the referee ma}'' rule him off for the remainder of the g'ame or for such time as he may deem expedient, and no suDstitute shall be allowed. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 81 WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. 14. When the puck goes off the ice behind the goal line it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice, and there faced. When the puck goes off the ice at the side, it shall be simi- larly faced three yards from the side. GOAL-KEEPER. 15. The goal-keeper must not during play, lie, sit or kneel upon the ice; he may stop the puck with his hands, but shall not throw or hold it. He may wear pads, but must not wear a garment such as would give him undue assistance in keeping goal. The referee must rule off the ice, for any time in his discretion, a player, who, in the opinion of the referee, has offended against this rule. CHANGE OF PLAYERS. 16. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced. Should any player be injured during a match, break his skate, or from any other accident be compelled to leave the ice, the opposite side shall immediately drop a man to equalize the teams and the match proceed, without such players until such time as the player so compelled to leave the ice is ready to return. In event of any dispute, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee. STOPPAGES. 17. Should any match be stopped by the referee by reason of any infringement of an}^ of the rules or because of an accident or change of players, the puck shall be faced again at the spot where it was last played before such infringement, accident ol change of players shall have occurred. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, LAWS ACROSS BORDER CONDITIONS WHICH GOVERN PLAY OF THE EASTERN CANADA LEAGUE. Section i. A team shall be compos'^^d of seven players who shall be bona fide members of the clubs they represent. No player shall be allowed to play on more than one team in the same series during a season, except in a case of bona fide change of residence from one city to another at least fifty miles apart. Sec, 2. The game shall be commenced and renewed by a face in the center of the rink. DEFINITION OF A FACE. The puck shall be faced by being placed between the sticks of two opponents, and the referee then calling "play." The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 3. Two half-hours, with an intermission of ten minutes between, will be the time allowed for matches, but no stops of more than fifteen minutes will be allowed. A match will be de- cided by the team winning the greatest number of games dur- ing that time. In case of a tie after playing the specified two half-hours, play will continue until one side secures a game, unless otherwise agreed upon between the captains before the match. Goals shall be changed after each half-hour. Sec. 4. No change of players shall be made after a match has commenced, except for reasons of accidents or injury during the game. Sec 5. In the event of a player being injured or compelled to leave the ice during a match, he may retire from the game for the period of ten minutes playing time, but play must be con- tinued immediately without the teams leaving the ice, the op- posing team dropping a player to equalize. If at the expiration I 8t*ALt>iNG'S ATHLETIC LIBHaRY. 8g oi ten minutes the injured player is unable to resume his position on the ice, his captain may put on a substitute, providing the injury occurred during the first half of the match. If, however, the player was injured during the second half, the opposing captain shall have the option of dropping a man for the balance of the playing time or allowing the injured player's side to put on a substitute. The man dropped to equalize shall return to the ice when the injured player does or when substitute is put on. In the event of a dispute between the captains as to the injured player's fitness to continue the game, the matter shall at once be decided by the referee, and his decision shall be final. An injured player may not resume play after his place has been filled by a substitute, without the consent of the opposing team's captain. Sec. 6. Should the game be temporarily stopped by the in- fringement of any of the rules, the captain of the opposite team may claim that the puck be taken back and a face take place where it was last played from before such infringement occurred. Sec. 7. When a player hits the puck, anyone of the same side, who at such moment of hitting is nearer the opponent's goal line is out of play, and may not touch the puck himself or in any way whatever prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been played. A player should always be on his own side of the puck. In the event of the puck rebounding off the goal keeper's body, players of his team touching the puck are to be considered on side. Sec. 8. The puck may be ^topped but not carried or knocked on by any part of the body, nor shall any player close his hand on, or carry the puck to the ice in his hand. No player shall raise his stick above the shoulder, except in lifting the puck. Charging from behind, tripping, collaring, kicking or shinning shall not be allowed, and for any infringement of these rules, the referee or his assistant may rule the offending player off the ice for that match, or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit, but it shall not be necessary to stop the game to en- force this rule. Sec. 9. "V^'.ien the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind 84 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LICtlAftt. • . the goals it shall be taken by the referee to five yards at rigri^ angles from the goal line and there faced. When the puck goes off the ice at the sides it shall be taken by the referee to five yards at right angles from the bomidary line and there faced. Sec. 10. The goal keeper must not during play, lie, kneel or sit upon the ice, but m.ust maintain a standing position. Sec. II. Goal shall be scored when the puck shall have passed between the goal posts from in front below an imaginary line across the top of posts. Sec. 12. Hockey sticks shall not be more than three inches wide at any part. Sec. 13. The puck must be made of vulcanized rubber, one inch thick all through and three inches in diameter. The Spalding hockey puck, the official puck of the League, must be used in all matches. The home club to furnish the referee with a new puck previous to the match. Sec. 14. The captains of the competing teams shall agree upon two timekeepers, one penalty timekeeper, two umpires (one to be stationed behind each goal, which position shall not be changed during a match). In the event of the captains failing to agree on umpires and timekeepers, the referee shall appoint them. Sec. 15. All disputes during the match shall be decided by the referee, and he shall have full control of all players and of- cials from the commencement to finish of matches, inclusive of stops, and his decision shall be final. Sec. 16. All questions as to games shall be settled by the umpires, and their decision shall be final. Sec. 17. In the event of any dispute as to the decision of an umpire or timekeeper the referee shall have power to remove and replace him. Sec. 18. Any player guilty oif using profane or abusive lan- guage to any officials or other players shall be liable to be ruled off by the referee or his assistant for the match or for such portion of actual playing time as he may see fit. * Sec. 19. The referee shall, previous to the commencement of the match for which he has been duly appointed or agreed upon, obtain from the captains of each of the competing clubs a full •! SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 85 list of the players of their respective teams, and, if during the match a substitute is used by either chib, the captain of the club using such substitute shall give to the referee the name of such substitute player, and same will be inclined in the list of names of said team. The referee shall, before starting a match, see that the neces- sary penalty timekeeper, timekeepers and umpires have been ap- pointed and are in their respective places. In the event of the competing clubs failing to agree upon umpires and timekeepers the referee shall appoint same. The referee shall have full con- trol of all officials and players during the match (including stops), he shall face the puck at the commencement of each half and at such other times as may be necessary, he shall also call off-sides or rule offending players off for such period of playing lime as he may see fit, and perform such other duties as may be provided for hereinafter or in the laws of hockey or championship rules. The referee shall order the teams on the ice at the advertised time, and if for any reason there be more than fifteen minutes delay in the commencement of the match, the referee shall state in his report to the Secretary .of the Association the cause of the delay, and name the club or clubs if they be at fault. It will be the referee's duty to record the time of the starting and finish- ing of the match, as well as the games scored, mailing to the Secretary of the Association, within three days of date of match, on the forms provided for the purpose, a report of the match in detail, including the names of players penalized, together with the number and length of penalties imposed (this informa- tion to be obtained from the penalty timekeeper, who shall also keep for the referee a record of the games scored, and, if pos- sible, who by and the time). Should the assistant appointed or agreed upon be made to act at the last minute, or through sickness or accident be un- able to finish the match, the referee shall have power to appoint another in his stead, if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captains of one of the competing teams. Sec. 20. The assistant xeferee will during the period of a 86 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. match be under the control of the referee; he shall, however, have full power to stop the game should an ofifside or foul occur which has escaped the notice of the referee. He shall also have power to rule off for such time as he may see fit any player committing a foul. He shall also perform such other duties as may be assigned to him by the referee from time to time. If owing to illness or accident, the referee is unable to continue to officiate, the assistant shall perform such duties as devolve upon the referee during the balance of the match, selecting an as- sistant if he deems it necessary or if requested to do so by the captain of one of the competing teams. Sec. 21. The penalty timekeeper shall keep a complete record of the penalties imposed by the referee or his assistant, and shall have control of all players while serving the time of their penal- ties, and any player ruled off shall not return to the ice until the playing time for which he was penalized has expired and then only by permission of the penalty timekeeper. A record of the games scored, who scored by and the time of each shall be recorded by the penalty timekeeper, and this, to- gether with a record of the penalties imposed, shall be handec?! the referee at the close of the match. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 87 EASTERN CANADA RULES Section i. The season shall he from the first of January to the tenth of March, both days inclusive. Sec, 2. The championship shall be decided by a series of games, a schedule of which shall be drawn up by one delegate from each club at the annual convention. The club winning the most matches shall be declared champions. Sec. 3. Unless President is notified jointly by the competing clubs at least four clear days before a match, that a referee and assistant have been agreed upon and have consented to act, the appointments shall be made at a meeting of a committee com- posed of one delegate from each club, to be called three days previous to the date set for each game. In the event of a tie, the President or his representative to have casting vote. Sec. 4. All championship matches shall be played in rinks arranged for by the home club, subject to the approval of the Association. Rink must be at least one hundred and seventy-five feet long by sixty-five feet in width. Goals shall be six feet wide and four feet high, and provided with goal nets, such as approved by the Association. The goals shall be placed at least ten feet from the edge of the ice. Sec. 5. The home club shall furnish the referee with a new puck for each match. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the official puck of the league, must be used in all matches. Sec. 6. All matches shall be started at 8.30 P. M., unless other- wise agreed upon by the competing clubs, and if, for any reason, there be more than fifteen minutes' delay in the commencement of a match, the club at fault shall, unless good reasons be given to the President for the delay, pay to the Association as a pen- alty the sum of twenty-five dollars. The referee shall state in his report to the Secretary of the Association if more than fifteen minutes' delay occurred in the commencement of the 88 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. match, giving cause of such delay and naming the club at fault. Upon receipt of this information the President shall decide whether or not the club be fined. Sec, 7. Visiting clubs shall be allowed traveling expenses (by the home club) as follows : Between Montreal and Ottawa, eighty-five dollars ; between Montreal and Quebec, one hundred dollars ; between Ottawa and Quebec, one hundred and twenty- five dollars. Sec. 8. — The Association shall offer a championship trophy, the winning club to hold same, and be recognized as champions. The trophy shall be delivered to the winning club within seven days after the close of the season. Sec. 9. — Any club winning the championship three times shall become absolute owners of the trophy. Sec. 10. Any team making default shall forfeit the right to compete for the championship for that season, no matches played with defaulting clubs shall count. Unless a written notice signed by the President and Secretary of the club be sent to the Secre- taries of the opposing team and Association, five days previous to the match, signifying the club's intention to default, the defaulting club shall pay to the opposing team within thirty days a fine of one hundred dollars. §pALDtNG*§ ATHLETIC LmfeARt. Constitution of the Intercollegiate Hockey League ARTICLE I. The title of this organ-ization shall be "The Intercollegiate Hockey League.'' ARTICLE II. The object of the organization shall be to govern the playing of the game of ice hockey among its members, to provide rules therefor, and to arrange annually a series of games for the cham- pionship of the League. ARTICLE III. The League shall con«sist of' ice hockey teams representing Columbia University, Dartmouth College, Harvard University, Princeton University, Yale University, and such others as may be admitted at any annual meeting by a majority vote. (Cornell University admitted November 8, 1909.) ARTICLE IV. (a) The annual meeting shall be held in New York City dur- ing the month of October of each year on a day to be fixed by the Advisory Committee, hereinafter provided for, a majority of the members constituting a quorum. (b) Special meetings may be called by the Advisory Committee whenever in their judgment one is necessary and a special meet- ing must be called by the Secretary upon the written request of any three members of the League. (c) At all meetings each member shall have one vote but may be represented by three delegates. ARTICLE V. (a) At the annual meeting, or thereafter, each member shall be entitled to designate a representative, preferably a graduate. 90 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LJBRARt. to serve on an Advisory Comrftittee, until the following annual meeting. Should the representative so designate fail or cease to serve, another may be designated to take his place. (b) The Advisory Committee shall interpret the playing rules, arrange for playing off any tie in the League Championship and shall decide all questions of dispute which may arise among the members of the League and all other points not covered by the Constitution; it shall generally do all such things as it may be requested to do by the League. ARTICLE VL (a) Shortly after the annual meeting, the members of the Advisory Committee shall meet and elect from their own num- ber a Chairman, a Vice-Chairman and a Secretary-Treasurer. Vacancies shall be filled as they may occur. (b) The Chairman, or in his absence the Vice-Chairman, shall preside at all meetings of the League and of the Advisory Com- mittee. The Secretary-Treasurer shall keep a record of all meetings of the League and Advisory Committee, shall notify members of the annual and special meetings and shall keep an account of the funds of the League, reporting whenever called upon to do so. ARTICLE VIL Annual dues shall be fixed by the Advisory Committee but shall not exceed Ten dollars a year. ARTICLE VIII. Additions and amendments to this Constitution may be made at any annual meeting by a majority vote. SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY, 91 Laws of Hockey of the Intercollegiate Hockey League (Adopted October 30, 1909.) Section i. The game of Intercollegiate Hockey shall be played on ice by two teams, the players of which shall all be on skates. Its object shall be the lawful scoring of goals. The team scoring the greater number of goals during the playing period shall be declared the winner. RINK. Sec. 2. The Hockey rink shall be at least 112 by 58 feet. The imaginary lines at the two ends of the rink shall be termed the goal lines. The two sides of the rink shall be known as the side lines. GOALS. Sec. 3. A goal shall be placed midway on each goal line, and shall consist of a goal net supported by two upright posts 4 feet in height, placed 6 feet apart, and at least 10 and not more than 15 feet from the edge of the ice. The goal posts must be firmly fixed to the ice. Note. — In the eveni of a goal post or net being broken or dis- placed, the referee shall at once stop the game and not allow play to be resumed until after the damage is repaired. POSITIONS. Sec. 4. There shall not be more than seven players on a Hockey team. These players shall fill the position of goal, point, cover point and forwards, respectively. The goal position shall be the one that is directly in front of the goal. At no period during the play shall any player who fills this position lie, kneel, or sit upon the ice. He must also always maintain a standing position. The point position is the one that is directly in front of the goal position. The cover point position is the one directly 92 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. ill front of the point position. The four forward positions shall be known as the left wing, the right wing, the centre and the rover, respectively. The wing positions shall be at the two ends of the forward line. The center position is the one midway on the forward line, and it shall be the duty of the player who fills this position to face the puck. The rover position is between the cover point and the center positions. Note. — It is to be understood that the positions herein named are the ones that the players are intended to fill when the teams face off in the center of the ice. STICKS. Sec. 5. A Hockey stick shall not be more than thre^ inches wide at any part and not more than thirteen inches long at the blade. It shall be made entirely of wood. Tape binding is per- missible, however. Each player shall carry a Hockey stick in his hand, and shall be considered out of the play the moment he violates this rule. SKATES. Sec. 6. No player shall wear skates that are pointed or sharp- ened in such a manner as to be unnecessarily dangerous to other players. The referee shall be the judge, and shall refuse to allow a player to use such skates. PUCK. Sec. 7. A puck shall be made of vulcanized rubber one inch thick throughout. It shall be three inches in diameter, and shall weigh at least 7 6/16 and not more than 7 9/16 ounces. OFFICIALS. Sec. 8. There shall be a referee, an assistant referee, two goal umpires and two timekeepers for each match. Should a referee be unable to continue to officiate, his assistant shall become the referee. The referee shall fill all vacancies in other official positions that may occur during a match; or when the competing teams have been unable to agree ; or when the selected SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 93 officials are absent at the agreed starting hour. In the event of a dispute over the decision of an umpire, the referee may remove and replace the official. DUTIES OF THE REFEREE. Sec. 9. The referee, before starting a match, shall see that the other officials are in their proper places. He shall see that the ice is in condition for play and that the goals comply with the rules. He shall order the puck faced at the commencement of the game and at such other times as may be necessary. He shall have full control over the puck during the match. He shall call offside plays. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing time that he may see fit any player who violates the rules. The referee shall, furthermore, perform all other duties that may be compulsory. He shall begin and suspend play by means of a whistle. DUTIES OF THE ASSISTANT REFEREE. Sec. 10. The assistant referee shall see that no player violates Section 19 of the Laws. He shall have the power to rule off for any period of the actual playing timie that he may see fit any player who violates the said section. The assistant referee shall become the referee should the latter be unable to continue to officiate. DUTIES OF THE UMPIRES. Sec. II. An umpire shall be stationed behind each goal. He shall inform the referee whenever the puck has passed between the goal posts from the front. He shall have no jurisdiction over the awarding of a goal. He shall stand upon the ice, and shall retain the same goal throughout the entire game. DUTIES OF THE TIMEKEEPERS. Sec. 12. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of the time of the match, deducting time for stoppages in actual play. They shall immediately report to the referee any variance 94 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. in time, and the referee shall decide the matter. The timekeepers shall keep an accurate account of penalties imposed, and no pen- alized player shall return to the ice without the permission of the timekeepers. The timiekeepers shall be notified by the referee when a goal is scored, and shall keep an accurate record of the tallies. The final score shall be given by them to the referee at the close of the match. They shall, at half time, notify the contesting teams when five and when eight minutes have expired. They shall, at half time notify the referee when ten minutes have expired. LENGTH OF GAME. Sec. 13. There shall be two halves of twenty minutes each, with an intermission of ten minues between the two periods of play. At the end of the forty minutes' play, should the score be tied, the teams shall change goals, and after an intermission of five minutes play shall be resumed for a period of ten minutes. Should the score be tied at the end of this period, play shall be resumed after an intermission of five minutes and continued until a goal has been scored. The captains of the contesting teams with the consent of the referee, after the regular periods and the first extra period have been played, may agree on another method of playing off a tie score, but in the absence of such agreement and consent, the tie must be played off in accordance with the provisions of this Law. TIME TAKEN OUT. Sec. 14. Time shall be taken out whenever the game is sus- pended by the referees, and shall begin again when the puck is put in play. No delay of more than five minutes shall be allowed. SUBSTITUTES. Sec. 15. Substitutes shall be allowed at any time during a game, but a player who has been replaced by 3 substitute shall not be al^wed to re-enter the game, SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 95 WHAT CONSTITUTES A GOAL. Sec. i6. A goal shall be scored when the puck shall have law- fully passed between the goal posts. No goal shall be allowed that is the direct and immediate result of loafing off side, an offside play, a kick or a throw by the hand. The referee shall decide upon these points, and may render his decision even after the puck has passed between the goal posts. A line not more than one-half an inch wide shall be drawn on the ice from the center of one goal post to the center of the other. To effect a score the puck must have completely passed this line. FACE. Sec. 17. A face is the placing by the referee of the puck upon the ice on its largest surface between the sticks of two players, one from each team. The referee shall then order the play to begin. Should a player repeatedly refuse to lawfully face the puck he shall be penalized by the referee. A face shall take place in the center of the ice at the beginning of each period and after the scoring of each goal. The referee may also order a face at any time and place he deems necessary. A face shall be in order whenever play is resumed. OFFSIDE PLAY. Sec 18. Any player nearer to his opponent's goal line than is an imaginary line running through the center of the puck and parallel with the two goal lines is offside. A player offside shall be considered out of the play, and may not touch the puck himi- self or in any manner prevent any other player from doing so, until the puck has been touched by an opponent in any way whatsoever, or until it has been carried nearer than he is himself to his opponent's goal line. If a player violates this rule, the puck shall be faced where it was last played before the offside play occurred. In the event of the puck rebounding off the body of the player in the goalkeeper's position, the other players of his team shall be considered on side. 96 SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. FOUL PLAYING. Sec. 19. There shall be no unnecessary roughness. No player shall check another from behind. No player shall throw his stick. No player shall trip, hold with his hand, body or stick, kick, push or cross-check an opponent. No player shall inter- fere in any way with an opponent who is not playing the puck. No player shall raise his stick above his shoulder, except in lift- ing the puck. A player being out of the play shall not interfere with an opponent. ^^^^ ^^^^g Sec. 20. A player may stop the puck with any part of his stick or body. He may not, however, hold, bat, throw, kick or carry the puck with his skate or any part of his body. He may not close his hand upon the puck The player in the goal position may catch the puck, but if he does he must at once drop the puck to the ice at his own feet. WHEN THE PUCK LEAVES THE ICE. Sec. 21. When the puck goes off the ice or a foul occurs behind the goal line, it shall be brought out by the referee to a point five yards in front of the goal line, on a line at right angles thereto, from the point at which it left the ice or where the foul occurred, and there faced. In the aforementioned cases the puck shall always be faced at least five yards to the left or the right of the nearer goal post. When the puck goes off the ice at the side lines it shall be taken by the referee to a point five yards out at right angles with the nearer side line and there faced. PENALTIES. Sec. 22. In awarding a penalty the referee or his assistant shall use discretion in order that his ruling does not work against the better interests of the non-offending team. POWERS OF CAPTAINS. Sec. 23. The captains of the opposing teams shall have the power to agree upon any matter not covered in the aforesaid laws. HOCKEY AT MUREEN, SWITZERLAND. suBsSTHE $RftLDING(iDTRADE-MARK GUARANl QUAU !©del Inloclliey Sticfiis Mr. Howard is considered to be the most sue cessful ice hockey coach in either the United States or Canada. He has furnished his spe cial model sticks during the past twenty years to players whose teams have won both amateur and professional cham- pionships year after year. Hereafter all genuine "Tom Howard" ice hockpy sticks will be supplied by A. G. Spalding & Bros Supplied for either right or left handed players. Men- tion which model required and whether right or left handed when ordering. Tom Hov The "Tom Howard " Model Ice hockey sticks are what is known as"flat lying"sticksand are adapted for general all around play. Bpth models are shaped so that there is more wood at the h than in ordinary sticks, and blades are slightly bevel for proper shooting of the puck and to give corri( balance. Fairly light in weight and made with pfoi* degree of stiffness, the elm being specially selected bylj f^ Howard. Balance is a special feature in these sticks. " Tom Howard " Model A. Long handle, long blade. Blar widerthan on Model B. For p'layerswho like a big stick.. "Tom Howard" Model B. Same general lines as Model A.J,, horterin handle and bladeand smaller model throughout. V SpaMimig Players' A^tlograp]; Hloclkey jpe ally selected Rock Elm. Exact duplicates in shaf ght, balance and every other particular of the actual stii CSA'S /f* [V^ d^n» vMhtvi vt/Ou. Far Canadian piiea ti /filial Canadian Calalogm, ptri NO 8STITUTE GUARANTEES QUALITY ^7'aMiiig' CtiiampioiisMp HocSley Sticks .!ad>f the ■ne$ lected id ncfcn. Ex (jlyused ;d Qy LU^IU^IL^N, ti-lyused (CTDZZlC^E Regular Forward No Forward No rJ'-aLJUji^j^feS lam. jf the No. Defence holders of the Stanley Cup; by the Victorias, Winnipeg, Champions (Amateurs) Allen Ind the Canadian Hockey Club of Montreal, and many other well known teams. These J will not fray at the bottom where they come in .contact with the ice and will retain Ihape under all conditions. The very important matter of weight and balance has been carefully lered and the Spalding Sticks are much lighter, yet stronger, than any others on the market No. 0. Championship Stick, Regular Forward Model. No. 0. Championship Stick, Long Blade. Forward Model. No. 0. Championship Stick, Defence Model. Sticks 1. On lines of o iber. Very popular as 2. Spalding "Practice" Hockey Stick. Regulation size and made of good quality timber. A very serviceable stick. E^., 25c. ling ockey Pmclis No. 13. The Spalding "Official" Trade-Mark Puck has been adopted as the official puck of "The Canadian Amateur Hockey League," composed of the following world-famed teams: Montreal, Shamrock, Quebec, Victoria and Westmount Each, 50c. No. 15. The Spalding "Practice" Puck is regulation size, and really better than the so-called official pucks turned out by other manufacturers. Each, 25c. Extract from Official Rules of the Canadian Amateur Hockey League : Sec. 13. The Spalding Hockey Puck, the Official Puck of the League, must be used in all match games. ; See the Spalding Trade-Mark on Puck itself before putting into play. Spalding Ice Mocllley Qoals >. A. Strong steel frame, with heavy white twine netting. Suitable for either outdoor or indoor use; quickly removable, leaving no holes in ice. PROMPT AHENTIOX GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS AOOBESSED TO US A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOfl COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE THE SPALDING(6))tRADE MARK ^^q^^; GUARANTF QUALITY No. AF Spaldiiig Leg Guards for Goal and Defense No. 6G. Special leather covered leg guard for goal keepers. Extends from the instep to and above the thigh, is hinged at the knee, affording perfectly free action and gives ample protection to the whole leg. Well padded with reeds, which are covered with soft pads to allow the puck to fall to the ice at the feet of the goal tender, thus en- abling him to send it out of danger. Pair, $6.00 No. 5G. Canvas Leg Guard for goal keepers. Specially padded Per pair, $3.50 Spalding Shin Guards for Forward Players No. AF. Aluminum molded shin guard, with spe- cial'felt padding covering the knee, and extra felt piece at bottom. Gives most thorough protection. Pair, $5.00 No. 6X. Fiber molded shin guard, with special felt padding extending over knee and extra felt piece at bottom to ward off shin. Per pair, $2.50 No. 7. Made of molded fiber, with leather straps to ward off shin bone, and bound with felt at anl To be worn under stockings Per pair, $1. ■ Spalding Combined Knee Pad and Elastic Bandage No. KE. Combined Knee Pad and Elastic Bandage. Leather covered roll style padding: complete with elastic knee bandage, which holds pad in place and gives additional support Pair, $2.50 -^r SJ7.(V Doz prs. No. KC. Combined Knee Pad and Elastic Bandage. Canvas covered knee pad lined with heavy felt, with elastic band- 1 age at top and bottom. Pair, $L00 if S!cKSl> Doz. prs. Spalding Hockey Pants for Forwards No. 5B. Made of heavy Brown or White Canvas, hips padded lightly. Very loose fitting. Per pair, $1.00 -J^- SW.SO Doz. Spalding Hockey Pants Unpadded, Fly Front, Lace Back Black Sateen Hockey Pants. . Per pair. %\.2.'!,-k $13.50 Doz. Black Sateen Hockey Pants. . " 1.00 -j^ JO.SO " Black Sateen Hockey Pants. " .75* S./O" White, Black or Gray Jean Hockey Pants. " .50 ir 5M " down sides of any of these pants. . . Pair extia,25cif .:>l-'.7^Doz.prs. Spalding Full Length Tights Best worsted, full fashioned, stock colors and sizes. . Per pair, $5.00 j Cut worsted, stock colors and sizes. . . Per pair, $2.50 if S-'T/P JJoz. \ Cotton, full quality. White, Black, Flesh. Spalding Hockey Gleves No. A. Special horse hide glove, of best qual- ity, easy fitting, and padded palm. Pr.. $5.00 No. HG. Gives ample protection to all bones and joints in the player's hand. Brown leather, with soft buckskin palm, and gaunt- let padded with rattan reeds. Two sizes, large and medium. . . Per pair, $4.00 No. L. Unpadded drab buckskin gauntlet glove. Extra long, and a very popular style Per pair, $3.00 Spalding Score Cards for Ice Hockey Designed by S. Trafford Hicks, former Cap- tain Harvard Hockey Team. Doz., 24c. The prices printed in italics opposite items marked iuith*will he (fuoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity prices NOT allowed on ttems'NOT marked with * 1.00* IClSODoz. Spalding Eyeglass Protector for Hockey Pat. Oct. 12, Made of strong annealed win nicely padded, and a thoroug protection for eyeglesees o spectacles. . . Each, $2.0' pttiPTAniinwisiynTB in COMMIttlTiMS A.G.SPALDING & BROS STORES IN AL ARGE CI «Mii]kMH^ftiirMiiat'iMK: GUARANTEES QUALITY Used by the Champion Speed Skaters in All Their Races V'ery light weight, all tubular steel construction. Every joint well reinforced, making them the strongest tubular racing skates manufactured. Blades made of chrome nickel steel, hardened and drawn, tapered from 1-16 inch at the toe to I -32 inch at the heel. Toe and heel plates made of best partly hardened steel, left full size, so they can be cut to fit shoe. Furnished in two lengths of blades, \4j4 and 15^ inches. Foot plates arranged to fit small, medium or large size shoes. Specify size of shoe worn when order- ing, also length of blade required. These skates are built for use with light racing shoes, Spalding No. 337 preferably. Our guarantee will not cover if heavy hockey or skating shoes are used. Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates, nickel-plated and polished Per pair, $8.00 Price, including No. 337 Shoes, attached. Per pair, $13.00 Spalding Tubular Steel Racing Skates, aluminum finish. . . . Per pair, $6.00 Price, including No. 337 Shoes, attached. Per pair, $11.00 Showing Spalding Tubular Racing Skate, Nickel-plated, attached to ^ Spalding No. 337 Shoe MPT AHENTION GIVEN TO m COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US - A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK 'Prica in effect July 5, 1913. Subject to change wllhout notice For Canadian prices seg special Canadian Calalosue, ACCEPT NO MTtmrniil •paldi: Al^ssElntna Flulsli ill Spalding Tubular Steel Hockey Skate The 1913 model is a big improvement over any Tubular Hockey Skate ever built previously. Our experience during the past nine years in turning out properly made tubular ice skates enables us to build skates which, while extremely light in weight, are at the same time the strongest tubular skates made, and this means much to the expert hockey player. Runners of extra quality chrome nickel steel, specially tempered, very tough and absolutely the best obtainable for the purpose. The model has the endorsement of actual use by the most famous players in Canada. Sizes 9)2, 10, \0)4, 11, 11^^, 12 inches foot length. Spalding Tubular Steel Hockey Skates. Aluminum Finish Per pair, $6.00 Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $11.00 Showing Spalding Tubular Steel Hockey Skate attached to Spalding No. 339 Shoe PROMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS A.G.SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FQBJpUPUTEUSTOFqOIIB tSiNSUKFHONTCOVOr Of THIS BOO! 'Prtomt>igtdJ^5.l9l3. 5b^to«Aa^Mlrto«(«i« F«r CvwAm H* m i ^iS»r iUBSTITUTE ?E THE SPALDING (MTRADE^ARK QUALITY Spalding ^^ Intercolle^ia^te ^^ Expert floclie^ Sfeates SPECIAL NOTICE— These skates are made to be used on Spalding Shoes No. 339, or some style of shoe made similarly. They cannot be used to good advantage on or- dinary street shoes nor with heavy skating shoes made with full heels. No. XH. Built especially for expert hockey players. Model and general features of construction suggested by most prominent players on intercol- legiate hockey teams. Runners of finest quality chrome nickel steel, highly tempered and drawn so as to toughen them and give a razor cutting edge. Toe and heel plates No. XH Skate fastened to No. 339 Shoe ^f f^^^ quality cold rolled steeh Highly polished, extra heavy nickel-plated Sizes9^'2 to 12 inches. Pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 339 Shoes, complete, attached. " 10.00 (BY S. No. XHL Skate fastened to No. 370 Shoe No. XHL. Ladies' Intercollegiate Hockey Skates, similar to No. XH Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes &j4 to \0}4 inches. . . Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 370 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 PROMPT AnENTlOX GIVEN TO JiNY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN Ate LARGE CITIES ' - FOR COMPLETE IIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK "Pricci in tffcU Jiilt/ 5, 19^3, Suijcct U> tiw^i^ wUhout ooUa. For Qinadian pHui see ipedai Canadian Catalogue ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE THESRALDING(il)TRADEMARK GUARANl QUALI .iirng CANADIAN PATTERN— IMPROVED MODEL Canadian Pattern. No. XS. Men's No. XS. Men's. Blades of finest chrome nickel steel, hardened. This steel is specially noted for its tough- ness. Extra heavy electro-nickel- plated, highly polished throughout. Sizes 9'< to 12 inches. Pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 336 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 Canadian Pattern. No. XSL. Ladies' No. XSL. Ladies'. Similar to No. XS Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes 6j4 to lOV^ inches Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 PROMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMHONICATIONS ADDRESSEOTOUS A. G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COYER OF THIS BOOK 'Prica in effect July 5, 1913. Subject to change ylilhoui notice. Foi Canadian pnixi jee ipeaal Canadian Colalogue. EUHE SPALDING TRADEMARK TlTty I ciie: CANADIAN PATTERN Canadian Pattern. No. XP. Men's No. XP Skate fastened to No. 332 Shoe No. XP. Men's. Made with "Championship" Model Blades of special welded oteel. Heavily nickel-plated. Sizes 9 ':3 to 12 inches . . . Per pair, $4 00 Price, including Spalding No. 332 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $7.50 Canadian Pattern, No. XPL. Ladies' No. XPL Skate fastened to No. 330 Shoe No. XPL. Ladies'. Similar to Men's No. XP, but with small heel plate and narrow^ toe plate. Sizes &y2 to IO/2 inches. Per pair, $4.00 Price, including Spalding No. 330 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $7.50 PBOMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES 11^4 ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPUTE UST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT GOVER BF THIS BOOR Vfico In tftti Julii 5, 1913. Sukftd lo cAonfo vlOhoui notk» For Canadian priou ttt ipcclal CanaJian Calaloiut. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE 'aiding' HocSley SSlatles CANADIAN PATTERN Canadian Pattern. No. YH. Men's No. YH Skate fastened to No. 332 Shoe No. YH. Men's. Canadian Hockey Pattern. Special steel runners, carefully hardened and tempered. Heavily nickel-plated and finely polished. Sizes 9/'2 to 12 inches. . Pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 332 Shoes, complete, at- tached. . Per pair, $6.50 Canadian Pattern. No. YHL. Ladies' No. YHL Skate fastened to No. 330 Shoe No. YHL. Ladies'. Similar to Men's No. YH, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 8^'<2 to lOji inches. . Per pair, $3.00 Price, including Spalding No. 330 Shoes, complete at- tached. . Per pair, $6.50 PiRIMl^mENTIOfleiVENTO any cohuonigationi addTessedtous A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COYER OF THIS BOOK 'PH^lntjfKlIukt5,l9l3. SukhdlochontnelAoulaeacm. Far( I MC ifccial Canadian Catalosut. o ^ FOR FANCY SKATING No. CR. Rink Skate. Men's No. CR Skate fastened to No. 336 Shoe No. CR. Foot plates same as on Canadian pattern hockey skates, highly polished, nickel-plated and buffed. The runners on these skates are special chrome steel, selected for its peculiar fitness for a skate of this character, and ground with curved bottoms, as adopted by national skating associations. Toes made on ex- pert curved pattern with teeth correctly placed for fancy skating. Sizes 9 ' 2 to 1 2 inches. Pair, $5.00 Price, including SpaldingNo.336 Shoes, complete, attached. Pair, $10.00 No. CRL. Rink Skate. Ladies* No. CRL. Ladies'. Same as No. CR, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes S'/i to 10'^ inches. Per pair, $5.00 Price, including Spalding No. 350 Shoes, complete, attached. Per pair, $10.00 PHOMPTAnENTiON GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDBESSEOTOUS A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN Al.t. LARGE CIT!^_ FOR COMfLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF IHIS BOOK T'1cc»lo<^ulJulu5J9l3. SukjcdloJ>antcwiDu,ulaeU(^ f », C/ Wto. pfte, » v^al Q>n«Ji«n G.jJ«w. Spaldllimg Ail Clg^ffiap H©cll.e^ Sliates No. XSAC. Men's All Clamp Hockey Skates. Blades same as No. XS Can- adian Pattern Hockey Skate. Made of finest quality chrome All Clamp. No. XSAC. Men's nickel steel, hardened. Truss braced heel plates. Special design wing heel clamps with spurs. Back slot for strap. Extra heavy electro-nickel-plated and ... Per pair, $5.00 No.XSLAC. Ladies' All Clamp Hockey Skates. Similar to No. XSAC Men's, but small heel plates and narrow toe plates. Sizes8;4tolO;^, nches. Per pair, $5.00' highly polished throughout. All Clamp. No, XSLAC. Ladies SWhl .^tem No. CRAG. Men's All Clamp Rink Skates. Blades same asNo.CRRinkSkate, but without teeth on toe. Of finest ,,-— chrome nickel — ^- steel, hardened. Special design All Clamp. No. CRAC. Men's wing heel clamps w^ith spurs. Back slot for strap. Extra heavy electro-nickel- plated and polished throughout. Sizes 9 '2 to 12 in. . . . Per pair, $5.00 No.CRLAC. Ladies'. All Clamp Rink Skates. Sim- ilar to Men's No. CRAC, but with small heel plates and narrov/ toe plates. Sizes 8 '2 to 10 '2 inches. All Clamp. No. CRLAC. Ladies' Per pair, $5.00 --^. PROMPT mENTION GIVEN TO I kH1 COMMUNICATIONS UDDRESSED TO OS A. G. SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STOfla SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER Of THIS BOOK frtca in tffcKl July 5, 1913 SukjKl lo chang* i*«fcou( notlet. hot Canadian prion tec vmJal Canadian Catahgut. THE SPALDINGlgi)TRADEMARK GUARANTEES QUALITY 'Y THE KEY CLAMP FASTENING for hockey skates has proven its efficiency and the wisdom of its adoption through its continued popularity with the great number of skaters who prefer flat blade skates for ordinary skating, and in addition to those who play hockey and do not find it con- venient to keep a separate pair of shoes particularly for their hockey skates. No. 9H. Key clamp fastenings. Extra heavy nickel-plated and specially polished throughout. Blades of absolutely best quality three-ply welded steel, highly tempered, w^ith ribbed flange at bottom. Made in both men's and w^omen's models. Each pair in paper box, neatly wrapped. Sizes 9; 2 to 12 inches Pair, $5.00 No. 9HL. Ladies'. Like above, but small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 9 to I) inches Pair, $5.00 No. 7H. Key clamp fastenings. Nickel-plated throughout, not polished ; ribbed runners; best quality steel. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. . Pair, $4.00 No. CH. Key clamp fastenings. Highly tempered and hardened three-ply welded steel runners. Sizes 9/2 to 12 inches Pair, $3.00 No. CHL. Ladies'. Same as No. CH, but small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 8 to II inches Pair, $3.00 No. DH. Key clamp fastenings. Runners of best cast steel, hardened. Entire skate full nickel-plated. Sizes 9 to 12 inches. . . . Pair, $2.00 No. EH. Key clamp fastenings. Flat runners of best cold rolled steel. Entire skate nickel-plated. Sizes 9)4. to 12 inches Pair, $1.50 No. EHL. Ladies'. Same as No. EH, but w^ith small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 8 to \0}4 inches Pair, $1.50 PROMPT AHENTION GIVEN TO I ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A.G.SPALDING &. BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK 'Prices fn effect July 5,1913. Subject to change without ndtife. For Canadian prices see special Canadian Catalogue^ Su UHE SRALDINGJ jTRAD E MARK '^^ I .ate; FOR FANCY SKATING No. 16 No. 16. Full key clamp fastenings, highly tempered and concaved, three- ply welded steel ribbed runners. All parts heavily nickel-plated and polished. Specially designed for fancy skating. Sizes 9 j^ to 12 inches. Pair, $5.00 No. 16L. Ladies'. Same as No. 16, but with small heel plate and narrow toe plate. Sizes 8 to \0}i inches Pair, $5.00 No. 1.5. Nickel-plated throughout, full key clamp fastenings, runners of welded steel, hardened and tempered. Sizes 9j4 to 12 inches. Pair, $3.00 No. 15 ( No. 15L. Ladies'. Same as No. 15, but w^ith small heel plate and narrow^ toe plate. Sizes 8 to 10/^2 inches Per pair, $3.00 No. 14. Nickel-plated, full key clamp fastenings, runners of cast steel, hardened beveled edges. Sizes 9}4 to 12 inches Pair, $1.50 No. 12. Rocker runners, all steel, full clamp fastenings. Sizes 9'^ to 12 inches Pair, $1.00 PROMPT AnENTIONIJVEH TO ANY GOMMUNICilTIONS A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR OOMPlfTE LIST OF STORES Sa INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS Boot P*M»t»atfMl!Ati,l9l^. Saiiudhtkt^valHmiaotkM. Fe> C«nodUpx price m vodJ Ctnojian * IpaldiEig' Fig'mre Sliates MEN'S — Made in two models as shown below. The blades of these skates are made of a special grade of Swedish steel ind they will remain sharp for an indefinite period. As they are only ightly nickel-plated, care must be exercised to see that they do not rust. '^~'-"->~-„ Brokaw Model. No. SR Figure Skate. Men's Style used by Mr. Irving Brokaw and by Champion Figure Skaters the world over. Spalding Model. No. SR Figure Skate. Men's Furnished in either Brokaw or Spalding Models No. SR. Two-stanchion skates, made without rivets or screws, the special welded construction giving the absolute rigidity required in a figure skate for expert use. Best quality Swedish steel, specially tempered blades. Round toes, with special teeth. Sizes 9)2 to 12 inches. Per pair, $15.00 Price, including Spalding No. 300 Shoes, complete, attached Per pair, $25.00 See NOTE on page of Spalding Ladies' Figure Skates giving in- structions for measuring, etc. ^ Showing Spalding Brokaw Model ' Men's Figure Skate No. SR fastened to Spalding Shoe No. 300. PROMPT mENTION GIVEN TO ANY COUMONIGATIONS ABOBESSEBTDOS A.G.SPALDING &, BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES ^!k!$TiS^^u^^9iTs!S«Th7^v!'*^^ SItHUHE SPALDINGtgjTRADE-MARK 'ZZ 5)p^ii(Qiiiini| (BROKAW MODEL) Made Especially for Figure Skating Many features developed by Mr. Irving Brokavkr through his long experi- ence on the most famous rinks in the world, are incorporated in the make-up of these shoes; the especially high heel required for assuming gracefully the " bent knee " position essential for the proper execution of artistic figures; the shaped top, lending itself easily to the forw^ard position of the ankle and lower portion of the leg, are important features adding much to the gracefulness of the skater, while the special toe cap, really the neatest form ever incorporated in a skating shoe, rounds out a combination that makes the Spalding shoe the only style for the skater anxious to maintain proper appearance on the rink while giving him at the same time confidence required for success in competition. Spalding shoes, worn from the be- ginning, guard the skater from falling into false or ungraceful positions while practicing intricate figures, and are always comfortable and neat in appearance. No. 300. Men's Brokaw Model. Per pair, $10.00 No. 310. Ladies' Brokaw Model. Per pair, $10.00 Spalding Brokaw Model Skating Shoes Nos. 300 and 310 are built especially for use with Spalding Figure Skates Nos. SR and SRL, but may be used also with Nos. XS and XSL Hockey Skates and Nos. CR and CRL Rink Skates. PROMPT AnENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A.G.SPALDING &. BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES I FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK 'prices in effect July 5. 1913. Subject to < For Canadim prices set special Canadian Catalogue, SPALDING "EXPERT" SPALDING lACING AND HOCKEY SHOE "CHAMPIONSHIP" HOCKEY SHOE This shoe has been gotten up especially lor racing and is just the thing for expert and particu- larly fast hockey players. This is a heavier weight shoe than the No. 337. 0. 337. Fine quality kangaroo leather, very soft and pliable; extremely light weight; reinforced inside over ankle; laces low. Blucher style. Special counter supports foot without tiring wearer. Very light sole. Pair, $5.00 We recommend these shoes for use especially with Spalding Tubular Rac- ing and Hockey Skates, and with No. XH Spalding "Intercollegiate" Expert Hockey Skates, also with any style racing skates made to be riveted to shoes. No. 339. Fine quality calf. Reinforced inside over ankle. Padded tongue. Special counter supports ankle, instep and arch of foot. Hard box toe special protection. Laced low. Blucher cut. Large brass eyelets. Per pair, $5.00 Recommended particularly for use with the Spalding "Expert" Hockey Skates No. XH and with Spalding Tubular Hockey and Racing Skates. Suitable also f(D fi. ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE THE SRALDINGdDTRADE MARK ^^ygljj Idmg' Reversible Collar i^tton Front Sw^eatersf For foot ball, autombbiling) skiing, training purposes, reducinj « weight, tramping during cold weather, golfing, hunting.tobog, , ganing, snowshoeing» High collar may be turned dowr-,; quickly, changing into neatest form of button front sweatenig Stock sizes 28 to 46 inches. !], We allow four inches fot* stretch in all our sweaters, and sizes. an i: marked accordingly. It is suggested, however, that for very hMvji> men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement ht orderec i to insure a comfortable fit. | No. AWJP. Heaviest weight special queJity worsted, witl pocket on either side. . . Each, $10.00*^/05.00 ZX« No. WJP. Highest quality special heavy weight wprsted, witt pocket on either side. Carried in stock also in new shaded "Spalding Blue." . .... Each, $8.00 ic $87.00 Dozl No. WJ. Same as No. WJP, but without pockets, CarrieCj in stock also in new shade, "Spalding Blue." t Each, $7.50 •^<5/.00Z)<«| No. WDJ. Fine quality standard weight worsted. Seune styltt as No. WJ, but lighter weight and without pockets. « Each, $6.00* 56^.50 £)or] Abooe sweaters are all made with special high reoersible style collar as shown iri cutr on this page. , Two pockets in either Nos. WJ or WDJ Sweaters if ordered at lirm sweater is made, not after, at an extra charge of 50c. SPECIAL NOTICE— Above sweaters with one color j>ody and tmothei color (not striped) collar and cuffs furnished in any colors, on special order, at no extra charge. The price i printed iji italics opposite items marked with -^ unll be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or more. Quantity prices NOT alloivea on items NOT marked unth -^ prices SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE AWJP STOCK COLORS-All Sweaters listed on this page carried iri stock in Gray White Navy Mardon Cardinal Purple Old Gold SPECIAL ORDERS— In addition to stock colors mentioned we supply these sweaters in finy other color, on special orders, without extra charge. N.B.— Three different shades are some- times called RED. They are Scarlet, Car- dinal, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order we supply Cardinal. PROMPT ATTENTION GIVEN TO ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDllE^S^DTOUS A. G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES irOR COMPLETE UST Of STORES SEE INSIDE fRONT COVER Of THIS BOOK "Prioa tn efftti Julj/ 5. 1913. SuhfeU to changt without i Fet Canadian prtctt tie special Canadian Catalogu 9^^^ Ba jHESPALDINGit -f ■aMm® Roll Collar S'weaters Jos A A. A and B Sweaters, listed belovy, are made of sp ^1 quality worsted, exceedingly soh and pleasant to wi For straight athletic wear there is no garment m useful than these regular roll collar sweaters which w fe»ve been making in our factories lor over twenty-five v« I. Full fashioned to body and arms and put together b; and, not simply stitched up on a machine, as are the in irity of garments sold as regular made goods. All rr e with 9-inch roll collars. Sizes: 28 to 46 inches. iJ/oic /orn- Duhes for streUh in all our siventers, and sizei are ed accordittgly. It is iuggeslfd. however, that for very heavy >i§fa si::e ahoul Izco inches larger than coat tneasure>nent be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. SlCK COLORS— We carry in »tock No«. AA, A and B Sweaters Gray, White, Navy, Maroon, Cardinal, Purple, and Old Gold. :iAL ORDERS— We also supply Nos. AA, A and B Sweaters any other color, on special orders, at no extra charge. -Three shades are sometimes called RED. They are Scarlet, dinal, Maroon. Where- RED is specified on order, we supply irdinal. CIAL NOTrCE— Solid Color sweaters, with one color body d another color (not striped) collar and cuffs furnished in any the colors noted, on special order, at no extra charge. j^^_ f^^^ \ AA. The proper style for use after heavy exercise, inducing copious perspiration, for reducing /eight or getting into condition for athletic c6ntests. Particularly suitable also for foot ball and kating. Heaviest sweater made. Roll collar Each, $8.00 * .^5(?. 40 Z)02;. A. "Intercollegiate." Special weight worsted, lighter than in No. AA. Roll collar. Each, $6.00 * $66.00 Doz. B. Heavy weight, but lighter worsted than in No. A. Roll collar. " 5.00 * SJf.OO " Spalding Shaker Knit Roll Collar Sweater 3j Good quality all wool sweater. Shaker knit, well made throughout. Sizes : 30 to 46 inches, Standard weight, slightly lighter than No. B. Roll collar. Carried in stock in Gray, Navy, Black, nd Maroon. No special orders Each, $4.00 * .^-45.00 £>02:. f'riccs limited ill Holies o/^/'ositc itcws marked Zi'itlf*t'u-ill be quoted only ov orders for one-half dozen or more. uility prices NOT allozi'cd on items NOT marked zci/h-k prices SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE 'ROMPTAnENTIONGIVENTOl ANY COMMUNICATIONS ADDRESSED TO US A. G. SPALDING & BROS, STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOB COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK ■Pricw in ijfecl July 5, 1913. SubjKl to cbsnge wilhoul notice. For Canadian prices se:- ipedal Canadian Cataloew. ap^^siiX SUBSTITUTE THE SPALDING lil S fTRADE MARK GUARANl QUALi Spalding Jacllet Sw^ee^ters Stock Size* : 28 to 46 inches chest measurement. '^^^ We allow four inches for slrelch in all our. sweaters, and sizes are marlied accordingly. It is. suggested. Iwiuever, that for very heavy men a size about two inches larger than coat measurement be ordered to insure a comfortable fit. Spaldaiii^ JacSiet Sweaters — Heavy weight WITH POCKETS No. VGP. Best quality worsted, heavy weight, pearl but- tons. Pocket on either side; particularly convenient and popular style for golf players, also for use in combination with CT Collarette during cold or inclement weather. Each, $6.50 • $70.20 T>oz. WITHOUT POCKETS No. VG. Same as No. VGP. but without pockets. Each. $6.00 * $64.80 T>oz. STOCK COLORS— AH Sweaters (except No. 3J) listed on this page carried in stock in Gray, White, Navy, Maroon, Cardinal, Purple, and Old Gold. SPECIAL ORDERS.— In addition to stock colors mentioned, we also supply any of the sweaters listed on this page in any other color on special orders without extra charge. SPECIAL NOTICE.— We will furnish any of the solid color sweaters listed on this page, (except No. 3 J), with one color body and any other color (not striped) collar and cuffs, on special orders, at no extra charge. Spaldasa^ Jsicfi^et S^we^ters— standard weight The standard or lighter weight jacket sweaters are especially suitable for wear under regular c6at when walking or taking ordinary exercise. No. DJ. Fine worsted, standard weight, pearl buttons, fine khit edging. Each, $5.00 * ^5^.00 ©oz. No. 3J. Standard weight, similar style to No. DJ. but Shaker knit instead of fine worsted, without fineknit edging. Pearl buttons. Carried in stock in Gray. Navy. Black. Ma- roon. No special orders. Each. $4.00 * $45.00 T)oz. Two pockets in either No. DJ or No. 3J sweaters, put in at time made, not after. Extra. 50c. The {>nces.lyrnitcd in ilalics otposile items iiinykcii 7cilli'*:.-i!l bcjiiioti Quantify prices NOT alloived on Items No. VGP Sw Made especially for use with Spaldj ingjacketand Vest Collar Sweaters. th. combination providing the necessari warmth and protection required in coli or inclement weather or while enj) gaging in outdoor winter sports. |« No.CT. Spalding Collarette. CarrieA in stock in same colors as sweateiL listed on this page, and furnished ojc special orders in any other colc'| without extra charge. . Each $2.0'f( PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE JJ WITHOUT NOTICE 9 PROMPT AHENTIOK GIVEN TO >ikNY COMMUNICATIONS^ ADDRESSED TO US ' A. G.SPALDING &, BROS STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE USr OF STOBES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVEI OF THIS BOOK 7)Mceito^ec(/<45. /9(J. .SutMtociaFWtHllWoatfPK /sv Qtpoiiaa prioci m 0eda/ Cmoi&ia ( i BSTITUTE 'JHE SPALDINGfef TRADEMARK S>alding Ang'ora Wool Jacket Sw^eater Paiularly for ladies' use This soft texture wool, which we have had made intoa worsted for the special garments listed bel . enables us to knit m the same stitch we use in our regular athletic sweaters, a warmer, easier fitting and neater looking jwter. than it is possible to turn out with our regular high grade worsted. We cannot, however.-supply this Angora wool ler in any but an exclusive Spalding shade of dark gray, quite different from the regular or silver gray supplied in our regular athletic sweaters. Pearl buttons. Stock Sizes: 28 to 46 inches chest measurement. Made good length and.with one pocket on either side. No. NPJ. Spalding Angora Wool Jacket Sweater, with pockets. Ea., $7.50 Spaldiirag Asagora Wool MuMer No. N. Made of same Arvgora wool as in our No. NPJ Sweater, and fur- nished in dark Gray only Each, $2.00 Spaldini^ Afag'ora Wool Toc|uses asad liiaat^ed Caps No. N55. Toque, with tassel, for tobogganing, etc. Made of same Angora wool as in our No. NPJ. Sweater, and is furnished in dark Gray only Each, $1.50 No. NBS. Knitted Cap, shorter than toque, and without tassel. Qark Gray Angora wool only, same as in No. NPJ Sweater Each, $1.00 Spaldiirag Toqtses asad SMtislS Caps No. SB. Worsted, heavy weight. Striped alternate; in a variety of colors and attractive mixtures Each, $1.00 No. SC. Worsted, light weight. Striped alternate ; in various colors. " .50 No. NPJ SpaldaKi^ Riiag HecR asad Vest Collar S'weat^s's. I B-OB. Ring neck style; for foot ball, hockey and general athletic use. Best quality worsted, good weight. No uttons. See note below 'regarding colors and sizes ; E^ch, $5.00 -^ '$54 .00 Do3. I BG. Vest collar style; for skating and general athletic use. Best quality worsted, good weight. No buttons, iee note below regarding colors and sizes ' ^<^,,%^SQ ~t( $60.00 -Doz. '•o pockets in either Nps. B-OB or BG Sweaters, put in at time sweater- is made, not after. .... Extra, 50C; ;DCK SIZES: 28 to 46 inches chest measuremeitt. We allow four inches for stretch in all our sweaters, and sizes are marked . ordingly. It is suggested, however, that 'for people who are at all stout a size about two inches larger thaji coat measurement be < :red to insure a comfortable fit. 3CK COLORS: Nos, BOB and BG Sweaters are carried in istock regularly in Gray, White, Navy, Maroon, Cardinal, Purple, and I Gold: Furnished also in any other color on special orders at ho extra charge. Either Nos. B-OB or BG Sweaters furnished with : color body and another color (not striped) collar and cuffs on special orders at no extra charge. Three shades are sometimes led RED. They are Scarlet, Cardinal, Maroon. Where RED is specified on order we supply Cardinal. •i^ prices printed in italics opposite items marked with "ti will be quoted only on orders for one-half dozen or tnorei Quantity prices NOT allowed on items NOT marked with'k PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE *«.-,-H. ■. , .^ ^^^ ..^^ _ Mo. BG .W iMS^M No NPJ Sweatcr:^lm^B^ ^ I - , No NBS Cap ' t^'^lfl^B 3 ' ' '-■ '^ No. B-OB "^ISIl rHiOTAnEintiNsivEiin Alir «Ad Mt 5. / 9li. Suhfed it>chn„ 1 mttm^l^l r^^t^Jtm, HE 5S^ s □ Pat. Sept 12,1911 i No.J5 Complete, $5.00 This is tKe ONLY OFFICIAL^ COLLEGE FOOT BALL, and is used in every important match played in this country. GUARANTEED ABSOLUTELY IF SEAL OF BOX IS UNBROKEN Elach ball complete in sealed box, including leather case, guaranteed pure Para rubber bladder (not compounded). ^E GUARANTEE every JS Spalding Foot Ball to be perfect in material and workmanship and correct in shape and size when inspected at our factory. If any defect is discovered during the first game in which it is used, or during the first day's practice use, and if returned at once, we will replace same under this guarantee. We do not guarantee against ordinary wear nor against defect in shape or size that is not discovered imn^edi- ately after the first day's use. ^ Owing to the superb qindity of every Spalding Foot E^l, our customers have grown to expect a season's use of one ball, and at times make unreasonable claim* under our guarantee which we will not allow. ^C^/^^<^^^ ^$€ PBOMPTAnENTlON GIVEN TO ANT COHMUNICATIONS MDIIESSED TO MS A. G.SPALDING & BROS STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOR COMPLETE LIST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVER OF THIS BOOK I 'POmbiiffmlJidy 5,1913. Suiftd b> Jnu^ vUhoui noUet. For CcnaJkm prtet$ $ee V)ttUil CmaJlm Calalogue. THE S PALPINGIBDTRADEMARK QUALITY The Spalding Official Basket Ball i^^^ THE ONLY OFFICIAL BASKET BALL V x-oftl^' WE GUARANTEE this ball to be perfect in ma- terial and workmanship and correct in shape and size when inspected at our fac- tory. If any defect is dis- covered during the firat game in which it is used, or during the first day's practice use, and, if returned at once, we will replace same under this guarantee. We do not guar- antee against ordinary .wear nor against defect in shape or size that is not discovered im- mediately of ter the first day's use. Owing to the superb quality of our No. M Basket Ball, our customers have grown to ex- pect a season's use oj one ball, and at times make unreason- able claims under our guar- a ntee, which ive will not allow. A. G. SPALDING & BROS. OFFICIALLY ADOPTED AND STANDARD, The cover is made in four sections, with capless ends, and of the finest and most carefully selected pebble grain English leather. We take the entire output of this superior grade of leather from the English tanners, and in the Official Basket Ball use the choicest parts of each hide. Extra heavy bladder made especially for this ball of extra quality pure Para rubber (not compounded). Each ball packed complete, in sealed box, with rawhide lace and lacing needle, and guaranteed per- fect in evei7 detail. To provide that all official contests may be held under absolutely fair and uniform conditions, it is stipulated that this ball must be used in all match games of either men's or women's teams. No. M. Spalding « Officiary Basket Bail. Eacli, $6.00 from Men's OlOcial Role Book Rule II -Ball. ic.8. TheballmadebyA.G.Spald- *g & Bros, shall be the official ball, fficial balls will be y«!ffKtZ>\ amped as herewith, ic^o%/i^\ id will be in sealed V^^^^^ BC. <. The official ball must be led in all match games. Extract from Olllclal CoUegiate Rule Book The Spalding Official Basket Ball No. »1 is the official ball of the Intercollegi- ate Basket Ball Associa- tion, and must be used in all match games. Extract from Women's OUiclal Rule Book Rule II -Ball. Sec. 3. The ball made by A.G.Spald- ing & Bros shall be the official ball. Official balls will be ^^«si?75-^ stamped as herewith. /'Q5i~5i> and will be in sealed boxes. Sec. 4. The official ball must bo used in all m&tch pames. 'lOMrTATTBITIiniSIVEIITOl m COMMOIIiUTieNS WDBtmOTBBS SQ A.G.SPALDING & BROS. STORES IN ALL LARGE CITIES FOB COMPUTE UST OF STORES SEE INSIDE FRONT COVED OF THIS BOOH 'Prka in tff^ Jiikl 5, 19(3. Subject fo cliangt VOhool oetipt. For Cmadlcat ttka mt tbulal Cmadlan Cal«lota», ACCEPT NO SUBSTITUTE ttiilililli'/filillliliSI Spalding' "Official National League" Bali Patent Cork Center Fatcnud Anguil 31. 1&09 Adopted by the National League in 1 878, is the only ball used in Championship games since that time and has now been adopted for twenty years more, makmg a total adoption* of fifty-four years. No.1 Each, . . $1.25 Per Dozen, $15.00 This ball has the Spalding "Patent" Cork Center, the same as used since August I , 1 9 1 0, without change \n size of cork or construction Each ball wrapped in tinfoil, packed in a separate box, and sealed in accordance with the latest League regulations. Warranted to last a full game when used under ordi- nary conditions. li The Spaldingi "Official National Lea^ue*^ Ball Has been tKe Official Ball of tHe Game since 1875* SpaldiBfl CoHipletc Calaloflne ol Alhlctic Goods MaUed Free. . UTTIHTIOH TIAKT COVMONICA m A.G.SPALDING ,oes- Foot Ball, College Foot Ball. Rugby Foot Ball, Soccer Golf Cymnasiuni Jumping Running Skating S^u^sh Street , Walking I'Shot- Athletic Indoor , Massage /Skates- ■ Ice OF THIS BOOK Skate Bag Skate Key. Skate Rollers Skate Straps Skate Sundries Skis . Snow Shoes Sprint Lane* Squash Goods Standards- Vaulting VoUeyBaU Straps^ ForThree-t,.e(SeELPHIA CHICOPEE, JIASS* tONDON. ENG, "^P<>kl ^^<^ ^^% \ ^' ^^ ^^^ ^ ^V ^ % :^. % > >' ...V^^. ?), = '^^d* \'%s B %,''^.*'%^^ .K ,<^ °^ '^. ,-^' 5^."_<,N %.^x^' ^- ^>.^#^:*^^ > ^>^^^\^ % .^ ^^^^ ^;. .^ ■<^ '-:i^ •-,0^\;..;,V-'^Pn /^u:^:^.^ oK \> .-«.,r^ "^^0^ ,^^ ^ A^^' : .^' .^: ..1 ^^^^ :^W-- I^ ^.K^ \.<^ :^"' ^\ %. -.<^^^":>^i r-<^ V cP- ' <, '-• '':/'\^ .S ^^ % ^■■i<7.# cO'. .f'^ \> V '^ " " / c?\ •^^, K ^d 6-0 cP'- <■- % ■^-.o^ ^^ '''^' 9:.'^'/ :^m^^ ^ .^^ ^- '^\^ ,rV^ ■^4<>^^^"- ^^ . vri^^'iiin ^ V * , -P '"' ^ .^'.V ^ < <^^ ^'^^^^>^ cf>, ^A^ ^'<^ ^^^.>. v^^ V 9> ^^ •^^ -C rO^ .0^ 9 ePZ LOS 900